# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. # Copyright (C) Odoo S.A. # This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 16.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2025-02-20 08:51+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" "Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" "Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp.rst:5 msgid "Supply Chain" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode.rst:8 msgid "Barcode" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode.rst:10 msgid "**Odoo Barcode** allows users to assign barcodes to individual products and product categories, and track inventory movements using those barcodes. By connecting a barcode scanner, certain inventory processes can be triggered by scanning barcodes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode.rst:15 msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Barcode `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations.rst:5 msgid "Daily operations" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:3 msgid "Apply inventory adjustments with barcodes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:5 msgid "In a warehouse, the recorded inventory counts in the database might not always match the actual, real inventory counts. In such cases, inventory adjustments can be made to reconcile the differences, and ensure that the recorded counts in the database match the actual counts in the warehouse. In Odoo, the *Barcode* app can be used to make these adjustments." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:10 msgid "These adjustments can be done in real time using an Odoo-compatible barcode scanner or the Odoo mobile app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:14 msgid "For a list of Odoo-compatible barcode mobile scanners, and other hardware for the *Inventory* and *Barcode* apps, refer to the `Odoo Inventory • Hardware page `_." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:19 msgid ":doc:`../../inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:22 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:15 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:13 msgid "Enable Barcode app" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:24 msgid "To use the *Barcode* app to create and apply inventory adjustments, it **must** be installed by enabling the feature from the settings of the *Inventory* app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:27 msgid "To do so, go to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Barcode` section, and click the checkbox next to the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanner` option." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:31 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:24 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:22 msgid "Once the checkbox is ticked, click :guilabel:`Save` at the top of the page to save changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:33 msgid "After saving, a new drop-down menu appears under the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanner` option, labeled :guilabel:`Barcode Nomenclature`, where either :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature` or :guilabel:`Default GS1 Nomenclature` can be selected. Each nomenclature option determines how scanners interpret barcodes in Odoo." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:38 msgid "There is also a :guilabel:`Configure Product Barcodes` internal link arrow, along with a set of :guilabel:`Print` buttons for printing barcode commands and a barcode demo sheet." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:-1 msgid "Enabled Barcode feature in Inventory app settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:46 msgid "For more information on setting up and configuring the :guilabel:`Barcode` app, refer to the :doc:`Set up your barcode scanner <../setup/hardware>` and :doc:`Activate the Barcodes in Odoo <../setup/software>` docs." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:51 msgid "Perform an inventory adjustment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:53 msgid "Begin by navigating to the :menuselection:`Barcode app --> Barcode Scanning` dashboard, where different options will be displayed, including :guilabel:`Operations`, :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustments`, and :guilabel:`Batch Transfers`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:57 msgid "To create and apply inventory adjustments, click on the :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustments` button at the bottom of the screen." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:60 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:123 msgid "Doing so navigates to the *Barcode Inventory Client Action* page, labeled as :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustment` in the top header section." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:-1 msgid "Barcode app start screen with scanner." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:67 msgid "To begin the adjustment, first scan the *source location*, which is the current location in the warehouse of the product whose count should be adjusted. Then, scan the product barcode(s)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:70 msgid "The barcode of a specific product can be scanned multiple times to increase the quantity of that product in the adjustment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:74 msgid "If the warehouse *multi-location* feature is **not** enabled in the database, a source location does not need to be scanned. Instead, simply scan the product barcode to start the inventory adjustment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:78 msgid "Alternatively, the quantity can be changed by clicking the :guilabel:`✏️ (pencil)` icon on the far right of the product line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:81 msgid "Doing so opens a separate window with a keypad. Edit the number in the :guilabel:`Quantity` line to change the quantity. Additionally, the :guilabel:`+1` and :guilabel:`-1` buttons can be clicked to add or subtract quantity of the product, and the number keys can be used to add quantity, as well." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:86 msgid "In the below inventory adjustment, the source location `WH/Stock/Shelf/2` was scanned, assigning the location. Then, the barcode for the product `[FURN_7888] Desk Stand with Screen` was scanned 3 times, increasing the units in the adjustment. Additional products can be added to this adjustment by scanning the barcodes for those specific products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:0 msgid "Barcode Inventory Client Action page with inventory adjustment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:95 msgid "To complete the inventory adjustment, click the green :guilabel:`✅ Apply` button with the check mark at the bottom of the page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:98 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:150 msgid "Once applied, Odoo navigates back to the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanning` screen. A small green banner appears in the top right corner, confirming validation of the adjustment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:101 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:180 msgid "Did you know?" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:103 msgid "Odoo's *Barcode* application provides demo data with barcodes to explore the features of the app. These can be used for testing purposes, and can be printed from the home screen of the app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:106 msgid "To access this demo data, navigate to the :menuselection:`Barcode app` and click :guilabel:`stock barcodes sheet` and :guilabel:`commands for Inventory` (bolded and highlighted in blue) in the information pop-up window above the scanner." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:0 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:0 msgid "Demo data prompt pop-up on Barcode app main screen." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:115 msgid "Manually add products to inventory adjustment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:117 msgid "When the barcodes for the location or product are not available, Odoo *Barcode* can still be used to perform inventory adjustments." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:120 msgid "To do this, navigate to the :menuselection:`Barcode app --> Barcode Scanning --> Inventory Adjustments`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:126 msgid "To manually add products to this adjustment, click the white :guilabel:`➕ Add Product` button at the bottom of the screen." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:129 msgid "This navigates to a new, blank page where the desired product, quantity, and source location must be chosen." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:0 msgid "Keypad to add products on Barcode Inventory Client Action page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:136 msgid "First, click the :guilabel:`Product` line, and choose the product whose stock count should be adjusted. Then, manually enter the quantity of that product, either by changing the `1` in the :guilabel:`Quantity` line, or by clicking the :guilabel:`+1` and :guilabel:`-1` buttons to add or subtract quantity of the product. The number pad can be used to add quantity, as well." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:141 msgid "Below the number pad is the :guilabel:`location` line, which should read `WH/Stock` by default. Click this line to reveal a drop-down menu of locations to choose from, and choose the :guilabel:`source location` for this inventory adjustment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:145 msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:147 msgid "To apply the inventory adjustment, click the green :guilabel:`✅ Apply` button with the check mark, at the bottom of the page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:3 msgid "Default barcode nomenclature" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:10 msgid "Define *barcode nomenclatures* to ensure Odoo correctly recognizes and categorizes barcodes. When scanned, a barcode matches the **first** rule with a matching pattern, based on regular expressions. A barcode is successfully read if its prefix and/or length matches the defined rule." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:14 msgid "For instance, at a :doc:`Point of Sale <../../../sales/point_of_sale>` station, product weight barcodes in the European Article Number (EAN) format, which begin with `21` and have five digits specifying the weight, are used to weigh products and generate a barcode depicting the weight and price. The `21` and five-digit weight is the barcode pattern used to identify the barcode and can be customized to ensure Odoo correctly interprets all barcodes for the business." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:21 msgid "Barcodes are also commonly used with Odoo's **Inventory** and **Barcode** apps." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:23 msgid "Odoo **Barcode** supports |EAN|, Universal Product Code (UPC), and :doc:`GS1 ` formats. This document exclusively focuses on :ref:`default rules and patterns in Odoo `, which use |UPC| and |EAN| encoding." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:29 msgid "To use |UPC| and |EAN| barcodes for uniquely identifying products across the entire supply chain, they **must** be `purchased from GS1 `_." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:32 msgid "In Odoo, custom barcode patterns can be defined to recognize barcodes specific to the company. Barcodes do not need to be purchased if used only within the company, such as in the :ref:`example ` where the barcode is written in the |EAN| format." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:38 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:52 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:39 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:14 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:38 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:18 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:21 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:11 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:65 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:22 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/cross_dock.rst:18 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:16 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:21 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:14 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:26 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:22 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:48 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:16 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:20 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:17 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:13 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:12 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:11 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:55 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:8 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:13 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/resupply_warehouses.rst:11 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:23 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:11 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:15 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:13 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:10 msgid "Configuration" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:40 msgid "To use default nomenclature, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Barcode` section, tick the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanner` checkbox. Doing so installs the **Barcode** app in the database." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:44 msgid "Next, in the :guilabel:`Barcode Nomenclature` field, ensure :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature` is selected. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:-1 msgid "Enabled barcode setting with Default Nomenclature selected." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:51 msgid "With the **Barcode** module installed, and the :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature` selected, the barcode actions using |UPC| and |EAN|, detailed in the :ref:`default nomenclature list `, are available for use. And, by default, Odoo automatically handles |UPC|/|EAN| conversion." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:59 msgid "Example: product weight barcode" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:61 msgid "To better understand how barcode nomenclature is used to identify products in Odoo, this example where product weight barcodes in |EAN| format are used to allow a :doc:`Point of Sale <../../../sales/point_of_sale>` business to automatically print barcodes, and calculate the price using the weight of the item." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:66 msgid "To set up barcodes for weighted products, the following rule is used:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:71 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:186 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:173 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:38 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:166 msgid "Rule Name" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:72 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:189 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:173 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:38 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:166 msgid "Barcode Pattern" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:73 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:38 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:166 msgid "Field in Odoo" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:74 msgid "Weighted Barcodes 3 Decimals" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:75 msgid "(21)....{NNDDD}" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:76 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:177 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:40 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:168 msgid ":guilabel:`Barcode` field on product form" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:79 msgid "To better understand the barcode pattern for weighted products, consider the barcode, `2112345000008`:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:82 msgid "`21`: code that identifies this a barcode for weighted products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:83 msgid "`12345`: five digits (denoted by `.....` in the table above) that identify the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:84 msgid "`00000`: five digits (denoted by `{NNDDD}` in the table) representing the weight of the product. On the product form, the five weight values **must** be `00000`. The first two digits are whole number values, and the last three digits are decimal values. For example, \"13.5 grams\" in the `{NNDDD}` format is `13500`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:88 msgid "`8`: `check digit `_ for `211234500000`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:90 msgid "Together, these components make up a 13-character |EAN| - 13 barcode." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:92 msgid "To configure the product barcode for `Pasta Bolognese`, the |EAN| barcode for weighted products, `2112345000008`, is entered in the :guilabel:`Barcode` field on the product form (accessible by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and selecting the desired product). In addition, the :guilabel:`Unit of Measure` is set to :guilabel:`kg`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:-1 msgid "Barcode field on the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:101 msgid "Next, a customer's bowl of pasta is weighed to be `1.5` kilograms. This generates a new barcode for the pasta, according to the weight: `211234501500`, which has a check digit of `2`. The new barcode is `2112345015002`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:-1 msgid "Generated barcode that includes a weight of 1.5 kg." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:109 msgid "Ensure the products scan properly, by navigating to the :menuselection:`Barcode app --> Operations`. Next, click any operation type, such as :guilabel:`Receipts`. Then, click the :guilabel:`New` button to create a draft stock move. Scan the product weight barcode, such as `2112345015002`, and if the intended product appears, the barcode setup is correct." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:-1 msgid "Show successfully scanned barcode." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:119 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:96 msgid "Create rules" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:122 msgid "Adding new rules is necessary for |UPC| and |EAN| formats that are **not** in Odoo's default list, since barcodes cannot be read successfully if there are unknown fields." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:125 msgid "While new rules can be created, Odoo fields do **not** auto-populate with information from these rules. `Custom development `_ is required for this functionality." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:129 msgid "To create a rule, first enable :ref:`developer mode `. Then, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Barcode Nomenclatures`, and select :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:133 msgid "On this page, configure the following optional fields:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:135 msgid ":guilabel:`UPC/EAN Conversion`: determines if a |UPC|/|EAN| barcode should be automatically converted when matching a rule with another encoding. Options include :guilabel:`Always` (the default option), :guilabel:`Never`, :guilabel:`EAN-13 to UPC-A`, and :guilabel:`UPC-A to EAN-13`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:138 msgid ":guilabel:`Is GS1 Nomenclature`: ensure this checkbox is **not** ticked, as the :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature` uses |UPC| and |EAN| encoding, *not* GS1 encoding." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:-1 msgid "Default Nomenclature page setting fields." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:145 msgid "On the :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature` page, click :guilabel:`Add a line` at the bottom of the table, which opens a :guilabel:`Create Rules` pop-up window to create a new rule." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:148 msgid "The :guilabel:`Rule Name` field is used internally to identify what the barcode represents." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:150 msgid "The :guilabel:`Sequence` field represents the priority of the rule; meaning the smaller the value, the higher the rule appears on the table." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:153 msgid "The barcode :guilabel:`Type` field represents different classifications of information that can be understood by the system (e.g., :guilabel:`Package`, :guilabel:`Lot`, :guilabel:`Location`, :guilabel:`Coupon`, etc.)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:157 msgid "The :guilabel:`Encoding` field specifies which encoding the barcode uses. This rule **only** applies if the barcode uses this specific encoding. The available :guilabel:`Encoding` options are: :guilabel:`EAN-13`, :guilabel:`EAN-8`, :guilabel:`UPC-A`, and :guilabel:`GS1-28`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:161 msgid "The :guilabel:`Barcode Pattern` field represents how the sequence of letters or numbers is recognized by the system to contain information about the product. Sometimes, when a certain amount of digits are required, the number of `.` is shown. `N` represents whole number digits, and `D` represent decimal digits." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:167 msgid "`1...` represents any 4-digit number that starts with 1. `NNDD` represents a two digit number with two decimal points. For example, `14.25` is 1425." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:170 msgid "After filling in the information, click the :guilabel:`Save & New` button to save the rule, and instantly start creating another rule. Or, click :guilabel:`Save & Close` to save the rule, and return to the table of rules." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:177 msgid "Default nomenclature list" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:179 msgid "The table below contains Odoo's list of :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature` rules. Barcode patterns are written in regular expressions." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:187 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:173 msgid "Type" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:188 msgid "Encoding" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:190 msgid "Price Barcodes 2 Decimals" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:191 msgid "Priced Product" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:192 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:200 msgid "EAN-13" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:193 msgid "23.....{NNNDD}" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:194 msgid "Discount Barcodes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:195 msgid "Discounted Product" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:196 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:204 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:208 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:212 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:216 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:220 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:224 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:228 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:232 msgid "Any" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:197 msgid "22{NN}" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:198 msgid "Weight Barcodes 3 Decimals" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:199 msgid "Weighted Product" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:201 msgid "21.....{NNDDD}" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:202 msgid "Customer Barcodes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:203 msgid "Client" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:205 msgid "042" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:206 msgid "Coupon & Gift Card Barcodes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:207 msgid "Coupon" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:209 msgid "043|044" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:210 msgid "Cashier Barcodes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:211 msgid "Cashier" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:213 msgid "041" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:214 msgid "Location barcodes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:215 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:189 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:189 msgid "Location" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:217 msgid "414" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:218 msgid "Package barcodes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:219 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:175 msgid "Package" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:221 msgid "PACK" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:222 msgid "Lot barcodes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:223 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:191 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:191 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:194 msgid "Lot" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:225 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:45 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:143 msgid "10" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:226 msgid "Magnetic Credit Card" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:227 msgid "Credit Card" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:229 msgid "%.*" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:230 msgid "Product Barcodes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:231 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:177 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:180 msgid "Unit Product" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:233 msgid ".*" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:236 msgid "When the :guilabel:`Barcode Pattern` contains `.*`, it means it can contain any number or type of characters." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:240 msgid ":doc:`gs1_nomenclature`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:3 msgid "GS1 barcode nomenclature" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:12 msgid "`GS1 nomenclature `_ consolidates various product and supply chain data into a single barcode. Odoo takes in `unique Global Trade Item Numbers `_ (GTIN), purchased by businesses, to enable global shipping, sales, and eCommerce product listing." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:17 msgid "Configure GS1 nomenclature to scan barcodes of sealed boxes and identify essential product information, such as |GTIN|, lot number, quantity information, and more." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:21 msgid "|GTINs| are unique product identification that **must** be `purchased from GS1 `_ to use GS1 barcodes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:25 msgid "`All GS1 barcodes `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:26 msgid ":ref:`Odoo's default GS1 rules `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:27 msgid ":ref:`Why's my barcode not working? `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:32 msgid "Set up barcode nomenclature" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:34 msgid "To use GS1 nomenclature, navigate to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then under the :guilabel:`Barcode` section, check the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanner` box. Next, select :menuselection:`Barcode Nomenclature --> Default GS1 Nomenclature` from the default barcode nomenclature options." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:-1 msgid "Choose GS1 from dropdown and click the external link to see the list of GS1 rules." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:43 msgid "The list of GS1 *rules* and *barcode patterns* Odoo supports by default is accessible by clicking the :guilabel:`➡️ (arrow)` icon to the right of the :guilabel:`Barcode Nomenclature` selection." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:46 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Open: Nomenclature` pop-up table, view and edit the GS1 :guilabel:`Rule Names` available in Odoo. The table contains all the information that can be condensed with a GS1 barcode, along with the corresponding :guilabel:`Barcode Pattern`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:51 msgid "After setting GS1 as the barcode nomenclature, the :menuselection:`Barcode Nomenclatures` settings can also be accessed by a hidden menu that's discoverable after enabling :ref:`developer mode `. Once enabled, navigate to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Barcode Nomenclatures` menu and finally, select :guilabel:`Default GS1 Nomenclature`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:60 msgid "Use GS1 barcodes in Odoo" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:62 msgid "For product identification using GS1 barcodes in Odoo, businesses obtain a `unique GTIN `_ as an internationally distinct product identifier purchased from GS1. This |GTIN| is combined with specific product details following GS1's designated *barcode pattern*. The barcode pattern's arrangement of numbers and letters must adhere to GS1 conventions for accurate interpretation by global systems along the supply chain." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:68 msgid "Every barcode starts with a 2-4 digit `application identifier `_ (A.I.). This required prefix universally indicates what kind of information the barcode contains. Odoo follows GS1 rules for identifying information, as detailed in the :ref:`default GS1 rules list `. Including the relevant |AI| from the list enables Odoo to correctly interpret GS1 barcodes. While most barcode patterns have a fixed length requirement, certain ones, such as lots and serial numbers, have flexible length." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:77 msgid "For flexible-length barcode patterns not placed at the end of the GS1 barcode, use the FNC1 separator (`\\\\x1D`) to end the barcode." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:80 msgid "Example: The barcode pattern for lot numbers is 20 characters long. Instead of creating a 20-character lot number barcode, like `LOT00000000000000001`, use the FNC1 separator to make it shorter: `LOT001\\x1D`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:84 msgid "Refer to the :ref:`GS1 nomenclature list ` to see a comprehensive list of all barcode patterns and rules to follow. Otherwise, refer to :ref:`this GS1 usage doc ` for specific examples of combining |GTIN| to product information and configuring the workflow." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:90 msgid ":ref:`Lots workflow `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:91 msgid ":ref:`Non-unit quantities workflow `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:98 msgid "GS1 rules are a specific format of information contained in the barcode, beginning with an |AI| and containing a defined length of characters. Scanning GS1 barcodes from the :ref:`default GS1 list ` auto-fills corresponding data in the Odoo database." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:103 msgid "Adding GS1 barcode rules in Odoo ensures accurate interpretation of unique, non-standard GS1 formats." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:106 msgid "To do so, begin by turning on :ref:`developer mode ` and navigating to the :guilabel:`Barcode Nomenclatures` list in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Barcode Nomenclatures`. Then, select the :guilabel:`Default GS1 Nomenclature` list item." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:110 msgid "On the :guilabel:`Default GS1 Nomenclature` page, select :guilabel:`Add a line` at the bottom of the table, which opens a window to create a new rule. The :guilabel:`Rule Name` field is used internally to identify what the barcode represents. The barcode :guilabel:`Types` are different classifications of information that can be understood by the system (e.g. product, quantity, best before date, package, coupon). The :guilabel:`Sequence` represents the priority of the rule; this means the smaller the value, the higher the rule appears on the table. Odoo follows the sequential order of this table and will use the first rule it matches based on the sequence. The :guilabel:`Barcode Pattern` is how the sequence of letters or numbers is recognized by the system to contain information about the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:120 msgid "After filling in the information, click the :guilabel:`Save & New` button to make another rule or click :guilabel:`Save & Close` to save and return to the table of rules." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:126 msgid "Barcode troubleshooting" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:128 msgid "Since GS1 barcodes are challenging to work with, here are some checks to try when the barcodes are not working as expected:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:131 msgid "Ensure that the :guilabel:`Barcode Nomenclature` setting is set as :menuselection:`Default GS1 Nomenclature`. Jump to the :ref:`nomenclature setup section ` for more details." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:134 msgid "Ensure that the fields scanned in the barcode are enabled in Odoo. For example, to scan a barcode containing lots and serial numbers, make sure the :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` feature is enabled in :ref:`Odoo's settings ` and :ref:`on the product `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:138 msgid "Omit punctuation such as parentheses `()` or brackets `[]` between the :abbr:`A.I. (Application Identifier)` and the barcode sequence. These are typically used in examples for ease of reading and should **not** be included in the final barcode. For more details on building GS1 barcodes, go to :ref:`this section `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:142 msgid "When a single barcode contains multiple encoded fields, Odoo requires all rules to be listed in the barcode nomenclature for Odoo to read the barcode. :ref:`This section ` details how to add new rules in the barcode nomenclature." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:146 msgid "Test barcodes containing multiple encoded fields, piece by piece, to figure out which field is causing the issue." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:150 msgid "When testing a barcode containing the |GTIN|, lot number, and quantity, start by scanning the |GTIN| alone. Then, test the |GTIN| with the lot number, and finally, try scanning the whole barcode." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:154 msgid "After diagnosing the encoded field is unknown, :ref:`add new rules ` to Odoo's default list to recognize GS1 barcodes with unique specifications." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:159 msgid "While the new field will be read, the information won't link to an existing field in Odoo without developer customizations. However, adding new rules is necessary to ensure the rest of the fields in the barcode are interpreted correctly." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:166 msgid "GS1 nomenclature list" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:168 msgid "The table below contains Odoo's default list of GS1 rules. Barcode patterns are written in regular expressions. Only the first three rules require a `check digit `_ as the final character." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:173 msgid "GS1 Content Type" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:173 msgid "Odoo field" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:175 msgid "Serial Shipping Container Code" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:175 msgid "(00)(\\\\d{18})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:175 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:177 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:180 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:183 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:186 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:189 msgid "Numeric identifier" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:175 msgid "Package name" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:177 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:40 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:168 msgid "Global Trade Item Number (GTIN)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:177 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:40 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:168 msgid "(01)(\\\\d{14})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:180 msgid "GTIN of contained trade items" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:180 msgid "(02)(\\\\d{14})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:180 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:43 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:3 msgid "Packaging" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:183 msgid "Ship to / Deliver to global location" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:183 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:183 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:186 msgid "Destination location" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:183 msgid "(410)(\\\\d{13})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:186 msgid "Ship / Deliver for forward" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:186 msgid "(413)(\\\\d{13})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:186 msgid "Source location" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:189 msgid "I.D. of a physical location" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:189 msgid "(414)(\\\\d{13})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:191 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:45 msgid "Batch or lot number" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:191 msgid "(10) ([!\"%-/0-9:-?A-Z_a-z]{0,20})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:191 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:194 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:225 msgid "Alpha-numeric name" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:194 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:194 msgid "Serial number" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:194 msgid "(21) ([!\"%-/0-9:-?A-Z_a-z]{0,20})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:197 msgid "Packaging date (YYMMDD)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:197 msgid "Packaging Date" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:197 msgid "(13)(\\\\d{6})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:197 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:200 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:203 msgid "Date" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:197 msgid "Pack date" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:200 msgid "Best before date (YYMMDD)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:200 msgid "Best before Date" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:200 msgid "(15)(\\\\d{6})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:200 msgid "Best before date" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:203 msgid "Expiration date (YYMMDD)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:203 msgid "Expiration Date" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:203 msgid "(17)(\\\\d{6})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:203 msgid "Expiry date" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:206 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:43 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:171 msgid "Variable count of items" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:206 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:208 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:211 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:213 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:215 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:217 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:219 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:221 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:223 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:43 msgid "Quantity" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:206 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:43 msgid "(30)(\\\\d{0,8})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:206 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:208 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:211 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:213 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:215 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:217 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:219 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:221 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:223 msgid "Measure" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:206 msgid "UoM: Units" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:208 msgid "Count of trade items" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:208 msgid "(37)(\\\\d{0,8})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:208 msgid "Qty in units for containers (AI 02)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:211 msgid "Net weight: kilograms (kg)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:211 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:171 msgid "(310[0-5])(\\\\d{6})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:211 msgid "Qty in kg" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:213 msgid "Length in meters (m)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:213 msgid "(311[0-5])(\\\\d{6})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:213 msgid "Qty in m" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:215 msgid "Net volume: liters (L)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:215 msgid "(315[0-5])(\\\\d{6})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:215 msgid "Qty in L" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:217 msgid "Net volume: cubic meters (m\\ :sup:`3`)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:217 msgid "(316[0-5])(\\\\d{6})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:217 msgid "Qty in m\\ :sup:`3`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:219 msgid "Length in inches (in)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:219 msgid "(321[0-5])(\\\\d{6})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:219 msgid "Qty in inches" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:221 msgid "Net weight/volume: ounces (oz)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:221 msgid "(357[0-5])(\\\\d{6})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:221 msgid "Qty in oz" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:223 msgid "Net volume: cubic feet (ft\\ :sup:`3`)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:223 msgid "(365[0-5])(\\\\d{6})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:223 msgid "Qty in ft\\ :sup:`3`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:225 msgid "Packaging type" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:225 msgid "Packaging Type" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:225 msgid "(91) ([!\"%-/0-9:-?A-Z_a-z]{0,90})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:225 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:126 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:77 msgid "Package type" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:3 msgid "GS1 barcode usage" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:10 msgid "GS1 barcodes provide a standardized format that barcode scanners can interpret. They encode information in a :ref:`specific structure recognized globally `, allowing scanners to understand and process supply chain data consistently." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:14 msgid "Odoo *Barcode* interprets and prints GS1 barcodes, automating product identification and tracking in warehouse operations such as receiving, picking, and shipping." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:17 msgid "The following sections contain examples of how Odoo uses GS1 barcodes provided by the business to identify common warehouse items and automate certain warehouse workflows." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:21 msgid "Odoo **does not** create GS1 barcodes. Businesses must purchase a unique Global Trade Item Number (GTIN) from GS1. Then, they can combine their existing GS1 barcodes with product and supply chain information (also provided by GS1) to create barcodes in Odoo." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:26 msgid "`Purchase GTINs `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:27 msgid ":ref:`GS1 nomenclature `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:32 msgid "Configure barcodes for product, quantity, and lots" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:34 msgid "To build a GS1 barcode that contains information about a product, its quantities, and the lot number, the following barcode patterns and Application Identifiers (A.I.) are used:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:38 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:166 msgid "Name" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:38 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:166 msgid "A.I." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:40 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:168 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:78 msgid "Product" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:40 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:135 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:168 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:204 msgid "01" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:43 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:139 msgid "30" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:43 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:171 msgid ":guilabel:`Units` field on transfer form" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:45 msgid "Lot Number" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:45 msgid "(10)([!\"%-/0-9:-?A-Z_a-z]{0,20})" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:45 msgid ":guilabel:`Lot` on Detailed Operations pop-up" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:54 msgid "First, :ref:`enable product tracking using lots ` by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and checking the box for :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` under the :guilabel:`Traceability` heading." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:58 msgid "Then, set up the product barcode by navigating to the intended product form in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products` and selecting the product. On the product form, click :guilabel:`Edit`. Then, in the :guilabel:`General Information` tab, fill in the :guilabel:`Barcode` field with the unique 14-digit `Global Trade Item Number (GTIN) `_, which is a universally recognized identifying number that is provided by GS1." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:66 msgid "On the product form, omit the |AI| `01` for |GTIN| product barcode pattern, as it is only used to encode multiple barcodes into a single barcode that contains detailed information about the package contents." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:72 msgid "To record the GS1 barcode for the product, `Fuji Apple`, enter the 14-digit |GTIN| `20611628936004` in the :guilabel:`Barcode` field on the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:0 msgid "Enter 14-digit GTIN into the Barcode field on product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:80 msgid "To view a list of *all* products and their corresponding barcodes in the Odoo database, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Barcode` heading, click on the :guilabel:`Configure Product Barcodes` button under the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanner` section. Enter the 14-digit |GTIN| into the :guilabel:`Barcode` column, then click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:0 msgid "View the Product Barcodes page from inventory settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:92 msgid "After activating tracking by lots and serial numbers from the settings page, specify that this feature is to be applied on each product by navigating to the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab on the product form. Under :guilabel:`Tracking`, choose the :guilabel:`By Lots` radio button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:-1 msgid "Enable product tracking by lots in the \"Inventory\" tab of the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:101 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:176 msgid "Scan barcode on receipt" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:103 msgid "To ensure accurate lot interpretation in Odoo on product barcodes scanned during a receipt operation, navigate to the :menuselection:`Barcode` app to manage the :ref:`receipt picking process `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:107 msgid "From the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanning` dashboard, click the :guilabel:`Operations` button, then the :guilabel:`Receipts` button to view the list of vendor receipts to process. Receipts generated from :abbr:`POs (Purchase Orders)` are listed, but new receipt operations can also be created directly through the :menuselection:`Barcode` app using the :guilabel:`Create` button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:112 msgid "On the list of receipts, click on the warehouse operation (`WH/IN`) and scan product barcodes and lot numbers with a barcode scanner. The scanned product then appears on the list. Use the :guilabel:`✏️ (pencil)` button to open a window and manually enter quantities for specific lot numbers." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:118 msgid "After placing a :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` for fifty apples, navigate to the associated receipt in the *Barcode* app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:121 msgid "Scan the barcode containing the |GTIN|, quantity, and lot number. For testing with a barcode scanner, below is an example barcode for the fifty Fuji apples in Lot 2." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:129 msgid "50 Fuji apples in Lot0002" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:131 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:200 msgid "2D Matrix" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:0 msgid "2D matrix of GS1 barcode of 50 fuji apples with an assigned lot number." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:134 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:203 msgid "|AI| (product)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:136 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:205 msgid "GS1 Barcode (product)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:137 msgid "20611628936004" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:138 msgid "|AI| (quantity)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:140 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:209 msgid "GS1 Barcode (quantity)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:141 msgid "00000050" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:142 msgid "|AI| (lot)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:144 msgid "GS1 Barcode (lot #)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:145 msgid "LOT0002" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:146 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:211 msgid "Full GS1 barcode" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:147 msgid "0120611628936004 3000000050 10LOT0002" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:149 msgid ":ref:`If the configuration is correct `, `50/50` :guilabel:`Units` processed will be displayed and the :guilabel:`Validate` button turns green. Click the :guilabel:`Validate` button to complete the reception." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:0 msgid "Scan the barcode for a product on the reception picking page in the *Barcode* app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:160 msgid "Configure barcode for product and non-unit quantity" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:162 msgid "To build a GS1 barcode that contains products measured in a non-unit quantity, like kilograms, for example, the following barcode patterns are used:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:171 msgid "Quantity in kilograms" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:171 msgid "310[0-5]" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:178 msgid "To confirm that quantities are correctly interpreted in Odoo, place an order in the *Purchase* app using the appropriate unit of measure (:guilabel:`UoM`) for the quantity of products to be purchased." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:183 msgid ":ref:`Simplify vendor unit conversions with UoMs `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:186 msgid "After the order is placed, navigate to the :menuselection:`Barcode` app to :ref:`receive the vendor shipment `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:190 msgid "On the receipt in the *Barcode* app, receive an order for `52.1 kg` of peaches by scanning the barcode containing the |GTIN| and quantity of peaches in kilograms." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:198 msgid "52.1 kg of Peaches" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:0 msgid "2D matrix of GS1 barcode of 52.1 kg of peaches." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:206 msgid "00614141000012" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:207 msgid "|AI| (kg, 1 decimal point)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:208 msgid "3101" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:210 msgid "000521" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:212 msgid "0100614141000012 3101000521" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:214 msgid ":ref:`If the configuration is correct `, `52.1 / 52.1` :guilabel:`kg` will be displayed and the :guilabel:`Validate` button turns green. Finally, press :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the validation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:0 msgid "Scan barcode screen for a reception operation in the Barcode app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:223 msgid "Verify product moves" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:225 msgid "For additional verification, the quantities of received products are also recorded on the :guilabel:`Product Moves` report, accessible by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Reporting --> Product Moves`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:229 msgid "The items on the :guilabel:`Product Moves` report are grouped by product by default. To confirm the received quantities, click on a product line to open its collapsible drop-down menu, which displays a list of *stock move lines* for the product. The latest stock move matches the warehouse reception reference number (e.g. `WH/IN/00013`) and quantity processed in the barcode scan, demonstrating that the records processed in the *Barcode* app were properly stored in *Inventory*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:-1 msgid "Reception stock move record for 52.1 kg of peaches." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:3 msgid "Process receipts and deliveries with barcodes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:7 msgid "The *Barcode* app can be used to process receipts, deliveries, and other types of operations in real time using a barcode scanner or the Odoo mobile app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:10 msgid "This makes it possible to process operations on the warehouse floor when they happen, instead of having to wait to validate transfers from a computer. Processing operations this way can help to properly attribute barcodes to the appropriate products, pickings, locations, and more." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:17 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:15 msgid "To use the *Barcode* app to process transfers, it must be installed by enabling the feature from the settings of the *Inventory* app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:20 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:18 msgid "To do so, go to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Barcode` section, and click the checkbox next to the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanner` feature." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:26 msgid "Once the page has refreshed, new options will be displayed under the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanner` feature: :guilabel:`Barcode Nomenclature` (with a corresponding drop-down menu), where either :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature` or :guilabel:`Default GS1 Nomenclature` can be selected." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:30 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:29 msgid "There is also a :guilabel:`Configure Product Barcodes` internal link arrow, and a set of :guilabel:`Print` buttons for printing barcode commands and a barcode demo sheet." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:37 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:36 msgid "For more on setting up and configuring the :guilabel:`Barcode` app, refer to the :doc:`Set up your barcode scanner <../setup/hardware>` and :doc:`Activate the Barcodes in Odoo <../setup/software>` documentation pages." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:44 msgid "Scan barcodes for receipts" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:46 msgid "To process warehouse receipts for incoming products, there first needs to be a purchase order (PO) created, and a receipt operation to process." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:49 msgid "To create a :abbr:`PO (purchase order)`, navigate to the :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Create` to create a new request for quotation (RFQ)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:52 msgid "From the blank :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` form, click the drop-down menu next to the :guilabel:`Vendor` field to add a vendor. Then, on the :guilabel:`Product` line under the :guilabel:`Products` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a product`, and select the desired product(s) to add to the quotation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:57 msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Save` at the top of the form, then click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to confirm the :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` to a :abbr:`PO (purchase order)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:-1 msgid "Completed purchase order for barcode product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:64 msgid "To process and scan barcodes for warehouse receipts, navigate to the :menuselection:`Barcode app`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:66 msgid "Once inside the :guilabel:`Barcode app`, a :guilabel:`Barcode Scanning` screen displaying different options is presented. To process receipts, click on the :guilabel:`Operations` button at the bottom of the screen. This navigates to an :menuselection:`Operations` overview page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:74 msgid "From this page, locate the :guilabel:`Receipts` card, and click the :guilabel:`# To Process` button to view all outstanding receipts. Then, select the desired receipt operation to process. This navigates to the barcode transfer screen." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:79 msgid "If *only* using a barcode scanner or the Odoo mobile app, the barcodes for each transfer of a corresponding operation type can be scanned to be processed easily. Once scanned, the products that are part of an existing transfer can be scanned, and new products can be added to the transfer, as well. Once all products have been scanned, validate the transfer to proceed with the stock moves." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:85 msgid "From this screen, an overview of all receipts to process within that transfer (**WH/IN/000XX**) is shown. At the bottom of the screen, there are options to :guilabel:`Add Product` or :guilabel:`Validate`, depending on if products need to be added to the operation, or if the whole operation should be validated at once." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:-1 msgid "Overview of receipts in transfer to scan." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:94 msgid "To process and scan each product individually, choose a specific product line. The :guilabel:`+#` button (in this case, :guilabel:`+10`) can be clicked to indicate receipt of that product, or the :guilabel:`pencil` icon can be clicked to open a new screen to edit that product line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:98 msgid "From this screen, the product that's being received is listed. Under the product name, the :guilabel:`Quantity` line can be edited. Either change the `0` in the line to the desired quantity, or click the :guilabel:`/# Units` button (in this case, :guilabel:`/10 Units`) to automatically fill the quantity ordered from the :abbr:`PO (purchase order)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:104 msgid "In the reception operation `WH/IN/00019`, `10 Units` of the `Barcode Product` is expected to be received. `[BARCODE_PROD]` is the :guilabel:`Internal Reference` set on the product form. Scan the barcode of the `Barcode Product` to receive one unit. Afterwards, click the :guilabel:`pencil` icon to manually enter the received quantities." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:0 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:0 msgid "Product line editor for individual transfer in Barcode app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:113 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:179 msgid "Additionally, the :guilabel:`+1` and :guilabel:`-1` buttons can be clicked to add or subtract quantity of the product, and the :guilabel:`number keys` can be used to add quantity, as well." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:116 msgid "Below the :guilabel:`number keys` is the :guilabel:`location` line, which reads `WH/Stock` by default, unless another *location* is listed on the product itself. Click this line to reveal a drop-down menu of additional locations to choose from." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:120 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:194 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:158 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:211 msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the changes made to the product line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:122 msgid "Then, from the overview page with all receipts to process within that transfer (**WH/IN/000XX**), click the :guilabel:`+#` button on the product line for the products being received, and click :guilabel:`Validate`. The receipt has now been processed, and the :guilabel:`Barcode app` can be closed out." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:-1 msgid "Overview of receipts in transfer to validate." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:132 msgid "Scan barcodes for delivery orders" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:134 msgid "To process warehouse deliveries for outgoing products, there first needs to be a sales order (SO) created, and a delivery operation to process." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:137 msgid "To create a :abbr:`SO (sales order)`, navigate to the :menuselection:`Sales app --> Create` to create a new quotation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:140 msgid "From the blank quotation form, click the drop-down menu next to the :guilabel:`Customer` field to add a customer. Then, on the :guilabel:`Product` line under the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a product`, and select the desired product(s) to add to the quotation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:144 msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Save` at the top of the form, and click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to confirm the quotation to a :abbr:`SO (sales order)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:-1 msgid "Completed sales order for barcode product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:151 msgid "To process and scan barcodes for warehouse deliveries, navigate to the :menuselection:`Barcode app`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:153 msgid "Once inside the :guilabel:`Barcode app`, a :guilabel:`Barcode Scanning` screen displaying different options is presented. To process deliveries, click on the :guilabel:`Operations` button at the bottom of the screen. This navigates to an :guilabel:`Operations` overview page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:157 msgid "From this page, locate the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` card, and click the :guilabel:`# To Process` button to view all outstanding deliveries. Then, select the desired delivery order to process. This navigates to the barcode transfer screen." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:-1 msgid "Operations overview page in Barcode app dashboard." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:165 msgid "From this screen, an overview of all deliveries to process within that transfer (**WH/OUT/000XX**) is shown. At the bottom of the screen, there are options to :guilabel:`Add Product` or :guilabel:`Validate`, depending on if products need to be added to the operation, or if the whole operation should be validated at once." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:170 msgid "To process and scan each product individually, choose a specific product line. The :guilabel:`+1` button can be clicked to indicate delivery of that product, or the :guilabel:`pencil icon` can be clicked to open a new screen to edit that product line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:174 msgid "From this screen, the product that's being delivered is listed. Under the product name, the :guilabel:`Quantity` line can be edited. Either change the `0` in the line to the desired quantity, or click the :guilabel:`/# Units` button (in this case, :guilabel:`/10 Units`) to automatically fill the quantity ordered from the :abbr:`SO (sales order)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:182 msgid "Below the :guilabel:`number keys` is the :guilabel:`location` line, which reads `WH/Stock` by default, unless another location is listed on the product itself." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:185 msgid "This is the location that the product is being pulled from for delivery. Click this line to reveal a drop-down menu of additional locations to choose from (if this product is stored in multiple locations in the warehouse)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:190 msgid "For warehouses that have multiple different storage locations, putaway rules, and removal strategies, additional steps can be added for various operation types, while using the *Barcode* app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:196 msgid "Then, from the overview page with all receipts to process within that transfer (**WH/OUT/000XX**), click the :guilabel:`+#` button on the product line for the products being received, and click :guilabel:`Validate`. The delivery has now been processed, and the *Barcode* app can be closed out." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:-1 msgid "Overview of deliveries in transfer to validate." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:3 msgid "Create and process transfers with barcodes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:5 msgid "The *Barcode* app can be used to process internal transfers for all types of products, including transfers for products tracked using lots or serial numbers. Transfers can be created from scratch in real time using an Odoo-compatible barcode scanner or the Odoo mobile app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:9 msgid "For a list of Odoo-compatible barcode mobile scanners, and other hardware for the *Inventory* app, refer to the `Odoo Inventory • Hardware page `_." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:24 msgid "When the page has refreshed, new options are displayed under the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanner` feature: :guilabel:`Barcode Nomenclature` (with a corresponding drop-down menu), where either :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature` or :guilabel:`Default GS1 Nomenclature` can be selected. The nomenclature selected changes how scanners interpret barcodes in Odoo." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:41 msgid "Scan barcodes for internal transfers" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:43 msgid "To create and process internal transfers for products in a warehouse, the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` and :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` features **must** be enabled." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:46 msgid "To do so, go to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section, and click the checkboxes next to :guilabel:`Storage Locations` and :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:50 msgid "Then, click :guilabel:`Save` at the top of the page to save changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:53 msgid "Create an internal transfer" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:55 msgid "To process existing internal transfers, there first needs to be an internal transfer created, and an operation to process." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:58 msgid "To create an internal transfer, navigate to the :menuselection:`Inventory app`. From the :guilabel:`Inventory Overview` dashboard, locate the :guilabel:`Internal Transfers` card, and click on the :guilabel:`0 To Process` button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:62 msgid "Then, click :guilabel:`Create` in the top left of the resulting page. This navigates to a new :guilabel:`Internal Transfer` form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:65 msgid "On this blank form, the :guilabel:`Operation Type` is automatically listed as :guilabel:`Internal Transfers`. Under that field, the :guilabel:`Source Location` and :guilabel:`Destination Location` are set as :guilabel:`WH/Stock` by default, but can be changed to whichever locations the products are being moved from, and moved to." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:-1 msgid "Blank internal transfer form with source location and destination location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:74 msgid "Once the desired locations have been selected, products can be added to the transfer. On the :guilabel:`Product` line under the :guilabel:`Products` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a product`, and select the desired product(s) to add to the transfer." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:78 msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Save` at the top of the form to save the new internal transfer. Once saved, click the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` icon (four lines, at the far right of the :guilabel:`Product` line) to open the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:-1 msgid "Internal transfer detailed operations pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:86 msgid "From the pop-up, click :guilabel:`Add a line`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:88 msgid "Then, in the :guilabel:`To` column, change the location from :guilabel:`WH/Stock` to a different location, where the products should be moved." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:91 msgid "Next, in the :guilabel:`Done` column, change the quantity to the desired quantity to transfer. Once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to close out the pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:95 msgid "Scan barcodes for internal transfer" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:97 msgid "To process and scan barcodes for internal transfers, navigate to the :menuselection:`Barcode app`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:99 msgid "Once inside the :guilabel:`Barcode app`, a :guilabel:`Barcode Scanning` screen displaying different options is presented." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:102 msgid "To process internal transfers, click on the :guilabel:`Operations` button at the bottom of the screen. This navigates to an :menuselection:`Operations` overview page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:109 msgid "From this page, locate the :guilabel:`Internal Transfers` card, and click the :guilabel:`# To Process` button to view all outstanding internal transfers. Then, select the desired operation to process. This navigates to the barcode transfer screen." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:114 msgid "When using the *Barcode* app without the *Inventory* app (**only** if using a barcode scanner or the Odoo mobile app), the barcodes for each transfer of a corresponding operation type can be scanned to be processed easily." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:118 msgid "Once scanned, the products that are part of an existing transfer can be scanned, and new products can be added to the transfer, as well. Once all products have been scanned, validate the transfer to proceed with the stock moves." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:122 msgid "From this screen, an overview of all products to process within that specific internal transfer (**WH/INT/000XX**) is shown. At the bottom of the screen, there are options to :guilabel:`Add Product` or :guilabel:`Validate`, depending on if products need to be added to the operation, or if the whole operation should be validated at once." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:131 msgid "Then, scan the barcode of the product to process the internal transfer." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:133 msgid "Or, to process and scan each product individually, choose a specific product line. The :guilabel:`+ 1` button can be clicked to add additional quantity of that product to the transfer, or the :guilabel:`pencil icon` can be clicked to open a new screen to edit that product line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:137 msgid "In the product's pop-up window, the product and the units to process is displayed with a number pad. Under the product name, the :guilabel:`Quantity` line can be edited. Change the number in the line to the quantity listed to be transferred on the internal transfer form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:142 msgid "In the internal transfer operation `WH/INT/000XX`, `50 Units` of the `Transfer Product` is moved from `WH/Stock` to `WH/Stock/Shelf 1`. `[TRANSFER_PROD]` is the :guilabel:`Internal Reference` set on the product form. Scan the barcode of the `Transfer Product` to receive one unit. Afterwards, click the :guilabel:`pencil icon` to manually enter the transferred quantities." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:151 msgid "Additionally, the :guilabel:`+1` and :guilabel:`-1` buttons can be clicked to add or subtract quantity of the product, and the number keys can be used to add quantity, as well." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:154 msgid "Below the number keys are the two :guilabel:`location` lines, which read whichever locations were previously specified on the internal transfer form, in this case `WH/Stock` and `WH/Stock/Shelf 1`. Click these lines to reveal a drop-down menu of additional locations to choose from." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:160 msgid "Then, from the overview page with all products to process within that transfer (**WH/INT/000XX**), click :guilabel:`Validate`. The receipt has now been processed, and the *Barcode* app can be closed out." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:165 msgid "The *Barcode* app can also be used to scan products in internal transfers containing unique lot numbers and serial numbers." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:168 msgid "From the barcode transfer screen, scan the barcode of a lot or serial number, and Odoo automatically increases the quantity of the product to the quantity recorded in the database. If the same lot or serial number is shared between different products, scan the product barcode first, then the barcode of the lot/serial number." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:174 msgid "Create a transfer from scratch" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:176 msgid "In addition to processing and scanning barcodes for existing, previously-created internal transfers, the *Barcode* app can also be used to create transfers from scratch, simply by scanning a printed operation type barcode." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:182 msgid "Odoo's *Barcode* application provides demo data with barcodes to explore the features of the app. These can be used for testing purposes, and can be printed from the home screen of the app. To access this demo data, navigate to the :menuselection:`Barcode app` and click :guilabel:`stock barcodes sheet` (bolded and highlighted in blue) in the information pop-up above the scanner." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:191 msgid "To do this, first navigate to the :menuselection:`Barcode app`. Once inside the *Barcode* app, a :guilabel:`Barcode Scanning` screen displaying different options is presented." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:194 msgid "From this screen, when using a USB or bluetooth barcode scanner, directly scan the product barcode." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:196 msgid "When using a smartphone as the barcode scanner, click the :guilabel:`Tap to Scan` button (next to the camera icon, at the center of the screen). This opens a :guilabel:`Barcode Scanner` pop-up screen that enables the camera of the device being used." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:200 msgid "Face the camera toward the printed operation type barcode to scan it. Doing so processes the barcode, and navigates to a barcode transfer screen." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:203 msgid "From this screen, an overview of all products to process within that specific internal transfer (**WH/INT/000XX**) is shown. Since this is a new transfer created from scratch, however, there should not be any products listed on the page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:207 msgid "To add products, scan the product barcode. If the barcode is not available, manually enter the product into the system by clicking the :guilabel:`Add Product` button at the bottom of the screen, and add the products and product quantities that should be transferred." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:-1 msgid "Blank product editor in scratch internal transfer." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:217 msgid "Then, from the overview page with all products to process within that transfer (**WH/INT/000XX**), click :guilabel:`Validate`. The internal transfer has now been processed, and the *Barcode* app can be closed out." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup.rst:5 msgid "Setup" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:3 msgid "Set up your barcode scanner" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:7 msgid "Follow this guide to choose and set up a barcode scanner compatible with Odoo's *Inventory* and *Barcode* apps." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:14 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:14 msgid "An image of an example barcode scanner." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:17 msgid "Scanner types" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:19 msgid "Before setting up a barcode scanner, it is important to determine which scanner type best meets the needs of the business. There are three main types, each with their own benefits and use cases:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:22 msgid "**USB scanners** are connected to a computer, and are suitable for businesses that scan products at a fixed location, like at the checkout in a grocery store. Ensure the chosen USB scanner is compatible with the keyboard layout of the computer." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:26 msgid "**Bluetooth scanners** pair with a smartphone or tablet, making them an ideal cost-effective and portable barcode scanner option. In this scenario, Odoo is installed on the smartphone, allowing warehouse operators to handle operations, and check stock directly through their mobile devices." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:30 msgid "**Mobile computer scanners** are mobile devices with a built-in barcode scanner. First, ensure the device can run the Odoo mobile app properly. Recent models that use Android OS with the Google Chrome browser, or Windows OS with Microsoft Edge, should work. However, testing is crucial due to the variety of available models and configurations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:36 msgid "`Compatible hardware with Odoo Inventory `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:41 msgid "When setting up the barcode scanner, make sure the following configurations are correct so the scanner can properly interpret barcodes with Odoo." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:45 msgid "Keyboard layout" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:47 msgid "When using a USB barcode scanner, match its keyboard layout with the operating system's layout for proper interpretation of characters. Generally, the scanning mode should be set to accept a USB keyboard (HID), with the language set based on the keyboard that is in use." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:51 msgid "To configure the keyboard layout for a **Zebra** scanner, scan the keyboard wedge barcode for the desired language in the scanner's user manual." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:57 msgid "Example of a user manual for keyboard layout." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:57 msgid "Examples of keyboard language settings in the Zebra scanner user manual." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:60 msgid "Automatic carriage return" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:62 msgid "Odoo has a default 100-millisecond delay between scans to prevent accidental double scanning. To synchronize with the barcode scanner, set it to include a *carriage return* (:dfn:`character like the \"Enter\" key on a keyboard`) after each scan. Odoo interprets the carriage return as the end of the barcode input; so Odoo accepts the scan, and waits for the next one." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:67 msgid "Typically, on the scanner, a carriage return is included by default. Ensure it is set by scanning a specific barcode in the user manual, like `CR suffix ON` or `Apply Enter for suffix`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:71 msgid "Zebra scanner" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:73 msgid "When using Zebra scanners, ensure the following keystroke configurations are set to prevent errors." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:75 msgid "Begin on the Zebra scanner's home screen, and select the :guilabel:`DataWedge` app (the icon for the app is a light blue barcode). On the :guilabel:`DataWedge Profiles` page, select the profile option to access the Zebra scanner's settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:79 msgid "Scroll down to the :guilabel:`Keyboard Output` option, and ensure the :guilabel:`Enable/disable keystroke output` option is :guilabel:`Enabled`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:-1 msgid "Show keystroke option in the Zebra scanner's DataWedge app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:86 msgid "Now, go back to the :guilabel:`Profile` options page, and select :guilabel:`Key event options`. Here, ensure the :guilabel:`Send Characters as Events` option is checked." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:3 msgid "Activate the Barcodes in Odoo" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:7 msgid "The barcode scanning features can save you a lot of time usually lost switching between the keyboard, the mouse and the scanner. Properly attributing barcodes to products, pickings locations, etc. allows you to work more efficiently by controlling the software almost exclusively with the barcode scanner." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:16 msgid "To use this feature, you first need to activate the *Barcode* functionality via :menuselection:`Inventory --> Settings --> Barcode Scanner`. Once you have ticked the feature, you can hit save." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:24 msgid "Set Product Barcodes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:26 msgid "You can easily assign barcodes to your different products via the *Inventory* app. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Settings --> Configure Products Barcodes`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:32 msgid "Then, you have the possibility to assign barcodes to your products directly at creation on the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:42 msgid "Be careful to add barcodes directly on the product variants and not on the template product. Otherwise, you won’t be able to differentiate them." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:49 msgid "Set Locations Barcodes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:51 msgid "If you manage multiple locations, you will find useful to attribute a barcode to each location and stick it on the location. You can configure the locations barcodes in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Locations`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:62 msgid "You can easily print the barcode you allocate to the locations via the *Print* menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:66 msgid "Barcode Formats" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:68 msgid "Most retail products use EAN-13 barcodes, also known as GTIN (Global Trade Identification Numbers). GTIN are used by companies to uniquely identify their products and services. While GTIN and UPC are often used synonymously, GTIN refers to the number a barcode represents, while UPC refers to the barcode itself. More information about GTIN can be found on the GS1 website." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:73 msgid "In order to create GTIN for items, a company must have a GS1 Company Prefix. This prefix is the number that will appear at the beginning of each GTIN, and will identify the company as the owner of the barcode any the products it appears on. To learn more about GS1 Company Prefixes, or purchase a license for a prefix, visit the GS1 Company Prefix page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:78 msgid "Odoo users are able to use GTIN barcodes to identify their products. However, since Odoo supports any numeric string as a barcode, it is also possible to define a custom barcode for internal use." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory.rst:8 msgid "Inventory" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory.rst:10 msgid "Odoo *Inventory* is both an inventory application and a warehouse management system. The app allows users to easily manage lead times, automate replenishment, configure advanced routes, and more." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory.rst:14 msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Inventory `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management.rst:5 msgid "Product management" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:9 msgid "Configure product" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:11 msgid "A group of products in Odoo can be further defined using:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:13 msgid ":doc:`Units of measure (UoM) `: a standard quantity for specifying product amounts (e.g., meters, yards, kilograms). Enables automatic conversion between measurement systems in Odoo, such as centimeters to feet." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:17 msgid "*Ex: Purchasing fabric measured in meters but receiving it in yards from a vendor.*" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:19 msgid ":doc:`configure/package`: A physical container used to group products together, regardless of whether they are the same or different." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:22 msgid "*Ex: A box containing assorted items for delivery, or a storage box of two hundred buttons on a shelf.*" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:25 msgid ":doc:`configure/packaging`: groups the *same* products together to receive or sell them in specified quantities." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:28 msgid "*Ex: Cans of soda sold in packs of six, twelve, or twenty-four.*" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:31 msgid "Comparison" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:33 msgid "This table provides a detailed comparison of units of measure, packages, and packaging to help businesses evaluate which best suits their requirements." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:40 msgid "Feature" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:41 msgid "Unit of measure" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:42 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:3 msgid "Packages" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:44 msgid "Purpose" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:45 msgid "Standardized measurement for product units (e.g., cm, lb, L)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:46 msgid "Tracks the specific physical container and its contents" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:47 msgid "Groups a fixed number of items together for easier management (e.g., packs of 6, 12 or 24)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:48 msgid "Product uniformity" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:49 msgid "Defined per product; saved as one |UoM| in the database" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:50 msgid "Allows mixed products" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:51 msgid "Same products only" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:52 msgid "Flexible" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:53 msgid "Converts between vendor/customer |UoMs| and database |UoM|" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:54 msgid "Items can be added or removed from the container" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:55 msgid "Quantities are fixed (e.g., always packs of 6, 12 or 24)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:56 msgid "Complexity" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:57 msgid "Simplest for unit conversions" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:58 msgid "More complex due to container-level inventory tracking" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:59 msgid "Simpler; suitable for uniform product groupings" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:60 msgid "Inventory tracking" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:61 msgid "Tracks product quantities within the warehouse in the specific |UoM| defined in the product form" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:63 msgid "Tracks package location and contents within the warehouse" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:64 msgid "Tracks grouped quantities but not individual items' locations" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:65 msgid "Smooth barcode operations" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:66 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:74 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:78 msgid "Not available" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:67 msgid "Requires scanning both the package and individual items for reception. (even if there are 30 items in a package). Can enable the :ref:`Move Entire Packages ` feature to update the package's contained items' locations, when moving the package" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:71 msgid "Scanning a packaging barcode automatically records all included units. (e.g. 1 pack = 12 units)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:73 msgid "Product lookup" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:75 msgid "Scanning a product's barcode identifies its typical storage location in the Odoo database" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:76 msgid "Barcode identifies grouped quantity, not storage location" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:77 msgid "Unique barcodes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:79 msgid "Unique barcodes for individual packages (e.g. Pallet #12)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:80 msgid "Barcodes set at the packaging type level (e.g. for a pack of 6)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:81 msgid "Reusability" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:82 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:87 msgid "Not applicable" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:83 msgid "Can be disposable or reusable, configured via the :ref:`Package Use ` field" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:85 msgid "Disposable only" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:86 msgid "Container weight" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:88 msgid "Weight of the container itself is included in the *Shipping Weight* field of a package (:menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Packages`)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:90 msgid "Weight of the container is defined in the *Package Type* settings" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:91 msgid "Lot/serial number tracking" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:92 msgid "Requires manual adjustments to track |UoMs| via lots (See :ref:`use case ` for details)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:94 msgid "Applies only to contained products" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:95 msgid "Applies to both contained products and the container" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:96 msgid "Custom routes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:97 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:98 msgid "Cannot be set" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:99 msgid "Routes can define specific warehouse paths for a particular packaging type" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:102 msgid "Use cases" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:104 msgid "After comparing the various features, consider how these businesses, with various inventory management and logistics workflows, came to their decision." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:108 msgid "Pallets of items using packaging" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:110 msgid "A warehouse receives shipments of soap organized on physical pallets, each containing 96 bars. These pallets are used for internal transfers and are also sold as standalone units. For logistical purposes, the pallet's weight must be included in the total shipping weight for certain deliveries. Additionally, the pallet requires a barcode to facilitate tracking, and the number of individual bars of soap must be included in the stock count when the pallet is received." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:116 msgid "After evaluating various options, *product packaging* was the most suitable solution. Packaging enables assigning a barcode to a pallet, identifying it as a \"pallet type\" containing 96 soap bars. This barcode streamlines operations by automatically registering the grouped quantity. Key distinctions include:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:121 msgid "**Warehouse tracking limitations**: Odoo tracks only the total quantity, not the number of packagings. For instance, if a pallet with 12 and 24 quantities is received, Odoo records 36 quantities, not the pallet details." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:124 msgid "**Packaging barcodes are type-specific, not unique**: Barcodes represent packaging types (e.g., \"pallet of 96 soap bars\") but do not uniquely identify individual pallets, such as Pallet #1 or Pallet #2." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:129 msgid "Capture product information using barcode" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:131 msgid "An Odoo user expects the **Barcode** app to display the typical storage location of a product by scanning a barcode for a container." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:134 msgid "*Packages* was the most suitable. When the :ref:`appropriate setting is enabled `, scanning a package barcode displays its contents in the **Barcode** app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:138 msgid "Packages represent physical containers, enabling detailed tracking of the items they hold. Scanning a package provides visibility into its contents and facilitates operations, like inventory moves." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:145 msgid "Track different units of measure in storage" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:147 msgid "A fruit juice distributor tracks multiple |UoMs| for their operations:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:149 msgid "Fruits are purchased in tons." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:150 msgid "Juice is produced and stored in kilograms." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:151 msgid "Small samples are stored in grams for recipe testing." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:153 msgid "*Unit of Measure* was most suitable. Odoo automatically converts tons to kilograms during receipts. However, since Odoo tracks only one |UoM| per product in the database, the company uses lot numbers to differentiate |UoMs|:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:157 msgid "LOT1: Grams (g)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:158 msgid "LOT2: Kilograms (kg)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure.rst:160 msgid "Manual inventory adjustments are required to convert between lots, such as subtracting 1 kg from LOT2 to add 1,000 g to LOT1. While functional, this workaround can be time-consuming and prone to errors." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:7 msgid "A *package* is a physical container holding one or more products. Packages can also be used to store items in bulk." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:10 msgid "Packages are commonly used for the following purposes:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:12 msgid ":ref:`Grouping products to move them in bulk `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:13 msgid ":ref:`Shipping to customers `: configure package types to align with shipping carriers' size and weight requirements, streamlining the packing process, and ensuring compliance with carrier shipping specifications." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:16 msgid "Storing items in bulk." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:18 msgid "*Package use* is a field on the package form in Odoo that is only visible by enabling the *Batch Transfers* and *Packages* features (:menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:21 msgid "By default, the *Package Use* field on a packages form is set to *Disposable Box*. Change this field to *Reusable Box* **only** when configuring packages for :ref:`cluster pickings `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:25 msgid "*Package type* is an optional feature used for :doc:`calculating shipping cost <../../shipping_receiving/setup_configuration>`, based on real shipping weight. Create package types to include the weight of the package itself (e.g. boxes, pallets, other shipping containers) in shipping cost calculations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:31 msgid "While packages are commonly used in the :doc:`three-step delivery route <../../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps>`, they can be used in any workflow involving storable products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:40 msgid "To use packages, first go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Operations` heading, activate the :guilabel:`Packages` feature. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:-1 msgid "Activate the *Packages* setting in Inventory > Configuration > Settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:50 msgid "When moving packages internally, the *Move Entire Packages* feature can be enabled on an operation type to update a package's contained item's location upon updating the package's location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:53 msgid "To do that, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Operations Types` and select the desired operation this feature will apply to (may have to set it for multiple)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:56 msgid "On the operation type page, in the :guilabel:`Packages` section, tick the :guilabel:`Move Entire Packages` checkbox." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:62 msgid "Pack items" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:64 msgid "Products can be added to packages in any transfer by:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:66 msgid "Clicking each :ref:`Detailed Operations ` icon on the product line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:68 msgid "Using the :ref:`Put in Pack ` button to place everything in the transfer into a package." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:74 msgid "Detailed operations" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:76 msgid "On any warehouse transfer (e.g. receipt, delivery order), add a product to a package by clicking the :guilabel:`⦙≣ (bulleted list)` icon in the :guilabel:`Operations` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:-1 msgid "Show \"Detailed Operations\" icon in the product line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:83 msgid "Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` pop-up window for the :guilabel:`Product`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:85 msgid "To put the :guilabel:`Product` in a package, click :guilabel:`Add a line`, and assign the product to a :guilabel:`Destination Package`. Select an existing package, or create a new one by typing the name of the new package, then select :guilabel:`Create...`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:93 msgid "Assign a package to \"Destination Package\" field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:93 msgid "Twelve units of `Acoustic Bloc Screen` are placed in `PACK0000001`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:95 msgid "Then, specify the quantity of items to go into the package in the :guilabel:`Done` column. Repeat the above steps to place the :guilabel:`Product` in different packages. Once finished, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to close the window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:100 msgid ":doc:`Ship one order in multiple packages <../../shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack>`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:106 msgid "Put in pack" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:108 msgid "Alternatively, click the :guilabel:`Put in Pack` button on **any** warehouse transfer to create a new package, and place all the items in the transfer in that newly-created package." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:112 msgid "The :guilabel:`Put in Pack` button appears on receipts, delivery orders, and other transfer forms with the *Packages* feature enabled in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:120 msgid "Image of the \"Put in Pack\" button being clicked." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:120 msgid "In batch transfer `BATCH/00003`, the :guilabel:`Put in Pack` button was clicked to create a new package, `PACK0000002`, and assign all items to it in the :guilabel:`Destination Package` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:128 msgid "Create package types by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Package Types`, in order to set custom dimensions and weight limits. This feature is mainly used to calculate package weights for shipping costs." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:133 msgid ":doc:`Shipping carriers <../../shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper>`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:134 msgid ":doc:`../../shipping_receiving/setup_configuration`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:136 msgid "On the :guilabel:`Package Types` list, clicking :guilabel:`New` opens a blank package type form. The fields of the form are as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:139 msgid ":guilabel:`Package Type` (required): define the package type's name." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:140 msgid ":guilabel:`Size`: define the dimensions of the package in millimeters (mm). The fields, from left to right, define the :guilabel:`Length`, :guilabel:`Width`, and :guilabel:`Height`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:142 msgid ":guilabel:`Weight`: weight of an empty package (e.g. an empty box, pallet)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:145 msgid "Odoo calculates the package's weight by adding the weight of the empty package plus the weight of the item(s), which can be found in the :guilabel:`Weight` field, in the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab, of each product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:149 msgid ":guilabel:`Max Weight`: maximum shipping weight allowed in the package." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:150 msgid ":guilabel:`Barcode`: define a barcode to identify the package type from a scan." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:151 msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: specify a company to make the package type available **only** at the selected company. Leave the field blank if it is available at all companies." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:153 msgid ":guilabel:`Carrier`: specify the intended shipping carrier for this package type." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:154 msgid ":guilabel:`Carrier Code`: define a code that is linked to the package type." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:-1 msgid "Package type for FedEx's 25 kilogram box." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:163 msgid "Cluster packages" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:165 msgid "To use *cluster packages*, first navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and activate the :guilabel:`Batch Transfers` feature, located in the :guilabel:`Operations` section. Doing so makes the *Package Use* field become visible on a package form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:-1 msgid "Activate the *Batch Transfers* feature in Inventory > Configuration > Settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:174 msgid "Add new packages by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Packages`. Then, click :guilabel:`New`, or select an existing package. Doing so opens the package form, which contains the following fields:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:178 msgid ":guilabel:`Package Reference` (required): name of the package." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:179 msgid ":guilabel:`Package Type`: used for :ref:`configuring shipping boxes to ship to the customer `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:183 msgid ":guilabel:`Package Type` is unnecessary for configuring packages for cluster pickings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:185 msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Weight`: used to input the weight of the package after measuring it on a scale." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:187 msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: specify a company to make the package available **only** at the selected company. Leave the field blank if the package is available at all companies." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:189 msgid ":guilabel:`Location`: current location of the package." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:190 msgid ":guilabel:`Pack Date`: the date the package was created." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:191 msgid ":guilabel:`Package Use`: choose :guilabel:`Reusable` for packages used for moving products within the warehouse; :guilabel:`Disposable` for packages used to ship products to customers." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:-1 msgid "Display package form to create a cluster pack." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/package.rst:199 msgid ":doc:`Using cluster packages <../../shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster>`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:5 msgid "In Odoo *Inventory*, *packaging* refers to disposable containers holding multiple units of a specific product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:8 msgid "For example, different packages for cans of soda, such as a 6-pack, a 12-pack, or a case of 36, **must** be configured on the individual product form. This is because packagings are product specific, not generic." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:13 msgid "Packaging can be used in conjunction with Odoo :ref:`Barcode `. When receiving products from suppliers, scanning the packaging barcode automatically adds the number of units in the packaging to the internal count of the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:20 msgid "To use packagings, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, under the :guilabel:`Products` heading, enable the :guilabel:`Product Packagings` feature, and click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:-1 msgid "Enable packagings by selecting \"Product Packagings\"." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:31 msgid "Create packaging" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:33 msgid "Packagings can be created directly on the product form, or from the :guilabel:`Product Packagings` page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:37 msgid "From product form" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:39 msgid "Create packagings on a product form by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and select the desired product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:42 msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Packaging` section, and click :guilabel:`Add a line`. In the table, fill out the following fields:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:45 msgid ":guilabel:`Packaging` (required): name of packaging that appears on sales/purchase orders as a packaging option for the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:47 msgid ":guilabel:`Contained quantity` (required): amount of product in the packaging." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:48 msgid ":guilabel:`Unit of Measure` (required): measurement unit for quantifying the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:49 msgid ":guilabel:`Sales`: check this option for packagings intended for use on sales orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:50 msgid ":guilabel:`Purchase`: check this option for packagings intended for use on purchase orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:53 msgid "Access additional fields in the :guilabel:`Packaging` table below by clicking the :guilabel:`(sliders)` icon to the far-right of the column titles in the :guilabel:`Packaging` section, and selecting the desired options from the drop-down menu that appears." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:0 msgid "Show the additional options menu's icon: sliders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:61 msgid ":guilabel:`Barcode`: identifier for tracing packaging in stock moves or pickings, using the :ref:`Barcode app `. Leave blank if not in use." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:63 msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: indicates the packaging is only available at the selected company. Leave blank to make the packaging available across all companies." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:67 msgid "To create a packaging type for six units of the product, `Grape Soda`, begin by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`. In the line, name the :guilabel:`Packaging` `6-pack`, and set the :guilabel:`Contained quantity` to `6`. Repeat this process for additional packagings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:0 msgid "Create 6-pack case for product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:76 msgid "From product packagings page" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:78 msgid "To view all packagings that have been created, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Product Packagings`. Doing so reveals the :guilabel:`Product Packagings` page with a complete list of all packagings that have been created for all products. Create new packagings by clicking :guilabel:`New`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:84 msgid "Two soda products, `Grape Soda` and `Diet Coke`, have three types of packagings configured. On the :guilabel:`Product Packagings` page, each product can be sold as a `6-Pack` that contains 6 products, as a `12-Pack` of 12 products, or as a `Case` of 32 products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:0 msgid "List of different packagings for products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:93 msgid "Partial reservation" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:95 msgid "After :ref:`completing the packaging setup `, packagings can be reserved in full or partial quantities for outgoing shipments. Partial packaging flexibility expedites order fulfillment by allowing the immediate shipment of available items, while awaiting the rest." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:100 msgid "To configure packaging reservation methods, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Product Categories`. Then, click :guilabel:`New`, or select the desired product category." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:103 msgid "On the product category's form, in the :guilabel:`Logistics` section, :guilabel:`Reserve Packagings` can be set to :guilabel:`Reserve Only Full Packagings` or :guilabel:`Reserve Partial Packagings`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:107 msgid "To see the :guilabel:`Reserve Packaging` field, the :guilabel:`Product Packaging` feature **must** be enabled. To enable this feature, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, scroll to the :guilabel:`Products` section, tick the :guilabel:`Product Packagings` checkbox, and click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:-1 msgid "Show Reserve Packagings field on the product categories page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:117 msgid "To better evaluate the options based on business needs, consider the following example:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:119 msgid "a product is sold in twelve units per packaging." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:120 msgid "an order demands two packagings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:121 msgid "there are only twenty-two units in stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:123 msgid "When :guilabel:`Reserve Only Full Packagings` is selected, only twelve units are reserved for the order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:126 msgid "Conversely, when :guilabel:`Reserve Partial Packagings` is selected, twenty-two units are reserved for the order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:130 msgid "Apply packagings" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:132 msgid "When creating a sales order in the :menuselection:`Sales` app, specify the packagings that should be used for the product. The chosen packaging is displayed on the :abbr:`SO (Sales Order)` under the :guilabel:`Packaging` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:137 msgid "18 cans of the product, `Grape Soda`, is packed using three 6-pack packagings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/packaging.rst:0 msgid "Assign packagings on the Sales Order Line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:3 msgid "Units of measure" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:11 msgid "In some cases, handling products in different units of measure is necessary. For example, a business can buy products from a country that uses the metric system, and then sell those products in a country that uses the imperial system. In that case, the business needs to convert the units." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:15 msgid "Another case for unit conversion is when a business buys products in a big pack from a supplier, and then sells those products in individual units." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:18 msgid "Odoo can be set up to use different *units of measure (UoM)* for one product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:23 msgid "To use different units of measure in Odoo, first go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and under the :guilabel:`Products` section, activate the :guilabel:`Units of Measure` setting. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:-1 msgid "Enable Units of Measure in the Inventory settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:32 msgid "Units of measure categories" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:34 msgid "After enabling the *Units of Measure* setting, view the default units of measure categories in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> UoM Categories`. The category is important for unit conversion; Odoo can convert a product's units from one unit to another **only** if both units belong to the same category." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:-1 msgid "Set units of measure categories." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:43 msgid "Each units of measure category has a reference unit. The reference unit is highlighted in blue in the :guilabel:`Uom` column of the :guilabel:`Units of Measure Categories` page. Odoo uses the reference unit as a base for any new units." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:47 msgid "To create a new unit, first select the correct category from the :guilabel:`Units of Measure Categories` page. For example, to sell a product in a box of six units, click the :guilabel:`Unit` category line. Then, on the category page that appears, click :guilabel:`Add a line` in the :guilabel:`Units of Measure` tab. Then, in the :guilabel:`Unit of Measure` field, title the new unit, such as `Box of 6`, then in the :guilabel:`Type` field, select the appropriate size reference, such as :guilabel:`Bigger than the reference Unit of Measure`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:54 msgid "If applicable, enter a :guilabel:`UNSPSC Category`, which is a globally recognized `code managed by GS1 `_, that **must** be purchased in order to use." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:57 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Ratio` field, enter how many individual units are in the new |UOM|, such as `6.00000` when using the example of the `6-Pack` (since a box of six is six times *bigger* than the reference unit, `1.00000`)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:-1 msgid "Convert products from one unit to another as long as they belong to the same category." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:66 msgid "Specify a product's units of measure" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:68 msgid "To set units of measure on a product, first go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products` and select a product to open its product form page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:71 msgid "In the :guilabel:`General Information` tab, edit the :guilabel:`Unit of Measure` field to specify the unit of measure that the product is sold in. The specified unit is also the unit used to keep track of the product's inventory and internal transfers." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:75 msgid "Edit the :guilabel:`Purchase UoM` field to specify the unit of measure that the product is purchased in." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:81 msgid "Unit conversion" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:83 msgid "Odoo automatically converts unit measurements when products have different :abbr:`UoMs (Units of Measure)` and purchase :abbr:`UoMs (Units of Measure)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:86 msgid "This occurs in various scenarios, including:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:88 msgid ":ref:`Vendor orders `: purchase |UOM| on purchase orders (POs) converts to |UOM| on internal warehouse documents" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:90 msgid ":ref:`Automatic replenishment `: generates |POs| when the stock levels of a product (tracked in |UOM|) dips below a certain level. But, the |POs| are created using the purchase |UOM|" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:93 msgid ":ref:`Sell products `: if a different |UOM| is used on the sales order (SO), the quantity is converted to the warehouse's preferred |UOM| on the delivery order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:100 msgid "Buy products in the purchase UoM" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:102 msgid "When creating a new request for quotation (RFQ) in the *Purchase* app, Odoo automatically uses the product's specified purchase unit of measure. If needed, manually edit the :guilabel:`UoM` value on the |RFQ|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:106 msgid "After the |RFQ| is confirmed into a |PO|, click the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button at the top of the |PO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:109 msgid "Odoo automatically converts the purchase unit of measure into the product's sales/inventory unit of measure, so the :guilabel:`Demand` column of the delivery receipt shows the converted quantity." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:113 msgid "When the product's purchase :guilabel:`UoM` is `Box of 6`, and its sales/inventory unit of measure is `Units`, the |PO| shows the quantity in boxes of six, and the receipt (and other internal warehouse documents) shows the quantity in units." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:0 msgid "Image of a purchase order that is using the purchase unit of measure." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:121 msgid "An order of three quantities is placed using the purchase \"UoM\": `Box of 6`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:0 msgid "Image of receipt displaying the unit of measure." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:127 msgid "Upon warehouse receipt, the recorded quantities are in the internal \"Unit of Measure\": `Units`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:133 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:6 msgid "Replenishment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:135 msgid "A request for quotation for a product can also be generated directly from the product form using the :guilabel:`Replenish` button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:138 msgid "After clicking :guilabel:`Replenish`, a replenish assistant box pops up. The purchase unit of measure can be manually edited in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field, if needed. Then, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to create the |RFQ|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:143 msgid "A |PO| can **only** be automatically generated if at least **one** vendor is listed in the product form's :guilabel:`Purchase` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:-1 msgid "Click Replenish button to manually replenish." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:150 msgid "Navigate to the created |PO| by clicking the :guilabel:`Forecasted` smart button on the product form. Scroll down to the :guilabel:`Forecasted Inventory` section, and in the :guilabel:`Requests for quotation` line, click the |RFQ| reference number to open the draft |RFQ|. If necessary, the purchase |UOM| can be edited directly on the |PO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:158 msgid "Sell in a different UoM" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:160 msgid "When creating a new quotation in the *Sales* app, Odoo automatically uses the product's specified unit of measure. If needed, the :guilabel:`UoM` can be manually edited on the quotation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:163 msgid "After the quotation is sent to the customer, and confirmed into a sales order (SO), click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button at the top of the |SO|. Odoo automatically converts the unit of measure into the product's inventory unit of measure, so the :guilabel:`Demand` column of the delivery shows the converted quantity." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/configure/uom.rst:168 msgid "For example, if the product's |UOM| on the |SO| was changed to `Box of 6`, but its inventory unit of measure is `Units`, the |SO| shows the quantity in boxes of six, and the delivery shows the quantity in units." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation.rst:5 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:280 msgid "Inventory valuation" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:3 msgid "Integrating additional costs to products (landed costs)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:7 msgid "The landed cost feature in Odoo allows the user to include additional costs (shipment, insurance, customs duties, etc.) into the cost of the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:13 msgid "First, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings --> Valuation` and activate the :guilabel:`Landed Costs` feature. Odoo also gives the option to set a :guilabel:`Default Journal` in which the landed costs accounting entries will be recorded." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:-1 msgid "Activate the landed cost feature in Inventory settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:22 msgid "Add costs to products" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:25 msgid "Receive the vendor bill" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:27 msgid "After a vendor fulfills a purchase order and sends a bill, click :guilabel:`Create Bill` on the purchase order to create a vendor bill in Odoo. If the vendor bill includes landed costs, such as custom duties, tick the box in the :guilabel:`Landed Costs` column on the vendor bill invoice line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:-1 msgid "Enable Landed Costs option on vendor bill line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:35 msgid "For charges that are always landed costs, create a landed cost product in Odoo. That way, the landed cost product can be quickly added to the vendor bill as an invoice line instead of manually entering the landed cost information every time a vendor bill comes in." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:39 msgid "First, create a new product in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Products --> Create`. Next, name the landed cost product. Then, set the :guilabel:`Product Type` to :guilabel:`Service`. A landed cost product must always be a service product type. After that, go to the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab and check the box next to :guilabel:`Is a Landed Cost`. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save` to finish creating the landed cost product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:45 msgid "If this product is always a landed cost, you can also define it on the product and avoid having to tick the box on each vendor bill." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:-1 msgid "Option to define a product as a landed cost." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:52 msgid "Once the landed cost is added to the vendor bill (either by checking the :guilabel:`Landed Cost` option on the invoice line or adding a landed cost product to the bill), click the :guilabel:`Create Landed Costs` button at the top of the bill. Odoo automatically creates a landed cost record with the set landed cost pre-filled in the :guilabel:`Additional Costs` product lines. From here, decide which picking the additional costs apply to by clicking :guilabel:`Edit` and selecting the picking reference number from the :guilabel:`Transfers` drop-down menu. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:-1 msgid "Use a warehouse transfer to cover a landed cost in the accounting journal." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:64 msgid "After setting the picking, click :guilabel:`Compute` on the landed cost record. Then, go to the :guilabel:`Valuation Adjustments` tab to see the impact of the landed costs. Finally, click :guilabel:`Validate` to post the landed cost entry to the accounting journal." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:68 msgid "The user can access the journal entry that has been created by the landed cost by clicking on the :guilabel:`Journal Entry`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:72 msgid "The product that the landed cost is applied to must have a product category set to a :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)` or an :abbr:`AVCO (Average Costing)` method." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:-1 msgid "Landed cost journal entry" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:80 msgid "Landed cost records can also be directly created in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Landed Costs`, it is not necessary to create a landed cost record from the vendor bill." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:3 msgid "Inventory valuation configuration" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:7 msgid "All of a company's stock on-hand contributes to the valuation of its inventory. That value should be reflected in the company's accounting records to accurately show the value of the company and all of its assets." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:11 msgid "By default, Odoo uses a periodic inventory valuation (also known as manual inventory valuation). This method implies that the accounting team posts journal entries based on the physical inventory of the company, and that warehouse employees take the time to count the stock. In Odoo, this method is reflected inside each product category, where the :guilabel:`Costing Method` field will be set to `Standard Price` by default, and the :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation` field will be set to `Manual`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:-1 msgid "The Inventory Valuation fields are located on the Product Categories form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:21 msgid "Alternatively, automated inventory valuation is an integrated valuation method that updates the inventory value in real-time by creating journal entries whenever there are stock moves initiated between locations in a company's inventory." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:26 msgid "Automated inventory valuation is a method recommended for expert accountants, given the extra steps involved in journal entry configuration. Even after the initial setup, the method will need to be periodically checked to ensure accuracy, and adjustments may be needed on an ongoing basis depending on the needs and priorities of the business." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:34 msgid "Types of accounting" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:36 msgid "Accounting entries will depend on the accounting mode: *Continental* or *Anglo-Saxon*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:39 msgid "Verify the accounting mode by activating the :ref:`developer-mode` and navigating to :menuselection:`Accounting app --> Configuration --> Settings`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:42 msgid "Then, in the search bar, look for :guilabel:`Anglo-Saxon Accounting`, to see if the feature is enabled. If it is **not** enabled, Continental accounting mode is in use." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:0 msgid "Show the Anglo-Saxon accounting mode feature." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:49 msgid "In *Anglo-Saxon* accounting, the costs of goods sold (COGS) are reported when products are sold or delivered. This means that the cost of a good is only recorded as an expense when a customer is invoiced for a product. So for **manual** valuation method, set the :guilabel:`Expense Account` to `Stock Valuation` for the current asset type; for **automatic** valuation method, set the the :guilabel:`Expense Account` to an *Expenses* or a *Cost of Revenue* type (e.g. `Cost of Production`, `Cost of Goods Sold`, etc.)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:56 msgid "In *Continental* accounting, the cost of a good is reported as soon as a product is received into stock. Because of this, the :guilabel:`Expense Account` can be set to **either** *Expenses* or a *Cost of Revenue* type, however, it is more commonly set to an *Expenses* account." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:61 msgid ":ref:`Details about configuring Expense and Stock accounts `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:67 msgid "Make changes to inventory valuation options by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Product Categories`. In the :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation` section, select the desired :guilabel:`Costing Method` and :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation` options." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:72 msgid "It is possible to use different valuation settings for different product categories." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:-1 msgid "Show inventory valuation configuration options." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:81 msgid "Costing method" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:83 msgid "From the product category's configuration page, choose the desired :guilabel:`Costing Method`:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:88 msgid "Standard Price" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:90 msgid "The default costing method in Odoo. The cost of the product is manually defined on the product form, and this cost is used to compute the valuation. Even if the purchase price on a purchase order differs, the valuation is the cost defined on the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:98 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:139 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:210 msgid "Operation" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:99 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:140 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:211 msgid "Unit Cost" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:100 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:141 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:212 msgid "Qty On Hand" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:101 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:142 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:213 msgid "Incoming Value" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:102 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:143 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:214 msgid "Inventory Value" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:104 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:109 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:114 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:119 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:124 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:150 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:221 msgid "$10" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:105 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:146 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:217 msgid "0" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:107 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:145 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:148 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:216 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:219 msgid "$0" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:108 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:149 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:220 msgid "Receive 8 products for $10/unit" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:110 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:151 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:222 msgid "8" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:111 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:152 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:223 msgid "8 * $10" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:112 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:153 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:224 msgid "$80" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:113 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:154 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:225 msgid "Receive 4 products for $16/unit" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:115 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:156 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:227 msgid "12" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:116 msgid "4 * $10" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:117 msgid "$120" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:118 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:159 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:230 msgid "Deliver 10 products" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:120 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:161 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:232 msgid "2" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:121 msgid "-10 * $10" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:122 msgid "$20" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:123 msgid "Receive 2 products for $9/unit" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:125 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:166 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:238 msgid "4" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:126 msgid "2 * $10" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:127 msgid "$40" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:129 msgid "Average Cost (AVCO)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:131 msgid "Calculates the valuation of a product based on the average cost of that product, divided by the total number of available stock on-hand. With this costing method, inventory valuation is *dynamic*, and constantly adjusts based on the purchase price of products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:155 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:160 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:226 msgid "$12" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:157 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:228 msgid "4 * $16" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:158 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:229 msgid "$144" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:162 msgid "-10 * $12" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:163 msgid "$24" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:164 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:236 msgid "Receive 2 products for $6/unit" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:165 msgid "$9" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:167 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:239 msgid "2 * $6" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:168 msgid "$36" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:170 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:242 msgid "How are unit cost and inventory value calculated at each step?" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:172 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:244 msgid "When receiving four products for $16 each:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:174 msgid "Inventory value is calculated by adding the previous inventory value with the incoming value: :math:`$80 + (4 * $16) = $144`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:176 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:248 msgid "Unit cost is calculated by dividing the inventory value by the quantity on-hand: :math:`$144 / 12 = $12`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:179 msgid "When delivering ten products, the average unit cost is used to calculate the inventory value, regardless of the purchase price of the product. Therefore, inventory value is :math:`$144 + (-10 * $12) = $24`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:183 msgid "Receive two products for $6 each:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:185 msgid "Inventory value: :math:`$24 + (2 * $6) = $36`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:186 msgid "Unit cost: :math:`$36 / 4 = $9`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:189 msgid "When choosing :guilabel:`Average Cost (AVCO)` as the :guilabel:`Costing Method`, changing the numerical value in the *Cost* field for products in the respective product category creates a new record in the *Inventory Valuation* report to adjust the value of the product. The *Cost* amount is then automatically updated, based on the average purchase price of both the inventory on-hand and the costs accumulated from validated purchase orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:196 msgid "First In First Out (FIFO)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:198 msgid "Tracks the costs of incoming and outgoing items in real-time, and uses the real price of the products to change the valuation. The oldest purchase price is used as the cost for the next good sold, until an entire lot of that product is sold. When the next inventory lot moves up in the queue, an updated product cost is used based on the valuation of that specific lot." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:203 msgid "This method is arguably the most accurate inventory valuation method for a variety of reasons, but it is highly sensitive to input data and human error." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:231 msgid "$16" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:0 msgid "-8 * $10" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:0 msgid "-2 * $16" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:235 msgid "$32" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:237 msgid "$11" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:240 msgid "$44" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:246 msgid "Inventory value is calculated by adding the previous inventory value to the incoming value: :math:`$80 + (4 * $16) = $144`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:251 msgid "When delivering ten products, eight units were purchased for $10, and two units were purchased for $16." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:254 msgid "First, the incoming value is calculated by multiplying the on-hand quantity by the purchased price: :math:`(-8 * $10) + (-2 * $16) = -112`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:256 msgid "The inventory value is calculated by subtracting the incoming value from the previous inventory value: :math:`$144 - $112 = $32`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:258 msgid "Unit cost is calculated by dividing the inventory value by the remaining quantity: :math:`$32 / 2 = $16`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:261 msgid "When receiving two products for $6, inventory value is :math:`$32 + $12 = $44`. Unit cost is :math:`$44 / 4 = $11`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:265 msgid "Changing the costing method greatly impacts inventory valuation. It is highly recommended to consult an accountant first before making any adjustments here." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:269 msgid ":doc:`using_inventory_valuation`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:271 msgid "When the :guilabel:`Costing Method` is changed, products already in stock that were using the :guilabel:`Standard` costing method **do not** change value; rather, the existing units keep their value, and any product moves from then on affect the average cost, and the cost of the product will change. If the value in the :guilabel:`Cost` field on a product form is changed manually, Odoo will generate a corresponding record in the *Inventory Valuation* report." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:282 msgid "Inventory valuation in Odoo can be set to be updated manually or automatically. While *Expense* accounts apply to both, the *Stock Input* and *Stock Output* accounts are only used for automated valuation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:286 msgid "Refer to the :ref:`Expense ` and :ref:`Stock input/output ` sections for details on configuring each account type." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:292 msgid "Expense account" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:294 msgid "To configure the *expense account*, go to the :guilabel:`Account Properties` section of the intended product category (:menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Product Categories`). Then, choose an existing account from the :guilabel:`Expense Account` drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:298 msgid "To ensure the chosen account is the correct :guilabel:`Type,` click the |right arrow| icon to the right of the account. Then, set the account type based on the information below." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:303 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:371 msgid "Anglo-Saxon" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:307 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:334 msgid "Automated" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:309 msgid "In Anglo-Saxon accounting for automated inventory valuation, set the :guilabel:`Expense Account` to the `Expenses` account. Then, click the |right arrow| icon to the right of the account." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:313 msgid "In the pop-up window, choose :guilabel:`Expenses` or :guilabel:`Cost of Revenue` from the :guilabel:`Type` drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:0 msgid "Show **Expense Account** field, and external link icon." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:320 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:339 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:206 msgid "Manual" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:322 msgid "To configure the :guilabel:`Expense Account`, choose :guilabel:`Stock Valuation` from the field's drop-down menu. Verify the account's type by clicking the |right arrow| icon, and then ensure the :guilabel:`Type` is :guilabel:`Current Assets`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:0 msgid "Show the **Expense Account** field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:330 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:389 msgid "Continental" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:336 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:341 msgid "Set the :guilabel:`Expense Account` to the :guilabel:`Expenses` or :guilabel:`Cost of Revenue` account type." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:347 msgid "Stock input/output (automated only)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:349 msgid "To configure the :guilabel:`Stock Input Account` and :guilabel:`Stock Output Account`, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Product Categories` and select the desired product category." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:353 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation` field, select :guilabel:`Automated`. Doing so makes the :guilabel:`Account Stock Properties` section appear. These accounts are defined as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:356 msgid ":guilabel:`Stock Valuation Account`: when automated inventory valuation is enabled on a product, this account will hold the current value of the products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:358 msgid ":guilabel:`Stock Journal`: accounting journal where entries are automatically posted when a product's inventory valuation changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:360 msgid ":guilabel:`Stock Input Account`: counterpart journal items for all incoming stock moves will be posted in this account, unless there is a specific valuation account set on the source location. This is the default value for all products in a given category, and can also be set directly on each product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:364 msgid ":guilabel:`Stock Output Account`: counterpart journal items for all outgoing stock moves will be posted in this account, unless there is a specific valuation account set on the destination location. This is the default value for all products in a given category, and can also be set directly on each product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:373 msgid "In Anglo-Saxon accounting, the :guilabel:`Stock Input Account` and :guilabel:`Stock Output Account` are set to *different* :guilabel:`Current Assets` accounts. This way, delivering products and invoicing the customer balance the *Stock Output* account, while receiving products and billing vendors balance the *Stock Input* account." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:378 msgid "To modify the account type, go to the click the |right arrow| icon to the right of the stock input/output account. In the pop-up window, choose :guilabel:`Current Assets` from the :guilabel:`Type` drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:0 msgid "Display account setup page, highlighting the **Type** field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:386 msgid "The *Stock Input* account is set to `Stock Interim (Received)`, a *Current Asset* account type." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:391 msgid "In Continental accounting, the :guilabel:`Stock Input Account` and :guilabel:`Stock Output Account` are set to **the same** :guilabel:`Current Assets` account. That way, one account can be balanced when items are bought and sold." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:396 msgid "The stock input and output accounts are both set to `Stock Interim (Received)`, a :guilabel:`Current Assets` account type. They can also be set to the `Stock Interim (Delivered)`, as long as the input and output accounts are assigned to the **same** account." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:0 msgid "Show the Stock Input and Output accounts." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:406 msgid "Inventory valuation reporting" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:408 msgid "To start, go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Reporting --> Balance Sheet`. At the top of the dashboard, change the :guilabel:`As of` field value to :guilabel:`Today`, and adjust the filtering :guilabel:`Options` to :guilabel:`Unfold All` in order to see all of the latest data displayed, all at once." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:414 msgid ":doc:`../../../../finance/accounting/get_started/cheat_sheet`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:416 msgid "Under the parent :guilabel:`Current Assets` line item, look for the nested :guilabel:`Stock Valuation Account` line item, where the total valuation of all of the inventory on hand is displayed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:420 msgid "Access more specific information with the :guilabel:`Stock Valuation Account` drop-down menu, by selecting either the :guilabel:`General Ledger` to see an itemized view of all of the journal entries, or by selecting :guilabel:`Journal Items` to review all of the individualized journal entries that were submitted to the account. As well, annotations to the :guilabel:`Balance Sheet` can be added by choosing :guilabel:`Annotate`, filling in the text box, and clicking :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:-1 msgid "See the full inventory valuation breakdown in Odoo Accounting app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:3 msgid "Using inventory valuation" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:7 msgid "*Inventory valuation* is a quintessential accounting procedure that calculates the value of on-hand stock. Once determined, the inventory valuation amount is then incorporated into a company's overall value." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:11 msgid "In Odoo, this process can be conducted manually— by warehouse employees physically counting the products— or automatically through the database." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:15 msgid "Automatic inventory valuation" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:17 msgid "To use Odoo to automatically generate a trail of inventory valuation entries, first navigate to the :menuselection:`Product Categories` list by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Product Categories` and select the desired product category. On the form, set the :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation` as :guilabel:`Automated` and the :guilabel:`Costing Method` to any of the three options." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:24 msgid ":doc:`Set up inventory valuation `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:26 msgid "In order to understand how moving products in and out of stock affects the company's overall value, consider the following product and stock moves scenario below." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:30 msgid "Receive a product" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:32 msgid "To track the value of incoming products, such as a simple *table*, configure the product category on the the product itself. To get there, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products` and click the desired product. On the product form, click the :guilabel:`➡️ (right arrow)` icon beside the :guilabel:`Product Category` field, which opens an internal link to edit the product category. Next, set the :guilabel:`Costing Method` as :guilabel:`First In First Out (FIFO)` and :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation` as :guilabel:`Automated`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:40 msgid "Alternatively access the :guilabel:`Product Categories` dashboard by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Product Categories` and select the desired product category." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:44 msgid "Next, assume 10 tables are purchased at a price of $10.00, each. The :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` for those tables will show the subtotal of the purchase as $100, plus any additional costs or taxes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1 msgid "Purchase order with 10 tables products valued at $10.00 each." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:51 msgid "After selecting :guilabel:`Validate` on the :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)`, the :guilabel:`Valuation` smart button is enabled. Clicking on this button displays a report showing how the inventory valuation for the table was affected by this purchase." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:56 msgid ":ref:`Developer mode ` **must** be turned on to see the :guilabel:`Valuation` smart button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:60 msgid "The :doc:`consignment <../../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock>` feature allows ownership to items in stock. Thus, products owned by other companies are not accounted for in the host company's inventory valuation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1 msgid "See Valuation smart button on a receipt, with Developer mode enabled." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:68 msgid "For a comprehensive dashboard that includes the inventory valuation of all product shipments, inventory adjustments, and warehouse operations, refer to the :ref:`stock valuation report `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:73 msgid "Deliver a product" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:75 msgid "In the same logic, when a table is shipped to a customer and leaves the warehouse, the stock valuation decreases. The :guilabel:`Valuation` smart button on the :abbr:`DO (Delivery Order)`, likewise, displays the stock valuation record as it does on a :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1 msgid "Decreased stock valuation after a product is shipped." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:86 msgid "Inventory valuation report" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:88 msgid "To view the current value of all products in the warehouse, first turn on :ref:`Developer mode ` and navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Reporting --> Valuation`. The :guilabel:`Stock Valuation` dashboard displays detailed records of products with the :guilabel:`Date`, :guilabel:`Quantity`, :guilabel:`Unit Value`, and :guilabel:`Total Value` of the inventory." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:95 msgid ":ref:`Developer mode ` **must** be enabled to see the :guilabel:`Valuation` option under :guilabel:`Reporting`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1 msgid "Inventory valuation report showing multiple products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:102 msgid "The :guilabel:`Valuation At Date` button, located in the top-left corner of the :guilabel:`Stock Valuation` page, reveals a pop-up window. In this pop-up, the inventory valuation of products available during a prior specified date can be seen and selected." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:107 msgid "View a detailed record of a product's inventory value, stock move, and on-hand stock by selecting the teal :guilabel:`➡️ (right arrow)` button to the right of the :guilabel:`Reference` column value." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:112 msgid "Update product unit price" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:114 msgid "For any company: lead times, supply chain failures, and other risk factors can contribute to invisible costs. Although Odoo attempts to accurately represent the stock value, *manual valuation* serves as an additional tool to update the unit price of products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:119 msgid "Manual valuation is intended for products that can be purchased and received for a cost greater than 0, or have product categories set with :guilabel:`Costing Method` set as either :guilabel:`Average Cost (AVCO)` or :guilabel:`First In First Out (FIFO)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1 msgid "Add manual valuation of stock value to a product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:127 msgid "Create manual valuation entries on the :guilabel:`Stock Valuation` dashboard by first navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Reporting --> Valuation`. Next, to enable the *product revaluation* feature, select :menuselection:`Group by --> Product` to organize all the records by product. Click on the gray :guilabel:`▶️ (drop-down triangle)` icon to reveal stock valuation line items below, as well as a teal :guilabel:`➕ (plus)` button on the right." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:133 msgid "Click the teal :guilabel:`+ (plus)` button to open up the :guilabel:`Product Revaluation` form. Here, the inventory valuation for a product can be recalculated, by increasing or decreasing the unit price of each product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:138 msgid "The :guilabel:`▶️ (drop-down triangle)` and :guilabel:`➕ (plus)` buttons are only visible after grouping entries by product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1 msgid "Product revaluation form adding a value of $1.00 with the reason being inflation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:146 msgid "Inventory valuation journal entries" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:148 msgid "In Odoo, automatic inventory valuation records are also recorded in the :menuselection:`Accounting app --> Accounting --> Journal Entries` dashboard. On this comprehensive list of accounting entries, inventory valuation records are identified by checking values in the :guilabel:`Journal` column, or looking for the :guilabel:`Reference` column value which matches the warehouse operation reference (e.g. `WH/IN/00014` for receipts)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:154 msgid "Clicking on an inventory valuation journal entry opens a *double-entry accounting* record. These records are generated by Odoo to track the change of value in inventory valuation as products are moved in and out of the warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:159 msgid "To view the inventory valuation of 10 *tables*, costing $10.00 each, upon reception from the vendor, go to the :menuselection:`Journal Entries` page found in :menuselection:`Accounting app --> Accounting --> Journal Entries`. Here, click the journal line where the :guilabel:`Reference` column value matches the reference on the receipt, `WH/IN/00014`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:0 msgid "Stock valuation page depicting the products within a shipment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:168 msgid "`Stock interim` is a holding account for money intended to pay vendors for the product. The `stock valuation` account stores the value of all on-hand stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:0 msgid "Accounting entry for the inventory valuation of 10 tables." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:176 msgid "`Odoo Tutorial: Inventory Valuation `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:6 msgid "Product tracking" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:8 msgid "*Lots* and *serial numbers* are the two ways to identify and track products in Odoo. While there are similarities between the two traceability methods, there are also notable differences that affect receipts, deliveries, and inventory reports." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:12 msgid "A *lot* usually indicates a specific batch of an item that was received, is currently stored, or was shipped from a warehouse. However, it can also pertain to a batch of products manufactured in-house, as well." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:16 msgid "A *serial number* is a unique identifier assigned incrementally (or sequentially) to an item or product, used to distinguish it from other items or products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:20 msgid ":doc:`product_tracking/lots`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:21 msgid ":doc:`product_tracking/serial_numbers`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:24 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:28 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:20 msgid "Enable lots & serial numbers" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:26 msgid "To track products using lots and serial numbers, the *Lots & Serial Numbers* feature must be enabled." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:29 msgid "To do that, go to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Traceability` section, and click the box next to :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers`. Then, click the :guilabel:`Save` button to save changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:-1 msgid "Enabled lots and serial numbers feature in inventory settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:38 msgid "When to use lots" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:40 msgid "Lots are useful for products that are manufactured or received in large quantities, such as clothes or food. Lots and can be used to trace a product back to a group, which is especially useful when managing product recalls or expiration dates." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:0 msgid "Created lot with quantity of products in it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:49 msgid "Manufacturers assign lot numbers to groups of products that have common properties; this can lead to multiple goods sharing the same lot number. This helps identify a number of products in a single group, and allows for end-to-end traceability of these products through each step in their life cycles." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:55 msgid "When to use serial numbers" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:57 msgid "The goal of assigning serial numbers to individual products is to make sure every item's history is identifiable when it travels through the supply chain. This can be especially useful for manufacturers that provide after-sales services related to products they sell and deliver." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:0 msgid "List of serial numbers for product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:66 msgid "Serial numbers can contain many different types of characters: numbers, letters, typographical symbols, or a mixture of all three types." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:70 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:321 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:114 msgid "Traceability" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:72 msgid "Manufacturers and companies can refer to traceability reports to see the entire life cycle of a product. These reports include vital information, like where it came from (and when), where it was stored, and to whom it was sent." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:76 msgid "To see the full traceability of a product, or group products by lots and/or serial numbers, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`. Doing so reveals the :guilabel:`Lots/Serial Numbers` dashboard." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:80 msgid "From here, products with lots or serial numbers assigned to them are listed by default. They can also be expanded to show what lots or serial numbers have been specifically assigned to them." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:83 msgid "To group by lots or serial numbers, first remove any default filters from the search bar in the upper-right corner. Then, click :guilabel:`Group By`, and select :guilabel:`Add Custom Group`, which reveals a mini drop-down menu. From this mini drop-down menu, select :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`, and click :guilabel:`Apply`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:88 msgid "Doing so reveals all existing lots and serial numbers, and each can be expanded to show all product quantities with that assigned number. For unique serial numbers that are *not* reused, there should *only* be one product per serial number." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:-1 msgid "Reporting page with drop-down lists of lots and serial numbers." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:97 msgid "For additional information regarding an individual lot number or serial number, click the line item for the lot or serial number to reveal that specific number's :guilabel:`Lot` or :guilabel:`Serial Number` form. From this form, click the :guilabel:`Location` and :guilabel:`Traceability` smart buttons to see all stock on-hand using that serial number. Any operations made using that lot or serial number can be found here, as well." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:3 msgid "Expiration dates" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:7 msgid "In Odoo, *expiration dates* can be used to manage and track the lifecycles of perishable products, from purchase to sale. Using expiration dates reduces product loss due to unexpected expiry, and helps to avoid sending expired products to customers." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:11 msgid "In Odoo, only products that are tracked using *lots* and *serial numbers* can be assigned expiration information. Once a lot or serial number has been assigned, an expiration date can be set. This is especially helpful for companies (such as food manufacturers) that consistently, or exclusively, buy and sell perishable products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:17 msgid ":doc:`../product_tracking/lots`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:18 msgid ":doc:`../product_tracking/serial_numbers`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:21 msgid "Enable expiration dates" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:23 msgid "To enable the use of *expiration dates*, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Traceability` section. Then, click the checkbox to enable the :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` feature." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:27 msgid "Once that feature is activated, a new option will appear to enable :guilabel:`Expiration Dates`. Click that checkbox to enable the feature, and be sure to :guilabel:`Save` changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:-1 msgid "Enabled lots and serial numbers and expiration dates settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:35 msgid "Once the :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` feature is activated, additional features appear to :guilabel:`Display Lots & Serial Numbers on Delivery Slips`; to :guilabel:`Display Lots & Serial Numbers on Invoices`; and to :guilabel:`Display Expiration Dates on Delivery Slips`. Activating these features helps with end-to-end traceability, making it easier to manage product recalls, identify \"bad\" batches of products, and more." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:42 msgid "Configure expiration dates on products" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:44 msgid "Once the :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` and :guilabel:`Expiration Dates` features have been enabled in the settings of the *Inventory* app, expiration information can be configured on individual products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:48 msgid "To do so, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and select a product to edit. Selecting a product reveals the product form for that particular item. Once on the product form, click :guilabel:`Edit` in the upper-left corner to make changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:53 msgid "To be tracked using lots or serial numbers, or to configure expiration information, products *must* have their :guilabel:`Product Type` set as :guilabel:`Storable Product` under the :guilabel:`General Information` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:57 msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Traceability` section. From here, make sure that either :guilabel:`By Unique Serial Number` or :guilabel:`By Lots` is checked." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:61 msgid "Once it is, a new :guilabel:`Expiration Date` checkbox appears that must also be clicked. When both are enabled, a new :guilabel:`Dates` field appears to the right." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:65 msgid "If a product has stock on-hand prior to activating tracking by lots or serial numbers, an inventory adjustment might need to be performed in order to assign lot numbers to the existing stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:70 msgid "For processing large quantities of products on receipts or deliveries, it is recommended to track using lots, so multiple products can be traced back to the same lot, if any issues arise." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:-1 msgid "Expiration dates configuration on the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:77 msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Dates` field, there are four categories of expiration information to configure for the product:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:80 msgid ":guilabel:`Expiration Time`: the number of days after receiving products (either from a vendor or in stock after production) in which goods may become dangerous and should not be used or consumed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:82 msgid ":guilabel:`Best Before Time`: the number of days before the expiration date in which the goods start deteriorating, **without** necessarily being dangerous yet." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:84 msgid ":guilabel:`Removal Time`: the number of days before the expiration date in which the goods should be removed from stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:86 msgid ":guilabel:`Alert Time`: the number of days before the expiration date in which an alert should be raised on goods in a particular lot or containing a particular serial number." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:90 msgid "The values entered into these fields automatically compute the expiration date for goods entered into stock, whether purchased from a vendor or manufactured in-house." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:93 msgid "Once all the expiration information has been configured, click :guilabel:`Save` to save all changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:96 msgid "If the :guilabel:`Dates` field is not populated with any values for expiration information, dates (and lots) can be manually assigned upon receipts and deliveries in and out of the warehouse. Even when assigned, they can still be overwritten and changed manually if needed, as well." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:101 msgid "Set expiration dates on receipts with lots & serial numbers" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:103 msgid "Generating expiration dates for **incoming** goods can be done directly from the purchase order. To create a purchase order, go to the :menuselection:`Purchase` app and click :guilabel:`Create` to create a new request for quotation (RFQ)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:107 msgid "Then, fill out the information by adding a :guilabel:`Vendor`, and add products to the :guilabel:`Product` lines by clicking :guilabel:`Add a product`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:110 msgid "Choose the desired quantity to order by changing the number in the :guilabel:`Quantity` column, and click :guilabel:`Confirm Order`. This converts the :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` into a purchase order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:114 msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button at the top of the purchase order to be taken to the warehouse receipt form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:118 msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Validate` before assigning a serial number to the ordered product quantities causes a :guilabel:`User Error` popup to appear. The popup requires entry of a lot or serial number for the ordered products. The :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` cannot be validated without an assigned lot or serial number." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:0 msgid "User error popup when validating an order with no lot number." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:127 msgid "From here, click the :guilabel:`Additional Options` menu (hamburger) icon located on the far-right of the product line. When clicked, a :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` pop-up will appear." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:130 msgid "In this pop-up, click :guilabel:`Add a line`, and assign a lot or serial number under the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number Name` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:133 msgid "An expiration date automatically populates, based on the configuration on the product form (if previously configured)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:137 msgid "If the :guilabel:`Dates` field on the product form has not been configured, this date can be manually entered." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:140 msgid "After the expiration date has been established, mark the :guilabel:`Done` quantities, and click :guilabel:`Confirm` to close the pop-up. Finally, click :guilabel:`Validate`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:-1 msgid "Detailed operations popup showing expiration dates for ordered products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:147 msgid "A :guilabel:`Traceability` smart button will appear upon validating the receipt. Click the :guilabel:`Traceability` smart button to see the updated :guilabel:`Traceability Report`, which includes: a :guilabel:`Reference` document; the :guilabel:`Product` being traced; the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial #`; and more." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:153 msgid "Set expiration dates on manufactured products" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:155 msgid "Expiration dates can also be generated for products manufactured in-house. To assign expiration dates to manufactured products, a manufacturing order (MO) needs to be completed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:158 msgid "To create a :abbr:`MO (manufacturing order)`, go to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and click :guilabel:`Create`. Choose a product to manufacture from the :guilabel:`Product` field drop-down menu, then select the :guilabel:`Quantity` to produce." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:-1 msgid "Manufacturing order for product with expiration date." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:167 msgid "To manufacture a product, there must be materials to consume in the lines in the :guilabel:`Product` column. This can be achieved either by creating a :guilabel:`Bill of Material` for the :guilabel:`Product`, or manually adding materials to consume by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:172 msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:174 msgid "Next to :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`, either select an existing lot number from the drop-down menu, or click the green :guilabel:`+` sign to automatically assign a new lot number." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:177 msgid "Then, select a number of units for the :guilabel:`Quantity` field, and click :guilabel:`Mark as Done`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:180 msgid "Click on the :guilabel:`External Link` icon in the assigned :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` field. A pop-up appears, revealing a detail form for that specific number." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:183 msgid "On that pop-up, under the :guilabel:`Dates` tab, all expiration information that was previously configured for the product is displayed. That same information is also available on the detail form for that specific product, or by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:-1 msgid "Dates tab with expiration information for specific lot number." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:193 msgid "Sell products with expiration dates" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:195 msgid "Selling perishable products with expiration dates is done the same as any other type of product. The first step in selling perishable products is to create a sales order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:198 msgid "To do that, go to :menuselection:`Sales app --> Create` to create a new quotation, and fill out the information on the sales order form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:201 msgid "Add a :guilabel:`Customer`, click :guilabel:`Add a product` to add the desired products to the :guilabel:`Product` lines, and set a :guilabel:`Quantity` for the products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:204 msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Other Info` tab. Under the :guilabel:`Delivery` section, change the :guilabel:`Delivery Date` to a date after the expected date, and click the :guilabel:`green checkmark` icon to confirm the date. Finally, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the sales order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:208 msgid "Next, click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button at the top of the sales order to see the warehouse receipt form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:211 msgid "On the warehouse receipt form, click :guilabel:`Validate`, and then :guilabel:`Apply` in the accompanying pop-up window, to automatically process all :guilabel:`Done` quantities, and deliver the products to the customer." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:215 msgid "If the products are delivered before the :guilabel:`Alert Date` set on the product form, then no alerts will be created." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:219 msgid "To sell perishable products with expiration dates, the :guilabel:`Removal Strategy` for the :guilabel:`Location` the products are stored in must be set to :abbr:`FEFO (First Expiry, First Out)`. If there is not enough stock of perishable products in one lot, Odoo will automatically take the remaining quantity required from a second lot with the next-soonest expiration date. Removal strategies can also be set on :guilabel:`Product Categories`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:226 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:190 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:105 msgid ":doc:`../../shipping_receiving/removal_strategies`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:229 msgid "View expiration dates for lots & serial numbers" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:231 msgid "To view (and/or group) all products with expiration dates by lot number, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:234 msgid "Once there, remove any default search filters from the :guilabel:`Search...` bar. Then, click :guilabel:`Group By`, choose :guilabel:`Add Custom Group`, and select the :guilabel:`Expiration Date` parameter from the drop-down menu. Finally, click :guilabel:`Apply` to apply the filter." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:238 msgid "Doing so breaks down all perishable products, their expiration dates, and the assigned lot number." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:-1 msgid "Group by expiration dates on lots and serial numbers page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:245 msgid "Expiration alerts" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:247 msgid "To see expiration alerts, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:249 msgid "Then, click into a :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` with perishable products. Doing so reveals the serial number detail form. On the serial number detail form, click the :guilabel:`Dates` tab to see all expiration information related to the products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:253 msgid "To edit the form, click :guilabel:`Edit` in the upper-left corner of the form, then change the :guilabel:`Expiration Date` to today's date (or earlier), and click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:257 msgid "After saving, the lot number form displays a red :guilabel:`Expiration Alert` at the top of the form to indicate that the products in this lot are either expired or expiring soon. From here, click back to the :guilabel:`Lots/Serial Numbers` page (via the breadcrumbs)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:261 msgid "To see the new expiration alert, or any expiration alerts for products that are expired (or will expire soon), remove all of the search filters from the :guilabel:`Search...` bar on the :guilabel:`Lots/Serial Numbers` dashboard." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:265 msgid "Then, click :guilabel:`Filters`, and choose :guilabel:`Expiration Alerts`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:-1 msgid "Expiration alert for product past the expiration date." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:3 msgid "Lot numbers" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:8 msgid "*Lots* are one of the two ways to identify and track products in Odoo. They typically represent a specific batch of products that were received, stored, shipped, or manufactured in-house." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:11 msgid "Manufacturers assign lot numbers to groups of products sharing common properties, facilitating end-to-end traceability through their lifecycles." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:14 msgid "Lots are useful for managing large quantities of manufactured or received products, aiding in tracing items back to their group, particularly for product recalls or :doc:`expiration dates `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:19 msgid ":doc:`serial_numbers`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:24 msgid "To track products by lots, enable the *Lots & Serial Numbers* feature. Then, configure each product to be tracked by serial numbers on the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:30 msgid "To track products using lots, enable the *Lots & Serial Numbers* feature. Go to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Traceability` section, and tick the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers`. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:36 msgid ":doc:`Tracking expiration dates `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:37 msgid ":ref:`Print GS1 barcodes for lots and serial numbers `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:46 msgid "Track by lots" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:48 msgid "Once the :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` feature is activated, configure individual products to be tracked using lots. To do this, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and choose a product to configure." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:52 msgid "On the product form, go to the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab. In the :guilabel:`Traceability` section, select the :guilabel:`By Lots` option in the :guilabel:`Tracking` field. Now, new or existing lot numbers can be assigned to newly-received or manufactured batches of this product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:57 msgid "If a product has stock on-hand prior to activating tracking by lots or serial numbers, use an :doc:`inventory adjustment <../../warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products>` to assign lot numbers to existing products in stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:-1 msgid "Enabled tracking by lots feature on product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:66 msgid "Assign lots for shipping and receiving" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:68 msgid "Assign new lot numbers to :ref:`incoming goods ` on the receipt form. When shipping :ref:`outgoing goods `, select products with specific lot numbers on the delivery order form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:76 msgid "On receipts" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:78 msgid "Assigning new or existing lot numbers to incoming goods can be done directly on receipts." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:80 msgid "To begin, go to the :menuselection:`Purchase` app to `create and confirm `_ a |PO| for products tracked by lot numbers. Then, click the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button that appears at the top of the page to navigate to the warehouse receipt form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:86 msgid "Alternatively, navigate to an existing receipt by going to the :menuselection:`Inventory` app, clicking the :guilabel:`Receipts` Kanban card, and choosing the desired receipt." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:90 msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Validate` before assigning a lot number triggers a :guilabel:`User Error`, indicating that a lot number **must** be assigned before validating the receipt." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:0 msgid "Add lot/serial number user error popup." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:97 msgid "On the receipt form, on the product line in the :guilabel:`Operations` tab, select the :guilabel:`⦙≣ (bulleted list)` icon to the right of the product that is tracked by lot numbers." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:104 msgid "Show the bulleted list icon on the product line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:104 msgid "The bulleted list icon on the product line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:106 msgid "Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` pop-up window, where the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` and :guilabel:`Done` quantity are assigned." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:109 msgid "The two ways to assign lot numbers are **manually** and **copy/paste**." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:112 msgid "Manual assignment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:114 msgid "To manually assign lot numbers, click :guilabel:`Add a line`, and choose the location the products will be stored in under the :guilabel:`To` column. Then, type a new :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`, and specify the :guilabel:`Done` quantity." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:119 msgid "To assign multiple lot numbers, or store to multiple locations, click :guilabel:`Add a line`, and type a new :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` for additional quantities. Repeat until the total in the :guilabel:`Done` column matches the :guilabel:`Quantity Done` at the top." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:-1 msgid "Assign lot number detailed operations popup." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:128 msgid "Copy and paste" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:130 msgid "From a spreadsheet with all of the lot numbers received from the supplier (or manually chosen to assign upon receipt), click :guilabel:`Add a line`, and proceed to copy and paste the lot numbers, in the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` column." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:-1 msgid "List of lot numbers copied on excel spreadsheet." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:142 msgid "Lot numbers copied to the lot number line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:142 msgid "Lot numbers copied to the lot number line, with each lot number on its own line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:144 msgid "After clicking away from the text field, Odoo automatically generates the necessary lot number lines. The quantities in the :guilabel:`Done` column match the first entry. Manually adjust the :guilabel:`To` locations and :guilabel:`Done` quantities for each lot number, as needed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:148 msgid "Once all product quantities have been assigned a lot number, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to close the pop-up window. Then, click :guilabel:`Validate` on the receipt form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:152 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:201 msgid ":ref:`Traceability report for lot numbers `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:157 msgid "On delivery orders" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:159 msgid "Odoo makes it possible to specify which lot numbers for a product are chosen for outgoing shipment on a delivery order form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:162 msgid "To begin, create or select an existing quotation from the :menuselection:`Sales` app. After confirming the |SO|, the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button becomes available. Click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button to view the warehouse receipt form for that specific |SO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:167 msgid "Alternatively, navigate to delivery orders by going to the :menuselection:`Inventory` app, and clicking the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` Kanban card." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:170 msgid "Clicking the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button opens the the delivery order form, where lot numbers are picked for delivery. In the :guilabel:`Operations` tab, click the :guilabel:`⦙≣ (bulleted list)` icon to the right of the product that is tracked by lot numbers. Clicking that icon reveals a :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:175 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` pop-up window, a :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` is chosen, with the full :guilabel:`Reserved` quantity taken from that specific lot (if there is enough stock in that particular lot)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:179 msgid "If there is insufficient stock in that lot, or if partial quantities of the :guilabel:`Demand` should be taken from multiple lots, change the quantity in the :guilabel:`Done` column to only include that specific part of the total quantity." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:184 msgid "The lot automatically chosen for delivery orders varies, depending on the selected removal strategy (:abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)`, :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)`, or :abbr:`FEFO (First Expiry, First Out)`). It also depends on the ordered quantity, and whether the lot's on-hand quantity is enough to fulfill the order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:192 msgid "Next, click :guilabel:`Add a line`, select a different :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`, apply the remaining :guilabel:`Done` quantities, and click :guilabel:`Confirm` to close the pop-up window. Lastly, click the :guilabel:`Validate` button to deliver the products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:-1 msgid "Detailed operations popup for source lot number on sales order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:204 msgid "Lot management" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:206 msgid "Manage and view existing lot numbers for products in the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Numbers` dashboard by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:209 msgid "By default, lot numbers are grouped by product, and selecting the drop-down menu for each product displays the existing lot numbers. Select a lot number to :ref:`modify or add details ` linked to the lot. Lot numbers can also be :ref:`created ` from this page, by clicking the :guilabel:`New` button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:219 msgid "Show the \"Lot/Serial Number\" dashboard." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:219 msgid "Display lot numbers, grouped by products, on the **Lot/Serial Number** dashboard." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:224 msgid "Modify lot" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:226 msgid "Clicking a lot from the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` dashboard reveals a separate page where additional information can be provided about the lot." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:230 msgid "Odoo automatically generates a new :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` to follow the most recent number. However, it can be edited, by clicking the line under the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` field, and changing the generated number to any desired one." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:234 msgid "On the lot number form, the following fields can be modified:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:236 msgid ":guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`: Change the lot number linked to the :guilabel:`Product`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:237 msgid ":guilabel:`Internal Reference`: Records an alternative lot/serial number used within the warehouse that differs from the one used by the supplier manufacturer." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:239 msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: Specify the company where the lot number is available." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:240 msgid ":guilabel:`Description`: Add extra details about the lot or serial number in this text field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:243 msgid "The :guilabel:`Product` and :guilabel:`Quantity` fields **cannot** be modified, as the lot numbers are linked with existing stock moves." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:-1 msgid "Show the lot number form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:251 msgid ":doc:`Set expiration dates for lots `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:256 msgid "Reserve lot number for a product" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:258 msgid "To create a lot number for a product, begin by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lot/Serial Numbers`, and click :guilabel:`New`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:262 msgid "Creating a lot number reserves it for a product but **does not** assign it. To assign lot numbers, refer to the section on :ref:`assigning lot numbers on receipts `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:267 msgid "While Odoo automatically generates a new :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` to follow the most recent number, it can be edited and changed to any desired number, by clicking the line under the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` field on the lot form, and changing the generated number." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:271 msgid "Once the new :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` is generated, click the blank field next to :guilabel:`Product` to reveal a drop-down menu. From this menu, select the product to which this new number will be assigned." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:276 msgid "The lot number, `0000011`, is created for the product, `Drawer Black`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:0 msgid "New lot number creation form with assigned product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:282 msgid "After a new lot number has been created, saved, and assigned to the desired product, the lot number is saved as an existing lot number linked to the product, and can be selected when :ref:`assigning lot numbers to products on a receipt `, or when making an inventory adjustment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:288 msgid "After creating the lot number, `0000011` appears as an option for `Drawer Black` when assigning lot numbers on the :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustment` page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:0 msgid "Show how to assign serial numbers on the Inventory Adjustment page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:296 msgid "Manage lots for different operations types" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:298 msgid "By default, new lots can only be created when receiving products, and existing lot numbers cannot be used. For sales orders, only existing lot numbers can be utilized, and new ones cannot be created on the delivery order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:302 msgid "To change the ability to use new (or existing) lot numbers on any operation type, go to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Operations Types`, and select the desired operation type." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:306 msgid "On the operation type form, under the :guilabel:`Lots/Serial Numbers` section, tick the :guilabel:`Create New` checkbox to enable new lot numbers to be created during this operation type. Choose :guilabel:`Use Existing ones` if only existing lot numbers can be selected." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:-1 msgid "Enabled traceability setting on operations type form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:315 msgid "For inter-warehouse transfers involving products tracked by lots, it can be useful to enable the :guilabel:`Use Existing Lots/Serial Numbers` option for warehouse receipts." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:323 msgid "Manufacturers and companies can refer to traceability reports to see the entire lifecycle of a product: where it came from, when it arrived, where it was stored, who it went to (and when)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:326 msgid "To see the full traceability of a product, or group by lots, go to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`. Doing so reveals the :menuselection:`Lots/Serial Numbers` dashboard." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:330 msgid "From here, products with lot numbers assigned to them will be listed by default, and can be expanded to show the lot numbers those products have assigned to them." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:333 msgid "To group by lots, begin by removing any filters in the :guilabel:`Search...` bar. Then, click the :guilabel:`Group By` drop-down menu, select :guilabel:`Add Custom Group`, and select :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` from the drop-down menu. Then, click :guilabel:`Apply`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:337 msgid "Doing so displays all existing lots and serial numbers, and can be expanded to show all quantities of products with that assigned number." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:-1 msgid "Lots and serial numbers traceability report." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:345 msgid "Traceability report" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:347 msgid "To view a full stock moves report for a lot number, select the lot number line from the :guilabel:`Lots/Serial Number` dashboard. On the lot number form, click the :guilabel:`Traceability` smart button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:-1 msgid "Show the Traceability Report for a lot, that displays the stock moves." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:356 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:319 msgid ":doc:`../product_tracking`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:3 msgid "Use serial numbers to track products" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:5 msgid "*Serial numbers* are one of the two ways to identify and track products in Odoo. A serial number is a unique identifier assigned incrementally (or sequentially) to an item or product, used to distinguish it from other items and products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:9 msgid "Serial numbers can consist of many different types of characters: they can be strictly numerical, they can contain letters and other typographical symbols, or they can be a mix of all of the above." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:12 msgid "The goal of assigning serial numbers to individual products is to make sure that every item's history is identifiable when it travels through the supply chain. This can be especially useful for manufacturers that provide after-sales services to products that they sell and deliver." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:17 msgid ":doc:`/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:22 msgid "To track products using serial numbers, the :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` feature must be enabled. To enable this, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Traceability` section, and click the box next to :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers`. Remember to click the :guilabel:`Save` button to save changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:-1 msgid "Enabled lots and serial numbers setting." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:34 msgid "Configure serial number tracking on products" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:36 msgid "Once the :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` setting has been activated, individual products can now be tracked using serial numbers. To configure this, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and choose a desired product to track." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:40 msgid "Once on the product form, click :guilabel:`Edit`, and click the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:42 msgid "Once on the product form, click :guilabel:`Edit`, navigate to the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab, and scroll to the :guilabel:`Traceability` section. Then, select the :guilabel:`By Unique Serial Number` option, and click :guilabel:`Save` to save the changes. Existing or new serial numbers can now be selected and assigned to newly-received or manufactured batches of this product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:-1 msgid "Enabled serial number tracking on product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:52 msgid "If a product doesn't have a serial number assigned to it, a user error pop-up window will appear. The error message states that the product(s) in stock have no lot/serial number. However, a lot/serial number can be assigned to the product by making an inventory adjustment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:57 msgid "Create new serial numbers for products already in stock" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:59 msgid "New serial numbers can be created for products already in stock with no assigned serial number. To do this, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`, and click :guilabel:`Create`. Doing so reveals a blank lots/serial numbers form. On this form, a new :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` is generated automatically." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:65 msgid "While Odoo automatically generates a new lot/serial number to follow the most recent number, it can be edited and changed to any desired number, by clicking the line under the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` field, and changing the generated number." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:69 msgid "Once the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` is generated, click the blank field next to :guilabel:`Product` to reveal a drop-down menu. From this menu, select the product to which this new number will be assigned." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:73 msgid "This form also provides the option to adjust the :guilabel:`Quantity`, to assign a unique :guilabel:`Internal Reference` number (for traceability purposes), and to assign this specific lot/serial number configuration to a specific website in the :guilabel:`Website` field (if working in a multi-website environment)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:78 msgid "A detailed description of this specific lot/serial number can also be added in the :guilabel:`Description` tab below." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:81 msgid "When all desired configurations are complete, click the :guilabel:`Save` button to save all changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:-1 msgid "New serial number created for existing product stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:87 msgid "After a new serial number has been created, assigned to the desired product, and saved, navigate back to the product form, by going to :menuselection:`Products --> Products`, and selecting the product that this newly-created serial number was just assigned to." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:91 msgid "On that product's detail form, click the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Numbers` smart button to view the new serial number." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:95 msgid "Manage serial numbers for shipping and receiving" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:97 msgid "Serial numbers can be assigned for both **incoming** and **outgoing** goods. For incoming goods, serial numbers are assigned directly on the purchase order form. For outgoing goods, serial numbers are assigned directly on the sales order form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:102 msgid "Manage serial numbers on receipts" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:104 msgid "Assigning serial numbers to **incoming** goods can be done directly from the purchase order (PO)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:106 msgid "To create a :abbr:`PO (purchase order)`, go to the :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Create`. Doing so reveals a new, blank request for quotation (RFQ) form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:109 msgid "On this :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` form, fill out the necessary information, by adding a :guilabel:`Vendor`, and by adding the desired products to the :guilabel:`Product` lines, by clicking :guilabel:`Add a product`, under the :guilabel:`Products` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:113 msgid "Choose the desired quantity of the product to order, by changing the number in the :guilabel:`Quantity` column." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:116 msgid "When the necessary configurations are complete, click :guilabel:`Confirm Order`. This will convert the :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` to a purchase order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:119 msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button to be taken to the warehouse receipt form page for that specific :abbr:`PO (purchase order)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:123 msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Validate` before assigning a serial number to the ordered product quantities will cause a :guilabel:`User Error` pop-up to appear. The pop-up requires entry of a lot or serial number for the ordered products. The :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` **cannot** be validated without a serial number being assigned." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:-1 msgid "User error popup prompting serial number entry." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:132 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:230 msgid "From here, click the :guilabel:`Additional Options` menu, represented by a `hamburger` icon (four horizontal lines, located to the right of the :guilabel:`Unit of Measure` column in the :guilabel:`Operations` tab). Clicking that icon reveals a :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` pop-up." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:136 msgid "In this pop-up, configure a number of different fields, including the assignation of a serial number (or serial numbers) under the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number Name` column, located at the bottom of the pop-up." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:140 msgid "There are three ways to do this: manually assigning serial numbers, automatically assigning serial numbers, and copy/pasting serial numbers from a spreadsheet." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:144 msgid "Assign serial numbers manually" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:146 msgid "To assign serial numbers manually, click :guilabel:`Add a line` from the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` pop-up, and first choose the location where the product will be stored under the :guilabel:`To` column." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:150 msgid "Then, type a new :guilabel:`Serial Number Name`, and set the :guilabel:`Done` quantity in the appropriate columns." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:153 msgid "Repeat this process for the quantity of products shown in the :guilabel:`Demand` field, and until the :guilabel:`Quantity Done` field displays the correct (matching) number of products processed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:157 msgid "Assign serial numbers automatically" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:159 msgid "If a large quantity of products need individual serial numbers assigned to them, Odoo can automatically generate and assign serial numbers to each of the individual products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:162 msgid "To accomplish this, start with the :guilabel:`First SN` field in the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` pop-up window, and type the first serial number in the desired order to be assigned." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:165 msgid "Then, in the :guilabel:`Number of SN` field, type the total number of items that need newly-generated unique serial numbers assigned to them." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:168 msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Assign Serial Numbers`, and a list will populate with new serial numbers matching the ordered quantity of products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:-1 msgid "Automatic serial number assignment in detailed operations popup." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:176 msgid "Copy/paste serial numbers from a spreadsheet" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:178 msgid "To copy and paste serial numbers from an existing spreadsheet, first populate a spreadsheet with all of the serial numbers received from the supplier (or manually chosen upon receipt). Then, copy and paste them in the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number Name` column. Odoo will automatically create the necessary number of lines based on the amount of numbers pasted in the column." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:183 msgid "From here, the :guilabel:`To` locations and :guilabel:`Done` quantities can be manually entered in each of the serial number lines." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:-1 msgid "List of serial numbers copied in Excel spreadsheet." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:191 msgid "For purchase orders that include large quantities of products to receive, the best method of serial number assignment is to automatically assign serial numbers using the :guilabel:`Assign Serial Numbers` button located on the :abbr:`PO (purchase order)`. This prevents any serial numbers from being reused or duplicated, and improves traceability reporting." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:196 msgid "Once all product quantities have been assigned a serial number, click the :guilabel:`Confirm` button to close the pop-up. Then, click :guilabel:`Validate`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:199 msgid "A :guilabel:`Traceability` smart button appears upon validating the receipt. Click the :guilabel:`Traceability` smart button to see the updated :guilabel:`Traceability Report`, which includes: a :guilabel:`Reference` document, the :guilabel:`Product` being traced, the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial #`, and more." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:204 msgid "Once all product quantities have been assigned a serial number, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to close the popup, and click :guilabel:`Validate`. A :guilabel:`Traceability` smart button will appear upon validating the receipt. Click the :guilabel:`Traceability` smart button to see the updated :guilabel:`Traceability Report`, which includes: a :guilabel:`Reference` document, the :guilabel:`Product` being traced, the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial #`, and more." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:211 msgid "Manage serial numbers on delivery orders" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:213 msgid "Assigning serial numbers to **outgoing** goods can be done directly from the sales order (SO)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:215 msgid "To create an :abbr:`SO (sales order)`, navigate to the :menuselection:`Sales` app, and click the :guilabel:`Create` button. Doing so reveals a new, blank quotation form. On this blank quotation form, fill out the necessary information, by adding a :guilabel:`Customer`, and adding products to the :guilabel:`Product` lines (in the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab), by clicking :guilabel:`Add a product`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:221 msgid "Then, choose the desired quantity to sell by changing the number in the :guilabel:`Quantity` column." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:223 msgid "Once the quotation has been filled out, click the :guilabel:`Confirm` button to confirm the quotation. When the quotation is confirmed, the quotation becomes an :abbr:`SO (sales order)`, and a :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button appears." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:227 msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button to view the warehouse receipt form for that specific :abbr:`SO (sales order)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:234 msgid "In the pop-up, a :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` will be chosen by default, with each product of the total :guilabel:`Reserved` quantity listed with their unique serial numbers (most likely listed in sequential order)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:238 msgid "To manually change a product's serial number, click the drop-down menu under :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`, and choose (or type) the desired serial number. Then, mark the :guilabel:`Done` quantities, and click :guilabel:`Confirm` to close the pop-up." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:242 msgid "Finally, click the :guilabel:`Validate` button to deliver the products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:-1 msgid "Serial numbers listed in detailed operations popup." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:248 msgid "Upon validating the delivery order, a :guilabel:`Traceability` smart button appears. Click the :guilabel:`Traceability` smart button to see the updated :guilabel:`Traceability Report`, which includes: a :guilabel:`Reference` document, the :guilabel:`Product` being traced, the :guilabel:`Date`, and the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial #` assigned." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:253 msgid "The :guilabel:`Traceability Report` can also include a :guilabel:`Reference` receipt from the previous purchase order (PO), if any of the product quantities shared a serial number assigned during receipt of that specific :abbr:`PO (purchase order)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:258 msgid "Manage serial numbers for different operations types" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:260 msgid "By default in Odoo, the creation of new serial numbers is only allowed upon **receiving** products from a purchase order. **Existing** serial numbers cannot be used. For sales orders, the opposite is true: new serial numbers cannot be created on the delivery order, only existing serial numbers can be used." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:265 msgid "To change the ability to use new (or existing) serial numbers on any operation type, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Operations Types`, and select the desired :guilabel:`Operation Type`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:269 msgid "For the :guilabel:`Receipts` operation type, found on the :guilabel:`Operations Types` page, the :guilabel:`Use Existing Lots/Serial Numbers` option can be enabled, by selecting :guilabel:`Receipts` from the :guilabel:`Operations Types` page, clicking :guilabel:`Edit`, and then clicking the checkbox beside the :guilabel:`Use Existing Lots/Serial Numbers` option (in the :guilabel:`Traceability` section). Lastly, click the :guilabel:`Save` button to save the changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:275 msgid "For the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` operation type, located on the :guilabel:`Operations Types` page, the :guilabel:`Create New Lots/Serial Numbers` option can be enabled, by selecting :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` from the :guilabel:`Operations Types` page, clicking :guilabel:`Edit`, and clicking the checkbox beside the :guilabel:`Create New Lots/Serial Numbers` option (in the :guilabel:`Traceability` section). Be sure to click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:-1 msgid "Enabled traceability setting in operations type form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:286 msgid "Serial number traceability" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:288 msgid "Manufacturers and companies can refer to the traceability reports to see the entire lifecycle of a product: where it came from (and when), where it was stored, and who it went to." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:291 msgid "To see the full traceability of a product, or group by serial numbers, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`. Doing so reveals the :guilabel:`Lots/Serial Numbers` dashboard." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:295 msgid "From here, products with serial numbers assigned to them will be listed by default, and can be expanded to show what serial numbers have been specifically assigned to them." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:298 msgid "To group by serial numbers (or lots), first remove any default filters from the search bar in the upper-right corner. Then, click :guilabel:`Group By`, and select :guilabel:`Add Custom Group`, which reveals a mini drop-down menu. From this mini drop-down menu, select :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`, and click :guilabel:`Apply`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:303 msgid "Doing so reveals all existing serial numbers and lots, and can be expanded to show all quantities of products with that assigned number. For unique serial numbers that are not reused, there should be just one product per serial number." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:-1 msgid "Serial numbers reporting page with drop-down lists." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:312 msgid "For additional information regarding an individual serial number (or lot number), click the line item for the serial number to reveal that specific serial number's :guilabel:`Serial Number` form. From this form, click the :guilabel:`Location` and :guilabel:`Traceability` smart buttons to see all stock on-hand using that serial number, and any operations made using that serial number." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving.rst:5 msgid "Shipping and receiving" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:6 msgid "Inbound and outbound flows" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:8 msgid "There are several ways to handle how a warehouse receives products (receipts) and ships products (deliveries). Depending on several factors, such as the type of products stocked and sold, warehouse size, and the amount of daily confirmed receipts and delivery orders, the way products are handled when coming in and out of the warehouse can vary a lot. Different settings can be configured for receipts and deliveries; they do not have to be configured to have the same number of steps." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:15 msgid "`Using Routes (eLearning Tutorial) `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:16 msgid "`Push & Pull Rules (eLearning Tutorial) `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:20 msgid "Choosing the right inventory flow to handle receipts and deliveries" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:22 msgid "By default, Odoo handles shipping and receiving in three different ways: in one, two, or three steps. The simplest configuration is one step, which is the default. Each additional step required for a warehouse for either the receiving or shipping process will add an additional layer of operations to perform before a product is either received or shipped. These configurations depend entirely on the requirements for the products stored, such as performing quality checks on received products, or using special packaging on shipped products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:30 msgid "One-step flow" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:32 msgid "The receiving and shipping rules for a one-step configuration are as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:34 msgid "**Receipt**: Receive products directly into stock. No intermediate steps between receipt and stock occur, such as a transfer to a quality control location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:36 msgid "**Shipping**: Ship products directly from stock. No intermediate steps between stock and shipping occur, such as a transfer to a packing location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:38 msgid "Can only be used if not using :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)`, :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)`, or :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` removal strategies." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:40 msgid "Receipts and/or deliveries are handled quickly." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:41 msgid "Recommended for small warehouses with low stock levels, and for non-perishable items." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:42 msgid "Items are received or shipped directly into/from stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:45 msgid ":doc:`daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:48 msgid "Two-step flow" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:50 msgid "The receiving and shipping rules for a two-step configuration are as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:52 msgid "**Input + stock**: Bring products to an input location *before* moving into stock. Products can be organized by different internal storage locations, such as various shelves, freezers, and locked areas, before being stocked in the warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:55 msgid "**Pick + ship**: Bring products to an output location before shipping. Packages can be organized by different carriers or shipping docks before being shipped." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:57 msgid "Minimum requirement to use lot numbers or serial numbers to track products with a :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)`, :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` or :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` removal strategy." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:60 msgid "Recommended for larger warehouses with high stock levels, or when stocking large items (such as mattresses, large furniture, heavy machinery, etc.)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:62 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:83 msgid "Products received will not be available for manufacturing, shipping, etc., until they are transferred into stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:66 msgid ":doc:`daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:69 msgid "Three-step flow" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:71 msgid "The receiving and shipping rules for a three-step configuration are as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:73 msgid "**Input + quality + stock**: Receive products at the input location, transfer them to a quality control area, and move the ones that pass inspection into stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:75 msgid "**Pick + pack + ship**: Pick products according to their removal strategy, pack them in a dedicated packing area, and bring them to an output location for shipping." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:77 msgid "Can be used when tracking products by lot or serial numbers when using a :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)`, :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)`, or :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` removal strategy." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:80 msgid "Recommended for very large warehouses with very high stock levels." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:81 msgid "Required for any warehouse needing to perform quality control inspections before receiving items into stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:87 msgid ":doc:`daily_operations/receipts_three_steps`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:88 msgid ":doc:`daily_operations/delivery_three_steps`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/cross_dock.rst:3 msgid "Organize a cross-dock in a warehouse" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/cross_dock.rst:5 msgid "Cross-docking is the process of sending products that are received directly to the customers, without making them enter the stock. The trucks are simply unloaded in a *Cross-Dock* area in order to reorganize products and load another truck." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/cross_dock.rst:13 msgid "For more information on how to organize your warehouse, read our blog: `What is cross-docking and is it for me? `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/cross_dock.rst:20 msgid "In the *Inventory* app, open :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` and activate the *Multi-Step Routes*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/cross_dock.rst:27 msgid "Doing so will also enable the *Storage Locations* feature." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/cross_dock.rst:29 msgid "Now, both *Incoming* and *Outgoing* shipments should be configured to work with 2 steps. To adapt the configuration, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouses` and edit your warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/cross_dock.rst:36 msgid "This modification will lead to the creation of a *Cross-Docking* route that can be found in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Routes`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/cross_dock.rst:43 msgid "Configure products with Cross-Dock Route" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/cross_dock.rst:45 msgid "Create the product that uses the *Cross-Dock Route* and then, in the inventory tab, select the routes *Buy* and *Cross-Dock*. Now, in the purchase tab, specify the vendor to who you buy the product and set a price for it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/cross_dock.rst:55 msgid "Once done, create a sale order for the product and confirm it. Odoo will automatically create two transfers which will be linked to the sale order. The first one is the transfer from the *Input Location* to the *Output Location*, corresponding to the move of the product in the *Cross-Dock* area. The second one is the delivery order from the *Output Location* to your *Customer Location. Both are in state *Waiting Another Operation* because we still need to order the product to our supplier." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/cross_dock.rst:68 msgid "Now, go to the *Purchase* app. There, you will find the purchase order that has been automatically triggered by the system. Validate it and receive the products in the *Input Location*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/cross_dock.rst:77 msgid "When the products have been received from the supplier, you can go back to your initial sale order and validate the internal transfer from *Input* to *Output*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/cross_dock.rst:86 msgid "The delivery order is now ready to be processed and can be validated too." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:3 msgid "Three-step delivery" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:5 msgid "Some companies process large amounts of deliveries every day, many of which include multiple products or require special packaging. To make this efficient, a packing step is needed before shipping out products. For this, Odoo has a three step process for delivering goods." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:9 msgid "In the default three-step delivery process, products that are part of a delivery order are picked in the warehouse according to their removal strategy, and brought to a packing zone. After the items have been packed into the different shipments in the packing zone, they are brought to an output location before being shipped. These steps can be modified if they do not fit the needs of the business." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:18 msgid "To change delivery settings from :doc:`one step ` to three steps, make sure the *Multi-Step Routes* option is enabled in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings --> Warehouse`. Note that activating :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` will also activate *Storage Locations*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1 msgid "Activate multi-step routes and storage locations in inventory settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:27 msgid "Next, the warehouse needs to be configured for three step deliveries. To do this, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Warehouses`, and click on the :guilabel:`warehouse` to edit. Then, select :guilabel:`Pack goods, send goods in output and then deliver (3 steps)` for :guilabel:`Outgoing Shipments`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:-1 msgid "Set outgoing shipment option to deliver in three steps." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:36 msgid "Activating three-step receipts and deliveries creates two new internal locations: a *Packing Zone* (WH/Packing Zone), and *Output* (WH/Output). To rename these locations, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations`, click on the :guilabel:`Location` to change, and update the name." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:42 msgid "Deliver in three steps (pick + pack + ship)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:45 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:89 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:139 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:35 msgid "Create a sales order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:47 msgid "To create a new quote, navigate to :menuselection:`Sales app --> Create`, which reveals a blank quotation form. On the blank quotation form, select a :guilabel:`Customer`, add a storable :guilabel:`Product`, and click :guilabel:`Confirm`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:51 msgid "A :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button appears in the top right of the quotation form. Clicking it shows the picking order, packing order, and the delivery order associated with the sales order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:-1 msgid "After confirming the sales order, the Delivery smart button appears showing three items\n" "associated with it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:60 msgid "Process a picking" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:62 msgid "The picking, packing, and delivery orders will be created once the sales order is confirmed. To view these transfers, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Transfers`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:-1 msgid "Ready status for the pick operation while the packing and delivery operations are waiting\n" "another operation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:70 msgid "The status of the picking will be :guilabel:`Ready`, since the product must be picked from stock before it can be packed. The status of the packing order and delivery order will both be :guilabel:`Waiting Another Operation`, since the packing and delivery cannot happen until the picking is completed. The status of the delivery order will only change to :guilabel:`Ready` when the packing has been marked :guilabel:`Done`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:76 msgid "The receipt can also be found in the *Inventory* application. In the :guilabel:`Overview` dashboard, click the :guilabel:`1 To Process` smart button in the :guilabel:`Pick` kanban card." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:-1 msgid "The pick order can be seen in the Inventory Kanban view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:83 msgid "Click on the picking to process. If the product is in stock, Odoo will automatically reserve the product. Click :guilabel:`Validate` to mark the picking as done, and complete the transfer to the :guilabel:`Packing Zone`. Then the packing order will be ready. Since the documents are linked, the products which have been previously picked are automatically reserved on the packing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1 msgid "Validate the picking by clicking Validate." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:93 msgid "Process a packing" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:95 msgid "The packing order will be ready to be processed once the picking is completed, and can be found in the :menuselection:`Inventory` application :guilabel:`Overview` dashboard. Click the :guilabel:`1 To Process` smart button in the :guilabel:`Pack` kanban card." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:-1 msgid "The packing order can be seen in the Inventory kanban view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:103 msgid "Click on the packing order associated with the sales order, then click on :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the packing." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:-1 msgid "Click Validate on the packing order to transfer the product from the packing zone to the\n" "output location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:111 msgid "Once the packing order is validated, the product leaves the :guilabel:`WH/Packing Zone` location and moves to the :guilabel:`WH/Output` location. Then, the status of the document will change to :guilabel:`Done`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:116 msgid "Process a delivery" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:118 msgid "The delivery order will be ready to be processed once the packing is completed, and can be found in the :menuselection:`Inventory` application :guilabel:`Overview` dashboard. Click the :guilabel:`1 To Process` smart button in the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` kanban card." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:-1 msgid "The delivery order can be seen in the Delivery Orders Kanban view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:126 msgid "Click on the delivery order associated with the sales order, then click on :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the move." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1 msgid "Click Validate on the delivery order to transfer the product from the output location to\n" "the customer location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:134 msgid "Once the delivery order is validated, the product leaves the :guilabel:`WH/Output` location and moves to the :guilabel:`Partners/Customers` location. Then, the status of the document will change to :guilabel:`Done`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:3 msgid "Use dropshipping to ship directly from suppliers to customers" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:5 msgid "Dropshipping is an order fulfillment strategy that allows sellers to have items shipped directly from suppliers to customers. Normally, a seller purchases a product from a supplier, stores it in their inventory, and ships it to the end customer once an order is placed. With dropshipping, the supplier is responsible for storing and shipping the item. This benefits the seller by reducing inventory costs, including the price of operating warehouses." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:12 msgid "Configure products to be dropshipped" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:14 msgid "To use dropshipping as a fulfillment strategy, navigate to the :menuselection:`Purchase` app and select :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Logistics` heading, click the :guilabel:`Dropshipping` checkbox, and :guilabel:`Save` to finish." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:18 msgid "Next, go to the :menuselection:`Sales` app, click :menuselection:`Products --> Products` and choose an existing product or select :guilabel:`Create` to configure a new one. On the :guilabel:`Product` page, make sure that the :guilabel:`Can be Sold` and :guilabel:`Can be Purchased` checkboxes are enabled." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:-1 msgid "Enable the \"Can be Sold\" and \"Can be Purchased\" checkboxes on the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:27 msgid "Click on the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab and specify a vendor and the price that they sell the product for. Multiple vendors can be added, but the vendor at the top of the list will be the one automatically selected for purchase orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:-1 msgid "The product form with a vendor specified." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:35 msgid "Finally, select the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab and enable the :guilabel:`Dropship` checkbox in the :guilabel:`Routes` section." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:-1 msgid "Enable the Dropship option in the product inventory tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:43 msgid "Fulfill orders using dropshipping" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:45 msgid "When a customer completes an online purchase for a dropshipped product, a sales order will be automatically created with an associated request for quotation (:abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)`) for the supplier. Sales orders can be viewed in the :menuselection:`Sales` app by selecting :menuselection:`Orders --> Orders`. Click the :guilabel:`Purchase` smart button at the top right of a sales order to view the associated :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:52 msgid "Dropship sales orders can also be created manually through the :menuselection:`Sales` app by selecting :menuselection:`Orders --> Orders --> Create` and adding a product configured for dropshipping." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:-1 msgid "A dropship sales order with the Purchase smart button in the top right corner." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:60 msgid "Once the :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)` is confirmed, it becomes a purchase order and a dropship receipt is created and linked to it. The receipt can be viewed by clicking the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button in the top right corner of the purchase order form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:-1 msgid "A dropship purchase order with the Receipt smart button in the top right corner." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:68 msgid "The dropship receipt will list the supplier in the :guilabel:`Receive From` section and the customer in the :guilabel:`Destination Location` section. Upon delivery of the product to the customer, click on the :guilabel:`Validate` button at the top left of the dropship receipt to confirm the delivered quantity." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:-1 msgid "Validate the dropship receipt after delivery." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:77 msgid "To view all dropship orders, simply navigate to the :menuselection:`Inventory` :guilabel:`Overview` dashboard and click the teal :guilabel:`# TO PROCESS` button on the :guilabel:`Dropship` card." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/dropshipping.rst:-1 msgid "Click the green button on the Dropship card to view all dropship orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:3 msgid "Consignment: buy and sell stock without owning it" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:5 msgid "Most of the time, products stored in a company's warehouse are either purchased from suppliers, or are manufactured in-house. However, suppliers will sometimes let companies store and sell products in the company's warehouse, without having to buy those items up-front. This is called *consignment*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:10 msgid "Consignment is a useful method for suppliers to launch new products, and easily deliver to their customers. It's also a great way for the company storing the products (the consignee) to earn something back for their efforts. Consignees can even charge a fee for the convenience of storing products they don't actually own." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:16 msgid "Enable the consignment setting" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:18 msgid "To receive, store, and sell consignment stock, the feature needs to be enabled in the settings. To do this, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`, and under the :guilabel:`Traceability` section, check the box next to :guilabel:`Consignment`, and then click :guilabel:`Save` to finish." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:-1 msgid "Enabled Consignment setting in Inventory configuration." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:28 msgid "Receive (and store) consignment stock" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:30 msgid "With the feature enabled in Odoo, consignment stock can now be received into a warehouse. From the main :menuselection:`Inventory` dashboard, click into the :guilabel:`Receipts` section. Then, click :guilabel:`Create`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:35 msgid "Consignment stock is not actually purchased from the vendor; it is simply received and stored. Because of this, there are no quotations or purchase orders involved in receiving consignment stock. So, *every* receipt of consignment stock will start by creating manual receipts." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:39 msgid "Choose a vendor to enter in the :guilabel:`Receive From` field, and then choose the same vendor to enter in the :guilabel:`Assign Owner` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:43 msgid "Since the products received from the vendor will be owned by the same vendor, the :guilabel:`Receive From` and :guilabel:`Assign Owner` fields must match." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:46 msgid "Once the vendor-related fields are set, enter products into the :guilabel:`Product` lines, and set the quantities to be received into the warehouse under the :guilabel:`Done` column. If the :guilabel:`Units of Measure` feature is enabled, the :abbr:`UoM (Units of Measure)` can be changed, as well. Once all the consignment stock has been received, :guilabel:`Validate` the receipt." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:-1 msgid "Matching vendor fields in consignment Receipt creation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:56 msgid "Sell and deliver consignment stock" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:58 msgid "Once consignment stock has been received into the warehouse, it can be sold the same as any other in-stock product that has the :guilabel:`Can Be Sold` option enabled on the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:61 msgid "To create a sales order, navigate to the :menuselection:`Sales` app, and from the :guilabel:`Quotations` overview, click :guilabel:`Create`. Next, choose a customer to enter into the :guilabel:`Customer` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:66 msgid "The :guilabel:`Customer` *must* be different from the :guilabel:`Vendor` that supplied the consignment stock received (and stored) in the warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:69 msgid "Add the consignment product under the :guilabel:`Product` column in the order lines, set the :guilabel:`Quantity`, and fill out any other pertinent product details on the form. Once the quotation is complete, click :guilabel:`Confirm`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:-1 msgid "Sales order of consignment stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:77 msgid "Once the quotation has been confirmed, it becomes a sales order. From here, the products can be delivered by clicking on the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button, and selecting :guilabel:`Validate` to validate the delivery." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:82 msgid "Traceability and reporting of consignment stock" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:84 msgid "Although consignment stock is owned by the vendor who supplied it, and not by the company storing it in their warehouse, consignment products will *still* appear in certain inventory reports." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:87 msgid "To find inventory reports, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Reporting`, and choose a report to view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:91 msgid "Since the consignee does not actually own consignment stock, these products are *not* reflected in the :guilabel:`Stock Valuation` report, and have no impact on the consignee's inventory valuation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:96 msgid "Product moves report" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:98 msgid "To view all information about on-hand stock moves, navigate to the :guilabel:`Product Moves` dashboard by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Reporting --> Product Moves`. For consignment products, the information in this report is the same as any other product: the history of its product moves can be reviewed; the :guilabel:`Quantity Done` and :guilabel:`Reference` document are available; and its :guilabel:`Locations` are available, as well. The consignment stock will originate from :guilabel:`Partner Location/Vendors`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:106 msgid "To view a consignment product's moves by ownership, select the :guilabel:`Group By` filter, choose the :guilabel:`Add Custom Group` parameter, and then select :guilabel:`From Owner`, and :guilabel:`Apply` to finish." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:-1 msgid "Consignment stock moves history." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:115 msgid "To see forecasted units of consignment stock, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Reporting --> Forecasted Inventory`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:119 msgid "Stock on hand report" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/owned_stock.rst:121 msgid "View the :guilabel:`Stock On Hand` dashboard by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Reporting --> Inventory Report`. From this report, the :guilabel:`Locations` of all stock on-hand are displayed, in addition to the quantities per location. For consignment products, the :guilabel:`Owner` column will be populated with the owner of those products, or the original vendor who supplied the products in the first place." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:3 msgid "Putaway rules" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:5 msgid "Putaway is the process of routing products to appropriate storage locations upon shipment arrival." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:7 msgid "Odoo can accomplish this seamlessly using *putaway rules*, which dictate how products move through specified warehouse locations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:10 msgid "Upon shipment arrival, operations are generated based on putaway rules to efficiently move products to specified locations, and ensure easy retrieval for future delivery orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:13 msgid "In warehouses that process specific kinds of products, putaway rules can also prevent volatile substances from being stored in close proximity, by directing them to different locations determined by the warehouse manager." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:18 msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Putaway Rules `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:23 msgid "To use putaway rules, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and activate the :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` feature under the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section. By doing so, the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` feature is also automatically activated." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:27 msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:-1 msgid "Activate Multi-Step Routes in Inventory configuration settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:36 msgid "Define putaway rule" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:38 msgid "To manage where specific products are routed for storage, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Putaway Rules`. Use the :guilabel:`Create` button to configure a new putaway rule on a :guilabel:`Product` or :guilabel:`Product Category` that the rule affects." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:43 msgid "Putaway rules can be defined either per product/product category, and/or package type (the *Packages* setting must be enabled in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings` for that)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:47 msgid "In the same line, the :guilabel:`When product arrives in` location is where the putaway rule is triggered to create an operation to move the product to the :guilabel:`Store to` location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:50 msgid "For this to work, the :guilabel:`Store to` location must be a *sub-location* of the first (e.g., `WH/Stock/Fruits` is a specific, named location inside `WH/Stock` to make the products stored here easier to find)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:55 msgid "In a warehouse location, **WH/Stock**, there are the following sub-locations:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:57 msgid "WH/Stock/Fruits" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:58 msgid "WH/Stock/Vegetables" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:60 msgid "Ensure all apples are stored in the fruits section by filling the field :guilabel:`Store to` with the location `WH/Stock/Fruits` when the :guilabel:`Product`, `Apple` arrives in `WH/Stock`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:63 msgid "Repeat this for all products and hit :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:0 msgid "Create putaway rules for apples and carrots." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:70 msgid "Putaway rule priority" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:72 msgid "Odoo selects a putaway rule based on the following priority list (from highest to lowest) until a match is found:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:75 msgid "Package type and product" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:76 msgid "Package type and product category" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:79 msgid "Product category" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:82 msgid "The product `Lemonade can` has the following putaway rules configured:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:84 msgid "When receiving a `Pallet` (:guilabel:`Package Type`) of `Lemonade cans`, it is redirected to `WH/Stock/Pallets/PAL1`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:86 msgid "`Lemonade can`'s :guilabel:`Product Category` is `All/drinks`, and when receiving a `Box` of any item in this product category, items are redirected to `WH/Stock/Shelf 1`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:88 msgid "Any product on a `Pallet` is redirected to `WH/Stock/Pallets`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:89 msgid "The product `Lemonade can` is redirected to `WH/Stock/Shelf 2`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:90 msgid "Items in the `All/drinks` product category are redirected to `WH/Stock/Small Refrigerator`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/putaway.rst:0 msgid "Some examples of putaway rules." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:3 msgid "One-step receipt and delivery" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:5 msgid "By default, incoming shipments are configured to be received directly into stock, and outgoing shipments are configured to be delivered directly from stock to the customer; the default setting for warehouses in Odoo is one step receipts and deliveries." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:10 msgid "Incoming and outgoing shipments do not need to be configured with the same steps. For example, products can be received in one step, but shipped in three steps." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:13 msgid "In the following example, one step will be used for both receipts and deliveries." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:18 msgid "Configure the warehouse" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:20 msgid "If another receiving or shipping configuration is set on the warehouse, they can easily be set back to the one step setting." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:23 msgid "Begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouses`, and click on the desired warehouse to edit. Next, on the :guilabel:`Warehouse Configuration` tab, under the :guilabel:`Shipments` section, select :guilabel:`Receive goods directly (1 step)` for :guilabel:`Incoming Shipments` and/or :guilabel:`Deliver goods directly (1 step)` for :guilabel:`Outgoing Shipments`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:-1 msgid "Set incoming and outgoing shipment options to receive and deliver in one step." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:34 msgid "Receive goods directly (1 step)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:37 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:67 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:46 msgid "Create a purchase order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:39 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:69 msgid "On the main :menuselection:`Purchase` application dashboard, start by making a new quote by clicking :guilabel:`New`. Then, select (or create) a :guilabel:`Vendor` from the drop-down field, add a storable :guilabel:`Product` to the order lines, and click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to finalize the quote as a new purchase order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:44 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:96 msgid "A :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button will appear in the top-right corner of the :abbr:`PO (purchase order)` form — click it to reveal the associated receipt for the purchase order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:-1 msgid "Receipt smart button appears on the confirmed purchase order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:52 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:89 msgid "Purchase order receipts can also be found in the :menuselection:`Inventory` application. In the :guilabel:`Overview` dashboard, click the :guilabel:`# to Process` smart button in the :guilabel:`Receipts` kanban card." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:0 msgid "Receipt kanban card's 1 to Process smart button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:61 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:98 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:97 msgid "Process the receipt" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:63 msgid "When viewing the receipt (associated with the purchase order above), click :guilabel:`Validate` to then complete the receipt." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:-1 msgid "Validate the purchase order via the Validate smart button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:71 msgid "If :guilabel:`Storage Locations` are activated, clicking the :guilabel:`≣ (bullet list)` details icon next to the :guilabel:`🗑️ (trash)` delete icon enables the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` screen to pop-up. This allows the location(s) to be specified for the received product(s)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:0 msgid "Select the Storage Location for the products being received in the Detailed Operations\n" "pop-up." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:80 msgid "Once the receipt is validated, the product leaves the :guilabel:`Supplier Location` and enters the :guilabel:`WH/Stock Location`. Once it arrives here, it will be available for manufacturing, sales, etc. Then, the status of the document will change to :guilabel:`Done`, thus completing the reception process in one step." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:86 msgid "Deliver goods directly (1 step)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:91 msgid "Start my navigating to the main :menuselection:`Sales` app dashboard, and make a new quote by clicking :guilabel:`New`. Then select (or create) a :guilabel:`Customer` from the drop-down field, add a storable :guilabel:`Product` that is in stock to the order lines, and click :guilabel:`Confirm` to finalize the quotation as a sales order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:99 msgid "A :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button will appear in the top-right corner of the :abbr:`SO (Sales Order)` form — click it to reveal the associated delivery order for the sales order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:-1 msgid "The Delivery smart button appears after the sales order is confirmed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:107 msgid "Delivery orders can also be found in the :menuselection:`Inventory` application. In the :guilabel:`Overview` dashboard, click the :guilabel:`# to Process` smart button in the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` kanban card." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:0 msgid "Delivery Orders kanban card's 1 to Process smart button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:116 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:192 msgid "Process the delivery" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:118 msgid "When viewing the delivery order (associated with the sales order above), click :guilabel:`Validate` to then complete the delivery." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:-1 msgid "Validate the delivery order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:125 msgid "Once the picking order is validated, the product leaves the :guilabel:`WH/Stock location` and moves to the :guilabel:`Partners/Customers location`. Then, the status of the document will change to :guilabel:`Done`, thus completing delivery in one step." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:3 msgid "Two-step receipt and delivery" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:5 msgid "Depending on a company's business processes, multiple steps may be needed before receiving or shipping products. In the two-step receipt process, products are received in an input area, then transferred to stock. Two-step receipts work best when various storage locations are being used, such as locked or secured areas, freezers and refrigerators, or various shelves." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:10 msgid "Products can be sorted according to where they are going to be stored, and employees can stock all the products going to a specific location. The products are not available for further processing until they are transferred into stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:14 msgid "In the two-step delivery process, products that are part of a delivery order are picked from the warehouse according to their removal strategy, and brought to an output location before being shipped." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:18 msgid "One situation where this would be useful is when using either a :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)`, :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)`, or :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` removal strategy, where the products that are being picked need to be selected based on their receipt date or expiration date." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:23 msgid "Odoo is configured by default to :doc:`receive and deliver goods in one step `, so the settings need to be changed in order to utilize two-step receipts and deliveries. Incoming and outgoing shipments do not need to be set to have the same steps. For example, products can be received in two steps, but shipped in one step. In the following example, two steps will be used for both receipts and deliveries." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:30 msgid "Configure multi-step routes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:32 msgid "First, make sure the :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` option is enabled in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`, under the :guilabel:`Warehouse` heading. After enabling the setting, :guilabel:`Save` the changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:37 msgid "Activating the :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` setting will also activate the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` feature." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:44 msgid "Next, the warehouse needs to be configured for two-step receipts and deliveries. Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouses`, and click on the warehouse to change the warehouse settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:48 msgid "Then, select :guilabel:`Receive goods in input and then stock (2 steps)` for :guilabel:`Incoming Shipments`, and :guilabel:`Send goods in output and then deliver (2 steps)` for :guilabel:`Outgoing Shipments`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1 msgid "Set incoming and outgoing shipment options to receive and deliver in two steps." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:57 msgid "Activating two-step receipts and deliveries will create new *input* and *output* locations, which by default, are labeled :guilabel:`WH/Input` and :guilabel:`WH/Output`, respectively, on the :guilabel:`Locations` dashboard. To rename these locations, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Locations`, and select the :guilabel:`Location` to change. On the location form, update the :guilabel:`Location Name`, and make any other changes (if necessary)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:64 msgid "Process a receipt in two steps (input + stock)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:75 msgid "For businesses with multiple warehouses that have different step configurations, the :guilabel:`Deliver To` field on the :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` form may need to be specified as the correct *input location* connected to the two-step warehouse, which can be done by selecting the warehouse from the drop-down selection that includes the `Receipts` label at the end of the name." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:81 msgid "After confirming the :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)`, a :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button will appear in the top of the :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` form — click it to reveal the associated receipt." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:-1 msgid "After confirming a purchase order, a Receipt smart button will appear." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:0 msgid "One receipt ready to process in the Inventory Overview kanban view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:100 msgid "The receipt and internal transfer will be created once the purchase order is confirmed. The status of the receipt will be :guilabel:`Ready`, since the receipt must be processed first. The status of the internal transfer will be :guilabel:`Waiting Another Operation`, since the transfer cannot happen until the receipt is completed. The status of the internal transfer will only change to :guilabel:`Ready` once the receipt has been marked as :guilabel:`Done`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:106 msgid "Click on the :guilabel:`Receipt` associated with the purchase order, then click :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the receipt and move the product to the :guilabel:`Input Location`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1 msgid "Validate the receipt by clicking Validate, then the product will be transferred to the\n" "WH/Input location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:115 msgid "Process the internal transfer" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:117 msgid "Once the product is in the :guilabel:`Input Location`, the internal transfer is ready to move the product into stock. Navigate to the :menuselection:`Inventory` app, and on the :guilabel:`Inventory Overview` dashboard, click the :guilabel:`# To Process` smart button in the :guilabel:`Internal Transfers` kanban card." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:-1 msgid "One Internal Transfer ready to process in the Inventory Overview kanban view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:126 msgid "Click on the :guilabel:`Transfer` associated with the purchase order, then click :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the receipt and move the product to stock. Once the transfer is validated, the product enters the stock and is available for customer deliveries or manufacturing orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1 msgid "Validate the internal transfer to move the item to stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:136 msgid "Process a delivery order in two steps (pick + ship)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:141 msgid "In the :menuselection:`Sales` application, create a new quote by clicking :guilabel:`New`. Select (or create) a :guilabel:`Customer`, add a storable :guilabel:`Product` to the order lines, and then click :guilabel:`Confirm`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:145 msgid "After confirming the :abbr:`SO (Sales Order)`, a :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button will appear in the top, above the :abbr:`SO (Sales Order)` form. Click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button to reveal the associated receipt." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1 msgid "After confirming the sales order, the Delivery smart button appears showing two items\n" "associated with it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:155 msgid "Sales order receipts can also be found in the :menuselection:`Inventory` application. In the :guilabel:`Overview` dashboard, click the :guilabel:`# To Process` smart button in the :guilabel:`Pick` kanban card." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:0 msgid "The pick order can be seen in the Inventory kanban view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:164 msgid "Process the picking" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:166 msgid "The picking and delivery order will be created once the sales order is confirmed. When the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button appears, click it to reveal the :guilabel:`Transfers` dashboard, which lists both the picking and the delivery orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:170 msgid "The status of the picking will be :guilabel:`Ready`, since the product must be picked from stock before it can be shipped. The status of the delivery order will be :guilabel:`Waiting Another Operation`, since the delivery cannot happen until the picking is completed. The status of the delivery order will only change to :guilabel:`Ready` once the picking has been marked as :guilabel:`Done`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1 msgid "Ready status for the pick operation while the delivery operation is Waiting Another\n" "Operation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:181 msgid "Click on the picking delivery order to begin processing it. If the product is in stock, Odoo will automatically reserve the product. Click :guilabel:`Validate` to mark the picking as :guilabel:`Done`, then the delivery order will be ready for processing. Since the documents are linked, the products which have been previously picked are automatically reserved on the delivery order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:194 msgid "The delivery order will be ready to be processed once the picking is completed, and can be found in the :menuselection:`Inventory` application, on the :guilabel:`Inventory Overview` dashboard. Click the :guilabel:`# To Process` smart button in the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` kanban card to begin." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:199 msgid "The delivery order associated with the :abbr:`SO (Sales Order)` can also be quickly accessed by clicking on the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button again, and choosing the delivery order on the :guilabel:`Transfers` page (which should now be marked as :guilabel:`Ready`)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1 msgid "The delivery order can be seen in the Inventory Kanban view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:207 msgid "Click on the delivery order associated with the :abbr:`SO (Sales Order)`, then click on :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the move." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:215 msgid "Once the delivery order is validated, the product leaves the :guilabel:`WH/Output` location on the :guilabel:`Transfers` dashboard and moves to the :guilabel:`Partners/Customers` location. Then, the status of the document will change to :guilabel:`Done`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:3 msgid "Three-step receipt" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:5 msgid "Some companies require a quality control process before receiving goods from suppliers. To accomplish this, Odoo has a three-step process for receiving goods." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:8 msgid "In the three-step receipt process, products are received in an input area, then transferred to a quality area for inspection. Products that pass the quality inspection are then transferred into stock. The products are not available for further processing until they are transferred out of the quality area and into stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:16 msgid "Odoo is configured by default to :doc:`receive and deliver goods in one step `, so the settings need to be changed in order to utilize three-step receipts. First, make sure the *Multi-Step Routes* option is enabled in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings --> Warehouse`. Note that activating :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` will also activate *Storage Locations*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:-1 msgid "Activate multi-step routes and storage locations in Inventory settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:26 msgid "Next, the warehouse needs to be configured for three-step receipts. To do that, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Warehouses`, and select the desired warehouse to be edited. Doing so reveals the detail form for that specific warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:30 msgid "On that :guilabel:`Warehouse` detail form page, select :guilabel:`Receive goods in input, then quality and then stock (3 steps)` for :guilabel:`Incoming Shipments`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:-1 msgid "Set incoming shipment option to receive in three steps." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:37 msgid "Activating three-step receipts and deliveries creates two new internal locations: *Input* (WH/Input), and *Quality Control* (WH/Quality Control). To rename these locations, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations`, then click on the desired location to change (or update) the name." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:43 msgid "Receive in three steps (input + quality + stock)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:48 msgid "To create a new :abbr:`RfQ (Request for Quotation)`, navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> New`, which reveals a blank :abbr:`RfQ (Request for Quotation)` form page. On this page, select a :guilabel:`Vendor`, add a storable :guilabel:`Product`, and click :guilabel:`Confirm Order`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:52 msgid "A :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button will appear in the top right, and the receipt will be associated with the purchase order. Clicking on the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button will show the receipt order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:61 msgid "Process a receipt" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:63 msgid "One receipt and two internal transfers (one transfer to quality, and a subsequent transfer to stock) will be created once the purchase order is confirmed. To view these transfers, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Transfers`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:-1 msgid "The status of the three receipt transfers will show which operation is ready and which ones\n" "are waiting another operation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:72 msgid "The status of the receipt transferring the product to the input location will be :guilabel:`Ready`, since the receipt must be processed before any other operation can occur. The status of the two internal transfers will be :guilabel:`Waiting Another Operation`, since the transfers cannot be processed until the linked step before each transfer is completed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:77 msgid "The status of the first internal transfer to *quality* will only change to :guilabel:`Ready` when the receipt has been marked :guilabel:`Done`. The status for the second internal transfer to *stock* will be marked :guilabel:`Ready` only after the transfer to quality has been marked :guilabel:`Done`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:82 msgid "The receipt can also be found in the :menuselection:`Inventory` application. In the :guilabel:`Overview` dashboard, click the :guilabel:`1 To Process` smart button in the :guilabel:`Receipts` kanban card." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:-1 msgid "One Receipt ready to process in the Inventory Overview kanban view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:90 msgid "Click on the receipt associated with the purchase order, then click :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the receipt and move the product to the :guilabel:`Input Location`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:-1 msgid "Validate the receipt by clicking Validate, and the product will be transferred to the\n" "WH/Quality location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:99 msgid "Process a transfer to Quality Control" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:101 msgid "Once the product is in the :guilabel:`Input Location`, the internal transfer is ready to move the product to :guilabel:`Quality Control`. In the :menuselection:`Inventory` :guilabel:`Overview` dashboard, click the :guilabel:`1 To Process` smart button in the :guilabel:`Internal Transfers` kanban card." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:110 msgid "Click on the :guilabel:`Transfer` associated with the purchase order, then click :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the transfer and move the product to the :guilabel:`Quality Control` location. Once the transfer is validated, the product is ready for the quality inspection, but is not available for manufacturing or delivery orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:-1 msgid "Validate the internal transfer to move the item to the Quality Control location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:120 msgid "Process a transfer to stock" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:122 msgid "Once the product is in the :guilabel:`Quality Control` location, the final internal transfer is ready to move the product to :guilabel:`Stock`. In the :guilabel:`Inventory` overview dashboard, click the :guilabel:`1 To Process` smart button in the :guilabel:`Internal Transfers` Kanban card." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:126 msgid "Click on the final :guilabel:`Transfer` associated with the purchase order, then click :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the transfer and move the product to stock. Once the transfer is validated, the product enters the stock and is available for customer deliveries or manufacturing orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:3 msgid "Sell stock from multiple warehouses using virtual locations" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:5 msgid "While keeping stock and selling inventory from one warehouse might work for smaller companies, bigger companies might need to keep stock in, or sell from, multiple warehouses in multiple locations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:9 msgid "Sometimes products included in a single sales order might take stock from two (or more) warehouses; in Odoo, pulling products from multiple warehouses to satisfy sales demands can be done using *virtual locations*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:14 msgid "The solution in this document, describing the use of a virtual warehouse to fulfill orders for multiple warehouses, has some limitations. Consider the following before proceeding:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:17 msgid "When the :guilabel:`Warehouse` field is set to a virtual warehouse on a sales order, the virtual warehouse's address is indicated on the picking, packing, and delivery forms, **not** the actual warehouse's address." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:20 msgid "Each location has a `warehouse_id` (hidden field). This means that the stock in the virtual warehouse will **not** be the sum of the stock of the real warehouses, but rather the sum of the stock in the locations whose warehouse ID is the virtual warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:25 msgid "Potential limitation for those using :doc:`two <../../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps>` or :doc:`three-step delivery <../../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps>`:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:29 msgid "The output or packing zone on the various forms is incorrectly listed as the virtual warehouse's address." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:31 msgid "There is no workaround for two or three-step deliveries." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:32 msgid "Proceed **only** if setting a virtual warehouse's address as the output or packing zone makes sense for the company's workflow." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:36 msgid "In order to create virtual locations in warehouses, and proceed to the following steps, the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` and :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` features **must** be enabled." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:39 msgid "To do so, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section, and enable the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` and :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` options. Then, :guilabel:`Save` the changes to finish." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:47 msgid "Create virtual parent location" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:49 msgid "Before creating any virtual stock locations, create a new warehouse that acts as a *virtual* warehouse — the *parent* location of other physical warehouses." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:54 msgid "Virtual warehouses are great for companies with multiple physical warehouses. This is because a situation might arise when one warehouse runs out of stock of a particular product, but another warehouse still has stock on-hand. In this case, stock from these two (or more) warehouses could be used to fulfill a single sales order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:59 msgid "The \"virtual\" warehouse acts as a single aggregator of all the inventory stored in a company's physical warehouses, and is used (for traceability purposes) to create a hierarchy of locations in Odoo." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:63 msgid "To create a new warehouse, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Warehouses`, and click :guilabel:`Create`. From here, the warehouse :guilabel:`Name` and :guilabel:`Short Name` can be changed, and other warehouse details can be changed under the :guilabel:`Warehouse Configuration` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:68 msgid "Lastly, click :guilabel:`Save` to finish creating a *regular* warehouse. Continue following the steps below to finish configuring the virtual parent warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:-1 msgid "New warehouse form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:76 msgid ":doc:`Warehouse configurations <../../warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses>`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:77 msgid ":ref:`Incoming and outgoing shipments `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:78 msgid ":doc:`../../warehouses_storage/replenishment/resupply_warehouses`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:83 msgid "Create child warehouses" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:85 msgid "Create at least two *child* warehouses to link to the virtual warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:88 msgid "In order to take stock from multiple warehouses to fulfill a sales order, there needs to be at least **two** warehouses acting as child locations of the virtual parent location warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:91 msgid "To do that, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Warehouses`, click :guilabel:`Create`, and follow the :ref:`preceding instructions ` to configure the physical stock locations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:0 msgid "**Parent Warehouse**" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Warehouse`: `Virtual Warehouse`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Location`: `VWH/Stock`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:0 msgid "**Child Warehouses**" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Warehouses`: `Warehouse A` and `Warehouse B`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Locations`: `WHA` and `WHB`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:0 msgid "Graphic of child locations 'WHA' and 'WHB' tied to the parent location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:110 msgid "While the virtual stock location will be changed to 'View' later, the :guilabel:`Location Type` **must** be :guilabel:`Internal Location` at this point to :ref:`link the child warehouses ` in the next section." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:117 msgid "Link child warehouses to virtual stock" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:119 msgid "To set physical warehouses as child locations of the virtual location configured in the :ref:`previous step `, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:123 msgid "Remove any filters from the search bar. Then, click the physical warehouse :guilabel:`Location` that was previously created to be a child location (e.g. `WHA`), and click :guilabel:`Edit`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:126 msgid "Change the :guilabel:`Parent Location` field from :guilabel:`Physical Locations` to the virtual warehouse's **stock location** (e.g. `VWH/Stock`) from the drop-down menu, and click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:131 msgid "To select the virtual warehouse's stock location in the :guilabel:`Parent Location` drop-down menu, the parent warehouse stock location (e.g. `VWH/Stock`) **must** have its :guilabel:`Location Type` set to :guilabel:`Internal Location`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:-1 msgid "Set the child warehouse's *Parent Location* to the virtual warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:139 msgid "Repeat the preceding steps to configure two or more child warehouses." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:141 msgid "Once complete, the virtual, parent warehouse (e.g. `VWH/Stock`) fulfills orders using stock from child warehouses (e.g. `WHA` and `WHB`), if there is insufficient stock in any one location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:145 msgid "Set virtual stock location as 'view'" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:147 msgid "Set the virtual stock location's :guilabel:`Location Type` to :guilabel:`View`, as it is a non-existent location used to group various physical warehouses together." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:150 msgid "To do that, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:152 msgid "Click the virtual warehouse's stock location (e.g. `VWH/Stock`) that was :ref:`previously created `, from the :guilabel:`Locations` list." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:155 msgid "On the location form, under the :guilabel:`Additional Information` heading, set the :guilabel:`Location Type` to :guilabel:`View`. :guilabel:`Save` the changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:-1 msgid "Warehouse location types in location creation screen." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:163 msgid "To view the total quantity across **all** linked child warehouses, go to the product form and click the :guilabel:`On Hand` smart button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:0 msgid "Display stock across all linked warehouses." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:171 msgid "Example: sell products from a virtual warehouse" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:173 msgid "To sell products from multiple warehouses using a virtual parent location, the database must have at least **two** warehouses configured — with at least **one** product, with quantity on-hand in each warehouse, respectively." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:178 msgid "The following product, `Toy soldier`, is available at each location with the quantities:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:180 msgid "`WHA/Stock` : 1" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:181 msgid "`WHB/Stock` : 2" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:182 msgid "Warehouses `WHA` and `WHB` are child warehouses of the virtual warehouse `VWH`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:184 msgid "Create a quotation for the product by navigating to the :menuselection:`Sales` app and clicking :guilabel:`Create`. On the quote, add a :guilabel:`Customer`, and click :guilabel:`Add a product` to add the two products stored in the two warehouses." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:188 msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Other Info` tab on the sales order form. Under the :guilabel:`Delivery` section, change the :guilabel:`Warehouse` field value to the virtual warehouse that was :ref:`previously created `. Next, :guilabel:`Confirm` the sales order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:-1 msgid "Set virtual warehouse as the *Warehouse* field in sales order's *Other Info* tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:196 msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button. From the warehouse delivery form, confirm that the :guilabel:`Source Location` value matches the :guilabel:`Warehouse` field value from the sales order. Both should list the virtual warehouse location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:200 msgid "Finally, on the warehouse delivery form, under the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` tab, confirm that the :guilabel:`Locations` in the :guilabel:`From` column for each product match the child locations that are tied to the virtual parent location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:-1 msgid "Delivery order with matching source and child locations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:209 msgid "The :guilabel:`Source Location` on the warehouse delivery form, and the :guilabel:`Warehouse` under the :guilabel:`Other Info` tab on the sales order, **must** match for products in the sales order to be pulled from different warehouses." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:213 msgid "If the virtual warehouse is not in the :guilabel:`Source Location` field on the warehouse delivery form, retry product reservation by:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:216 msgid "Running the scheduler: turn on :ref:`developer mode `, and then go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Run Scheduler`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:218 msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Check Availability` on the delivery order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:219 msgid "If the virtual warehouse is **not** assigned to the :guilabel:`Warehouse` field on the sales order, then cancel it, and create a new sales order with the virtual warehouse set in the :guilabel:`Warehouse` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:222 msgid "If the :guilabel:`Warehouse` field is missing on the sales order form, then the multiple child warehouses may not have been set up correctly. Review the :ref:`previous section ` to ensure the correct settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:227 msgid "To use a virtual *parent* location as the default warehouse for sales orders, each salesperson should have the virtual warehouse assigned to them from the drop-down menu next to :guilabel:`Default Warehouse` on their employee form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/stock_warehouses.rst:0 msgid "Default warehouse location on employee form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:3 msgid "Storage categories" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:5 msgid "A *storage category* is used with :doc:`putaway rules `, as an extra location attribute to automatically propose optimal storage locations for products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:8 msgid "Follow these steps to complete the setup:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:10 msgid ":ref:`Enable the Storage Category feature `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:11 msgid ":ref:`Define a storage category ` with specific limitations" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:12 msgid "Assign a :ref:`category to storage locations `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:13 msgid "Add the storage category as an attribute to a :ref:`putaway rule `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:17 msgid ":doc:`putaway`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:20 msgid "Assigning categories to storage locations tells Odoo these locations meet specific requirements, such as temperature or accessibility. Odoo then evaluates these locations, based on defined capacity, and recommends the best one on the warehouse transfer form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:28 msgid "To enable storage categories, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, in the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section, ensure the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` and :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` features are enabled." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:32 msgid "Next, activate the :guilabel:`Storage Categories` feature. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:-1 msgid "Show the Storage Categories feature." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:41 msgid "Define storage category" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:43 msgid "A storage category with specific limitations **must** be created first, before it is applied to locations, in order to decide the optimal storage location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:46 msgid "To create a storage category, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Storage Categories`, and click :guilabel:`Create`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:49 msgid "On the storage category form, type a name for the category in the :guilabel:`Storage Category` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:52 msgid "Options are available to limit capacity by weight, product, and package type." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:55 msgid "Weight limits can be combined with capacity by package or product (e.g. a maximum of one hundred products with a total weight of two hundred kilograms)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:58 msgid "While it is possible to limit capacity by product and package type at the same location, it may be more practical to store items in different amounts across various locations, as shown in this example of :ref:`capacity by package `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:62 msgid "The :guilabel:`Allow New Product` field defines when the location is considered available to store a product:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:65 msgid ":guilabel:`If location is empty`: a product can be added there only if the location is empty." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:66 msgid ":guilabel:`If products are the same`: a product can be added there only if the same product is already there." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:68 msgid ":guilabel:`Allow mixed products`: several different products can be stored in this location at the same time." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:72 msgid "When clicked, the :guilabel:`Location` smart button shows which storage locations the category has been assigned to." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:76 msgid "Capacity by weight" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:78 msgid "On a storage category form (:menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Storage Categories`), set a maximum product weight in the :guilabel:`Max Weight` field. This limit applies to each location assigned this storage category." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:83 msgid "Capacity by product" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:85 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Capacity by Product` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a Line` to input items, and enter their capacities in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:89 msgid "Ensure only a maximum of five `Large Cabinets` and two `Corner Desk Right Sit` are stored at a single storage location, by specifying those amounts in the :guilabel:`Capacity by Product` tab of a storage category form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:0 msgid "Show storage category limiting by product count." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:100 msgid "Capacity by package" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:102 msgid "For companies using :doc:`packages <../../product_management/configure/package>`, it becomes possible to ensure real-time storage capacity checks, based on package types (e.g., crates, bins, boxes, etc.)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:107 msgid "Enable the :guilabel:`Packages` feature in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings` to show the :guilabel:`Capacity by Package` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:111 msgid "Create putaway rules for pallet-stored items, by creating the `High Frequency pallets` storage category." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:114 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Capacity by Package` tab, specify the number of packages for the designated :guilabel:`Package Type`, and set a maximum of `2.00` `Pallets` for a specific location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:0 msgid "Create a storage category on the page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:124 msgid "Assign to location" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:126 msgid "Once the storage category is created, assign it to a location. Navigate to the location by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations`, and select the desired location. Then, select the created category in the :guilabel:`Storage Category` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:131 msgid "Assign the `High Frequency pallets` storage category (which limits pallets stored at any location to two pallets) to the `WH/Stock/pallets/PAL 1` sub-location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:0 msgid "When a Storage Category is created, it can be linked to a warehouse location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:141 msgid "Putaway rule" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:143 msgid "With the :ref:`storage category ` and :ref:`location ` set up, create the :doc:`putaway rule ` by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Putaway Rules`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:147 msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Create` button to create the putaway rule. In the :guilabel:`Having Category` field of the new putaway rule form, select the storage category." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:151 msgid "Continuing the example from above, the `High Frequency Pallets` storage category is assigned to the putaway rule directing pallets of lemonade to locations with the `High Frequency Pallets` storage category :ref:`assigned to them `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:0 msgid "Storage Categories used in a variety of putaway rules." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:160 msgid "Use case: limit capacity by package" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:162 msgid "To limit the capacity of a storage location by a specific number of packages, :ref:`create a storage category with a Capacity By Package `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:165 msgid "Continuing the example from above, the `High Frequency Pallets` storage category is assigned to the `PAL1` and `PAL2` locations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:168 msgid "Then, :ref:`putaway rules ` are set, so that any pallets received in the warehouse are directed to be stored in `PAL1` and `PAL2` locations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:171 msgid "Depending on the number of pallets on-hand at each of the storage locations, when one pallet of lemonade cans is received, the following scenarios happen:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:174 msgid "If `PAL1` and `PAL2` are empty, the pallet is redirected to `WH/Stock/Pallets/PAL1`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:175 msgid "If `PAL1` is full, the pallet is redirected to `WH/Stock/Pallets/PAL2`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category.rst:176 msgid "If `PAL1` and `PAL2` are full, the pallet is redirected to `WH/Stock/Pallets`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:5 msgid "Routes and push/pull rules" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:7 msgid "In inventory management, the supply chain strategy determines when products should be purchased/manufactured, delivered to distribution centers, and made available to the retail channel." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:11 msgid "In Odoo, a product's supply chain strategy can be configured using *Routes*, which feature *Pull and Push Rules*. Once everything is properly configured, the Inventory app can automatically generate transfers following the configured push/pull rules." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:16 msgid "Inside the warehouse" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:18 msgid "In a generic warehouse, there are receiving docks, a quality control area, storage locations, picking and packing areas, and shipping docks. All products go through all these locations. As the products move through the locations, each location triggers the products' specified route and rules." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "View of a generic warehouse with stock and quality control area." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:27 msgid "In this example, vendor trucks unload pallets of ordered products at the receiving docks. Operators then scan the products in the receiving area. Depending on the product's route and rules, some of these products are sent to a quality control area (for example, products that are components used in the manufacturing process), while others are directly stored in their respective locations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "View of a generic push to rule when receiving products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:36 msgid "Here is an example of a fulfillment route. In the morning, items are picked for all the orders that need to be prepared during the day. These items are picked from storage locations and moved to the picking area, close to where the orders are packed. Then, the orders are packed in their respective boxes, and conveyor belts bring them to the shipping docks, ready to be delivered to customers." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "View of a generic pull from rule when preparing deliveries." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:46 msgid "Pull rules" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:48 msgid "With *Pull Rules*, a demand for some products triggers procurements, while *Push Rules* are triggered by products arriving in a specific location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:51 msgid "Pull Rules are used to fulfill a sales order. Odoo generates a need at the *Customer Location* for each product in the order. Because pull rules are triggered by a need, Odoo looks for a pull rule defined on the *Customer Location*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:55 msgid "In this case, a \"delivery order\" pull rule that transfers products from the *Shipping Area* to the *Customer Location* is found, and a transfer between the two locations is created." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:58 msgid "Then, Odoo finds another pull rule that tries to fulfill the need for the *Shipping Area*: the \"packing\" rule that transfers products from the *Packing Area* to the *Shipping Area*. Finally, other pull rules are triggered until a transfer between the *Stock* and the *Picking Area* is created." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:64 msgid "All these product transfers are automatically generated by Odoo based on the pull rules, starting from the end (the customer location) and going backward (the stock warehouse). While working, the operator processes these transfers in the opposite order: first the picking, then the packing, and finally the delivery order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:70 msgid "Push rules" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:72 msgid "On the other hand, *Push Rules* are much easier to understand. Instead of generating documents based on needs, they are triggered in real time when products arrive in a specific location. Push rules basically say: \"when a product arrives at a specific location, move it to another location.\"" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:76 msgid "An example of a push rule would be: when a product arrives in the *Receipt Area*, move it to the *Storage Location*. As different push rules can be applied to different products, the user can assign different storage locations for different products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:80 msgid "Another push rule could be: when products arrive at a location, move them to the *Quality Control Area*. Then, once the quality check is done, move them to their *Storage Location*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:84 msgid "Push rules can only be triggered if there are no pull rules that have already generated the product transfers." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:88 msgid "Sets of push/pull rules like those are called *Routes*. The grouping on the rule decides if products are grouped in the same transfer or not. For example, during the picking operation, all orders and their products are grouped in one transfer, whereas the packing operation respects the grouping per customer order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:96 msgid "Use routes and rules" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:98 msgid "Since *Routes* are a collection of *Push and Pull Rules*, Odoo helps you manage advanced route configurations such as:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:101 msgid "Manage product manufacturing chains." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:102 msgid "Manage default locations per product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:103 msgid "Define routes within the stock warehouse according to business needs, such as quality control, after-sales services, or supplier returns." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:105 msgid "Help rental management by generating automated return moves for rented products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:107 msgid "To configure a route for a product, first, open the :guilabel:`Inventory` application and go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. Then, in the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section, enable the :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` feature and click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "Activate the Multi-Step Routes feature in Odoo Inventory." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:116 msgid "The :guilabel:`Storage Locations` feature is automatically activated with the :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` feature." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:119 msgid "Once this first step is completed, the user can use pre-configured routes that come with Odoo, or they can create custom routes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:123 msgid "Pre-configured routes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:125 msgid "To access Odoo's pre-configured routes, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouses`. Then, open a warehouse form. In the :guilabel:`Warehouse Configuration` tab, the user can view the warehouse's pre-configured routes for :guilabel:`Incoming Shipments` and :guilabel:`Outgoing Shipments`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "A pre-configured warehouse in Odoo Inventory." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:134 msgid "Some more advanced routes, such as pick-pack-ship, are also available. The user can select the route that best fits their business needs. Once the :guilabel:`Incoming Shipments` and :guilabel:`Outgoing Shipments` routes are set, head to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Routes` to see the specific routes that Odoo generated." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "View of all the preconfigured routes Odoo offers." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:143 msgid "On the :guilabel:`Routes` page, click on a route to open the route form. In the route form, the user can view which places the route is :guilabel:`Applicable On`. The user can also set the route to only apply on a specific :guilabel:`Company`. This is useful for multi-company environments; for example, a user can have a company and warehouse in Country A and a second company and warehouse in Country B." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "View of a route example applicable on product categories and warehouses." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:153 msgid "At the bottom of the route form, the user can view the specific :guilabel:`Rules` for the route. Each :guilabel:`Rule` has an :guilabel:`Action`, a :guilabel:`Source Location`, and a :guilabel:`Destination Location`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "An example of rules with push & pull actions in Odoo Inventory." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:162 msgid "Custom Routes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:164 msgid "To create a custom route, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Routes`, and click on :guilabel:`Create`. Next, choose the places where this route can be selected. A route can be applicable on a combination of places." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "View of a pick-pack-ship route." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:172 msgid "Each place has a different behavior, so it is important to tick only the useful ones and adapt each route accordingly. Then, configure the :guilabel:`Rules` of the route." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:175 msgid "If the route is applicable on a product category, the route still needs to be manually set on the product category form by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Product Categories`. Then, select the product category and open the form. Next, click :guilabel:`Edit` and under the :guilabel:`Logistics` section, set the :guilabel:`Routes`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:180 msgid "When applying the route on a product category, all the rules configured in the route are applied to **every** product in the category. This can be helpful if the business uses the dropshipping process for all the products from the same category." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "View of a route applied to the \"all\" product category." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:188 msgid "The same behavior applies to the warehouses. If the route can apply to :guilabel:`Warehouses`, all the transfers occurring inside the chosen warehouse that meet the conditions of the route's rules will then follow that route." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "View of the warehouse drop-down menu when selecting applicable on warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:196 msgid "If the route is applicable on :guilabel:`Sales Order Lines`, it is more or less the opposite. The route must be manually chosen when creating a quotation. This is useful if some products go through different routes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:200 msgid "Remember to toggle the visibility of the :guilabel:`Route` column on the quotation/sales order. Then, the route can be chosen on each line of the quotation/sales order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "View of the menu allowing to add new lines to sales orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:207 msgid "Finally, there are routes that can be applied to products. Those work more or less like the product categories: once selected, the route must be manually set on the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:210 msgid "To set a route on a product, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Products` and select the desired product. Then, go to the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab and under the :guilabel:`Operations` section, select the :guilabel:`Routes`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "View of a product form, where the route must be selected." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:219 msgid "Rules must be set on the route in order for the route to work." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:222 msgid "Rules" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:224 msgid "The rules are defined on the route form. First, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Routes` and open the desired route form. Next, click :guilabel:`Edit` and in the :guilabel:`Rules` section, click on :guilabel:`Add a line`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "View of the rules menu, where it is possible to add new rules." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:232 msgid "The available rules trigger various actions. If Odoo offers *Push* and *Pull* rules, others are also available. Each rule has an :guilabel:`Action`:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:235 msgid ":guilabel:`Pull From`: this rule is triggered by a need for the product in a specific location. The need can come from a sales order being validated or from a manufacturing order requiring a specific component. When the need appears in the destination location, Odoo generates a picking to fulfill this need." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:239 msgid ":guilabel:`Push To`: this rule is triggered by the arrival of some products in the defined source location. In the case of the user moving products to the source location, Odoo generates a picking to move those products to the destination location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:242 msgid ":guilabel:`Pull & Push`: this rule allows the generation of pickings in the two situations explained above. This means that when products are required at a specific location, a transfer is created from the previous location to fulfill that need. This creates a need in the previous location and a rule is triggered to fulfill it. Once the second need is fulfilled, the products are pushed to the destination location and all the needs are fulfilled." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:247 msgid ":guilabel:`Buy`: when products are needed at the destination location, a request for quotation is created to fulfill the need." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:249 msgid ":guilabel:`Manufacture`: when products are needed in the source location, a manufacturing order is created to fulfill the need." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "Overview of a \"Pull From\" rule that creates a transfer between the stock and the packing\n" "zone." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:257 msgid "The :guilabel:`Operation Type` must also be defined on the rule. This defines which kind of picking is created from the rule." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:260 msgid "If the rule's :guilabel:`Action` is set to :guilabel:`Pull From` or :guilabel:`Pull & Push`, a :guilabel:`Supply Method` must be set. The :guilabel:`Supply Method` defines what happens at the source location:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:264 msgid ":guilabel:`Take From Stock`: the products are taken from the available stock of the source location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:266 msgid ":guilabel:`Trigger Another Rule`: the system tries to find a stock rule to bring the products to the source location. The available stock is ignored." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:268 msgid ":guilabel:`Take From Stock, if Unavailable, Trigger Another Rule`: the products are taken from the available stock of the source location. If there is no stock available, the system tries to find a rule to bring the products to the source location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:273 msgid "Example flow" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:275 msgid "In this example, let's use a custom *Pick - Pack - Ship* route to try a full flow with an advanced custom route." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:278 msgid "First, a quick look at the route's rules and their supply methods. There are three rules, all :guilabel:`Pull From` rules. The :guilabel:`Supply Methods` for each rule are the following:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:281 msgid ":guilabel:`Take From Stock`: When products are needed in the :guilabel:`WH/Packing Zone`, *picks* (internal transfers from :guilabel:`WH/Stock` to :guilabel:`WH/Packing Zone`) are created from :guilabel:`WH/Stock` to fulfill the need." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:284 msgid ":guilabel:`Trigger Another Rule`: When products are needed in :guilabel:`WH/Output`, *packs* (internal transfers from :guilabel:`WH/Packing Zone` to :guilabel:`WH/Output`) are created from :guilabel:`WH/Packing Zone` to fulfill the need." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:287 msgid ":guilabel:`Trigger Another Rule`: When products are needed in :guilabel:`Partner Locations/Customers`, *delivery orders* are created from :guilabel:`WH/Output` to fulfill the need." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "Overview of all the transfers created by the pick - pack - ship route." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:295 msgid "This means that, when a customer orders products that have a *pick - pack - ship* route set on it, a delivery order is created to fulfill the order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "View of the operations created by a pull from transfer." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:303 msgid "If the source document for multiple tranfers is the same sales order, the status is not the same. The status will be :guilabel:`Waiting Another Operation` if the previous transfer in the list is not done yet." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "View of the transfers' various statuses at the beginning of the process." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:311 msgid "To prepare the delivery order, packed products are needed at the output area, so an internal transfer is requested from the packing zone." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "View of the detailed operations for a transfer between the packing and output zones." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:318 msgid "Obviously, the packing zone needs products ready to be packed. So, an internal transfer is requested to the stock and employees can gather the required products from the warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "View of the detailed operations for a transfer between the stock and packing zones." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:325 msgid "As explained in the introduction of the documentation, the last step in the process (for this route, the delivery order) is the first to be triggered, which then triggers other rules until we reach the first step in the process (here, the internal transfer from the stock to the packing area). Now, everything is ready to be processed so the customer can get the ordered items." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:330 msgid "In this example, the product is delivered to the customer when all the rules have been triggered and the transfers are done." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes.rst:-1 msgid "View of the transfers' statuses when the route is completed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods.rst:5 msgid "Picking methods" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:3 msgid "Batch picking" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:7 msgid "*Batch picking* enables a single picker to handle multiple orders at once, reducing the time needed to navigate to the same location in a warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:10 msgid "When picking in batches, orders are grouped and consolidated into a picking list. After the picking, the batch is taken to an output location, where the products are sorted into their respective delivery packages." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:15 msgid ":ref:`Use Barcode app for pickings `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:17 msgid "Since orders *must* be sorted at the output location after being picked, this picking method suits businesses with a few products that are ordered often. Storing high-demand items in easily accessible locations can increase the number of orders that are fulfilled efficiently." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:24 msgid "To activate the batch picking option, begin by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Operations` section, check the :guilabel:`Batch Transfers` box." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:-1 msgid "Enable the *Batch Transfers* in Inventory > Configuration > Settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:32 msgid "Since batch picking is a method to optimize the *pick* operation in Odoo, the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` and :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` options under the :guilabel:`Warehouse` heading must also be checked on this settings page. When finished, click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:-1 msgid "Enable *Storage Locations* and *Multi-Step Routes* Inventory > Configuration > Settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:40 msgid "Lastly, enable the warehouse picking feature, by navigating to the warehouse settings page, which is accessible from :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Warehouses`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:43 msgid "From here, select the desired warehouse from the list. Then, from the radio options available for :guilabel:`Outgoing Shipments`, select either the :guilabel:`Send goods in output and then deliver (2 steps)` or :guilabel:`Pack goods, send goods in output and then deliver (3 steps)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:48 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:128 msgid ":doc:`Delivery in two steps <../daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps>`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:49 msgid ":doc:`../daily_operations/delivery_three_steps`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:-1 msgid "Set up 2-step or 3-step outgoing shipments." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:56 msgid "Create batch transfers" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:58 msgid "Manually create batch transfers directly from the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Batch Transfers` page. Click the :guilabel:`New` button to begin creating a batch transfer." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:61 msgid "On the batch transfer form, fill the following fields out accordingly:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:63 msgid ":guilabel:`Responsible`: employee assigned to the picking. Leave this field blank if *any* worker can fulfill this picking." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:65 msgid ":guilabel:`Operation Type`: from the drop-down menu, select the operation type under which the picking is categorized." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:67 msgid ":guilabel:`Scheduled Date`: specifies the date by which the :guilabel:`Responsible` person should complete the transfer to the output location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:70 msgid "Next, in the :guilabel:`Transfers` list, click :guilabel:`Add a line` to open the :guilabel:`Add: Transfers` window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:73 msgid "If the :guilabel:`Operation Type` field was filled, the list will filter transfer records matching the selected :guilabel:`Operation Type`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:76 msgid "Click the :guilabel:`New` button to create a new transfer." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:78 msgid "Once the transfer records are selected, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the batch picking." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:81 msgid "A new batch transfer assigned to the :guilabel:`Responsible`, `Joel Willis`, for the `Pick` :guilabel:`Operation Type`. The :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` is set to `August 11`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:0 msgid "View of *Batch Transfers* form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:88 msgid "Clicking the :guilabel:`Add a line` button opens the :guilabel:`Add:Transfers` window, displaying only pickings. This is because the :guilabel:`Operation Type` was set to `Pick` on the batch transfer form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:92 msgid "Click the checkbox to the left of the transfers, `WH/PICK/00001` and `WH/PICK/00002`, to include them in the new transfer. Then, click the :guilabel:`Select` button to close the :guilabel:`Add:Transfers` window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:0 msgid "Select multiple transfers from the *Add:Transfers* window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:103 msgid "Add batch from transfers list" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:105 msgid "Another method of creating batch transfers is available using the :guilabel:`Add to batch` option in a list. Navigate to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations` drop-down menu, and select any of the :guilabel:`Transfers` to open a filtered list of transfers." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:-1 msgid "Show all transfer types in a drop-down menu: Receipts, Deliveries, Internal Transfers,\n" "Manufacturings, Batch Transfers, Dropships." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:114 msgid "On the transfers list, select the checkbox to the left of the selected transfers to add in a batch. Next, navigate to the :guilabel:`Actions ⚙️ (gear)` button, and click :guilabel:`Add to batch` from the resulting drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:0 msgid "Use *Add to batch* button, from the *Action* button's list." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:122 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:148 msgid "Doing so opens an :guilabel:`Add to batch` pop-up window, wherein the employee :guilabel:`Responsible` for the picking can be assigned." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:125 msgid "Choose from the two radio options to add to :guilabel:`an existing batch transfer` or create :guilabel:`a new batch transfer`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:128 msgid "To begin with a draft, select the :guilabel:`Draft` checkbox." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:130 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:157 msgid "Conclude the process by clicking :guilabel:`Confirm`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:-1 msgid "Show *Add to batch* window to create a batch transfer." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:137 msgid "Process batch transfer" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:139 msgid "Handle batch transfers in the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Batch Transfers` page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:142 msgid "From here, select the intended transfer from the list. Then, on the batch transfer form, input the :guilabel:`Done` quantities for each product, under the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` tab. Finally, select :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the picking." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:147 msgid "Be certain the batch transfer is complete when the :guilabel:`Validate` button is highlighted in purple. If the :guilabel:`Check Availability` button is highlighted instead, that means there are items in the batch that are currently *not* available in-stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:154 msgid "In a batch transfer involving products from pickings, `WH/PICK/00001` and `WH/PICK/00002`, the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` tab shows that the product, `Cabinet with Doors`, has been picked because the :guilabel:`Done` column matches the value in the :guilabel:`Reserved` column. However, `0.00` quantities have been picked for the other product, `Cable Management Box`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:0 msgid "Show batch transfer of products from two pickings in the *Detailed Operations* tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:163 msgid "Only in-stock products are visible in the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:165 msgid "To view the complete product list, switch to the :guilabel:`Operations` tab. On this list, the :guilabel:`Demand` column indicates the required quantity for the order. The :guilabel:`Reserved` column shows the available stock to fulfill the order. Lastly, the :guilabel:`Done` column specifies the products that have been picked, and are ready for the next step." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:171 msgid "The product, `Desk Pad`, from the same batch as the :ref:`example above `, is only visible in the :guilabel:`Operations` tab because there are no :guilabel:`Reserved` quantities in-stock to fulfill the batch picking." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:175 msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Check Availability` button to search the stock again for available products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:0 msgid "Show unavailable reserved quantities in the *Operations* tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:182 msgid "Create backorder" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:184 msgid "On the batch transfer form, if the :guilabel:`Done` quantity of the product is *less* than the :guilabel:`Reserved` quantity, a pop-up window appears." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:187 msgid "This pop-up window provides the option: :guilabel:`Create Backorder?`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:189 msgid "Clicking the :guilabel:`Create Backorder` button automatically creates a new batch transfer, containing the remaining products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:192 msgid "Click :guilabel:`No Backorder` to finish the picking *without* creating another batch picking." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:194 msgid "Click :guilabel:`Discard` to cancel the validation, and return to the batch transfer form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:-1 msgid "Show the *Create Backorder* pop-up." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:203 msgid "Process batch transfer: Barcode app" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:205 msgid "Created batch transfers are also listed in the :menuselection:`Barcode` app, accessible by selecting the :guilabel:`Batch Transfers` button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:208 msgid "By default, confirmed batch pickings appear on the :guilabel:`Batch Transfers` page. On that page, click on the desired batch transfer to open the detailed list of products for the picking." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:-1 msgid "Show list of to-do batch transfers in *Barcode* app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:215 msgid "For the chosen batch transfer, follow the instructions at the top of the page in the black background. Begin by scanning the product's barcode to record a single product for picking. To record multiple quantities, click the :guilabel:`✏️ (pencil)` icon, and enter the required quantities for the picking." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:221 msgid "Products from the same order are labeled with the same color on the left. Completed pickings are highlighted in green." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:225 msgid "In a batch transfer for 2 `Cabinet with Doors`, 3 `Acoustic Bloc Screens`, and 4 `Four Person Desks`, the `3/3` and `4/4` :guilabel:`Units` indicate that the last two product pickings are complete." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:229 msgid "`1/2` units of the `Cabinet with Doors` has already been picked, and after scanning the product barcode for the second cabinet, Odoo prompts the user to `Scan a serial number` to record the unique serial number for :ref:`product tracking `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:0 msgid "Display products to be picked in barcode view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/batch.rst:237 msgid "Once all the products have been picked, click on :guilabel:`Validate` to mark the batch transfer as :guilabel:`Done`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:3 msgid "Cluster picking" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:10 msgid "Cluster picking is an advanced order fulfillment approach derived from :ref:`batch picking `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:13 msgid "In this strategy, pickers load a cart with multiple packages, each designated for a specific *sales order* (SO). Then, the picker travels to each storage location, and places the products directly in the package of the associated order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:17 msgid "This method is most efficient for medium-sized companies, with high order volumes, and relatively few unique products, since the method eliminates the need for sorting products into packages for customers after picking." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:21 msgid "However, cluster picking does have some disadvantages. For instance, urgent orders cannot be prioritized, and optimized batches must be manually created beforehand. As a result, the picking process can lead to bottlenecks." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:28 msgid "|SO| 1 calls for one apple and orange" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:29 msgid "|SO| 2 calls for one apple and banana" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:30 msgid "|SO| 3 calls for one apple, orange, and banana" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:32 msgid "Apples are stored in Shelf A, oranges in Shelf B, and bananas in Shelf C." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:34 msgid "To pick products for three orders at once, the cart is loaded with three empty packages." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:36 msgid "Starting at Shelf A, the picker places apples into each package. Next, the picker navigates to Shelf B, and places oranges in the packages designated for |SO| 1 and |SO| 3. Finally, the picker pushes the cart to Shelf C, and loads packages for |SO| 2 and |SO| 3 with a banana, each." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:40 msgid "With the packages for all three |SOS| packed, the picker pushes the cart to the output location, where the packages are sealed and prepared for shipment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:0 msgid "Show example of fulfilling sales orders 2 and 3 at once." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:50 msgid "To enable cluster picking, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Operations` heading, activate the :guilabel:`Packages` and :guilabel:`Batch Transfers` options." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:-1 msgid "Activate *Packages* and *Batch Transfers* features in the settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:58 msgid "Since batch picking is used to optimize the *pick* operation in Odoo, the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` and :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` options, under the :guilabel:`Warehouse` heading, must also be checked on this settings page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:62 msgid "*Storage locations* allow products to be stored in specific locations they can be picked from, while *multi-step routes* enable the picking operation itself." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:65 msgid "When finished, click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:74 msgid "Packages setup" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:76 msgid "After the :guilabel:`Packages` feature is enabled, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Packages`, and click the :guilabel:`New` button to create a new package." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:79 msgid "On the new package form, the :guilabel:`Package Reference` is pre-filled with the next available `PACK` number in the system. :guilabel:`Pack Date` is automatically set to the creation date of the form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:83 msgid "Set the :guilabel:`Package Use` field to :guilabel:`Reusable Box`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:86 msgid ":doc:`Packages <../../product_management/configure/package>`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:89 msgid "A package intended for cluster picking is named `CLUSTER-PACK-3` for easy identification. For this workflow, the products are directly packed using their intended shipping boxes, so :guilabel:`Package Use` is set to :guilabel:`Disposable Box`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:0 msgid "Create new package form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:98 msgid "Create cluster batch" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:100 msgid "To see how cluster picking works in Odoo, navigate to the :menuselection:`Sales` app, and create |SOS| that will be fulfilled together in the same batch. After confirming an |SO|, the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button becomes visible. Displayed inside the icon is a number representing the amount of steps in the outgoing shipment process." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:106 msgid "Begin by creating three |SOS| for the apples, oranges, and bananas, as shown in the :ref:`example above `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:109 msgid "After confirming the |SO|, the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button displays the number `2`, indicating there are two operations to complete: `Pick` and `Delivery`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:0 msgid "Example sales order for an apple, orange, and banana." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:116 msgid "With the |SOS| created, orders now must be grouped into batches. To do so, navigate to the *Inventory* dashboard and select the operation type card, :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` or :guilabel:`Pick` (whichever is the first operation in the delivery flow)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:120 msgid "Doing so displays a filtered list of outgoing operations with the :guilabel:`Ready` status, indicating that all the products in the |SO| are in stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:124 msgid "Cluster pick batches can be created for outgoing shipments in one, two, or three steps." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:127 msgid ":doc:`Delivery in one step <../daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step>`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:129 msgid ":doc:`Delivery in three steps <../daily_operations/delivery_three_steps>`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:131 msgid "Click the checkbox to the left of the corresponding outgoing operation to add them to the batch. With the desired pickings selected, click the :guilabel:`⚙️ Actions (gear)` button, and select the :guilabel:`Add to batch` option from the resulting drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:136 msgid "To create a cluster batch, as shown in the :ref:`example above `, in a warehouse configured with two-step outgoing shipments, the following pick operations are selected:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:140 msgid "`WH/PICK/00007`: linked to |SO| 88 for one apple and orange." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:141 msgid "`WH/PICK/00008`: linked to |SO| 89 for one apple and banana." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:142 msgid "`WH/PICK/00009`: linked to |SO| 90 for one apple, orange, and banana." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:151 msgid "Choose from the two options in the :guilabel:`Add to` field to either: add to :guilabel:`an existing batch transfer`, or create :guilabel:`a new batch transfer`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:154 msgid "To create draft batch pickings to be confirmed at a later date, select the :guilabel:`Draft` checkbox." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:164 msgid "Process batches" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:166 msgid "To process batches, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Batch Transfers`. Click on a batch to select it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:169 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` tab, products that are to be picked are grouped by location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:171 msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Source Package` or :guilabel:`Destination Package` field, enter the package used for the picking." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:175 msgid "Use the :guilabel:`Source Package` field when the picking package is configured as *reusable* on the :ref:`package form `. This means the products are temporarily placed in a container during picking, before getting transferred to their final shipping box." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:179 msgid "Alternatively, use the :guilabel:`Destination Package` field when the product is directly placed in its *disposable* shipping box during picking." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:183 msgid "Process the cluster batch for the three orders of apples, oranges, and bananas :ref:`example ` by assigning each picking to a dedicated package." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:186 msgid "At the storage location for apples, `WH/Stock/Shelf A`, assign the apples in all three pickings to one of the three disposable packages, `CLUSTER-PACK-1`, `CLUSTER-PACK-2`, or `CLUSTER-PACK-3`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:189 msgid "Record this in Odoo using the :guilabel:`Destination Package` field in the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:0 msgid "Example of processing cluster pickings in *Inventory*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:197 msgid "In Barcode" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:199 msgid "To process cluster pickings directly from the *Barcode* app, select the :guilabel:`Batch Transfers` button from the *Barcode* dashboard. Then, select the desired batch." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:202 msgid "On the batch transfer screen, the products in the picking are grouped by location, and each line is color-coded to associate products in the same picking together." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:205 msgid "Then, follow the prompt to :guilabel:`Scan the source location` barcode for the storage location of the first product. Then, scan the barcode for the product and package to process the transfer." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:208 msgid "Repeat this for all products, and click the :guilabel:`Validate` button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:211 msgid "To find the package barcode, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Packages`, select the desired package, click the :guilabel:`⚙️ (gear)` icon at the top of the package form, and select the :guilabel:`Print` option." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:215 msgid "Next, select one of the three print options to generate the package barcode from the :guilabel:`Package Reference` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:0 msgid "Display where the package barcode can be generated." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:223 msgid "Begin processing the cluster picking by going to the first storage location, `Shelf A`, and scanning the :ref:`location barcode `. Doing so highlights all the pickings that need products from this particular location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:227 msgid "Scan the barcode for the apple, which highlights the picking (labeled in red) for the product `Apple`, for the picking, `WH/PICK/00007`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:230 msgid "Then, scan the `CLUSTER-PACK-1` package barcode, and place the product in the designated package." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:0 msgid "Example of cluster batch from the *Barcode* app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/cluster.rst:237 msgid "After creating a batch transfer and assigning a package to a picking, Odoo suggests the specified package by displaying the name *in italics* under the product name, ensuring pickers place products into the correct boxes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:3 msgid "Process wave transfers" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:5 msgid "While a batch transfer is a group of several pickings, a **wave transfer** only contains some parts of different pickings. Both methods are used to pick orders in a warehouse, and depending on the situation, one method may be a better fit than the other." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:9 msgid "To handle orders of a specific product category, or fetch products that are at the same location, wave transfers are the ideal method." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:12 msgid "In Odoo, wave transfers are actually batch transfers with an extra step: transfers are split before being grouped in a batch." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:18 msgid "Before a wave transfer can be created, the :guilabel:`Batch Transfers` and :guilabel:`Wave Transfers` options must be activated." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:21 msgid "First, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. In the :guilabel:`Operations` section, enable :guilabel:`Batch Transfers` and :guilabel:`Wave Transfers`. Then, click :guilabel:`Save` to apply the settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:-1 msgid "View of Odoo Inventory app settings to enable the wave transfers option." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:30 msgid "Add products to a wave" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:32 msgid "Now that the settings are activated, start a wave transfer by adding products to a wave." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:34 msgid "Wave transfers can only contain product lines from transfers of the same operation type. To view all the transfers and product lines in a specific operation, first go to the :guilabel:`Inventory` dashboard and locate the desired operation type's card. Then, open the options menu (the three dots icon in the corner of the operation type's card) and click :guilabel:`Operations`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:-1 msgid "How to get an operation type's list of operations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:43 msgid "On the operations page, select the product lines you want to add in a new or existing wave. Then, click :guilabel:`Add to Wave`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:-1 msgid "Select lines to add to the wave." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:51 msgid "Use the :guilabel:`Filters` in the search bar to group lines with the same product, location, carrier, etc..." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:54 msgid "After that, a pop-up box appears." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:56 msgid "To add the selected lines to an existing wave transfer, select the :guilabel:`an existing wave transfer` option and select the existing wave transfer from the drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:59 msgid "To create a new wave transfer, select the :guilabel:`a new wave transfer` option. If creating a new wave transfer, an employee can also be set in the optional :guilabel:`Responsible` field. Once the desired options are selected, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to add the product lines to a wave." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:64 msgid "View wave transfers" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/picking_methods/wave.rst:66 msgid "To view all wave transfers and their statuses, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Wave Transfers`. Wave transfers can also be viewed in the :guilabel:`Barcode` app by going to :menuselection:`Barcode --> Batch Transfers`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:3 msgid "Removal strategies" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:5 msgid "For companies with warehouses, **removal strategies** determine which products are taken from the warehouse, and when. Removal strategies are typically defined for specific picking operations. This helps companies to select the best products, optimize the distance workers need to travel when picking items for orders, and account for quality control, such as moving products with expiration dates." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:11 msgid "Usually, *Removal Strategies* are defined in picking operations to select the best products to optimize the distance for the worker, for quality control purposes, or to first move the products with the closest expiration date." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:15 msgid "When a product needs to be moved, Odoo finds available products that can be assigned to the transfer. The way Odoo assigns these products depends on the :guilabel:`Removal Strategy` defined in either the :guilabel:`Product Category` or the :guilabel:`Location` dashboards." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:19 msgid "To change the :guilabel:`Removal Strategy`, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations` or :menuselection:`Product Categories`. Click on a :guilabel:`Location` or :guilabel:`Product Category`, and then click :guilabel:`Edit`. Change the product category :guilabel:`Force Removal Strategy` or the location :guilabel:`Removal Strategy` by clicking on the drop-down menu and selecting the desired removal strategy. After selecting the new removal strategy, click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid "Change the Force Removal Strategy for either the Product Categories or Locations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:31 msgid "What happens inside the warehouse?" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:33 msgid "Most warehouses share the same important areas: receiving docks and sorting areas, storage locations, picking and packing areas, and shipping/loading docks. While all products entering or leaving the warehouse might go through each of these locations at some point, removal strategies can have an effect on which products are taken, from where, and when." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:38 msgid "In this example below, vendor trucks unload pallets of goods at the receiving docks. Then, operators scan the products in the receiving area, with the reception date and expiration date. After that, products are stored in their respective storage locations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:43 msgid "Not all products have expiration dates, but in this example, expiration dates apply." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid "Products entering stock via the receiving area." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:49 msgid "In Odoo, receive products by navigating to the :menuselection:`Inventory` application, and in the kanban view, click on either the :guilabel:`Receipts` heading or :guilabel:`# TO PROCESS` button. On the :guilabel:`Receipts` dashboard, find and click on the individual receipt which will open the warehouse intake form. Click :guilabel:`Edit`, and then enter the received quantity in the :guilabel:`Done` column. To finish, :guilabel:`Validate` to receive the products and register them in the Odoo database." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:57 msgid "Receiving products can also be done within the Odoo *Barcode* application. If using the *Barcode* app, scan the product(s), update the quantity, and finally, click :guilabel:`Validate`. After products are received in Odoo, the products can then be moved to their respective storage locations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:62 msgid "Continuing with the same example, below, imagine several sales orders are made for the products received earlier, that use expiration dates. In this example, the products weren't received on the same day, and they don't have the same expiration date. In this situation, logically, sending products with the closest expiration date is preferred, instead of products received first or last. Using the chosen removal strategy configured for those products (in this example, :ref:`FEFO `), Odoo generates a transfer for the products with the soonest expiration date to the picking area, then the packing area, and finally, to the shipping docks for delivery to the customer." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid "Products being packed at the packing area for delivery, taking the expiration dates into\n" "account." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:77 msgid "To pick for delivery, the product's lot/serial number can be found on the transfer form. To learn more about picking and shipping, refer to either the :doc:`Two-step delivery <../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps>` or :doc:`Three-step delivery <../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps>` documentation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:83 msgid "How each removal strategy works" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:85 msgid "Removal strategies determine which products are taken from the warehouse when orders are confirmed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:88 msgid "First In, First Out (FIFO)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:90 msgid "When using a :guilabel:`First In, First Out (FIFO)` strategy, demand for a product triggers a removal rule, which requests a transfer for the lot/serial number that entered the stock first (and therefore, has been in stock for the longest time)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:94 msgid "For example, imagine there are three lots of nails in the warehouse, and have the corresponding lot numbers: `00001`, `00002`, `00003`. Each lot has five boxes of nails in it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:97 msgid "Lot `00001` entered the stock on May 23, lot `00002` on May 25, and lot `00003` on June 1. A customer orders six boxes on June 11." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:100 msgid "Using the :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)` removal strategy, a transfer request will pick the five boxes from lot `00001` first, and then from the boxes in lot `00002`, since lot `00001` entered the stock first. The box from lot `00002` is taken next because it has the oldest receipt date after lot `00001`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid "The detailed operations for the transfer shows the nail lots to be removed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:110 msgid "Last In, First Out (LIFO)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:112 msgid "Similar to the :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)` method, the :guilabel:`Last In, First Out (LIFO)` removal strategy moves products based on the date they entered a warehouse's stock. Instead of removing the oldest stock on-hand, however, it targets the **newest** stock on-hand for removal." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:116 msgid "Every time an order for products with the :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` method is placed, a transfer is created for the lot/serial number that has most recently entered the stock (the **last** lot/serial number that entered the warehouse's inventory)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:121 msgid "In many countries, the :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` removal strategy in banned, since it can potentially result in old, expired, or obsolete products being delivered to customers." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:124 msgid "For example, imagine there are three lots of boxes of screws in the warehouse, and have the corresponding lot numbers: `10001`, `10002`, and `10003`, each with 10 boxes of screws per lot." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:127 msgid "Lot `10001` entered the stock on June 1, lot `10002` on June 3, and lot `10003` on June 6. A customer orders seven boxes on June 8." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:130 msgid "Using the :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` removal strategy, a transfer is requested for seven boxes of screws from lot `10003` because that lot is the last one to have entered the stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid "The detailed operations shows which lots are being selected for the picking." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:138 msgid "First Expired, First Out (FEFO)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:140 msgid "While the :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)` and :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` methods target products for removal based on date of entry into the warehouse, the :guilabel:`First Expired, First Out (FEFO)` method targets products for removal based on their assigned expiration dates." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:144 msgid "Using the :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` removal strategy, every sales order that includes products with this removal strategy assigned ensures that transfers are requested for products with the expiration date soonest to the order date." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:148 msgid "As an example, imagine there are three lots of six-egg boxes. Those three lots have the following lot numbers: `20001`, `20002`, and `20003`, each with five boxes in it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:151 msgid "Lot `20001` entered the stock on July 1 and expires on July 15, lot `20002` entered on July 2 and expires on July 14, and lot `20003` entered on July 3 and expires on July 21. A customer orders six boxes on July 5." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:155 msgid "Using the :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` method, a transfer is requested for the five boxes from lot `20002` and one from lot `20001`. All the boxes in lot `20002` are transferred because they have the earliest expiration date. The transfer also requests one box from lot `20001` because it has the next closest expiration date after lot `20002`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid "The detailed operations for the transfer shows the lots to be removed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:165 msgid "Using removal strategies" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:167 msgid "To differentiate some units of products from others, the units need to be tracked, either by :guilabel:`Lot` or by :guilabel:`Serial Number`. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, activate the :guilabel:`Storage Locations`, :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes`, and :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` settings. Click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid ":alt: Traceability settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid ":alt: Warehouse settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:181 msgid "To use the :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` removal strategy, the :guilabel:`Expiration Dates` setting needs to be activated as well. To enable this, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Traceability` section, and click the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Expiration Dates`. Remember to click :guilabel:`Save` to save all changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:187 msgid "Now, specific removal strategies can be defined on product categories. To do this, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Product Categories`, and choose a product category to define the removal strategy on. In the :guilabel:`Force Removal Strategy` field, choose a removal strategy." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:192 msgid "The *First Expired, First Out* (FEFO) strategy is a bit different from the other two removal strategies. For :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)`, the expiration date is important, not the date the product entered the stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:196 msgid "For example, imagine there are three lots of six-egg boxes (in this specific case, don't forget to use :doc:`units of measure <../product_management/configure/uom>`). Those three lots have the following numbers: :guilabel:`20001`, :guilabel:`20002`, and :guilabel:`20003`, each with five boxes in it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:201 msgid ":guilabel:`20001` entered the stock on the 1st of July and expires on the 15th of July, :guilabel:`20002` entered on the 2nd and expires on the 14th of July, and :guilabel:`20003` entered on the 4th and expires on the 21st of July. A customer orders six boxes on the 5th of July. With the :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` strategy selected, a transfer is requested for the five boxes of :guilabel:`20002` and one from :guilabel:`20001`. The transfer for all the boxes in lot :guilabel:`20002` is because they have the closest expiration date. The transfer also requests one box from :guilabel:`20001` because has the next closest expiration date after lot :guilabel:`20002`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:210 msgid "Basically, for every sales order of a product with the :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` strategy, a transfer is requested for the product that has the nearest expiration date from the order date." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:215 msgid "Closest Location" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:217 msgid "The *Closest Location* strategy is completely different from the other removal strategies. It is not related to the date of entry in the warehouse, but rather the location of the product. It is commonly used for products that do not deteriorate with time." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:221 msgid "The aim is to avoid making the warehouse worker take a long journey to the bottom of the stock when the product is also located at a near location. This method is only available if the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` setting is on. The closest location is actually the one that comes first in the alphabetic order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:227 msgid "Use removal strategies" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:229 msgid "To differentiate some units from others, the units need to be tracked, either by *lot* or by *serial number*. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, activate the :guilabel:`Storage Location`, :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes`, and :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid "Removal strategy on a product category." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:238 msgid "To view all products with lots/serial numbers assigned to them, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`. This reveals a page with drop-down menus of all products assigned lots or serial numbers, filtered by *product* by default. To change the category these products are filtered by, click :guilabel:`Product` (in the search bar, in the top right of the page) to remove the default filter, and select a new filter if desired." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid "Click on Products, then Lots/Serial Numbers to display all the products with lots or serial\n" "numbers." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:249 msgid "To view the serial numbers being selected for a sales order, go to the :guilabel:`Sales app` and select the sales order in question. In the sales order, click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button in the top right. In the :guilabel:`Operations` tab, click the :guilabel:`⦙≣ (Detailed Operations)` icon in the far right for the product in question. The :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` window appears, and displays the lot or serial numbers selected for that specific product for the delivery order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:257 msgid "FIFO (First In, First Out)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:259 msgid "The :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)` removal strategy implies that products which enter a warehouse's stock first are removed first. Companies should use this method if they are selling products with short demand cycles, such as clothes, to ensure they are not stuck with outdated styles in stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:264 msgid "In this example, there are three lots of white shirts. The shirts are from the *All/Clothes* category, where *FIFO* is set as the removal strategy. In the :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation Report`, the three different receipts are listed with the amounts." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid "View of the lots of white shirts in the inventory valuation report." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:272 msgid "Lot `000001` contains five shirts, lot `000002` contains three shirts, and lot `000003` contains two shirts." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:275 msgid "To see the removal strategy in action, go to the :menuselection:`Sales app` and click :guilabel:`Create` to create a sales order. Next, select a :guilabel:`Customer` from the drop-down menu. Then click :guilabel:`Add a product` in the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab. Select a product (for this example, the :guilabel:`White Shirt`) from the drop-down menu, or type in the name of the product in the field. Enter a quantity (for this example, `6.00`) in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field, then click :guilabel:`Save`, then click :guilabel:`Confirm`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:282 msgid "Once the sales order is confirmed, the delivery order will be created and linked to the picking, and the oldest lot numbers will be reserved thanks to the :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)` strategy. All five shirts from lot `000001` and one shirt from lot `000002` will be selected to be sent to the customer." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid "Two lots being reserved for a sales order with the FIFO strategy." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:292 msgid "LIFO (Last In, First Out)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:294 msgid "The :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` removal strategy works in the **opposite** manner from the :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)` strategy. With this method, the products that are received **last** are moved out first. This method is mostly used for products without a shelf life, and no time-sensitive factors, such as expiration dates." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:299 msgid "In this example, there are three lots of cinder blocks. The blocks are from the *All/Building Materials* category, where *FIFO* is set as the removal strategy. In the :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation Report`, the three different receipts are listed with the amounts." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid "View of the lots of cinder blocks in the inventory valuation report." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:307 msgid "Lot `000020` contains three cinder blocks, lot `000030` contains five cinder blocks, and lot `0000400` contains four cinder blocks." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:310 msgid "To see how the :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` strategy works, first navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Product Categories`, and select a product category (for this example, the :guilabel:`All/Building Materials` category) to edit. This reveals a product category form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:315 msgid "Once on the product category form, under the :guilabel:`Logistics` section, change the :guilabel:`Force Removal Strategy` to :guilabel:`Last In First Out (LIFO)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid "Last in first out (LIFO) strategy set up as forced removal strategy." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:322 msgid "To see the removal strategy in action, go to the :menuselection:`Sales app` and click :guilabel:`Create` to create a sales order. Next, select a :guilabel:`Customer` from the drop-down menu. Then click :guilabel:`Add a product` in the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab. Select a product (for this example, the :guilabel:`Cinder Block`) from the drop-down menu, or type in the name of the product in the field. Enter a quantity (for this example, `5.00`) in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field, then click :guilabel:`Save`, then click :guilabel:`Confirm`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:329 msgid "Once the sales order is confirmed, the delivery order will be created and linked to the picking, and the newest lot numbers will be reserved thanks to the :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` strategy. All four cinder blocks from lot `0000400` and one cinder block from lot `000030` will be selected to be sent to the customer." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid "Two lots being reserved for sale with the LIFO strategy." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:341 msgid "FEFO (First Expired, First Out)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:343 msgid "The :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` removal strategy differs from the :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)` and :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` strategies, because it targets products for removal based on **expiration dates** instead of their warehouse receipt dates. With this method, the products that are going to expire first are moved out first. This method is used for perishable products, such as medicine, food, and beauty products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:349 msgid "Lots are picked based on their **removal date** from earliest to latest. Removal dates indicate how many days *before* the expiration date the product needs to be removed from stock. The removal date is set on the product form. Lots without a removal date defined are picked after lots with removal dates." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:355 msgid "If products are not removed from stock when they should be, lots that are past the expiration date may still be picked for delivery orders!" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:359 msgid ":doc:`../product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:361 msgid "First, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings` and ensure :guilabel:`Expiration Dates` is enabled. Once the :guilabel:`Expiration Dates` setting is enabled, it's possible to define different expiration dates for individual serialized products, as well as for lot numbers containing many products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:366 msgid "In this example, there are three lots of hand cream. The creams are from the *All/Health & Beauty* category, where *FEFO* is set as the removal strategy. In the :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation Report`, the three different receipts are listed with the amounts." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:370 msgid "Lot `0000001` contains twenty tubes of hand cream, expiring on Sept 30, lot `0000002` contains ten tubes of hand cream, expiring on November 30, and lot `0000003` contains ten tubes of hand cream, expiring on October 31." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid "View the hand cream lot numbers and expiration dates in the inventory report." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:378 msgid "Expiration dates can be entered when validating the received products, or set on products by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`. Click :guilabel:`Create`, enter the serial number, and select the product from the drop-down menu. Next, select the expiration date in the :guilabel:`Dates` tab. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid "View of the removal date for 0000001." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:387 msgid "To see how the :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` strategy works, first navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Product Categories`, and select a product category (in this example, the :guilabel:`All/Health & Beauty` category) to edit. This reveals a product category form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:392 msgid "Once on the product category form, under the :guilabel:`Logistics` section, change the :guilabel:`Force Removal Strategy` to :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid "FEFO forced removal strategy set on the product category." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:399 msgid "Next, go to the :menuselection:`Sales app` and click :guilabel:`Create` to create a sales order. Next, select a :guilabel:`Customer` from the drop-down menu. Then click :guilabel:`Add a product` in the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab. Select a product (for this example, the :guilabel:`Hand Cream`) from the drop-down menu, or type in the name of the product in the field. Enter a quantity (in this example, `25.00`) in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field, then click :guilabel:`Save`, then click :guilabel:`Confirm`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:406 msgid "Once the sales order is confirmed, the delivery order will be created and linked to the picking, and the lot numbers expiring first will be reserved thanks to the :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` strategy. All twenty tubes of hand cream from lot `0000001` and five from lot `0000003` will be selected to be sent to the customer, detailed in the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` tab in the sales order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/removal_strategies.rst:-1 msgid "Hand cream lot numbers selected for the sales order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:6 msgid "Delivery methods" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:8 msgid "When activated in Odoo, the *Delivery Methods* setting adds the option of calculating the cost of shipping on sales orders and e-commerce shopping carts." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:11 msgid "When integrated with a :ref:`third-party carrier `, shipping prices are calculated based on the carrier's pricing and packaging information." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:15 msgid ":ref:`Third-party shipping carrier setup `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:16 msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Delivery Prices `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:22 msgid "To calculate shipping on sales orders and e-commerce, the *Delivery Costs* module must be installed. To do so, navigate to the :menuselection:`Apps` application from the main Odoo dashboard." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:25 msgid "Then, remove the :guilabel:`Apps` filter, and type in `Delivery Costs` in the :guilabel:`Search...` bar. After finding the :guilabel:`Delivery Costs` module, click :guilabel:`Activate` to install it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:-1 msgid "Install the Delivery Costs module." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:33 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:28 msgid "Add shipping method" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:35 msgid "To configure delivery methods, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Shipping Methods`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:39 msgid "If the :guilabel:`Shipping Methods` option is not available from the :guilabel:`Configuration` drop-down menu, verify whether the feature is enabled by following these steps:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:42 msgid "Go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:43 msgid "Scroll to the :guilabel:`Shipping` section and enable the :guilabel:`Delivery Methods` feature by checking the corresponding checkbox." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:0 msgid "Enable the *Delivery Methods* feature by checking the box in Configuration > Settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:50 msgid "On the :guilabel:`Shipping Methods` page, add a method by clicking :guilabel:`New`. Doing so opens a form to provide details about the shipping provider, including:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:53 msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Method` (*Required field*): the name of the delivery method (e.g. `flat-rate shipping`, `same day delivery`, etc.)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:55 msgid ":guilabel:`Provider` (*Required field*): choose the delivery service, like Fedex, if using a :ref:`third-party carrier `. Ensure the integration with the shipping carrier is properly installed and select the provider from the drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:59 msgid "For more details on configuring custom shipping methods, such as :ref:`fixed price `, :ref:`based on rules `, or :ref:`pickup in store ` options, refer to their respective sections below." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:62 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:46 msgid ":guilabel:`Website`: configure shipping methods for an e-commerce page. Select the applicable website from the drop-down menu, or leave it blank to apply the method to all web pages." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:64 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:43 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:127 msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: if the shipping method should apply to a specific company, select it from the drop-down menu. Leave the field blank to apply the method to all companies." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:69 msgid ":guilabel:`Delivery Product` (*Required field*): the product listed on the :ref:`sales order line ` as the delivery charge." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:71 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:51 msgid ":guilabel:`Free if order amount is above`: checking this box enables free shipping if the customer spends above the specified amount." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:74 msgid "For examples on how to configure specific shipping methods, refer to the sections below." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:79 msgid "Fixed price" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:81 msgid "To configure a shipping price that is the same for all orders, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Shipping Methods`. Then, click :guilabel:`New`, and on the shipping method form, set the :guilabel:`Provider` to the :guilabel:`Fixed Price` option. Selecting this option makes the :guilabel:`Fixed Price` field become available, which is where the fixed rate shipping amount is defined." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:87 msgid "To enable free shipping if the amount of the order exceeds a specified amount, check the box :guilabel:`Free if order amount is above` and fill in the amount." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:91 msgid "To set up `$20` flat-rate shipping that becomes free if the customer spends over `$100`, fill in the following fields:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:94 msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Method`: `Flat-rate shipping`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:95 msgid ":guilabel:`Provider`: :guilabel:`Fixed Price`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:96 msgid ":guilabel:`Fixed Price`: `$20.00`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:97 msgid ":guilabel:`Free if order amount is above`: `$100.00`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:98 msgid ":guilabel:`Delivery Product`: `[SHIP] Flat`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:0 msgid "Example of filling out a shipping method." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:107 msgid "Based on rules" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:109 msgid "To calculate the price of shipping based on pricing rules, set the :guilabel:`Provider` field to the :guilabel:`Based on Rules` option. Optionally, adjust :guilabel:`Margin on Rate` and :guilabel:`Additional margin` to include additional shipping costs." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:114 msgid "Create pricing rules" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:116 msgid "Navigate to the :guilabel:`Pricing` tab and click :guilabel:`Add a line`. Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Create Pricing Rules` window, where the :guilabel:`Condition` related to the product weight, volume, price, or quantity is compared to a defined amount to calculate the :guilabel:`Delivery Cost`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:121 msgid "Once finished, click either :guilabel:`Save & New` to add another rule, or :guilabel:`Save & Close`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:124 msgid "To charge customers $20 in shipping for orders with five or fewer products, set the :guilabel:`Condition` to `Quantity <= 5.00`, and the :guilabel:`Delivery Cost` to `$20`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:0 msgid "Display window to add a pricing rule. Set a condition and delivery cost." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:131 msgid "To restrict shipping to specific destinations on the eCommerce website, in the shipping method form, navigate to the :guilabel:`Destination Availability` tab and define the :guilabel:`Countries`, :guilabel:`States`, and :guilabel:`Zip Prefixes`. Leave these fields empty if all locations apply." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:136 msgid "Calculate delivery cost" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:138 msgid "Shipping cost is the :guilabel:`Delivery cost` specified in the rule that satisfies the :guilabel:`Condition`, plus any extra charges from the :guilabel:`Margin on rate` and :guilabel:`Additional margin`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:142 msgid "Total = Rule's~Delivery~Cost + (Margin~on~rate \\times Rule's~Delivery~Cost) + Additional~margin\n" "\n" "" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:146 msgid "With the two following rules set up:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:148 msgid "If the order contains five or fewer products, shipping is $20" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:149 msgid "If the order contains more than five products, shipping is $50." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:151 msgid ":guilabel:`Margin on Rate` is `10%` and :guilabel:`Additional margin` is `$9.00`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:-1 msgid "Show example of \"Based on rules\" shipping method with margins configured." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:157 msgid "When the first rule is applied, the delivery cost is $31 (20 + (0.1 * 20) + 9). When the second rule is applied, the delivery cost is $64 (50 + (0.1 * 50) + 9)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:163 msgid "Pickup in store" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:165 msgid "To configure in-store pickup, select :guilabel:`Pickup in store` in the :guilabel:`Provider` field and specify the pickup location in :guilabel:`Warehouse`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:168 msgid "To invoice the customer for the shipping cost to the pickup location, choose the :guilabel:`Get Rate and Create Shipment` option in the :guilabel:`Integration Level` field. Then, pick either the :guilabel:`Estimated cost` or :guilabel:`Real cost` radio options in the :guilabel:`Invoicing Policy` field to decide whether the added shipping charge on the sales order is the precise cost from the shipping carrier." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:175 msgid ":doc:`Invoice cost of shipping `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:180 msgid "Add shipping" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:182 msgid "Shipping methods can be added to sales orders in the form of delivery products, which appear as individual line items. First, navigate to the desired sales order by going to :menuselection:`Sales app --> Orders --> Orders`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:186 msgid "On the sales order, click the :guilabel:`Add shipping` button, which opens the :guilabel:`Add a shipping method` pop-up window. Then, choose a :guilabel:`Shipping Method` from the list." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:189 msgid "The :guilabel:`Total Order Weight` is pre-filled based on product weights (that are defined in the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab for each product form). Edit the field to specify the exact weight, and then click :guilabel:`Add` to add the shipping method." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:194 msgid "The amount defined in :guilabel:`Total Order Weight` overwrites the total product weights defined on the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:197 msgid "The shipping cost is added to the *sales order line* as the :guilabel:`Delivery Product` detailed on the shipping method form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:201 msgid "`Furniture Delivery`, a delivery product with a fixed rate of `$200`, is added to sales order `S00088`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:0 msgid "Show delivery order on the sales order line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:209 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:259 msgid "Delivery order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:211 msgid "The shipping method added to the sales order is linked to the shipping carrier details on the delivery order. To add or change the delivery method on the delivery itself, go to the :guilabel:`Additional Info` tab and modify the :guilabel:`Carrier` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:-1 msgid "Shipping carrier information on the delivery form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:3 msgid "Bpost integration" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:5 msgid "Set up the *Bpost* shipping connector in Odoo to manage Bpost shipments to clients directly within Odoo. To configure it, complete these steps:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:8 msgid "Create a Bpost account." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:9 msgid "Get the :ref:`Account ID and passphrase `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:10 msgid ":ref:`Set up the shipping method in Odoo `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:12 msgid "Upon completion, it is possible to calculate the cost of shipping, based on package size and weight, have the charges applied directly to a Bpost business account, and automatically print Bpost tracking labels through Odoo." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:17 msgid ":doc:`third_party_shipper`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:18 msgid ":doc:`../setup_configuration`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:19 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:19 msgid ":doc:`dhl_credentials`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:20 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:21 msgid ":doc:`ups_credentials`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:23 msgid "Account setup" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:25 msgid "To begin, go to the `Bpost website `_ to create, or log into, the company's Bpost business account. When creating the Bpost account, have the company's VAT number and mobile phone number ready." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:29 msgid "Follow the website's steps to complete registration, and sign up for shipping services. Doing so submits a request to enter a contractual business relationship between the company and Bpost." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:33 msgid "Odoo **cannot** be integrated with `non-business Bpost `_ accounts." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:35 msgid "After completing the setup, get the Bpost account ID and passphrase, by navigating to the :guilabel:`Shipping Manager` menu item." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:40 msgid "On the :guilabel:`Shipping Manager` page, go to the :guilabel:`Admin` tab, then the :guilabel:`General Settings` tab, to find the :guilabel:`Account ID` and :guilabel:`Passphrase` needed to configure Odoo's shipping method." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:-1 msgid "In the *Admin* tab, show the Account ID and Passphrase." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:50 msgid "Shipping method configuration" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:52 msgid "With those necessary credentials, configure the Bpost shipping method in Odoo by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Shipping Methods`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:55 msgid "On the :guilabel:`Shipping Methods` page, click :guilabel:`Create`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:57 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Provider` field, select :guilabel:`Bpost` from the drop-down menu. Doing so reveals the :guilabel:`Bpost Configuration` tab at the bottom of the form, where the Bpost credentials can be entered." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:61 msgid "For details on configuring the other fields on the shipping method, such as :guilabel:`Delivery Product`, refer to the :doc:`Configure third-party carrier ` documentation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:65 msgid "To generate Bpost :doc:`shipping labels ` through Odoo, ensure the :guilabel:`Integration Level` option is set to :guilabel:`Get Rate and Create Shipment`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:68 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Bpost Configuration` tab, complete the following fields:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:70 msgid ":guilabel:`Bpost Account Number` (required field): enter the company's unique :ref:`account ID ` from the Bpost website." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:72 msgid ":guilabel:`Passphrase` (required field): enter the :ref:`passphrase ` from the Bpost website." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:74 msgid ":guilabel:`Bpost Delivery Nature`: select either :guilabel:`Domestic` or :guilabel:`International` shipping services. Choosing :guilabel:`Domestic` shows the :guilabel:`Options` section, while :guilabel:`International` enables the :guilabel:`Bpost Shipment Type` and :guilabel:`Bpost Parcel Return Instructions` fields." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:78 msgid ":guilabel:`Bpost Package Type`: select the type of shipping service from the drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:80 msgid "For `domestic delivery `_, the options are: :guilabel:`bpack 24h Pro`, :guilabel:`bpack 24h business`, or :guilabel:`bpack Bus`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:83 msgid "For `international delivery `_, the options are: :guilabel:`bpack World Express Pro`, :guilabel:`bpack World Business`, or :guilabel:`bpack Europe Business`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:85 msgid ":guilabel:`Bpost Shipment Type` (required field): for international deliveries, declare the type of goods in the package as :guilabel:`SAMPLE`, :guilabel:`GIFT`, :guilabel:`GOODS`, :guilabel:`DOCUMENTS`, or :guilabel:`OTHER`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:88 msgid ":guilabel:`Bpost Parcel Return Address`: return address when an international shipment fails to deliver. Select from the drop-down menu: :guilabel:`Destroy`, :guilabel:`Return to sender by air`, or :guilabel:`Return to sender by road`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:91 msgid ":guilabel:`Label Type`: choose :guilabel:`A6` or :guilabel:`A4` label sizes from the drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:93 msgid ":guilabel:`Label Format`: choose :guilabel:`PDF` or :guilabel:`PNG` from the drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:95 msgid "For domestic deliveries, these features are available in the :guilabel:`Options` section:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:97 msgid "Enable the :guilabel:`Delivery on Saturday` feature to include Saturdays as possible delivery dates. Depending on the :guilabel:`Bpost Package Type` selected, this option might incur additional costs to the company." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:100 msgid "Enable the :guilabel:`Generate Return Label` feature to automatically print a return label upon validating the delivery order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/bpost.rst:-1 msgid "Show Bpost shipping method." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/cancel.rst:3 msgid "How to cancel a shipping request to a shipper?" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/cancel.rst:6 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:6 msgid "Overview" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/cancel.rst:8 msgid "Odoo can handle various delivery methods, including third party shippers. Odoo will be linked with the transportation company tracking system." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/cancel.rst:12 msgid "It will allow you to manage the transport company, the real prices and the destination." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/cancel.rst:15 msgid "You can easily cancel the request made to the carrier system." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/cancel.rst:18 msgid "How to cancel a shipping request?" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/cancel.rst:20 msgid "If the delivery order is not **Validated**, then the request hasn't been made. You can choose to cancel the delivery or to change the carrier." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/cancel.rst:24 msgid "If you have clicked on **Validate**, the request has been made and you should have received the tracking number and the label. You can still cancel the request. Simply click on the **Cancel** button next to the **Carrier Tracking Ref**:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/cancel.rst:32 msgid "You will now see that the shipment has been cancelled." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/cancel.rst:37 msgid "You can now change the carrier if you wish." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/cancel.rst:40 msgid "How to send a shipping request after cancelling one?" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/cancel.rst:42 msgid "After cancelling the shipping request, you can change the carrier you want to use. Confirm it by clicking on the **Send to shipper** button. You will get a new tracking number and a new label." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/cancel.rst:50 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:122 msgid ":doc:`invoicing`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/cancel.rst:51 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:123 msgid ":doc:`multipack`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/dhl_credentials.rst:3 msgid "How to get DHL credentials for integration with Odoo?" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/dhl_credentials.rst:5 msgid "In order to use the Odoo DHL API, you will need:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/dhl_credentials.rst:7 msgid "A DHL.com SiteID" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/dhl_credentials.rst:9 msgid "A DHL Password" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/dhl_credentials.rst:11 msgid "A DHL Account Number" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/dhl_credentials.rst:15 msgid "Getting SiteID and password for countries other than United States (UK and Rest of the world)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/dhl_credentials.rst:17 msgid "You should contact DHL account manager and request integration for XML Express API. The presales should provide you live credentials." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/dhl_credentials.rst:20 msgid "Getting SiteID and Password for United States" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/dhl_credentials.rst:22 msgid "You need to write to xmlrequests@dhl.com along with your full Account details like account number, region, address, etc. to get API Access." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:3 msgid "Shipping cost invoicing" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:5 msgid "Invoicing customers for shipping after delivery ensures accurate charges based on real-time shipping factors like distance, weight, and method." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:8 msgid "In Odoo, shipping costs can be invoiced in two ways:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:10 msgid "Agree with the customer on a fixed cost and :ref:`include it in the sale order. `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:13 msgid ":ref:`Invoice shipping costs to the customer post-delivery `, reflecting the actual expenses incurred by the business." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:19 msgid "To set prices to delivery methods, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Shipping` section, enable the :guilabel:`Delivery Methods` feature. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:-1 msgid "Enable the \"Delivery Methods\" feature in Settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:30 msgid "Next, configure the the price of each delivery method by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Shipping Methods` and click the :guilabel:`Create` button. Doing so opens a form to provide details about the shipping provider, including:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:34 msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Method` (*required*) the name of the delivery method (e.g. `flat-rate shipping`, `same day delivery`, etc.)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:36 msgid ":guilabel:`Provider` (*required*): choose the delivery service, like FedEx, if using a third-party carrier Ensure the integration with the shipping carrier is properly installed and select the provider from the drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:41 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:122 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:23 msgid ":doc:`../setup_configuration/third_party_shipper`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:49 msgid ":guilabel:`Delivery Product` (*required*): the product listed on the :ref:`sales order line ` as the delivery charge." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:57 msgid "Invoice cost on sales order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:59 msgid "To invoice shipping costs on the sales order, before the item is delivered, go to the :menuselection:`Sales app` and select the desired sales order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:62 msgid "On the sales order, click the :guilabel:`Add Shipping` button at the bottom-right corner." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:-1 msgid "Click \"Add Shipping\" button at the bottom right, near the total." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:68 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Add a shipping method` pop-up window, choose the intended carrier in the :guilabel:`Shipping Method` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:71 msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Get Rate` button to the calculate shipping price based on real-time shipping data Odoo's shipping carrier integration." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:74 msgid "The :guilabel:`Cost` is automatically calculated using the weight of the items in the order. Finally, click the :guilabel:`Add` button to close the window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:-1 msgid "Calculate shipping by selecting a shipping method." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:83 msgid "On the sales order, the delivery product appears in the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab, with the :guilabel:`Unit Price` set as the shipping cost calculated in the :guilabel:`Add a shipping method` pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:-1 msgid "Show delivery product on the sales order line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:91 msgid "Finally, after the product is delivered, click the :guilabel:`Create invoice` button, and an invoice is created that includes the shipping cost that was added earlier." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:-1 msgid "Show \"Create Invoice\" button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:98 msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Create and View Invoice` button, and a draft invoice is generated, with the shipping cost included in the :guilabel:`Invoice Lines` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:-1 msgid "Show delivery product in the invoice line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:108 msgid "Invoice real shipping costs" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:110 msgid "To modify the invoice to reflect the real cost of shipping, follow the steps :ref:`above ` to create an invoice with a delivery product with a :guilabel:`Unit Price` of zero." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:114 msgid "Then, on a draft invoice, modify the :guilabel:`Unit Price` to reflect the real shipping cost. Finally, invoice the customer the adjusted shipping cost by clicking :guilabel:`Confirm`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:-1 msgid "Show delivery product on the invoice line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/invoicing.rst:123 msgid ":doc:`../setup_configuration/labels`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:3 msgid "Change shipping label size" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:8 msgid "In Odoo, there are a variety of different types of shipping labels that can be selected for delivery orders. Depending on the types of shipping packages used, different label sizes may be more appropriate, and can be configured to fit the package." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:15 msgid "In the :menuselection:`Inventory` module, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Delivery --> Shipping Methods.` Click on a delivery method to choose it. For the following example, *FedEx International* will be used." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:-1 msgid "Different shipping methods." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:23 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Configuration` tab, under :guilabel:`Label Type`, choose one of the label types available. The availability varies depending on the carrier." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:-1 msgid "Select a label type." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:30 msgid "When a sales order with the corresponding shipping company is confirmed and a delivery order is validated, the shipping label will be automatically created as a PDF and appear in the :guilabel:`Chatter`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:37 msgid "In the :menuselection:`Sales` application, click :guilabel:`Create` and select an international customer. Click :guilabel:`Add A Product` and select an item. Click :guilabel:`Add Shipping`, select a shipping method, then click :guilabel:`Get Rate`, and finally, click :guilabel:`Add`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:-1 msgid "Add a shipping method and rate to a sales order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:45 msgid "Once the quotation is confirmed by clicking :guilabel:`Confirm`, a :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button will appear." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:-1 msgid "Delivery order smart button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:52 msgid "Once the delivery order is validated by clicking :guilabel:`Validate` in the delivery order, the shipping documents appear in the :guilabel:`Chatter`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:-1 msgid "Shipping PDF documents." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:60 msgid "Example labels" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:62 msgid "The default :guilabel:`Label Type` is :guilabel:`Paper Letter`. An example of a FedEx letter sized label is:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:-1 msgid "Full page letter size FedEx shipping label." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:69 msgid "For comparison, an example of a FedEx bottom-half label is:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/label_type.rst:-1 msgid "Half page letter size FedEx shipping label." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:3 msgid "Print shipping labels" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:7 msgid "Integrate Odoo with :doc:`third-party shipping carriers <../setup_configuration/third_party_shipper>` to automatically generate shipping labels that includes prices, destination addresses, tracking numbers, and barcodes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:14 msgid "To generate labels for a third-party shipping carrier, first :doc:`install the third-party shipping connector <../setup_configuration/third_party_shipper>`. Then, configure and activate the :ref:`delivery method `, being sure to set the :guilabel:`Integration Level` to :guilabel:`Get Rate and Create Shipment` to generate shipping labels. Finally, provide the company's :ref:`source address ` and :ref:`product weights `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:-1 msgid "Set the \"Get Rate and Create Shipment\" option." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:30 msgid "Print tracking labels" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:32 msgid "Tracking labels are generated after the delivery order (DO) is validated." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:34 msgid "When both the *Sales* and *Inventory* apps are installed, begin on the :menuselection:`Sales app`, and proceed to the desired quotation to :ref:`add the shipping cost `, confirm the sales order, and validate the |DO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:38 msgid "If only the *Inventory* app is installed, create :abbr:`DOs (Delivery Orders)` directly in the :menuselection:`Inventory` app , :ref:`add the third-party carrier ` in the :guilabel:`Carrier` field, and validate the |DO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:46 msgid "Add shipping on quotation" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:48 msgid "To generate a tracking label for an order, begin by creating a quotation in :menuselection:`Sales app --> Orders --> Quotations`, clicking :guilabel:`New`, and filling out the quotation form. Then, click the :guilabel:`Add Shipping` button in the bottom-right corner of the quotation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:-1 msgid "Show the \"Add Shipping\" button on the quotation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:56 msgid "In the resulting pop-up window, select the intended carrier from the :guilabel:`Shipping Method` drop-down menu. Clicking :guilabel:`Get Rate` displays the shipping cost for the customer, via the third-party carrier in the :guilabel:`Cost` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:61 msgid "If clicking :guilabel:`Get Rate` results in an error, ensure the :ref:`warehouse's address ` and :ref:`weight of products in the order ` are properly configured." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:65 msgid "Click :guilabel:`Add` to add the cost to the quotation, which is listed as the :ref:`configured delivery product `. Finally, click :guilabel:`Confirm` on the quotation, and click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button to access the |DO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:-1 msgid "Show \"Get rate\" pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:75 msgid "For users who do not have the *Sales* app installed, the shipping carrier is specified in a delivery order's :guilabel:`Carrier` field of the :guilabel:`Additional Info` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:0 msgid "Show the \"Additional Info\" tab of a delivery order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:85 msgid "Validate delivery order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:87 msgid "On a delivery order form, navigate to the :guilabel:`Additional Info` tab to ensure the third-party shipping carrier has been added to the :guilabel:`Carrier` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:91 msgid "If the *Sales* app is not installed, the third-party carrier is set in the :guilabel:`Carrier` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:94 msgid "After the items in the order have been packed, click :guilabel:`Validate` to get the shipping carrier's tracking number, and generate the shipping label." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:98 msgid "Create or select an existing delivery order by going to the :menuselection:`Inventory` app, and selecting the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` card." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:101 msgid "The :guilabel:`Tracking Reference` number is generated in the :guilabel:`Additional Info` tab of the delivery order. Click the :guilabel:`Tracking` smart button to access the tracking link from the shipping carrier's website." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:105 msgid "The tracking label is found in PDF format in the chatter." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:-1 msgid "Show generated shipping label in the chatter." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:112 msgid "For multi-package shipping, one label is generated per package. Each label appears in the chatter." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:119 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/labels.rst:119 msgid "Sample label generated from Odoo's shipping connector with FedEx." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:3 msgid "Multi-package shipments" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:5 msgid "In some cases, a delivery order with multiple items may need to be shipped in more than one package. This may be necessary if the items are too large to ship in a single package, or if certain items cannot be packaged together. Shipping a single delivery order in multiple packages provides flexibility for how each item is packaged, without the need to create multiple delivery orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:13 msgid "In order to split a delivery order across multiple packages, the *Packages* setting must be enabled. To do so, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`, then enable the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Packages`. Click :guilabel:`Save` to confirm the change." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:-1 msgid "The Packages setting on the Inventory app settings page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:24 msgid "Ship items in multiple packages" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:26 msgid "To split items in the same delivery order across multiple packages, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Delivery Orders`, then select a delivery order that has multiple items, a multiple quantity of the same item, or both." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:30 msgid "On the :guilabel:`Operations` tab, select the :guilabel:`⁞≣ (menu)` icon in the line of the product that will be shipped in the first package." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:-1 msgid "The menu icon for a product in a delivery order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:37 msgid "This makes a :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` pop-up window appear. In the table at the bottom of the pop-up window, the :guilabel:`Reserved` column shows the total quantity of the product included in the delivery order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:41 msgid "If the full quantity will be shipped in the first package, enter the number from the :guilabel:`Done` column in the :guilabel:`Reserved` column. If less than the full quantity will be shipped in the first package, enter a smaller number than the one that appears in the :guilabel:`Reserved` column. Click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the :guilabel:`Done` quantities and close the pop-up." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:-1 msgid "The Detailed Operations pop-up for a product in a delivery order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:51 msgid "Repeat the same steps for every item quantity that is included in the first package. Then, click :guilabel:`Put In Pack` to create a package with all of the selected items." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:-1 msgid "The Put In Pack button on a delivery order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:58 msgid "For the next package, follow the same steps as detailed above, marking the quantity of each item to be included in the package as :guilabel:`Done` before clicking :guilabel:`Put In Pack` on the delivery order. Continue doing so until the full quantity of all items are added to a package." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:62 msgid "Finally, after all of the packages have been shipped, click :guilabel:`Validate` to confirm that the delivery order has been completed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:66 msgid "After one or more packages are created, a :guilabel:`Packages` smart button appears in the top-right corner of the delivery order. Click the :guilabel:`Packages` smart button to go to the :guilabel:`Packages` page for the delivery order, where each package can be selected to view all of the items included in it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:0 msgid "The Packages smart button on a delivery order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:76 msgid "Create a backorder for items to be shipped later" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:78 msgid "If some items will be shipped at a later date than others, there is no need to put them in a package until they are ready to be shipped. Instead, create a backorder for the items being shipped later." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:81 msgid "Begin by shipping the items that will be shipped immediately. If they will be shipped in multiple packages, follow the :ref:`steps above ` to package them as required. If they will be shipped in a single package, simply mark in the :guilabel:`Done` column the quantity of each item being shipped, but **do not** click the :guilabel:`Put In Pack` button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:86 msgid "After all quantities being shipped immediately are marked as :guilabel:`Done`, click the :guilabel:`Validate` button, and a :guilabel:`Create Backorder?` pop-up window appears. Then, click the :guilabel:`Create Backorder` button. Doing so confirms the items being shipped immediately and creates a new delivery order for the items that will be shipped later." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:-1 msgid "The Create Backorder? pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:95 msgid "The backorder delivery order will be listed in the chatter of the original delivery order in a message that reads :guilabel:`The backorder WH/OUT/XXXXX has been created.`. Click on :guilabel:`WH/OUT/XXXXX` in the message to view the backorder delivery order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:-1 msgid "The backorder delivery order listed in the chatter of the original delivery order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:103 msgid "The backorder delivery order can also be accessed by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory`, clicking the :guilabel:`# Back Orders` button on the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` card, and selecting the delivery order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:-1 msgid "The Back Orders button on the Delivery Orders card." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:111 msgid "Once the remaining items are ready to be shipped, navigate to the backorder delivery order. The items can be shipped in a single package by clicking :guilabel:`Validate` and selecting :guilabel:`Apply` on the :guilabel:`Immediate Transfer?` pop-up window that appears, or shipped in multiple packages by following the steps detailed in the section above." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/multipack.rst:116 msgid "It is also possible to ship out some of the items while creating another backorder for the rest. To do so, simply follow the same steps used to create the first backorder." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:3 msgid "Sendcloud integration" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:5 msgid "Sendcloud is a shipping service aggregator that facilitates the integration of European shipping carriers with Odoo. Once integrated, users can select shipping carriers on inventory operations in their Odoo database." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:10 msgid "`Sendcloud integration documentation `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:14 msgid "Setup in Sendcloud" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:17 msgid "Create an account and activate carriers" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:19 msgid "To get started, go to `Sendcloud's platform `_ to configure the account and generate the connector credentials. Log in with the Sendcloud account, or create a new one if needed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:24 msgid "For new account creation, Sendcloud will ask for a :abbr:`VAT (Value-Added Tax Identification)` number or :abbr:`EORI (Economic Operators' Registration and Identification)` number. After completing the account setup, activate (or deactivate) the shipping carriers that will be used in the Odoo database." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:30 msgid "Odoo integration of Sendcloud works on free Sendcloud plans *only* if a bank account is linked, since Sendcloud won't ship for free. To use shipping rules, or individual custom carrier contacts, a paid plan of Sendcloud is **required**." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:37 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:179 msgid "Warehouse configuration" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:39 msgid "Once logged into the Sendcloud account, navigate to :menuselection:`Settings --> Shipping --> Addresses`, and fill in the field for :guilabel:`Warehouse address`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:-1 msgid "Adding addresses in the Sendcloud settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:46 msgid "To allow Sendcloud to process returns as well, a :guilabel:`Return Address` is required. Under the :guilabel:`Miscellaneous section`, there is a field called :guilabel:`Address Name (optional)`. The Odoo warehouse name should be entered here, and the characters should be exactly the same." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid "**SendClould configuration**" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Miscellaneous`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Address Name (optional)`: `Warehouse #1`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Brand`: `Default`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid "**Odoo warehouse configuration**" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Warehouse`: `Warehouse #1`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Short Name`: `WH`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: `My company (San Francisco)`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Address`: `My Company (San Francisco)`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:63 msgid "Notice how the inputs for the :guilabel:`Warehouse` field, for both the Odoo configuration and the Sendcloud configuration, are the exact same." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:67 msgid "Generate Sendcloud credentials" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:69 msgid "In the Sendcloud account, navigate to :menuselection:`Settings --> Integrations` in the menu on the right. Next, search for :guilabel:`Odoo Native`. Then, click on :guilabel:`Connect`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:72 msgid "After clicking on :guilabel:`Connect`, the page redirects to the :guilabel:`Sendcloud API` settings page, where the :guilabel:`Public and Secret Keys` are produced. The next step is to name the :guilabel:`Integration`. The naming convention is as follows: `Odoo CompanyName`, with the user's company name replacing `CompanyName` (e.g. `Odoo StealthyWood`)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:77 msgid "Then, check the box next to :guilabel:`Service Points` and select the shipping services for this integration. After saving, the :guilabel:`Public and Secret Keys` are generated." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:-1 msgid "Configuring the Sendcloud integration and receiving the credentials." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:85 msgid "Setup in Odoo" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:87 msgid "To ensure seamless Sendcloud integration with Odoo, :ref:`install ` and :ref:`link ` the Sendcloud shipping connector to the Sendcloud account. Then, :ref:`configure Odoo fields `, so Sendcloud can accurately pull shipping data to generate labels." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:97 msgid "Install Sendcloud shipping module" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:99 msgid "After the Sendcloud account is set up and configured, it's time to configure the Odoo database. To get started, go to Odoo's :guilabel:`Apps` module, search for the `Sendcloud Shipping` integration, and install it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:-1 msgid "Sendcloud Shipping module in the Odoo Apps module." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:110 msgid "Sendcloud shipping connector configuration" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:112 msgid "Once installed, activate the :guilabel:`Sendcloud Shipping` module in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. The :guilabel:`Sendcloud Connector` setting is found under the :guilabel:`Shipping Connectors` section." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:116 msgid "After activating the :guilabel:`Sendcloud Connector`, click on the :guilabel:`Sendcloud Shipping Methods` link below the listed connector. Once on the :guilabel:`Shipping Methods` page, click :guilabel:`Create`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:121 msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Methods` can also be accessed by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Delivery --> Shipping Methods`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:124 msgid "Fill out the following fields in the :guilabel:`New Shipping Method` form:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:126 msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Method`: type `Sendcloud DPD`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:127 msgid ":guilabel:`Provider`: select :guilabel:`Sendcloud` from the drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:128 msgid ":guilabel:`Delivery Product`: set the product that was configured for this shipping method or create a new product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:130 msgid "In the :guilabel:`SendCloud Configuration` tab, enter the :guilabel:`Sendcloud Public Key`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:131 msgid "In the :guilabel:`SendCloud Configuration` tab, enter the :guilabel:`Sendcloud Secret Key`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:132 msgid "Manually :guilabel:`Save` the form by clicking the cloud icon next to the :guilabel:`Shipping Methods / New` breadcrumbs." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:135 msgid "After configuring and saving the form, follow these steps to load the shipping products:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:137 msgid "In the :guilabel:`SendCloud Configuration` tab of the :guilabel:`New Shipping Method` form, click on the :guilabel:`Load your SendCloud shipping products` link." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:139 msgid "Select the shipping products the company would like to use for deliveries and returns." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:140 msgid "Click :guilabel:`Select`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:143 msgid "Sample Sendcloud shipping products configured in Odoo:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`DELIVERY`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Product`: `DPD Home 0-31.5kg`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Carrier`: `DPD`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Minimum Weight`: `0.00`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Maximum Weight`: `31.50`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:151 msgid ":guilabel:`Countries`: `Austria` `Belgium` `Bosnia` `Herzegovina` `Bulgaria` `Croatia` `Czech` `Republic` `Denmark` `Estonia` `Finland` `France` `Germany` `Greece` `Hungary` `Iceland` `Ireland` `Italy` `Latvia` `Liechtenstein` `Lithuania` `Luxembourg` `Monaco` `Netherlands` `Norway` `Poland` `Portugal` `Romania` `Serbia` `Slovakia` `Slovenia` `Spain` `Sweden` `Switzerland`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`RETURN`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Return Shipping Product`: `DPD Return 0-20kg`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Return Carrier`: `DPD`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Return Minimum Weight`: `0.00`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Return Maximum Weight`: `20.00`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0 msgid ":guilabel:`Return Countries`: `Belgium` `Netherlands`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:-1 msgid "Example of shipping products configured in Odoo." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:169 msgid "Sendcloud does not provide test keys when a company tests the sending of a package in Odoo. This means if a package is created, the configured Sendcloud account will be charged, unless the associated package is canceled within 24 hours of creation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:173 msgid "Odoo has a built-in layer of protection against unwanted charges when using test environments. Within a test environment, if a shipping method is used to create labels, then those labels are immediately canceled after the creation — this occurs automatically. The test and production environment settings can be toggled back and forth from their respective smart buttons." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:181 msgid "Shipping information" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:183 msgid "To use Sendcloud to generate shipping labels, the following information **must** be filled out accurately and completely in Odoo:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:186 msgid "**Customer information**: when creating a quotation, ensure the selected :guilabel:`Customer` has a valid phone number, email address, and shipping address." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:189 msgid "To verify, select the :guilabel:`Customer` field to open their contact page. Here, add their shipping address in the :guilabel:`Contact` field, along with their :guilabel:`Mobile` number and :guilabel:`Email` address." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:193 msgid "**Product weight**: ensure all products in an order have a specified :guilabel:`Weight` in the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab of their product form. Refer to the :ref:`Product weight section ` of this article for detailed instructions." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:197 msgid "**Warehouse address**: ensure the warehouse name and address in Odoo match the :ref:`previously defined warehouse ` in the Sendcloud setup. For details on warehouse configuration in Odoo, refer to the :ref:`warehouse configuration section ` of the third-party shipping documentation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:204 msgid "Generate labels with Sendcloud" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:206 msgid "When creating a quotation in Odoo, add shipping and a :guilabel:`Sendcloud shipping product`. Then, :guilabel:`Validate` the delivery. Shipping label documents are automatically generated in the chatter, which include the following:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:210 msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping label(s)` depending on the number of packages." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:211 msgid ":guilabel:`Return label(s)` if the Sendcloud connector is configured for returns." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:212 msgid ":guilabel:`Customs document(s)` should the destination country require them." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:214 msgid "Additionally, the tracking number is now available." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:217 msgid "When return labels are created, Sendcloud automatically charges the configured Sendcloud account." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:221 msgid "Shipping rules" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:223 msgid "Optionally, create shipping rules to automatically generate shipping labels tailored to different product needs. For example, a shipping rule can be created for customers shipping expensive jewelry items to purchase insurance." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:228 msgid "Shipping rules do **not** affect :ref:`shipping rate calculations `, and are only used to improve the process of :doc:`generating shipping labels `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:232 msgid "To use shipping rules, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Delivery: Shipping Methods`, and select the intended `Sendcloud` shipping method." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:235 msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Sendcloud Configuration` tab, in the :guilabel:`OPTIONS` section, choose the kind of shipments the shipping rules apply to, via the :guilabel:`Use Sendcloud shipping rules` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:239 msgid "From here, choose either: :guilabel:`Shipping` to customers, :guilabel:`Returns` from customers, or :guilabel:`Both`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:-1 msgid "Use Shipping Rules field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:246 msgid "Then, in the Sendcloud website, navigate to :menuselection:`Settings --> Shipping rules`. Create a new shipping rule by clicking :guilabel:`Create New`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:249 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Actions` section, set a :guilabel:`Condition` to determine when the rule applies. Then, configure what to do when packages meet the condition." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:253 msgid "`Create shipping rules on Sendcloud `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:257 msgid "FAQ" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:260 msgid "Shipment is too heavy" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:262 msgid "If the shipment is too heavy for the Sendcloud service that is configured, then the weight is split to simulate multiple packages. Products will need to be put in different :guilabel:`Packages` to :guilabel:`Validate` the transfer and generate labels." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:266 msgid ":guilabel:`Rules` can also be set up in Sendcloud to use other shipping methods when the weight is too heavy. However, note that these rules will not apply to the shipping price calculation on the calculation on the sales order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:271 msgid "Personal carrier contract" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:273 msgid "Use custom prices from a direct carrier contract, via CSV upload, by first logging into Sendcloud, navigating to :menuselection:`Settings --> Carriers --> My contracts`, and then selecting the intended contract." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:-1 msgid "Navigate to the contracts section in Sendcloud." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:281 msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Contract prices` section, click :guilabel:`Download CSV` and fill out the contract prices in the :guilabel:`price` column of the CSV file template." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:285 msgid "Ensure the CSV file includes the correct prices to avoid any inaccuracies." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:-1 msgid "Show sample contract CSV from Sendcloud, highlighting the price column." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:291 msgid ":guilabel:`Upload` the completed CSV file to Sendcloud, then click :guilabel:`Save these prices`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:294 msgid "`Sendcloud: How to upload contract prices with carriers `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:298 msgid "Measuring volumetric weight" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:300 msgid "Many carriers have several measures for weight. There is the actual weight of the products in the parcel, and there is the *volumetric weight* (:dfn:`Volumetric weight is the volume that a package occupies when in transit. In other words it is the physical size of a package`)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:305 msgid "Check to see if selected carrier(s) already have defined formulas to compute the volumetric weight." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:309 msgid "`Sendcloud: How to calculate & automate parcel volumetric weight `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:313 msgid "Unable to calculate shipping rate" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:315 msgid "First, verify that the product being shipped has a weight that is supported by the selected shipping method. If this is set, then verify that the destination country (from the customer address) is supported by the carrier. The country of origin (warehouse address) should also be supported by the carrier." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:3 msgid "Third-party shipping carriers" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:10 msgid "Users can link third-party shipping carriers to Odoo databases, in order to verify carriers' delivery to specific addresses, :doc:`automatically calculate shipping costs <../setup_configuration>`, and :doc:`generate shipping labels `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:14 msgid "In Odoo, shipping carriers can be applied to a sales order (SO), invoice, or delivery order. For tips on resolving common issues when configuring shipping connectors, skip to the :ref:`Troubleshooting ` section." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:20 msgid ":doc:`sendcloud_shipping`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:23 msgid "The following is a list of available shipping connectors in Odoo:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:29 msgid "Carrier" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:30 msgid "Region availability" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:31 msgid "FedEx" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:32 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:34 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:36 msgid "All" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:33 msgid ":doc:`DHL Express `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:35 msgid ":doc:`UPS `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:37 msgid "US Postal Service" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:38 msgid "United States of America" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:39 msgid ":doc:`Sendcloud `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:40 msgid "Some European countries (see details below)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:41 msgid ":doc:`Bpost `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:42 msgid "Belgium" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:43 msgid "Easypost" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:44 msgid "North America" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:45 msgid "Shiprocket" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:46 msgid "India" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:49 msgid "Other services from DHL are **not** supported." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:51 msgid "Sendcloud currently supports shipping **from** Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, the Netherlands, Spain, and the United Kingdom, and **to** any European country." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:57 msgid "To ensure proper setup of a third-party shipping carrier with Odoo, follow these steps:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:59 msgid ":ref:`Install the shipping connector `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:60 msgid ":ref:`Set up delivery method `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:61 msgid ":ref:`Activate production environment `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:62 msgid ":ref:`Configure warehouse `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:63 msgid ":ref:`Specify weight of products `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:68 msgid "Install shipping connector" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:70 msgid "To install shipping connectors, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:72 msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Shipping Connectors` section, tick the third-party shipping carrier's checkbox to install it. Multiple third-party shipping connectors can be selected at once. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:77 msgid ":doc:`Delivery methods <../setup_configuration>` can also be integrated with operations in the *Sales*, *eCommerce*, and *Website* apps. To install, refer to the :ref:`install apps and modules ` documentation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1 msgid "Options of available shipping connectors in Odoo." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:88 msgid "Delivery method" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:90 msgid "To configure the API credentials, and activate the shipping carrier, begin by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Shipping Methods`, and select the desired delivery method." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:95 msgid "The list often includes **two** delivery methods from the same :guilabel:`Provider`: one for international shipping and one for domestic shipping." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:98 msgid "Additional delivery methods can be created for specific purposes, such as :doc:`packaging <../../product_management/configure/packaging>`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:102 msgid ":doc:`Configure delivery methods <../setup_configuration>`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:105 msgid "Ensure the delivery method is published when it should be available on the *Website* app. To publish a delivery method on the website, click the desired delivery method, then click the :guilabel:`Unpublished` smart button. Doing so changes that smart button to read: :guilabel:`Published`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:110 msgid "The :guilabel:`Shipping Method` page contains details about the provider, including:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:112 msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Method` (*Required field*): the name of the delivery method (e.g. `FedEx US`, `FedEx EU`, etc.)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:114 msgid ":guilabel:`Website`: configure shipping methods for an *eCommerce* page that is connected to a specific website in the database. Select the applicable website from the drop-down menu, or leave it blank to apply the method to all web pages." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:117 msgid ":guilabel:`Provider` (*Required field*): choose the third-party delivery service, like FedEx. Upon choosing a provider, the :guilabel:`Integration Level`, :guilabel:`Invoicing Policy` and :guilabel:`Insurance Percentage` fields become available." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:120 msgid ":guilabel:`Integration Level`: choose :guilabel:`Get Rate` to simply get an :ref:`estimated shipment cost ` on an |SO| or invoice." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:124 msgid "Select :guilabel:`Get Rate and Create Shipment` to also :doc:`generate shipping labels `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:129 msgid ":guilabel:`Delivery Product` (*Required field*): the delivery charge name that is added to the |SO| or invoice." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:131 msgid ":guilabel:`Invoicing Policy`: select and calculate an :guilabel:`Estimated cost` of shipping directly from the shipping carrier. If the :guilabel:`Real cost` of shipping is wanted instead, refer to :doc:`Invoice real shipping costs ` document." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:134 msgid ":guilabel:`Margin on Rate`: specify an additional percentage amount added to the base shipping rate to cover extra costs, such as handling fees, packaging materials, exchange rates, etc." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:136 msgid ":guilabel:`Free if order amount is above`: enables free shipping for orders surpassing a specified amount entered in the corresponding :guilabel:`Amount` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:138 msgid ":guilabel:`Insurance Percentage`: specify a percentage amount of the shipping costs reimbursed to the senders if the package is lost or stolen in transit." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:145 msgid "Screenshot of a FedEx shipping method." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:145 msgid "**Shipping Method** configuration page for `FedEx US`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:147 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Configuration` tab, fill out the API credential fields (e.g. API key, password, account number, etc.). Depending on the third-party shipping carrier chosen in the :guilabel:`Provider` field, the :guilabel:`Configuration` tab will contain different required fields. For more details about configuring specific carriers' credentials, refer to the following documents:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:154 msgid ":doc:`DHL credentials `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:155 msgid ":doc:`Sendcloud credentials `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:156 msgid ":doc:`UPS credentials `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:161 msgid "Production environment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:163 msgid "With the delivery method details configured, click the :guilabel:`Test Environment` smart button to set it to :guilabel:`Production Environment`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:167 msgid "Setting the delivery method to :guilabel:`Production` creates **real** shipping labels, and users are at risk of being charged through their carrier account (e.g. UPS, FedEx, etc.) **before** users charge customers for shipping. Verify all configurations are correct before launching the delivery method to :guilabel:`Production`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1 msgid "Show the \"Test Environment\" smart button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:181 msgid "Ensure the warehouse's :guilabel:`Address` (including ZIP code) and :guilabel:`Phone` number are entered accurately. To do that, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Warehouses`, and select the desired warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:185 msgid "On the warehouse configuration page, open the warehouse contact page by clicking the :guilabel:`Company` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1 msgid "Highlight the \"Company\" field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:192 msgid "Verify that the :guilabel:`Address` and :guilabel:`Phone` number are correct, as they are required for the shipping connector to work properly." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1 msgid "Show company address and phone number." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:202 msgid "Product weight" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:204 msgid "For the carrier integration to work properly, specify the weight of products by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and selecting the desired product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:207 msgid "Then, switch to the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab, and define the :guilabel:`Weight` of the product in the :guilabel:`Logistics` section." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1 msgid "Display the \"Weight\" field in the Inventory tab of the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:215 msgid "Apply third-party shipping carrier" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:217 msgid "Shipping carriers can be applied on a :abbr:`SO (Sales Order)`, invoice, or delivery order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:219 msgid "After configuring the third-party carrier's :ref:`delivery method ` in Odoo, create or navigate to a quotation by going to :menuselection:`Sales app --> Orders --> Quotations`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:226 msgid "Sales order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:228 msgid "To assign a third-party shipping carrier, and get an estimated cost of shipping, begin by going to :menuselection:`Sales app --> Orders --> Quotations`. Create or select an existing quotation, and add the cost of shipping through a third-party carrier to a quotation, by clicking the :guilabel:`Add Shipping` button in the bottom-right corner of the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1 msgid "Show the \"Add shipping\" button at the bottom of a quotation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:237 msgid "In the resulting :guilabel:`Add a shipping method` pop-up window, select the intended carrier from the :guilabel:`Shipping Method` drop-down menu. The :guilabel:`Cost` field is automatically filled based on:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:241 msgid "the amount specified in the :guilabel:`Total Order Weight` field (if it is not provided, the sum of :ref:`product weights ` in the order is used)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:243 msgid "the distance between the warehouse's :ref:`source address ` and the customer's address." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:248 msgid "After selecting a third-party provider in the :guilabel:`Shipping Method` field, click :guilabel:`Get Rate` in the :guilabel:`Add a shipping method` pop-up window to get the estimated cost through the shipping connector. Then, click the :guilabel:`Add` button to add the delivery charge to the |SO| or invoice." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:254 msgid ":doc:`Charge customers for shipping after product delivery `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:261 msgid "For users making shipments without installing the *Sales* app, assign the shipping carrier to the delivery order, by first going to the :menuselection:`Inventory` app. Then, from the :guilabel:`Inventory Overview` dashboard, select the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` operation type, and choose the desired delivery order that is not already marked as :guilabel:`Done` or :guilabel:`Cancelled`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:267 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Additional info` tab, set the :guilabel:`Carrier` field to the desired third-party shipping carrier. When the delivery method is set to :ref:`production mode `, a :guilabel:`Tracking Reference` is provided." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:273 msgid ":doc:`Generate shipping labels `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1 msgid "Show the delivery order's \"Additional info\" tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:282 msgid "Troubleshooting" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:284 msgid "Since shipping connectors can sometimes be complex to set up, here are some checks to try when things are not working as expected:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:287 msgid "Ensure the :ref:`warehouse information ` (e.g., address and phone number) in Odoo is correct **and** matches the records saved in the shipping provider's website." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:290 msgid "Verify that the :ref:`package type ` and parameters are valid for the shipping carrier. To check, ensure the shipment can be directly created on the shipping carrier's website." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:293 msgid "When encountering a price mismatch between Odoo's estimated cost and the provider's charge, first ensure the delivery method is set to :ref:`production environment `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:297 msgid "Then, create the shipment in both the carrier's website and Odoo, and verify the prices are the same across Odoo, the shipping provider, and in the *debug logs*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:301 msgid "When checking for a price mismatch in the debug logs, if the request says the package weighs six kilograms, but the response from FedEx says the package weights seven kilograms, it concludes that the issue is on FedEx's side." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:306 msgid "Debug log" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:308 msgid "Track shipping data inconsistencies by activating debug logging. To do that, go to the delivery method's configuration page (:menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Shipping Method`), and select the desired shipping method. Click the :guilabel:`No Debugging` smart button to activate :guilabel:`Debug Requests`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1 msgid "Show the \"No Debug\" smart button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:317 msgid "With :guilabel:`Debug Requests` activated, each time the shipping connector is used to estimate the cost of shipping, records are saved in the :guilabel:`Logging` report. To access the report, turn on :ref:`developer mode `, and go to :menuselection:`Settings app --> Technical --> Database Structure section --> Logging`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:323 msgid "Logs are created for a shipping method each time the :ref:`Get Rate ` button is clicked on :abbr:`SOs (Sales Orders)` and invoices, **and** when a customer adds the shipping carrier to their order through the *Website* app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1 msgid "Show how to find the \"Logging\" option from the \"Technical\" menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:332 msgid "Click the *HTTP request* line item to open a detailed page, and verify the correct information is sent from Odoo to the shipping carrier. In the *HTTP response*, verify that the same information is received." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1 msgid "Show debug request history in Settings > Technical > Logging." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:3 msgid "How to get UPS credentials for integration with Odoo?" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:5 msgid "In order to use the Odoo UPS API, you will need:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:7 msgid "A UPS.com user ID and password" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:9 msgid "A UPS account number" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:11 msgid "An Access Key" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:13 msgid "An Access Key is a 16 character alphanumeric code that allows access to the UPS Developer Kit API Development and Production servers." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:17 msgid "Create a UPS Account" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:19 msgid "Note that only customers located in the US can open a UPS account online. If you are located outside the US, you will need to contact UPS Customer Service in order to to open an account." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:23 msgid "You can read additional information about opening a UPS account on the their website, on the page, `How to Open a UPS Account Online `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:27 msgid "If you don't already have a UPS account, you can create one along with your online profile by following these steps:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:30 msgid "1. Access the UPS.com web site at `www.ups.com `__, and click the **New User** link at the top of the page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:34 msgid "2. Click the **Register for MyUPS** button, and follow the prompts to complete the registration process." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:37 msgid "If you already have a UPS account, you can add it to your online profile as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:39 msgid "Log in to the `UPS.com website `_) using your UPS.com User ID and Password." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:41 msgid "Click the **My UPS** tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:43 msgid "Click the **Account Summary** link." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:45 msgid "4. Click the **Add an Existing UPS Account** link in the **UPS Account Details** section of the page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:48 msgid "5. In the **Add New Account** screen, enter the **UPS Account Number**, **Account Name**, and **Postal Code** fields. The country defaults to United States.q" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:52 msgid "Click the **Next** button to continue." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:55 msgid "Get an Access Key" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:57 msgid "After you have added your UPS account number to your user profile you can request an Access Key from UPS using the steps below:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:60 msgid "Go to the `UPS Developer Kit web page `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:61 msgid "Log into UPS.com with your user ID and password" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:62 msgid "Click on the link **Request an access key**." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:63 msgid "Verify your contact information" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:64 msgid "Click the **Request Access Key** button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:66 msgid "The **Access Key** will be provided to you on the web page, and an email with the Access Key will be sent to the email address of the primary contact." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage.rst:5 msgid "Warehouses and storage" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:6 msgid "Inventory management" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:8 msgid "In the Odoo *Inventory* app, :doc:`warehouses ` handle the broader organization and distribution of stock across different physical sites, while :doc:`locations ` provide a more detailed breakdown within each warehouse for efficient item management." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:13 msgid "This document serves as an introduction to the terminology and concepts necessary to master *Inventory*. For specific instructions and examples of how things work, refer to individual documentation pages." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:18 msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Warehouses & Locations `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:21 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:3 msgid "Warehouses" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:23 msgid ":doc:`Warehouses ` represent a physical place, with a physical address, where a company's items are stored." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:26 msgid "Configure :doc:`routes <../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes>` in a warehouse to control how products move to customers, from vendors, within the warehouse, or :doc:`between warehouses `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:31 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:3 msgid "Locations" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:33 msgid ":doc:`Locations ` refer to specific areas within a warehouse, such as shelves, floors, or aisles. These are sub-divisions within a warehouse, and are unique to that warehouse. Users can create and manage numerous locations within a single warehouse to organize inventory more precisely." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:39 msgid ":doc:`inventory_management/use_locations`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:40 msgid ":doc:`inventory_management/count_products`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:41 msgid ":doc:`inventory_management/cycle_counts`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:42 msgid ":doc:`inventory_management/scrap_inventory`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:47 msgid "Location types" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:49 msgid "*Location types* in Odoo help categorize and manage where products are, and what actions need to be taken with them. By default, on the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations` page, only internal locations are displayed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:53 msgid "To view the seven location types in Odoo, select any location, and in the :guilabel:`Location Type` field, there are:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:56 msgid ":guilabel:`Vendor Location`: defines an area where products purchased from vendors originate. Items here are **not** in stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:59 msgid ":guilabel:`View`: used to organize and structure the warehouse hierarchy. For example, the view location `WH` (short for warehouse) groups all internal locations, such as `Stock`, receiving docks, quality checkpoints, and packing areas to show they all belong to the same warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:64 msgid "View locations should **not** contain products, but it is possible to move them there." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:66 msgid ":guilabel:`Internal Location`: storage locations within the warehouse. Items stored in these locations are accounted for in :doc:`inventory valuation <../product_management/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation>`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:70 msgid ":guilabel:`Customer Location`: where sold products are tracked; items here are no longer in stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:72 msgid ":guilabel:`Inventory Loss`: counterpart location to consume missing items or create stock, accounting for discrepancies." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:75 msgid "In Odoo, examples of inventory loss locations are *Inventory Adjustment*, used to account for discrepancies during an inventory count, and *Scrap*, which is where damaged goods are sent to account for inventory losses." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:80 msgid "`Virtual Locations/Inventory Adjustment` is a location with the :guilabel:`Inventory Loss` type. The database shows `65` units in `WH/Stock`, but an inventory check reveals `60`. To correct the quantity, five units are moved from `WH/Stock` to `Virtual Locations/Inventory Adjustment`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:0 msgid "Product ends up in Virtual Locations/Inventory Adjustment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:89 msgid ":guilabel:`Production`: where raw materials are consumed, and :doc:`manufactured products <../../manufacturing>` are created." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:92 msgid ":guilabel:`Transit Location`: used for inter-company or inter-warehouse operations to track products shipped between different addresses, such as :ref:`Physical Locations/Inter-warehouse transit `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:-1 msgid "List of locations in Odoo." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:103 msgid "In Odoo, location types are color-coded:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:102 msgid "**Red**: internal locations" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:103 msgid "**Blue**: view locations" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:104 msgid "**Black**: external locations (including inventory loss, vendor, and customer locations)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:107 msgid "View locations in Odoo" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:109 msgid "Odoo databases include pre-configured view locations to organize the hierarchy of locations. These provide helpful context, and distinguish between internal and external locations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:112 msgid "*Physical locations* serve as an umbrella for external locations, without changing a product's inventory value. (Inventory valuation changes occur when products move from internal to external locations)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:119 msgid "When moving products in warehouses `WH` and `WH2`, the items are not in either warehouse, but still belong to the company. While in transit, they are placed in the `Inter-warehouse transit` location, a :guilabel:`Transit Location` type." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:123 msgid "This location is under the view location, `Physical Locations`, indicating that `Inter-warehouse transit` is outside of a warehouse, but still part of the company. Doing so does not affect the inventory valuation of the products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:127 msgid "*Partner locations* group customer and vendor locations (external locations) together. Transfers to these locations affect inventory valuation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:129 msgid "*Virtual locations* are locations that do **not** exist physically, but it is where items that are not in inventory can be placed. These can be items that are no longer in inventory due to loss, or other factors." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:3 msgid "Inventory adjustments" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:5 msgid "In any warehouse management system, the recorded inventory counts in the database might not always match the actual inventory counts in the warehouse. The discrepancy between the two counts can be due to damages, human errors, theft, or other factors. As such, inventory adjustments must be made to reconcile the differences, and ensure that the recorded counts in the database match the actual counts in the warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:12 msgid "Inventory Adjustments page" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:14 msgid "To view the *Inventory Adjustments* page, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Inventory Adjustments`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:-1 msgid "In stock products listed on the Inventory adjustments page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:21 msgid "On the :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustments` page, all products that are currently in stock are listed, with each product line containing the following information:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:24 msgid ":guilabel:`Location`: the specific location in the warehouse where a product is stored." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:25 msgid ":guilabel:`Product`: the product whose quantity is listed on the inventory adjustment line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:26 msgid ":guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`: the tracking identifier assigned to the specific product listed. It can contain letters, numbers, or a combination of both." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:30 msgid "If a specific product has a quantity of more than `1.00` in stock, and more than one serial number (or lot number) assigned to it, each uniquely-identified product is displayed on its own product line with its own lot/serial number, displayed under the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` column." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:35 msgid ":guilabel:`On Hand Quantity`: the quantity of the product currently recorded in the database." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:36 msgid ":guilabel:`UoM`: the *unit of measure* in which the product is measured. Unless otherwise specified (i.e., in :guilabel:`Pounds` or :guilabel:`Ounces`), the default :abbr:`UoM (Unit of Measure)` is :guilabel:`Units`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:39 msgid ":guilabel:`Counted Quantity`: the real quantity counted during an inventory count. This field is left blank by default, but can be changed, depending on if it matches the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` or not." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:42 msgid ":guilabel:`Difference`: the difference between the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` and :guilabel:`Counted Quantity`, once an inventory adjustment is made. The difference is automatically calculated after every inventory adjustment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:45 msgid ":guilabel:`Scheduled Date`: the date at which a count should be made. If not otherwise specified, this date will default to the 31st of December of the current year." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:47 msgid ":guilabel:`User`: the person assigned to the count in the database. This can either be the person physically counting the inventory, or applying the count in the database." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:49 msgid ":guilabel:`Product Category`: the category assigned internally to a specific product. Unless otherwise specified (i.e., as :guilabel:`Consumable` or :guilabel:`Rental`), the default *Product Category* is set to :guilabel:`All`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:52 msgid ":guilabel:`Available Quantity`: the quantity of a specific product that is currently available, based on any outstanding/uncompleted sales orders, purchase orders, or manufacturing orders that might change the available quantity once fulfilled." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:55 msgid ":guilabel:`Accounting Date`: the date on which the adjustments will be accounted in the Odoo *Accounting* app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:57 msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: the company whose database these inventory adjustments are being made on. The company is listed in the top right corner of the database, next to the user currently logged in." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:61 msgid "Some columns are hidden by default. To reveal these columns, click the :guilabel:`additional options` button (three dots icon) to the far right of the form's top row, and select any desired column to reveal by clicking the checkbox next to that option." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:66 msgid "Create an inventory adjustment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:68 msgid "To create a new inventory adjustment from the :menuselection:`Inventory Adjustments` page, click :guilabel:`Create`. Doing so creates a new, blank inventory adjustment line at the bottom of the page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:72 msgid "On this blank inventory adjustment line, click the drop-down menu under the :guilabel:`Product` column, and select a product. If the selected product is tracked using either lots or serial numbers, the desired lot or serial number can also be chosen from the drop-down menu under the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` column." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:77 msgid "Next, set the value in the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` column to the quantity counted for that product during the inventory adjustment process." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:81 msgid "The :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` for new inventory adjustments is set to `0.00` by default. An inventory move with `0.00` :guilabel:`Quantity Done` is recorded in the product's inventory adjustment history, so it should be set to reflect the actual quantity counted." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:85 msgid "To the right of the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` column, the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` and :guilabel:`User` can also be changed via their respective drop-down menus. Changing the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` changes the date that the inventory adjustment should be processed on, and selecting a responsible :guilabel:`User` assigns a user to the specific inventory adjustment (for traceability purposes)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:91 msgid "Once all changes have been made to the new inventory adjustment line, click away from the line. Doing so saves the adjustment, and moves the line to the top of the page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:94 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:156 msgid "If the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` is greater than the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity`, the value in the :guilabel:`Difference` column is **green**. If the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` is less than the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity`, the value in the :guilabel:`Difference` column is **red**. If the quantities match, and haven't been changed at all, no value appears in the :guilabel:`Difference` column." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:-1 msgid "Difference column on inventory adjustments page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:104 msgid "At this stage, the count (:dfn:`inventory adjustment`) is recorded, but not yet applied. This means that the quantity on hand before the adjustment has not yet been updated to match the new, real counted quantity." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:108 msgid "There are two ways to apply the new inventory adjustment. The first way is to click the :guilabel:`Apply` button on the line at the far right of the page. The second way is to click the checkbox on the far left of the line. Doing so reveals new button options at the top of the page, one of which is an :guilabel:`Apply` button. Clicking this button instead causes an :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustment Reference / Reason` pop-up window to appear." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:114 msgid "From this pop-up menu, a reference or reason can be assigned to the inventory adjustment. By default, the :guilabel:`Inventory Reference / Reason` field is pre-populated with the date the adjustment is being made on, but can be changed to reflect whatever reference or reason is desired." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:118 msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Apply` to apply the inventory adjustment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:-1 msgid "Apply all option applies the inventory adjustment once a reason is specified." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:125 msgid "Count products" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:127 msgid "Counting products is a recurring activity in a warehouse. Once a count is complete, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Inventory Adjustments` to update the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` column for each product line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:131 msgid "On each product line, identify whether the value in the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` column recorded in the database matches the newly-counted value. If the recorded value and the counted value do match, click the :guilabel:`Set` button (target icon) at the far right of the product line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:135 msgid "Doing so copies the value from the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` column over to the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` column, and sets the value of the :guilabel:`Difference` column to `0.00`. Subsequently, once applied, an inventory move with `0.00` :guilabel:`Quantity Done` is recorded in the product's inventory adjustment history." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:-1 msgid "Zero count inventory adjustment move." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:144 msgid "If the newly-counted value for a given product does **not** match the value in the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` recorded in the database, instead of clicking the :guilabel:`Set` button, record the real value in the field in the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` column." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:148 msgid "To do so, click the field in the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` column on the specific inventory adjustment line for the product whose count is being changed. This automatically assigns a :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` of `0.00`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:152 msgid "To change this value, type in a new value that matches the real, newly-counted value. Then, click away from the line. Doing so saves the adjustment, and automatically adjusts the value in the :guilabel:`Difference` column." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:162 msgid "Subsequently, once applied, a move with the difference between the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` and the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` is recorded in the product's inventory adjustment history." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:-1 msgid "Inventory Adjustments History dashboard detailing a list of prior product moves." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:170 msgid "Sometimes a count occurs, but cannot be applied in the database right away. In the time between the actual count and applying the inventory adjustment, product moves can occur. In that case, the on-hand quantity in the database can change and no longer be consistent with the counted quantity. As an extra precaution, Odoo asks for confirmation before applying the inventory adjustment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:177 msgid "Change inventory count frequency" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:179 msgid "By default, the *scheduled date* for inventory adjustments are always scheduled for the 31st of December of the current year. However, for some companies, it is crucial that they have an accurate inventory count at all times. In such cases, the default scheduled date can be modified." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:183 msgid "To modify the default scheduled date, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, in the :guilabel:`Operations` section, locate the :guilabel:`Annual Inventory Day and Month` setting, which includes a drop-down menu that is set to `31 December` by default." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:-1 msgid "Adjust the next inventory count date with the Annual Inventory Day and Month setting." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:191 msgid "To change the day, click the :guilabel:`31`, and change it to a day within the range `1-31`, depending on the desired month of the year." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:194 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:115 msgid "Then, to change the month, click :guilabel:`December` to reveal the drop-down menu, and select the desired month." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:197 msgid "Once all desired changes have been made, click :guilabel:`Save` to save all changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:200 msgid "Plan big inventory counts" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:202 msgid "To plan big inventory counts, such as a full count of everything currently in stock, first navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Inventory Adjustments`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:205 msgid "Then, select the desired products to be counted by clicking the checkbox on the far left of each product line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:209 msgid "To request a count of **all** products currently in stock, click the checkbox at the very top of the table, in the header row next to the :guilabel:`Location` label. This selects **all** product lines." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:-1 msgid "Request a count popup on inventory adjustments page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:217 msgid "Once all desired products have been selected, click the :guilabel:`Request a Count` button at the top of the page. This causes a :guilabel:`Request a Count` pop-up window to appear. From this pop-up, fill in the following information:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:221 msgid ":guilabel:`Inventory Date`: the planned date of the count." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:222 msgid ":guilabel:`User`: the user responsible for the count." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:223 msgid ":guilabel:`Accounting Date`: the date at which the inventory adjustment will be accounted." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:224 msgid ":guilabel:`Count`: to leave the on-hand quantity of each product line blank, select :guilabel:`Leave Empty`. To pre-fill the on-hand quantity of each product line with the current value recorded in the database, select :guilabel:`Set Current Value`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:228 msgid "Finally, once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to request the count." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:231 msgid "In the Odoo *Barcode* app, users can only view inventory counts that are assigned to **them**, and are scheduled for **today** or **earlier**." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:235 msgid ":doc:`cycle_counts`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:3 msgid "Cycle counts" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:5 msgid "For most companies, warehouse stock only needs to be counted once a year. This is why, by default, after making an *inventory adjustment* in Odoo, the scheduled date for the next inventory count is set for the 31st of December of the current year." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:9 msgid "However, for some businesses, it's crucial to have an accurate inventory count at all times. These companies use *cycle counts* to keep critical stock levels accurate. Cycle counting is a method by which companies count their inventory more often in certain *locations*, to ensure that their physical inventory counts match their inventory records." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:15 msgid "Activate storage locations" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:17 msgid "In Odoo, cycle counts are location-based. Therefore, the *storage locations* feature needs to be enabled before performing a cycle count." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:20 msgid "To enable this feature, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section. Then, click the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Storage Locations`. Click :guilabel:`Save` to save all changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:-1 msgid "Enabled storage locations setting in inventory settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:29 msgid "Change inventory count frequency by location" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:31 msgid "Now that the storage locations setting is enabled, the inventory count frequency can be changed for specific locations created in the warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:34 msgid "To view and edit locations, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations`. This reveals a :guilabel:`Locations` page containing every location currently created and listed in the warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:38 msgid "From this page, click into a location to reveal the settings and configuration page for that location. Click :guilabel:`Edit` to edit the location settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:41 msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Cyclic Inventory` section, locate the :guilabel:`Inventory Frequency (Days)` field, which should be set to `0` (if this location has not been edited previously). In this field, change the value to whichever number of days is desired." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:-1 msgid "Location frequency setting on location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:50 msgid "A location that needs an inventory count every 30 days should have the :guilabel:`Inventory Frequency (Days)` value set to `30`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:53 msgid "Once the frequency has been changed to the desired number of days, click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes. Now, once an inventory adjustment is applied to this location, the next scheduled count date is automatically set, based on the value entered into the :guilabel:`Inventory Frequency (Days)` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:59 msgid "Count inventory by location" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:61 msgid "To perform a cycle count for a specific location in the warehouse, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Inventory Adjustments`. This reveals an :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustments` page containing all products currently in stock, with each product listed on its own line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:66 msgid "From this page, the :guilabel:`Filters` and :guilabel:`Group By` buttons (at the top of the page, under the :guilabel:`Search...` bar), can be used to select specific locations and perform inventory counts." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:-1 msgid "Inventory adjustments page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:74 msgid "To select a specific location and view all products within that location, click :guilabel:`Group By`, then click :guilabel:`Add Custom Group` to reveal a new drop-down menu to the right." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:77 msgid "Click :guilabel:`Location` from the drop-down menu, then click :guilabel:`Apply`. The page now displays condensed drop-down menus of each location in the warehouse that has products in stock, and a cycle count can be performed for all products in that location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:82 msgid "In large warehouses with multiple locations and a high volume of products, it might be easier to search for the specific location desired. To do this, from the :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustments` page, click :guilabel:`Filters`. Then, click :guilabel:`Add Custom Filter` to reveal a new menu to the right. Click this menu to reveal three drop-downs." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:87 msgid "For the first field, click and select :guilabel:`Location` from the drop-down. For the second field, leave the :guilabel:`contains` value as is. For the third field, type in the name of the location that is being searched for. Click :guilabel:`Apply` for that location to appear on the page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:-1 msgid "Applied filters and group by on inventory adjustments page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:97 msgid "Change full inventory count frequency" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:99 msgid "While cycle counts are typically performed per location, the scheduled date for full inventory counts of everything in-stock in the warehouse can also be manually changed to push the date up sooner than the date listed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:103 msgid "To modify the default scheduled date, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, in the :guilabel:`Operations` section, locate the :guilabel:`Annual Inventory Day and Month` setting field, which includes a drop-down that is set to `31` :guilabel:`December` by default." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:-1 msgid "Frequency field in inventory app settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:112 msgid "To change the day, click the `31`, and change it to a day within the range `1-31`, depending on the desired month of the year." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:118 msgid "Once all changes have been made, click :guilabel:`Save` to save all changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:121 msgid ":doc:`count_products`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:3 msgid "Scrap inventory" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:5 msgid "In some cases, a product in inventory may be damaged or found to be defective. If it is not possible to repair or return the product, Odoo *Inventory* allows users to scrap it, ensuring that usable inventory counts remain accurate." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:10 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:19 msgid "Scrap orders can be viewed by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Scrap`. Each scrap order shows the date and time the order was created, along with the product and quantity that was scrapped." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:14 msgid "To view the total quantity of each item scrapped, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Locations`. Remove the :guilabel:`Internal` filter from the :guilabel:`Search...` bar to display virtual locations. Finally, select the :guilabel:`Virtual Locations/Scrap` location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:19 msgid "By default, scrapping a product removes it from physical inventory, and places it in a virtual location titled *Virtual Locations/Scrap*. A virtual location is **not** a physical space, but rather a designation in Odoo that is used to track items that are no longer in physical inventory." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:23 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:68 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:30 msgid "Learn more" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:25 msgid "For more information about virtual locations, see the documentation about the different types of :ref:`location types `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:29 msgid "Scrap from stock" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:31 msgid "To scrap a product located in inventory, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Scrap`. On the :guilabel:`Scrap Orders` page, click :guilabel:`Create` to configure a new scrap order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:35 msgid "On the scrap order, select the product being scrapped from the :guilabel:`Product` drop-down menu, then enter the quantity in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field. The :guilabel:`Source Location` defaults to the location where the product is stored, and the :guilabel:`Scrap Location` defaults to :guilabel:`Virtual Locations/Scrap`, but either of these can be changed by selecting a different location from their respective drop-down menus." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:-1 msgid "A new scrap order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:45 msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Validate` to scrap the product. The on-hand inventory count for the scrapped product updates to subtract the scrapped quantity." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:49 msgid "Scrap from a receipt, transfer, or delivery" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:51 msgid "It is also possible to scrap products during the receipt, transfer, and delivery operations. This can be necessary if any products are found to be defective when receiving them into inventory, transferring them from one location to another, or preparing them for delivery." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:55 msgid "To scrap a product during the receipt, transfer, or delivery operations, begin by navigating to the :menuselection:`Inventory` app. On the :guilabel:`Overview` page, select the :guilabel:`# TO PROCESS` button on the :guilabel:`Receipts`, :guilabel:`Internal Transfers`, or :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` card, depending on the type of operation the product is being scrapped from." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:61 msgid "For the :guilabel:`Internal Transfers` card to appear on the :menuselection:`Overview` page of the :menuselection:`Inventory` app, the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` setting must be enabled. To do so, navigate to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, then enable the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Storage Locations` under the :guilabel:`Warehouse` heading." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:66 msgid "Alternatively, a list of all delivery orders, receipts, and transfers can be viewed by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Transfers`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:69 msgid "Next, open a delivery order, receipt, or transfer from the corresponding page by clicking on it. A :guilabel:`Scrap` button appears at the top of the page. Click it to open the :guilabel:`Scrap` pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:-1 msgid "The scrap pop-up in the Inventory app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:78 msgid "The :guilabel:`Scrap` button will only appear on a receipt that has been validated. This is because Odoo only allows products to be scrapped once they have been entered into inventory." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:81 msgid "On the :guilabel:`Scrap` pop-up window, select the product being scrapped from the :guilabel:`Product` drop-down menu. Then, enter the quantity in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:84 msgid "The :guilabel:`Source Location` defaults to the location where the product is stored, and the :guilabel:`Scrap Location` defaults to :guilabel:`Virtual Locations/Scrap`, but either of these can be changed by selecting a different location from their respective drop-down menus." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:88 msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Done` to scrap the product. After doing so, the :guilabel:`Scrap` pop-up window disappears and a :guilabel:`Scraps` smart button appears in the top right of the page. Click it to view all of the scrap orders created from that operation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:-1 msgid "The Scraps smart button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:5 msgid "A *location* is a specific space within a warehouse. This can be a shelf, room, aisle, etc." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:10 msgid "To create specific storage locations, enable the *Storage Locations* feature by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. In the :guilabel:`Warehouses` section, tick the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` checkbox. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:15 msgid "Typically, the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` feature is used with :doc:`Multi-Step Routes <../../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes>`, which controls how products move between locations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:-1 msgid "Show Storage Locations feature." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:24 msgid "Create new location" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:26 msgid "After enabling *Storage Locations*, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:-1 msgid "List of internal locations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:33 msgid "On this page, click :guilabel:`New`. The new location form can then be configured as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:35 msgid ":guilabel:`Location Name`: recognizable name of the location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:36 msgid ":guilabel:`Parent Location`: the location within which the new location exists. After the location is created, it is listed on the :guilabel:`Locations` page using a *location hierarchy*, to describe how a specific location fits within larger areas of the warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:41 msgid "In `WH/Stock/Zone A/Refrigerator 1`, \"Refrigerator 1\" is the location name, \"Zone A\" is the parent location, and everything before it is the path showing where this spot is within the warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:46 msgid "Additional Information section" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:48 msgid "In addition to the required fields above, configure the following location fields to ensure the location serves its intended purpose in the database:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:51 msgid ":guilabel:`Location Type`: from the drop-down menu, choose :guilabel:`Vendor Location`, :guilabel:`View`, :guilabel:`Internal Location`, :guilabel:`Customer Location`, :guilabel:`Inventory Loss`, :guilabel:`Production`, or :guilabel:`Transit Location` to categorize the location. For details on each location type, refer to the :ref:`Location Types section `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:56 msgid ":guilabel:`Storage Category`: only available with the :doc:`Storage Categories <../../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/storage_category>` feature enabled in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:59 msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: the company the location belongs to." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:60 msgid ":guilabel:`Is a Scrap Location?`: tick this checkbox to allow for scrapped/damaged goods to be stored in this location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:62 msgid ":guilabel:`Is a Return Location?`: tick this checkbox to allow products to be returned to this location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:64 msgid ":guilabel:`Barcode`: used with the *Barcode* app, enter the barcode to :ref:`identify actions ` at this location when scanned." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:66 msgid ":guilabel:`Replenish Location`: used for :doc:`configuring routes <../../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes>`, tick this checkbox to set the location as a destination for receiving products from *Buy*, *Manufacture*, or other procurement routes, ensuring products are correctly supplied to the warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:-1 msgid "The form for creating a new location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:76 msgid "Cyclic Counting section" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:78 msgid "To schedule regular inventory counts at this location, set the :guilabel:`Inventory Frequency (Days)` field to the desired interval. By default, it is set to `0` (no scheduled counts)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:81 msgid "For example, setting this field to `30`, schedules a count every thirty days. For more specifics on setting up and using this feature, refer to the :doc:`Cycle Counts documentation `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:84 msgid "The :guilabel:`Last Effective Inventory` field displays the date the last inventory count at this location occurred. When scheduled inventory counts are enabled, the :guilabel:`Next Expected Inventory` field displays the date of the next inventory count." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:89 msgid "With inventory counts scheduled to occur every `30` days, and the :guilabel:`Last Effective Inventory` count occurring on July 16, the :guilabel:`Next Expected Inventory` is August 15." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:0 msgid "Show Cyclic Count section of the locations form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:97 msgid "Logistics section" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:99 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Logistics` section of the locations form, optionally select a :guilabel:`Removal Strategy` to determine the order and priority of how products are picked from inventory. The options are: :guilabel:`First In First Out (FIFO)`, :guilabel:`Last In First Out (LIFO)`, :guilabel:`Closest Location`, and :guilabel:`First Expiry First Out (FEFO)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:108 msgid "Current stock at location" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:110 msgid "To view the current stock at a single location, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations`, and select the desired location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:113 msgid "Next, click the :guilabel:`Current Stock` smart button to get a list of all products at the location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:117 msgid "A list of current stock at `Shelf 1` consists of `266` cabinets and `39` desks." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:0 msgid "Show stock at Shelf 1." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:5 msgid "In the Odoo *Inventory* app, a *warehouse* is a physical space with an address for storing items, such as a storage facility, distribution center, or physical store." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:8 msgid "Each database has a pre-configured warehouse with the company's address. Users can set up multiple warehouses, and :doc:`create stock moves <../../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/use_routes>` between them." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:15 msgid "To create or manage warehouses, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Warehouses`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:18 msgid "Then, select an existing warehouse, or create a new one by clicking :guilabel:`New`. Doing so opens the warehouse form, which contains the following fields:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:21 msgid ":guilabel:`Warehouse` (*required field*): the full name of the warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:22 msgid ":guilabel:`Short Name` (*required field*): the abbreviated code for the warehouse (maximum five characters). The short name for the default warehouse in Odoo is `WH`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:26 msgid "The :guilabel:`Short Name` appears on warehouse documents, so it is recommended to use an memorable one, like \"WH[first letters of location]\" (e.g. `WHA`, `WHB`, etc.)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:29 msgid ":guilabel:`Address` (*required field*): the address of the warehouse. To change the warehouse address when creating two or more warehouses, hover over the field, and click the :icon:`fa-arrow-right` :guilabel:`(right arrow)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:32 msgid ":guilabel:`Company` (*required field*): the company that owns the warehouse; this can be set as the company that owns the Odoo database, or the company of a customer or vendor." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:34 msgid ":guilabel:`Intrastat region`: :doc:`region name <../../../../finance/accounting/reporting/intrastat>` required for companies in the European Union." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:39 msgid "The options below are available **only** when the *Multi-Step Routes* feature is enabled in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:42 msgid ":guilabel:`Incoming Shipments`: select the option to receive products from the warehouse in :doc:`one <../../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step>`, :doc:`two <../../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps>`, or :doc:`three <../../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps>` steps." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:47 msgid ":guilabel:`Outgoing Shipments`: select the option to deliver products from the warehouse in :doc:`one <../../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step>`, :doc:`two <../../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps>`, or :doc:`three <../../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps>` steps." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:52 msgid ":guilabel:`Dropship Subcontractors`: available with the *Subcontracting* feature enabled in :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Tick this checkbox to purchase components from vendors, and dropship them to subcontractors." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:55 msgid ":guilabel:`Resupply Subcontractors`: available with the *Subcontracting* feature, tick this checkbox to supply subcontractors with raw materials stored in *this* specific warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:57 msgid ":guilabel:`Manufacture to Resupply`: tick this checkbox to allow for items to be manufactured in this warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:59 msgid ":guilabel:`Manufacture`: choose whether to manufacture products in :doc:`one <../../../manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing>`, :doc:`two <../../../manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing>`, or :doc:`three steps <../../../manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing>`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:63 msgid ":guilabel:`Buy to Resupply`: tick this checkbox to allow for purchased products to be delivered to the warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:65 msgid ":guilabel:`Resupply From`: available with multiple warehouses in the database, select warehouses to pull stock *from* to fulfill orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:69 msgid ":doc:`Use inventory adjustments to add stock to new warehouses `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses.rst:-1 msgid "Example warehouse form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:15 msgid "In Odoo, stock can be replenished one of three ways: *reordering rules*, the *make to order* (MTO) route, or using the *master production schedule* (MPS)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:18 msgid "Each replenishment mechanism triggers the creation or suggestion of a purchase order (PO) or manufacturing order (MO), with the best choice depending on the business process." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:42 msgid "Replenishment strategies" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:45 msgid "Replenishment report and reordering rules" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:47 msgid "Reordering rules are rules that can be set up to maintain a minimum stock level. They are often configured to support manufacturing or sales requirements. When a product's stock falls at or below the minimum level, Odoo generates (or suggests) a purchase or manufacturing order to replenish stock to the maximum level." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:52 msgid "When using automatic reordering rules, Odoo generates a new order. When using manual, Odoo suggests orders on the replenishment report. For detailed guidance, refer to the :doc:`replenishment report ` and :doc:`reordering rules `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:56 msgid "Key points include:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:58 msgid ":ref:`Automatic reordering rules `: Automatically create |POs| or |MOs| when stock falls below the minimum level. While this is convenient, it is less flexible." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:61 msgid ":ref:`Manual reordering rules `: Generate suggestions in the replenishment report for user review, allowing adjustments and batch orders while meeting deadlines." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:64 msgid ":ref:`Just-in-time logic `: A strategy to replenish only what is needed to prevent overstocking." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:68 msgid ":doc:`replenishment/reordering_rules`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:69 msgid ":doc:`replenishment/report`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:74 msgid "Make to order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:76 msgid "An |MTO| strategy means that procurement or production is triggered only after a sales order has been confirmed. This strategy is recommended when products are customizable, demand is unpredictable, there is limited storage capacity, and when products are high in value and low in demand. In such cases, it does not make sense to keep on-hand inventory." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:81 msgid "Unlike products replenished using reordering rules, Odoo automatically links the sales order to the |PO| or |MO| generated by the |MTO| route." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:84 msgid "Another difference between reordering rules and |MTO| is, with |MTO|, Odoo generates a draft |PO| or |MO| immediately after the |SO| is confirmed. With reordering rules, Odoo generates a draft |PO| or |MO| when the product's forecasted stock falls below the set minimum quantity." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:88 msgid "In addition, Odoo automatically adds quantities to the |PO| or |MO| as the forecast changes, so long as the |PO| or |MO| is not confirmed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:91 msgid "The |MTO| route is the best replenishment strategy for products that are customized, and/or for products that have no stock kept on-hand." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:95 msgid ":doc:`replenishment/mto`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:98 msgid "Master production schedule" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:100 msgid "The :abbr:`MPS (Master Production Schedule)` is a dashboard where products and their forecasted quantities are entered. Based on confirmed manufacturing and purchase orders, the dashboard recommends amounts to order or produce." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:104 msgid "This a useful **manual** tool for keeping track of quantities. The :abbr:`MPS (Master Production Schedule)` **should absolutely not** be used alongside reordering rules, as the automated workflow disrupts its manual replenishment method." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment.rst:109 msgid ":doc:`../../manufacturing/management/use_mps`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:3 msgid "Lead times" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:7 msgid "Accurately forecasting delivery dates is vital for fulfilling customer expectations. In Odoo, the **Inventory** app allows for comprehensive lead time configuration, allowing coordination and planning of manufacturing orders, deliveries, and receipts." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:12 msgid "Lead time types" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:14 msgid "Different lead times for different operations can impact various stages of the order fulfillment process. Here's a summary of the types of lead times in Odoo:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:-1 msgid "Show graphic of all lead times working together." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:21 msgid ":ref:`Customer lead time `: The default time frame for fulfilling customer orders. The customer lead time is the number of days from the date the sales order (SO) is confirmed to the date the products are shipped from the warehouse. This is also known as *delivery lead time*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:26 msgid ":ref:`Sales security lead time `: moves the *scheduled delivery date* forward by a specified number of days. This serves as a buffer to allow the team ample time to prepare the outgoing shipment earlier, considering the possibility of delays in the fulfillment process." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:31 msgid ":ref:`Purchase lead time `: the number of days from the confirmation of a purchase order (PO) to the receipt of products. It provides insight on the time it takes for products to arrive at the warehouse, facilitating effective scheduling and planning of supplier deliveries." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:36 msgid ":ref:`Purchase security lead time `: advances the order deadline on a :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` by a specified number of days. This proactive approach of placing orders earlier mitigates the risk of vendor or shipping delays. Thus, for products that are set to replenish to order, the need appears on the *Replenishment report* earlier, according to the specified number of days." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:42 msgid ":ref:`Days to Purchase lead time `: days needed for the vendor to receive a request for quotation (RFQ) and confirm it. It advances the deadline to schedule a |RFQ| by a specified number of days." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:46 msgid ":ref:`Manufacturing lead time `: the number of days needed to complete a manufacturing order (MO) from the date of confirmation. This lead time includes weekends (non-working hours in Odoo), and is used to forecast an approximate production date for a finished good." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:51 msgid ":ref:`Manufacturing security lead time `: moves the scheduled date of the :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` forward by a specified number of days. When used in conjunction with :ref:`replenish to order `, the security lead time makes the need appear earlier on the replenishment report." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:59 msgid "Sales lead times" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:61 msgid "Customer lead times and sales security lead times can be configured to automatically compute an *expected delivery date* on a :abbr:`SO (Sales Order)`. The expected delivery date ensures a realistic *delivery dates* setting for shipments from the warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:65 msgid "Odoo issues a warning message if the set delivery date is earlier than the expected date, as it may not be feasible to fulfill the order by that time, which would impact other warehouse operations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:69 msgid "A :abbr:`SO (Sales Order)` containing a `Coconut-scented candle` is confirmed on July 11th. The product has a customer lead time of 14 days, and the business uses a sales security lead time of 1 day. Based on the lead time inputs, Odoo suggests a delivery date in 15 days, on July 26th." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:0 msgid "Set *Delivery Date* in a sales order. Enables delivery lead times feature." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:77 msgid "The following sections demonstrate how to automatically compute expected delivery dates." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:80 msgid "Customer lead time" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:82 msgid "Set the customer lead time on each product form, by navigating to the products page. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Sales app --> Products --> Products`. From there, select the desired product, and switch to the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab. Then, under the :guilabel:`Customer Lead Time` field, fill in the number of calendar days required to fulfill the delivery order from start to finish." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:88 msgid "Set a 14-day customer lead time for the `Coconut-scented candle` by navigating to its product form. Then, in the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab, type `14.00` days into the :guilabel:`Customer Lead Time` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:0 msgid "Set *Customer Lead Time* on the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:99 msgid "Sales security lead time" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:101 msgid "*Sales security lead time* is set globally for the business in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:104 msgid "On the configuration page, under the :guilabel:`Advanced Scheduling` heading, locate the box for :guilabel:`Security Lead Time for Sales`, and click the checkbox to enable the feature." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:107 msgid "Next, enter the desired number of calendar days. This security lead time is a buffer notifying the team to prepare for outgoing shipments earlier than the scheduled date." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:111 msgid "Setting the :guilabel:`Security Lead Time for Sales` to `1.00` day, pushes the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` of a delivery order (DO) forward by one day. In that case, if a product is initially scheduled for delivery on April 6th, but with a one-day security lead time, the new scheduled date for the delivery order would be April 5th." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:0 msgid "View of the security lead time for sales configuration from the sales settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:121 msgid "Deliver several products" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:123 msgid "For orders that include multiple products with different lead times, the lead times can be configured directly from the quotation itself. On a quotation, click the :guilabel:`Other Info` tab, and set the :guilabel:`Shipping Policy` to:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:127 msgid ":guilabel:`As soon as possible` to deliver products as soon as they are ready. The :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` of the :abbr:`DO (Delivery Order)` is determined by adding today's date to the shortest lead time among the products in the order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:131 msgid ":guilabel:`When all products are ready` to wait to fulfill the entire order at once. The :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` of the :abbr:`DO (Delivery Order)` is determined by adding today's date to the longest lead time among the products in the order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:-1 msgid "Show *Shipping Policy* field in the *Other Info* tab of a quotation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:140 msgid "In a quotation containing 2 products, `Yoga mat` and `Resistance band,` the products have a lead time of 8 days and 5 days, respectively. Today's date is April 2nd." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:143 msgid "When the :guilabel:`Shipping Policy` is set to :guilabel:`As soon as possible`, the scheduled delivery date is 5 days from today: April 7th. On the other hand, selecting :guilabel:`When all products are ready` configures the scheduled date to be 8 days from today: April 10th." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:150 msgid "Purchase lead times" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:152 msgid "Automatically determining the dates on which to place orders from suppliers can help simplify the procurement process." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:155 msgid "Odoo calculates the supplier shipment *receipt date*, and :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` deadline, based on the required date the product is needed in the warehouse. By working backwards from the receipt date, vendor lead times and purchase security lead times are taken into account, in order to determine the :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` deadline." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:160 msgid "This deadline is the date by which the order should be confirmed, in order to ensure timely arrival by the expected receipt date." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:-1 msgid "Visualization of PO deadline and receipt date used with vendor lead times." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:168 msgid ":ref:`PO scheduling with reordering rules `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:171 msgid "Vendor lead time" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:173 msgid "To set a vendor lead time for orders arriving in the warehouse from a vendor location, begin by navigating to a product form through :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Products --> Products`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:176 msgid "Next, select the desired product, and switch to the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab. In the editable vendor pricelist, click the :guilabel:`Add a line` button to add vendor details, such as the :guilabel:`Vendor` name, :guilabel:`Price` offered for the product, and lastly, the :guilabel:`Delivery Lead Time`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:182 msgid "Multiple vendors and lead times can be added to the vendor pricelist. The default vendor and lead time selected will be the entry at the top of the list." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:186 msgid "On the vendor pricelist of the product form, the :guilabel:`Delivery Lead Time` for the selected vendor is set to `10 days.`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:0 msgid "Add delivery lead times to vendor pricelist on a product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:193 msgid "By setting the vendor lead time, the expected arrival date of the item is automatically determined as the date of the :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` confirmation, plus the vendor lead time. This ensures that warehouse employees are notified, if the products do **not** arrive within the expected timeframe." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:199 msgid "On a :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` confirmed on July 11th, for a product configured with a 10-day vendor lead time, Odoo automatically sets the :guilabel:`Receipt Date` to July 21st. The receipt date also appears as the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` on the warehouse receipt form, accessible from the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button, located on the :guilabel:`PO (Purchase Order)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:0 msgid "Show expected *Receipt Date* of the product from the vendor." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:0 msgid "Show expected *Scheduled Date* of arrival of the product from the vendor." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:215 msgid "Purchase security lead time" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:217 msgid "*Purchase security lead time* is set globally for the business in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:220 msgid "On the configuration page, under the :guilabel:`Advanced Scheduling` heading, locate the box for :guilabel:`Security Lead Time for Purchase`, and click the checkbox to enable the feature." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:223 msgid "Next, enter the desired number of calendar days. By configuring the security lead time, a buffer is set to account for potential delays in supplier deliveries." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:227 msgid "Setting the :guilabel:`Security Lead Time for Purchase` to `2.00` days, pushes the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` of receipt back by one day. In that case, if a product is initially scheduled to arrive on April 6th, with a two-day security lead time, the new scheduled date for the receipt would be April 8th." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:0 msgid "Set security lead time for purchase from the Inventory > Configuration > Settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:239 msgid "Days to purchase lead time" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:241 msgid "To set it up, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Advanced Scheduling` section, in the :guilabel:`Days to Purchase` field, specify the number of days required for the vendor to confirm a |RFQ| after receiving it from the company." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:248 msgid "Manufacturing lead times" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:250 msgid "Lead times can help simplify the procurement process for consumable materials and components used in manufactured products with bills of materials." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:253 msgid "The :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` deadline, which is the deadline to begin the manufacturing process to complete the product by the scheduled delivery date, can be determined by configuring the manufacturing lead times and manufacturing security lead times." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:-1 msgid "Visualization of the determination of planned MO date manufacturing lead times." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:262 msgid "Manufacturing lead time" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:264 msgid "Configure the manufacturing lead time directly on the product form, by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Products --> Products`, and select the desired product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:267 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab of the product, specify the calendar days needed to the manufacture the product in the :guilabel:`Manufacturing Lead Time` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:271 msgid "Specify a 14-day :guilabel:`Manufacturing Lead Time` for a product directly in the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab of the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:0 msgid "View of the manufacturing lead time configuration from the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:278 msgid "Establish a :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` deadline, based on the *expected delivery date*, indicated in the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` field of the :abbr:`DO (Delivery Order)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:281 msgid "The :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` deadline, which is the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` field on the :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)`, is calculated as the *expected delivery date* subtracted by the manufacturing lead time." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:285 msgid "This ensures the manufacturing process begins on time, in order to meet the delivery date." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:287 msgid "However, it's important to note that lead times are based on calendar days. Lead times do **not** consider weekends, holidays, or *work center capacity* (:dfn:`the number of operations that can be performed at the work center simultaneously`)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:292 msgid ":ref:`Manufacturing planning `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:293 msgid ":ref:`Configure automatic MO scheduling with reordering rules `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:297 msgid "A product's scheduled shipment date on the :abbr:`DO (Delivery Order)` is August 15th. The product requires 14 days to manufacture. So, the latest date to start the :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` to meet the commitment date is August 1st." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:304 msgid "Manufacturing security lead time" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:306 msgid "*Manufacturing security lead time* is set globally for the business in :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Planning` heading, locate the box for :guilabel:`Security Lead Time`, and click the checkbox to enable the feature." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:310 msgid "Next, enter the desired number of calendar days. By configuring the security lead time, a buffer is set to account for potential delays in the manufacturing process." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:-1 msgid "View of the security lead time for manufacturing from the manufacturing app settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:318 msgid "A product has a scheduled shipment date on the :abbr:`DO (Delivery Order)` set for August 15th. The manufacturing lead time is 7 days, and manufacturing security lead time is 3 days. So, the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` on the :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` reflects the latest date to begin the manufacturing order. In this example, the planned date on the :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` is August 5th." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:325 msgid "Global example" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:327 msgid "See the following example to understand how all the lead times work together to ensure timely order fulfillment:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:330 msgid "**Sales security lead time**: 1 day" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:331 msgid "**Manufacturing security lead time**: 2 days" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:332 msgid "**Manufacturing lead time**: 3 days" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:333 msgid "**Purchase security lead time**: 1 day" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:334 msgid "**Vendor lead time**: 4 days" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:336 msgid "The customer places an order for a manufactured product on September 1st, and the scheduled delivery date from the warehouse is on September 20th. Odoo uses lead times and automated reordering rules to schedule the necessary operations, based on the outgoing shipment delivery date, September 20th:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:-1 msgid "Show timeline of how lead times work together to schedule warehouse operations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:344 msgid "**September 1st**: Sales order created, confirmed by salesperson." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:346 msgid "**September 9th**: Deadline to order components to ensure they arrive in time when manufacturing begins (4-day supplier lead time)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:349 msgid "**September 13th**: Scheduled date of receipt for components. Initially, it was set to 9/14, but the 1-day purchase security lead time pushed the date earlier by 1 day." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:352 msgid "**September 14th**: Deadline to begin manufacturing. Calculated by subtracting the manufacturing lead time of 3 days, and the manufacturing security lead time of 2 days, from the expected delivery date of September 19th." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:356 msgid "**September 19th**: :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` on the delivery order form indicates the updated expected delivery date, which was originally set as September 20th. But the sales security lead time pushed the date forward by a day." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/lead_times.rst:360 msgid "Odoo's replenishment planning maps a business' order fulfillment process, setting pre-determined deadlines and raw material order dates, including buffer days for potential delays. This ensures products are delivered on time." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:3 msgid "Replenish on order (MTO)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:9 msgid "*Replenish on order*, also known as *MTO* (make to order), is a replenishment strategy that creates a draft order for a product every time a sales order is created for it. For products that are purchased from a vendor, a request for quotation (RFQ) is created, while a sales order for a product manufactured in-house triggers the creation of a manufacturing order. The creation of a |RFQ| or manufacturing order occurs every time a sales order is created, regardless of the current stock level of the product being ordered." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:19 msgid "Unarchive the Replenish on Order (MTO) route" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:21 msgid "By default, Odoo sets the |MTO| route as *archived*. This is because |MTO| is a somewhat niche workflow that is only used by certain companies. However, it is easy to unarchive the route in just a few simple steps." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:25 msgid "To do so, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Routes`. On the :guilabel:`Routes` page, click the :guilabel:`Filters` button and select the :guilabel:`Archived` option. This shows all routes that are currently archived." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:-1 msgid "The archived filter on the Routes page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:33 msgid "Enable the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)`, then click the :guilabel:`Action` button to reveal a drop-down menu. From the drop-down menu, select :guilabel:`Unarchive`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:-1 msgid "The unarchive action on the Routes page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:40 msgid "Finally, remove the :guilabel:`Archived` filter from the :guilabel:`Search...` bar. The :guilabel:`Routes` page will now show all available routes, including :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)`, which is now selectable on the inventory tab of each product page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:-1 msgid "The MTO route appears on the Routes page after unarchiving it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:49 msgid "Configure a product to use the MTO route" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:51 msgid "With the |MTO| route unarchived, products can now be properly configured to use replenish on order. To do so, begin by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Products`, then select an existing product, or click :guilabel:`Create` to configure a new one." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:55 msgid "On the product page, select the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab and enable the :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)` route in the :guilabel:`Routes` section, along with one other route." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:59 msgid "The :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)` route **does not** work unless another route is selected as well. This is because Odoo needs to know how to replenish the product when an order is placed for it (buy it, manufacture it, etc.)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:-1 msgid "Select the MTO route and a second route on the Inventory tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:67 msgid "If the product is purchased from a vendor to fulfill sales orders, enable the :guilabel:`Can be Purchased` checkbox under the product name. Doing so makes the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab appear alongside the other settings tabs below." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:71 msgid "Select the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab and specify a :guilabel:`Vendor` and the :guilabel:`Price` they sell the product for." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:-1 msgid "Enable \"Can be Purchased\" and specify a vendor." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:78 msgid "If the product is manufactured, make sure that it has a bill of materials (BOM) configured for it. To do so, click the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button at the top of the screen, then click :guilabel:`Create` on the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` page to configure a new |BOM| for the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:83 msgid "On the blank |BOM| form, add the components used to manufacture the product on the :guilabel:`Components` tab, along with the operations required for the manufacturing workflow on the :guilabel:`Operations` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:87 msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Save` to save the |BOM|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:90 msgid "Fulfill a sales order using the MTO route" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:92 msgid "After configuring a product to use the |MTO| route, a replenishment order is created for it every time a sales order including the product is confirmed. The type of order created depends on the second route selected in addition to |MTO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:96 msgid "For example, if *Buy* was the second route selected, then a purchase order is created upon confirmation of a sales order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:100 msgid "When the |MTO| route is enabled for a product, a replenishment order is always created upon confirmation of a sales order. This is the case even if there is enough stock of the product on-hand to fulfill the sales order, without buying or manufacturing additional units of it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:104 msgid "While the |MTO| route can be used in unison with a variety of other routes, the *Buy* route is used as the example for this workflow. Begin by navigating to the :menuselection:`Sales` app, then click :guilabel:`Create`, which opens a blank quotation form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:108 msgid "On the blank quotation form, add a :guilabel:`Customer`, then click :guilabel:`Add a product` under the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab, and enter a product that has been configured to use the *MTO* and *Buy* routes. Click :guilabel:`Confirm` and the quotation is turned into a sales order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:112 msgid "A :guilabel:`Purchase` smart button now appears in the top-right corner of the sales order. Clicking it opens the |RFQ| associated with the sales order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:115 msgid "Click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to confirm the |RFQ|, and turn it into a purchase order. A green :guilabel:`Receive Products` button now appears at the top of the purchase order. Once the products are received, click :guilabel:`Receive Products` to register them into inventory." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:119 msgid "Return to the sales order by clicking the :guilabel:`SO` breadcrumb, or by navigating to :menuselection:`Sales --> Orders --> Orders`, and selecting the sales order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/mto.rst:122 msgid "Finally, click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button in the top-right of the order to be taken to the delivery order. Once the products have been shipped to the customer, click :guilabel:`Validate` to confirm the delivery." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:3 msgid "Reordering rules" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:17 msgid "*Reordering rules* are used to keep forecasted stock levels above a certain threshold without exceeding a specified upper limit. This is accomplished by specifying a minimum quantity that stock should not fall below and a maximum quantity that stock should not exceed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:21 msgid "Reordering rules can be configured for each product based on the route used to replenish it. If a product uses the *Buy* route, then a *request for quotation* (RFQ) is created when the reordering rule is triggered. If a product uses the *Manufacture* route, then a *manufacturing order* (MO) is created instead. This is the case regardless of the selected replenishment route." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:27 msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Automatic Reordering Rules `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:28 msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Manual Reordering Rules `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:30 msgid "To set up reordering rules for the first time, refer to:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:32 msgid ":ref:`Reordering rules setup `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:33 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:128 msgid ":ref:`Trigger `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:34 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:129 msgid ":ref:`Preferred route `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:36 msgid "To understand and optimize replenishment using advanced features, see:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:38 msgid ":ref:`Just-in-time logic `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:39 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:133 msgid ":ref:`Visibility days `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:44 msgid "Reordering rules setup" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:46 msgid "To configure automatic and manual reordering rules, complete the following:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:48 msgid ":ref:`Product type configuration `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:49 msgid ":ref:`Create rule `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:54 msgid "Product type configuration" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:56 msgid "A product must be configured correctly to use reordering rules. Begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, then select an existing product, or create a new one by clicking :guilabel:`New`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:60 msgid "On the product form, under the :guilabel:`General Information` tab, set the :guilabel:`Product Type` to :guilabel:`Storable Product`. This is necessary because Odoo only tracks stock quantities for storable products, and quantities are needed to trigger reordering rules." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1 msgid "Set the Product Type as Storable." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:68 msgid "Next, click the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab and select one or more routes from the :guilabel:`Routes` section. Doing so tells Odoo which route to use to replenish the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1 msgid "Select one or more routes on the Inventory tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:75 msgid "If the product is reordered using the :guilabel:`Buy` route, confirm that the :guilabel:`Can be Purchased` checkbox is enabled under the product name. This makes the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab appear. Click on the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab, and specify at least one vendor, and the price that they sell the product for, so that Odoo knows which company the product should be purchased from." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1 msgid "Specify a vendor and price on the Purchase tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:84 msgid "If the product is replenished using the :guilabel:`Manufacture` route, it needs to have at least one *bill of materials* (BoM) associated with it. This is necessary because Odoo only creates manufacturing orders for products with a |BoM|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:88 msgid "If a |BoM| does not already exist for the product, select the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button at the top of the product form, then click :guilabel:`New` to configure a new |BoM|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1 msgid "The Bill of Materials smart button on a product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:98 msgid "Create new reordering rules" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:100 msgid "To create a new reordering rule, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Reordering Rules`, then click :guilabel:`New`, and fill out the following fields in the new line:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:103 msgid ":guilabel:`Product`: The product that requires replenishment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:104 msgid ":guilabel:`Location`: The specific location where the product is stored." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:105 msgid ":guilabel:`Min Quantity`: The minimum amount of product that should be available. When inventory levels goes below this number, the replenishment is triggered." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:107 msgid ":guilabel:`Max Quantity`: The amount of product that should be available after replenishing the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:109 msgid ":guilabel:`Multiple Quantity`: If the product should be ordered in specific quantities, enter the number that should be ordered. For example, if the :guilabel:`Multiple Quantity` is set to `5`, and only 3 are needed, 5 products are replenished." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1 msgid "The form for creating a new reordering rule." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:118 msgid "Reordering rules can also be created from the :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` smart button on the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:122 msgid "To learn how the :guilabel:`On Hand`, :guilabel:`Forecast`, and :guilabel:`To Order` fields are calculated using on-hand quantities and future demand, see the :ref:`Just-in-time logic ` section." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:126 msgid "For advanced usage of reordering rules, learn about the following reordering rule fields:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:130 msgid ":ref:`Vendor `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:131 msgid ":ref:`Bill of materials `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:132 msgid ":ref:`Procurement group `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:136 msgid "The fields above are not available by default, and must be enabled by selecting the :icon:`oi-settings-adjust` :guilabel:`(adjust)` icon in the far-right corner and selecting the desired column from the drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:143 msgid "Trigger" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:145 msgid "A reordering rule's *trigger* can be set to *automatic* or *manual*. While both function the same way, the difference between the two types of reordering rules is how the rule is launched:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:148 msgid ":ref:`Auto `: A purchase or manufacturing order is automatically created when the forecasted stock falls below the reordering rule's minimum quantity. By default, the :guilabel:`Auto` trigger is selected." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:151 msgid ":ref:`Manual `: The :doc:`Replenishment report ` lists products needing replenishment, showing current/forecasted stock, lead times, and arrival dates. Users can review forecasts before clicking *Order Once*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:155 msgid "To enable the :guilabel:`Trigger` field, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Replenishment` or :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Reordering Rules`. Then, click the :icon:`oi-settings-adjust` :guilabel:`(adjust)` icon, located to the far-right of the column titles, and tick the :guilabel:`Trigger` checkbox." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:160 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Trigger` column, select :guilabel:`Auto` or :guilabel:`Manual`. Refer to the sections below to learn about the different types of reordering rules." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:166 msgid "Auto" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:168 msgid "*Automatic reordering rules*, enabled by setting the reordering rule's :guilabel:`Trigger` field to :guilabel:`Auto`, generate purchase or manufacturing orders when either:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:171 msgid "The scheduler runs, and the *Forecasted* quantity is below the minimum, or" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:172 msgid "A sales order is confirmed, and lowers the *Forecasted* quantity of the product below the minimum." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:175 msgid "If the :guilabel:`Buy` route is selected, then an |RFQ| is generated. To view and manage |RFQs|, navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Orders --> Requests for Quotation`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:178 msgid "If the :guilabel:`Manufacture` route is selected, then an |MO| is generated. To view and manage |MOs|, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:181 msgid "When no route is selected, Odoo selects the :guilabel:`Route` specified in the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab of the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:185 msgid "The scheduler is set to run once a day, by default." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:187 msgid "To manually trigger a reordering rule before the scheduler runs, ensure :ref:`developer mode ` is enabled, and then select :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Run Scheduler`. Then, select the green :guilabel:`Run Scheduler` button on the pop-up window that appears." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:192 msgid "Be aware that this also triggers *any other* scheduled actions." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:195 msgid "The product, `Office Lamp`, has an automatic reordering rule set to trigger when the forecasted quantity falls below the :guilabel:`Min Quantity` of `5.00`. Since the current :guilabel:`Forecast` is `55.00`, the reordering rule is **not** triggered." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:0 msgid "Show automatic reordering rule from the Reordering Rule page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:208 msgid "*Manual reordering rules*, configured by setting the reordering rule's :guilabel:`Trigger` field to :guilabel:`Manual`, list a product on the :doc:`replenishment dashboard ` when the forecasted quantity falls below a specified minimum. Products on this dashboard are called *needs*, because they are needed to fulfill upcoming sales orders, for which the forecasted quantity is not enough." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:214 msgid "The replenishment dashboard, accessible by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Replenishment`, considers sales order deadlines, forecasted stock levels, and vendor lead times. It displays needs **only** when it is time to reorder items, thanks to the :guilabel:`To Reorder` filter." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1 msgid "Click the Order Once button on the replenishment dashboard to replenish stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:226 msgid "Preferred route" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:228 msgid "Odoo allows for multiple routes to be selected as replenishment methods under the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab on each product form. For instance, it is possible to select both :guilabel:`Buy` and :guilabel:`Manufacture`, indicating to Odoo that the product can be bought or manufactured." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:233 msgid "Odoo also enables users to set a preferred route for a product's reordering rule. This is the route that the rule defaults to if multiple are selected. To select a preferred route, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Reordering Rules` or :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Replenishment`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:238 msgid "Click inside of the column on the row of a reordering rule, and a drop-down menu shows all available routes for that rule. Select one to set it as the preferred route." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1 msgid "Select a preferred route from the drop-down." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:245 msgid "If multiple routes are enabled for a product but no preferred route is set for its reordering rule, the product is reordered using the selected route that is listed first on the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab of the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:250 msgid "Advanced uses" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:252 msgid "Pairing :guilabel:`Preferred Route` with one of the following fields on the replenishment report unlocks advanced configurations of reordering rules. Consider the following:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:257 msgid ":guilabel:`Vendor`: When the selected :guilabel:`Preferred Route` is :guilabel:`Buy`, setting the :guilabel:`Vendor` field to one of the multiple vendors on the vendor pricelist indicates to Odoo that the vendor is automatically populated on |RFQs| when a reordering rule triggers the creation of a purchase order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:264 msgid ":guilabel:`Bill of Materials`: When the :guilabel:`Preferred Route` is set to :guilabel:`Manufacture`, and there are multiple |BoMs| in use, specifying the desired |BoM| in the replenishment report, draft manufacturing orders are created with this |BoM| in use." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:270 msgid ":guilabel:`Procurement Group`: This is a way to group related |POs| or |MOs| that are tied to fulfilling a specific demand, like an |SO| or a project. It helps organize and track which orders are linked to a particular demand." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:275 msgid "Procurement groups link replenishment methods to demand, enabling smart buttons to appear when using the :ref:`MTO route `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:0 msgid "Showing smart button to PO." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:281 msgid "Sales order (demand) with a linked purchase order (replenishment method)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:283 msgid "In the context of reordering rules:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:285 msgid "Reordering rules do not automatically assign a procurement group, which is why there are no smart buttons that link |SOs| to |POs|, unlike the :abbr:`MTO (Make to Order)` route." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:287 msgid "To enable smart buttons for products replenished by reordering rules (not :abbr:`MTO (Make to Order)`), with specific quantities linked to specific demands (e.g. |SOs|), assign a procurement group." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:290 msgid "Without a procurement group, demands for the same product can be combined into a single |RFQ|, even if the reordering rule is executed multiple times for those demands. This allows for more efficient procurement by consolidating demands into fewer orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:294 msgid "Selecting a procurement group in the :guilabel:`Procurement Group` field on the replenishment report ensures that all linked orders are grouped under the same demand, based on the defined route." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:299 msgid "How can you set the *Procurement Group*, *Vendor*, and *Preferred Route* fields on the replenishment report to generate a single |RFQ| for five different products in sales order SO35, given they share the same vendor, Azure Interior, and ensure other demands for these products are handled separately?" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:306 msgid "Set the :guilabel:`Procurement Group` to `SO35`, in the reordering rule for all five products. This groups the demands for `SO35` in the same |RFQ| or |MO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:308 msgid "Set the :guilabel:`Vendor` to `Azure Interior` to ensure the |RFQ| is created for the same supplier." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:310 msgid "Set the :guilabel:`Preferred Route` to :guilabel:`Buy` to generate an |RFQ|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:311 msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Order Once` button to generate a single |RFQ| for the five products tied to `SO35`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:0 msgid "After placing the order, remove `SO35` from the :guilabel:`Procurement Group` field of the five products' reordering rules. This ensures future demands for these products are managed separately and assigned to different |RFQs| (the usual behavior)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:321 msgid "Just-in-time logic" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:323 msgid "*Just-in-time logic* in Odoo minimizes storage costs by placing orders precisely to meet deadlines. This is achieved using the :ref:`forecasted date `, which determines when replenishment is necessary to avoid overstocking." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:327 msgid "The forecasted date is the **earliest possible date** to receive a product if the replenishment process starts immediately. It is calculated by summing the lead times linked to the replenishment process, such as :ref:`vendor lead times ` and :ref:`purchasing delays ` for purchases, or :ref:`manufacturing lead times ` for production. Both automatic and manual reordering rules work this way." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:335 msgid "For a product with a 5-day total lead time and a sales order delivery date in 10 days, Odoo waits 5 days to place the order, ensuring it arrives just in time for delivery." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:338 msgid "Important considerations:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:340 msgid "**If this feels risky**, consider adding buffer time or :doc:`adjusting lead times ` for more flexibility." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:342 msgid "While lead times and just-in-time logic provide additional control, **reordering rules work perfectly fine without them**. Keeping delivery dates on sales orders as their *creation date* ensures purchases are immediately triggered when needed" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:349 msgid "Forecasted date and To Order quantity" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:351 msgid "To view the *forecasted date*, go to the replenishment report and click the :icon:`fa-info-circle` :guilabel:`(info)` icon for the desired reordering rule. The :guilabel:`Replenishment Information` pop-up window displays the :guilabel:`Forecasted Date` and various lead times." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:355 msgid "The *forecasted date* is the total time needed to procure a product in Odoo. It is calculated by summing the lead times linked to the product's replenishment process. The total of these lead times, added to the current date, determines when Odoo checks for demanded stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:360 msgid "The forecasted date is the **earliest possible date** the customer can receive the product if the replenishment process began right **now**. It is calculated by adding all lead times related to the product to the current date." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:365 msgid "A manual reordering rule is set up with no minimum or maximum quantities." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:367 msgid "Vendor lead time is 4 days, the purchase security lead time is 1 day, and the days to purchase is 2 days." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:369 msgid "Today's date is November 26." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:370 msgid "These add up to 7 days, making the forecasted date, December 3rd." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:372 msgid "A confirmed |SO| for 5 units has a delivery date of December 3rd (7 days from today). This demand will appear on the replenishment report today, in the **To Order** field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:375 msgid "However, if the delivery date were later than December 3rd, it would not yet appear on the report. Odoo only displays quantities to replenish when they fall within the forecasted date window, ensuring orders are placed precisely when needed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:0 msgid "Show forecasted date in Odoo." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:382 msgid "The *just-in-time* logic ensures replenishment happens only when it's necessary for the forecasted date's demand, helping avoid overstocking." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:385 msgid "For example:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:387 msgid "If the forecasted quantity drops below the minimum **on** the forecasted date, replenishment must begin immediately to avoid shortages." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:389 msgid "If the quantity drops below the minimum **after** the forecasted date, replenishment can wait." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:391 msgid "The **To Order** quantity is the total demand on the forecasted date." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:393 msgid "By timing purchase orders based on the combined lead times, Odoo optimizes stock levels, keeping inventory minimal while ensuring future requirements are ordered at the last possible moment—strategic procrastination without the stress!" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:398 msgid "Common confusion about forecasted quantities" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:400 msgid "|SOs| due **after** the :guilabel:`Forecasted Date` are not accounted for in the :guilabel:`Forecast` quantities of the reordering rule." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:403 msgid "They are, however, accounted for on the forecasted report that is opened by clicking the :icon:`fa-area-chart` :guilabel:`(graph)` icon on the replenishment report, as this one represents the **long-term forecasted quantity**." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:0 msgid "Forecast and To Order quantities is zero." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:412 msgid "Continuing the above example, when the sales order's deadline is adjusted to December 4th, the :guilabel:`Forecast` and :guilabel:`To Order` quantities are zero." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:0 msgid "Show forecasted report." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:418 msgid "Opening the :guilabel:`Forecasted Report` shows the :guilabel:`Forecasted` units is `5.00`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:423 msgid "Visibility days" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:425 msgid "*Visibility days* enable the ability to determine if additional quantities should be added to the planned replenishment. Odoo checks if forecasted stock on the forecasted date will drop below the minimum in the reordering rule. **Only if** it is time to reorder, visibility days check additional future demand by the specified number of days." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:430 msgid "This feature helps consolidate orders by grouping immediate and near-future needs, reducing transport costs and enabling supplier discounts for larger orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:433 msgid "To set visibility days to incorporate orders for a specified number of days in the future, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Replenishment`, or by clicking the *Reordering Rules* smart button from the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:437 msgid "Next, enable the :guilabel:`Visibility Days` field by clicking the :icon:`oi-settings-adjust` :guilabel:`(adjust)` icon to the far right and choosing the feature from the drop-down menu. Then, enter the desired visibility days." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:442 msgid "The forecasted date is never pushed forward or extended; Odoo only checks the extra visibility days if the stock falls below the minimum threshold on the forecasted date." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:446 msgid "Example where visibility days is triggered" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:448 msgid "A product shipped from Asia has a combined vendor lead time of 30 days and a shipping cost of $100 (including :doc:`landed costs <../../product_management/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs>` and tariffs)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:452 msgid "November 4: Current date. The forecasted date is December 4 (30 days later)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:453 msgid "|SO| 1: Requires the product by Dec 4. Odoo places the order today, costing $100." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:454 msgid "|SO| 2: Requires the product by Dec 19. Normally, Odoo would order on Nov 19, costing an additional $100." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:456 msgid "|SO| 3: Requires the product by Dec 25. Normally, Odoo would order on Nov 25, costing another $100." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:459 msgid "Ordering separately for these sales orders totals $300 in shipping costs." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1 msgid "Show forecasted date visualization." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:464 msgid "Setting :guilabel:`Visibility Days` to `20.0` allows Odoo to \"look ahead\" 20 days from December 4 (|SO| 1's forecasted date) to December 24." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:467 msgid "It groups |SO| 2's order with |SO| 1, reducing shipping costs by consolidating orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:468 msgid "|SO| 3, which is due on Dec 25, is one day late and is not grouped with the other two orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1 msgid "Visibility days visualization." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:474 msgid "Counterexample where visibility days is not triggered" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:476 msgid "Considering the example above, if |SO| 1 does not exist, then:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:478 msgid "**November 4**: Current date. The forecasted date is December 4 (30 days later)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:479 msgid "**November 5**: The forecasted date shifts to December 5." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:480 msgid "|SO| 2: Requires the product by December 19. Odoo will only trigger the order on November 19, meaning the user will not see a replenishment notification until then." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:483 msgid "This shows that visibility days complement just-in-time logic by optimizing it to balance replenishment costs more effectively." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1 msgid "Example where the visibility days does not trigger." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/report.rst:3 msgid "Replenishment report" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/report.rst:8 msgid "The *replenishment report* is an interactive dashboard that uses :doc:`manual reordering rules `, lead times, and upcoming demands to forecast quantities of products that need restocking." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/report.rst:12 msgid "Reordering rules used on this dashboard are normal reordering rules, but the user benefits from a monitoring menu with extra options to manage suggestions for replenishment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/report.rst:15 msgid "This enables users to anticipate future needs, keep less products on hand without the risk of running out, plan and consolidate orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/report.rst:18 msgid "To access the replenishment report, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Replenishment.`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/report.rst:21 msgid "The fields and features unique to the replenishment dashboard are displayed below. For definitions of the other fields, go to the :ref:`Create reordering rules section `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/report.rst:25 msgid "By default, the quantity in the :guilabel:`To Order` field is the quantity required to reach the set :guilabel:`Max Quantity`. However, the :guilabel:`To Order` quantity can be adjusted by clicking on the field and changing the value. To replenish a product manually, click :icon:`fa-truck` :guilabel:`Order Once`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/report.rst:30 msgid "Clicking :icon:`fa-bell-slash` :guilabel:`Snooze` temporarily deactivates the reordering rule for the set period, hiding the entry from the replenishment dashboard, when it is supposed to appear." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/report.rst:34 msgid "Defining a :guilabel:`Vendor` allows filtering or grouping demands by the vendor. This simplifies the process of identifying products to order and can reduce shipment costs." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/report.rst:-1 msgid "Replenishment report that displays recommended quantities to order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/report.rst:41 msgid "Automatic reordering rules appear on this menu, too but are hidden by default." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/report.rst:44 msgid "Replenishment information" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/report.rst:46 msgid "In each line of the replenishment report, clicking the :icon:`fa-info-circle` :guilabel:`(info)` icon opens the :guilabel:`Replenishment Information` pop-up window, which displays the *lead times* and *forecasted date*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/report.rst:50 msgid "For detailed information on how to use this feature for replenishment, go to the :ref:`Just in time logic ` section." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/resupply_warehouses.rst:3 msgid "Resupply from another warehouse" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/resupply_warehouses.rst:5 msgid "A common use case for multiple warehouses is to have one central warehouse that resupplies multiple shops, and in this case, each shop is considered a local warehouse. When a shop wants to replenish a product, the product is ordered to the central warehouse. Odoo allows the user to easily set which warehouse(s) can resupply another warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/resupply_warehouses.rst:13 msgid "To resupply from another warehouse, first go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings --> Warehouse` and activate :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes`. Then, click :guilabel:`Save` to apply the setting." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/resupply_warehouses.rst:-1 msgid "Enable Multi-Step Routes in Inventory settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/resupply_warehouses.rst:21 msgid "View all the configured warehouses by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouses`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/resupply_warehouses.rst:24 msgid "Create a new warehouse by clicking :guilabel:`Create`. Then, give the warehouse a name and a :guilabel:`Short Name`. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save` to finish creating the warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/resupply_warehouses.rst:27 msgid "After that, go back to the :guilabel:`Warehouses` page and open the warehouse that will be resupplied by the second warehouse. Then, click :guilabel:`Edit`. In the :guilabel:`Warehouse Configuration` tab, locate the :guilabel:`Resupply From` field, and check the box next to the second warehouse's name. If the warehouse can be resupplied by more than one warehouse, make sure to check those warehouses' boxes too. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save` to apply the setting. Now, Odoo knows which warehouses can resupply this warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/resupply_warehouses.rst:-1 msgid "Supply one warehouse with another in the Warehouse Configuration tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/resupply_warehouses.rst:39 msgid "Set route on a product" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/resupply_warehouses.rst:41 msgid "After configuring which warehouse(s) to resupply from, a new route is now available on all product forms. The new route appears as :guilabel:`Supply Product from [Warehouse Name]` under the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab on a product form. Use the :guilabel:`Supply Product from [Warehouse Name]` route with a reordering rule or the make to order (MTO) route to replenish stock by moving the product from one warehouse to another." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/resupply_warehouses.rst:-1 msgid "Route setting which enables a product to resupplied from a second warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/resupply_warehouses.rst:51 msgid "When a product's reordering rule is triggered and the product has the :guilabel:`Supply Product from [Warehouse Name]` route set, Odoo automatically creates two pickings. One picking is a *delivery order* from the second warehouse, which contains all the necessary products, and the second picking is a *receipt* with the same products for the main warehouse. The product move from the second warehouse to the main warehouse is fully tracked in Odoo." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/resupply_warehouses.rst:57 msgid "On the picking/transfer records created by Odoo, the :guilabel:`Source Document` is the product's reordering rule. The location between the delivery order and the receipt is a transit location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/resupply_warehouses.rst:-1 msgid "A reordering rule automatically creates two receipts for stock between warehouses." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/resupply_warehouses.rst:-1 msgid "A warehouse order for resupplying one warehouse's stock with another." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/resupply_warehouses.rst:-1 msgid "A receipt for stock received to one warehouse from another." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:3 msgid "Transfer products between warehouses using replenishment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:5 msgid "For companies that use multiple warehouses, it is often necessary to transfer items between them. This is referred to as an *inter-warehouse transfer*. Odoo *Inventory* handles the administrative process of inter-warehouse transfers to ensure that inventory counts remain accurate during and after the transfer. This document will detail the method for conducting an inter-warehouse transfer using replenishment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:12 msgid "Configure warehouses for inter-warehouse replenishment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:14 msgid "First, ensure the :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` setting is enabled by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`, and then check the box under the :guilabel:`Warehouse` tab. This will provide additional configuration options when creating a second warehouse that are needed for inter-warehouse replenishment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:19 msgid "By default, Odoo comes with a main warehouse already configured. If an additional warehouse has not already been created, do so now from the :guilabel:`Inventory` module by selecting :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouses --> Create`. Otherwise, select the warehouse that products will be transferred to from the :guilabel:`Warehouses` page and then click :guilabel:`Edit` to change its settings. Configure the warehouse as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:25 msgid ":guilabel:`Warehouse`: choose a name that is not already being used for another warehouse (e.g. `Alternative Warehouse`)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:27 msgid ":guilabel:`Short Name`: choose a short name by which the warehouse will be identified (e.g. `ALT_WH`)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:30 msgid "Click :guilabel:`Save` and the new warehouse will be created. In addition, a new :guilabel:`Resupply From` field will appear on the warehouse's form. Click :guilabel:`Edit` and then check the box next to the warehouse that will be used to resupply the warehouse that is currently being configured." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:-1 msgid "A warehouse settings form configured to allow resupplying between warehouses." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:39 msgid "For the purposes of this demonstration, the warehouse that products are transferred from (outgoing) will be titled \"San Francisco\", and the warehouse that products are transferred to (incoming) will be titled \"San Francisco 2\"." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:44 msgid "Configure products for inter-warehouse replenishment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:46 msgid "Products must also be configured properly in order for them to be transferred between warehouses. Navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Products` and select an existing product or :guilabel:`Create` a new one, if necessary." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:50 msgid "Then, on the product form, go to the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab and enable the checkbox for :guilabel:`X: Supply Product from Y`, with *X* being the warehouse receiving the transferred products and *Y* being the warehouse that products are transferred from." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:-1 msgid "Enable the checkbox to resupply one warehouse from another." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:59 msgid "Replenish one warehouse from another" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:61 msgid "Starting in the :menuselection:`Inventory` module, select :menuselection:`Products --> Products` and then choose the product that will be replenished. Click the :guilabel:`Replenish` button on the top left of the product page and fill out the pop-up form as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:65 msgid ":guilabel:`Quantity`: the number of units that will be sent to the warehouse being replenished" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:66 msgid ":guilabel:`Scheduled Date`: the date that the replenishment is scheduled to take place" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:67 msgid ":guilabel:`Warehouse`: the warehouse that will be replenished" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:68 msgid ":guilabel:`Preferred Routes`: select `X: Supply Product from Y`, with *X* being the warehouse to be replenished and *Y* being the warehouse that the product will be transferred from" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:-1 msgid "The form for replenishing a product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:75 msgid "Click :guilabel:`Confirm` and a delivery order will be created for the outgoing warehouse along with a receipt for the warehouse that will receive the product. Depending on the configuration settings for the outgoing and incoming warehouses, processing delivery orders and receipts will require between one and three steps. This document will detail how to process one-step deliveries and receipts." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:82 msgid "Process the delivery order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:84 msgid "The first stage of a replenishment order is processing the delivery from the warehouse that the product is being transferred from. On the :menuselection:`Inventory` dashboard, select the :guilabel:`X to Process` button on the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` card for the outgoing warehouse, then the delivery order created for the replenishment. On the delivery order page, click the :guilabel:`Check Availability` button in the top left to reserve the quantity of the product to be transferred. Once the delivery has been dispatched, click the :guilabel:`Validate` button to register the quantities shipped." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:-1 msgid "The delivery orders card for the outgoing warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:99 msgid "Once the goods arrive at the incoming warehouse, the receipt created for that warehouse must be processed as well. Return to the :menuselection:`Inventory` dashboard and select the :guilabel:`X to Process` button on the :guilabel:`Receipts` card for the incoming warehouse, then the receipt created for the replenishment. On the receipt page, click the :guilabel:`Validate` button in the top left of the page to register the quantities received." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:109 msgid "After processing the receipt, the products transferred will now appear in the inventory of the incoming warehouse. The stock numbers for both warehouses can be viewed by returning to the product page and selecting the :guilabel:`X Units On Hand` button at the top of the screen." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:114 msgid "Automate inter-warehouse replenishment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:116 msgid "Using reordering rules, it is possible to automate the process of replenishing one warehouse from another." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:119 msgid "To get started, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Products`, and then choose the product that will be replenished. From the product page, select the :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` smart button at the top of the form, and then on the next page, click :guilabel:`Create` to configure the form as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:124 msgid ":guilabel:`Location`: the location that the reordering rule will replenish when triggered, in this case, the incoming warehouse" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:126 msgid ":guilabel:`Min Quantity`: when the quantity on hand at the incoming warehouse falls below this number, the reordering rule will be triggered" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:128 msgid ":guilabel:`Max Quantity`: when the reordering rule is triggered, the product will be replenished at the incoming warehouse up to this quantity" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:130 msgid ":guilabel:`Multiple Quantity`: specify if the product should be replenished in batches of a certain quantity; for example, a product could be replenished in batches of 20" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:132 msgid ":guilabel:`UoM`: the unit of measure used for reordering the product; this value can simply be `Units`, or a specific unit of measurement for weight, length, etc." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:-1 msgid "A fully configured reordering rule." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:139 msgid "Finish by clicking :guilabel:`Save` and the reordering rule will be created. Now, when the scheduler runs automatically each day, a transfer will be created for each reordering rule that has been triggered." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:144 msgid "To manually trigger reordering rules, start from the :menuselection:`Inventory` module and select :menuselection:`Operation --> Run Scheduler`, then click the green :guilabel:`Run Scheduler` button in the pop-up that appears." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/replenishment/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:148 msgid "After the scheduler runs, a delivery order and receipt will be created for the outgoing and incoming warehouses, respectively. Both the delivery order and receipt should be processed using the same method as detailed above." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance.rst:8 msgid "Maintenance" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance.rst:10 msgid "**Odoo Maintenance** helps extend the effectiveness of equipment by keeping track of maintenance requirements." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance.rst:14 msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Managing Equipment Maintenance `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management.rst:5 msgid "Equipment management" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:3 msgid "Add new equipment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:7 msgid "In Odoo, *equipment* refers to any item that is used in everyday operations, including the manufacturing of products. This can mean a piece of machinery on a production line, a tool that is used in different locations, or a computer in an office space. Equipment registered in Odoo can be owned by the company that uses the Odoo database, or by a third party, such as a vendor in the case of equipment rentals." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:13 msgid "Using Odoo *Maintenance*, it is possible to track individual pieces of equipment, along with information about their maintenance requirements. To add a new piece of equipment, navigate to the :guilabel:`Maintenance` module, select :menuselection:`Equipments --> Machines & Tools --> Create`, and configure the equipment as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:18 msgid ":guilabel:`Equipment Name`: the product name of the piece of equipment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:19 msgid ":guilabel:`Equipment Category`: the category that the equipment belongs to; for example, computers, machinery, tools, etc.; new categories can be created by navigating to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Equipment Categories` and clicking :guilabel:`Create`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:22 msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: the company that owns the equipment; again, this can be the company that uses the Odoo database, or a third-party company" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:24 msgid ":guilabel:`Used By`: specify if the equipment is used by a specific employee, department, or both; select :guilabel:`Other` to specify both an employee and a department" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:26 msgid ":guilabel:`Maintenance Team`: the team responsible for servicing the equipment; new teams can be created by navigating to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Maintenance Teams` and selecting :guilabel:`Create`; the members of each team can also be assigned from this page" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:29 msgid ":guilabel:`Technician`: the person responsible for servicing the equipment; this can be used to assign a specific individual in the event that no maintenance team is assigned or when a specific member of the assigned team should always be responsible for the equipment; any person added to Odoo as a user can be assigned as a technician" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:33 msgid ":guilabel:`Used in location`: the location where the equipment is used; this is a simple text field that can be used to specify locations that are not work centers, like an office, for example" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:36 msgid ":guilabel:`Work Center`: if the equipment is used at a work center, specify it here; equipment can also be assigned to a work center by navigating to :menuselection:`Maintenance --> Equipments --> Work Centers`, selecting a work center or creating a new one using the :guilabel:`Create` button, and clicking the :guilabel:`Equipment` tab on the work center form" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:-1 msgid "An example of a fully configured new equipment form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:46 msgid "Include additional product information" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:48 msgid "The :guilabel:`Product Information` tab at the bottom of the form can be used to provide further details about the piece of equipment:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:51 msgid ":guilabel:`Vendor`: the vendor that the equipment was purchased from" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:52 msgid ":guilabel:`Vendor Reference`: the reference code assigned to the vendor" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:53 msgid ":guilabel:`Model`: the specific model of the piece of equipment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:54 msgid ":guilabel:`Serial Number`: the unique serial number of the equipment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:55 msgid ":guilabel:`Effective Date`: the date that the equipment became available for use; this is used to calculate the :abbr:`MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures)`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:57 msgid ":guilabel:`Cost`: the amount the equipment was purchased for" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:58 msgid ":guilabel:`Warranty Expiration Date`: the date on which the equipment's warranty will expire" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:-1 msgid "The product information tab for the new piece of equipment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:65 msgid "Add maintenance details" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:67 msgid "The :guilabel:`Maintenance` tab includes information that can be useful to maintenance teams:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:69 msgid ":guilabel:`Preventive Maintenance Frequency`: specifies how often maintenance should be performed to prevent equipment failure" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:71 msgid ":guilabel:`Maintenance Duration`: the amount of time required to fix the equipment when it fails" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:72 msgid ":guilabel:`Expected Mean Time Between Failure`: the average amount of time that the equipment is expected to operate before failing" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:-1 msgid "The maintenance tab for the new piece of equipment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:80 msgid "The :guilabel:`Maintenance` tab also includes sections for :guilabel:`Mean Time Between Failure`, :guilabel:`Estimated Next Failure`, :guilabel:`Latest Failure`, and :guilabel:`Mean Time To Repair`. These values are calculated automatically based on maintenance requests if any exist." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment.rst:86 msgid "To see the maintenance requests for a piece of equipment, go to the page for the equipment and select :guilabel:`Maintenance` in the top right corner of the form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing.rst:8 msgid "Manufacturing" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing.rst:10 msgid "**Odoo Manufacturing** helps manufacturers schedule, plan, and process manufacturing orders. With the work center control panel, put tablets on the shop floor to control work orders in real-time and allow workers to trigger maintenance operations, feedback loops, quality issues, etc." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing.rst:15 msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: MRP `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing.rst:16 msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Barcode Scanner `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing.rst:17 msgid ":doc:`IoT Boxes (MES) `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management.rst:5 msgid "Manufacturing workflows" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:3 msgid "Bill of materials" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:7 msgid "A *bill of materials* (or *BoM* for short) is a document that defines the quantity of each component required to make or deliver a finished product. It can also include various operations and the individual step guidelines needed to complete a production process." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:11 msgid "In Odoo Manufacturing, multiple :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)` can be linked to each product, so even product variants can have their own tailored :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:14 msgid "Correctly setting up a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` helps optimize the manufacturing process and save time." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:18 msgid "Set up a bill of materials (BoM)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:20 msgid "The simplest :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` setup is one without operations or instructions, only components. In this case, the production is solely managed using *Manufacturing Orders*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:23 msgid "To create a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` from the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` module, go to :menuselection:`Products --> Bills of Materials`. Then, click :guilabel:`Create`. Next, specify the :guilabel:`Product`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:28 msgid "A :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` can also be created directly from the product form, in which case the :guilabel:`Product` field is pre-filled." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:31 msgid "For a standard :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, set the :guilabel:`BoM Type` to :guilabel:`Manufacture this Product`. Then, click :guilabel:`Add a Line` to specify the various components that make up the production of the final product and their respective quantities. New components can be created quickly through the :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, or can be created beforehand in :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Products --> Products --> Create`. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save` to finish creating the :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:-1 msgid "Set up a Bill of Materials." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:43 msgid "Specify a bill of materials (BoM) for a product variant" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:45 msgid ":abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)` can also be assigned to specific *Product Variants*, with two setup options available to choose from." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:49 msgid "In order to assign :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)` to product variants, the product's variant attributes must already be configured on the product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:52 msgid "The first method is to create one :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` per variant by creating a new :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` and specifying the :guilabel:`Product Variant`. The second method is to create one master :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` that contains all of the components, and specify which variant each component applies to using the :guilabel:`Apply on Variants` column." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:-1 msgid "Product Variants in the Bill of Materials." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:62 msgid "Set up operations" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:64 msgid "Add an :guilabel:`Operation` to a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` to specify instructions for production and register time spent on an operation. To use this feature, first enable the :guilabel:`Work Orders` feature in :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Configuration --> Settings --> Operations`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:69 msgid "Then, when creating a new :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, click on the :guilabel:`Operations` tab and click :guilabel:`Add a line` to add a new operation. In the :guilabel:`Create Operations` box, give the operation a name, specify the :guilabel:`Work Center` and duration settings. Like components, Odoo gives the option to specify a product variant in the :guilabel:`Apply on Variants` field so the operation only applies to that variant. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save & Close`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:76 msgid "Each operation is unique, as it is always exclusively linked to one :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`. Operations can be reused when configuring a new :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, with the :guilabel:`Copy Existing Operations` feature." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:-1 msgid "Copy Existing Operations feature." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:85 msgid "Add by-products to a bill of materials (BoM)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:87 msgid "A *By-Product* is a residual product that is created during production in addition to the main product of a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`. Unlike the primary product, there can be more than one by-product on a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:91 msgid "To add by-products to a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, first enable the :guilabel:`By-Products` feature in :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Configuration --> Settings --> Operations`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:94 msgid "Once the feature is enabled, you can add by-products to a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` by clicking on the :guilabel:`Operations` tab and clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`. Then, name the by-product and indicate the :guilabel:`Quantity` and the :guilabel:`Unit of Measure`. If the :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` has configured operations, specify exactly which operation the by-product is produced from in the :guilabel:`Produced in Operation` field. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:3 msgid "Manufacturing product configuration" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:8 msgid "In order to manufacture a product in Odoo *Manufacturing*, the product must be properly configured. Doing so consists of enabling the *Manufacturing* route and configuring a bill of materials (BoM) for the product. Once these steps are completed, the product is selectable when creating a new manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:14 msgid "Activate the Manufacture route" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:16 msgid "The Manufacture route is activated for each product on its own product page. To do so, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Products --> Products`. Then, select an existing product, or create a new one by clicking :guilabel:`New`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:20 msgid "On the product page, select the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab, then enable the :guilabel:`Manufacture` checkbox in the :guilabel:`Routes` section. This tells Odoo the product can be manufactured." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:-1 msgid "The Manufacturing route on the Inventory tab of a product page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:28 msgid "Configure a bill of materials (BoM)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:30 msgid "Next, a |BOM| must be configured for the product so Odoo knows how it is manufactured. A |BOM| is a list of the components and operations required to manufacture a product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:33 msgid "To create a |BOM| for a specific product, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Products --> Products`, then select the product. On the product page, click the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button at the top of the page, then select :guilabel:`New` to configure a new |BOM|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:-1 msgid "The Bill of Materials smart button on a product page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:41 msgid "On the |BOM|, the :guilabel:`Product` field auto-populates with the product. In the :guilabel:`Quantity` field, specify the number of units that the BoM produces." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:44 msgid "Add a component to the |BOM| by selecting the :guilabel:`Components` tab and clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`. Select a component from the :guilabel:`Component` drop-down menu, then enter the quantity in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field. Continue adding components on new lines until all components have been added." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:-1 msgid "The Components tab on a bill of materials." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:53 msgid "Next, select the :guilabel:`Operations` tab. Click :guilabel:`Add a line` and a :guilabel:`Create Operations` pop-up window appears. In the :guilabel:`Operation` field, specify the name of the operation being added (e.g. Assemble, Cut, etc.). Select the work center where the operation will be carried out from the :guilabel:`Work Center` drop-down menu. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save & Close` to finish adding operations, or :guilabel:`Save & New` to add more." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:60 msgid "The :guilabel:`Operations` tab only appears if the :guilabel:`Work Orders` setting is enabled. To do so, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Configuration --> Settings`, then enable the :guilabel:`Work Orders` checkbox." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:-1 msgid "The Operations tab on a bill of materials." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:70 msgid "The section above provides instructions for creating a basic |BOM| that allows a product to be manufactured in Odoo. However, it is by no means an exhaustive summary of all the options available when configuring a |BOM|. For more information about bills of materials, see the documentation on how to :ref:`create a bill of materials `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:3 msgid "Use kits" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:5 msgid "In Odoo, a *kit* is a type of bill of materials (BoM) that can be manufactured and sold. Kits are sets of unassembled components sold to customers. They may be sold as standalone products, but are also useful tools for managing more complex bills of materials (BoMs)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:10 msgid "To use, manufacture, and sell kits, both the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` and :guilabel:`Inventory` apps need to be installed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:14 msgid "Create the kit as a product" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:16 msgid "To use a kit as a sellable product, or simply as a component organization tool, the kit should first be created as a product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:19 msgid "To create a kit product, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and click :guilabel:`Create`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:22 msgid "Then, assign a name to the new kit product. Next, under the :guilabel:`General Information` tab, set the :guilabel:`Product Type` to :guilabel:`Consumable`. Kit products work best as consumables, because the stock on-hand for kits is typically not tracked." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:27 msgid "Although kits should almost always be set to :guilabel:`Consumable`, companies using **Anglo-Saxon** accounting might need to create kits as a :guilabel:`Storable Product`. This is because when processing invoices for kits, the Cost of Goods Sold (COGS) will be posted in accounting journals." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:32 msgid "Unlike storable products, the :guilabel:`Routes` designation under the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab does not matter for kits, since Odoo uses the routes of the kit's individual components for replenishment purposes. All other parameters for the kit product may be modified according to preference. Once ready, click :guilabel:`Save` to save the new product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:37 msgid "The kit's components must also be configured as products via :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`. These components require no specific configuration." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:41 msgid "Set up the kit BoM" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:43 msgid "After fully configuring the kit product and its components, a new :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` can be created for the kit product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:46 msgid "To do so, go to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Products --> Bills of Materials`, and click :guilabel:`Create`. Next to the :guilabel:`Product` field, click the drop-down menu to reveal a list of products, and select the previously configured kit product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:50 msgid "Then, for the :guilabel:`BoM Type` field, select the :guilabel:`Kit` option. Finally, under the :guilabel:`Components` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a line`, and add each desired component, and specify their quantities under the :guilabel:`Quantity` column." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:54 msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Save` to save the newly-created :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:-1 msgid "Kit selection on the bill of materials." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:60 msgid "If the kit is solely being used as a sellable product, then only components need to be added under the :guilabel:`Components` tab, and configuring manufacturing operations is not necessary." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:64 msgid "When a kit is sold as a product, it appears as a single line item on the quotation and sales order. However, on delivery orders, each component of the kit is listed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:68 msgid "Use kits to manage complex BoMs" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:70 msgid "Kits are also used to manage multi-level :abbr:`BoMs (bills of materials)`. These are products that contain **other** :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` products as components, and therefore require *nested* :abbr:`BoMs (bills of materials)`. Incorporating pre-configured kits into multi-level :abbr:`BoMs (bills of materials)` allows for cleaner organization of bundled products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:75 msgid "To configure this type of :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` with a kit as a component, go to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Products --> Bills of Materials`, and click :guilabel:`Create`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:79 msgid "Next to the :guilabel:`Product` field, click the drop-down menu to reveal a list of products, and select the desired :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` product. Then, for the :guilabel:`BoM Type` field, select the :guilabel:`Manufacture this product` option." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:83 msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Components` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a line`, and select a kit as the component. Adding the kit as a component eliminates the need to add the kit's components individually. Any :guilabel:`BoM Type` can be used for the higher-level product's :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:88 msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:-1 msgid "Kit as a component in a multilevel bill of materials." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:95 msgid "Structure & cost" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:97 msgid "To access a comprehensive overview of the multi-level :abbr:`BoM's (bill of material's)` components, click on the :guilabel:`Structure & Cost` smart button. Sublevel :abbr:`BoMs (bills of materials)` can be expanded and viewed from this report." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:-1 msgid "Expanded kit in the Structure and Cost report." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:105 msgid "When creating a manufacturing order for a product with a multi-level :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)`, the kit product automatically expands to show all components. Any operations in the kit's :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` are also added to the list of work orders on the manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:111 msgid "Kits are primarily used to bundle components together for organization or sale. To manage multi-level products that require manufactured sub-components, refer to :doc:`this documentation ` on sub-assemblies." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:3 msgid "Manufacturing backorders" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:5 msgid "In some cases, the full quantity of a manufacturing order cannot be produced immediately. When this happens, Odoo *Manufacturing* allows for the manufacturing of partial quantities of the order and creates a *backorder* for the remaining amount." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:9 msgid "In the *Manufacturing* app, creating a backorder splits the original manufacturing order into two orders. The reference tag for each order is the tag used for the original order, followed by a hyphen and then an additional number to indicate that it's a backorder." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:14 msgid "A company creates a manufacturing order with the reference tag *WH/MO/00175*, for 10 units of *Product X*. After starting work on the manufacturing order, the employee working the production line realizes there are only enough components in stock to produce five units of the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:18 msgid "Instead of waiting for additional stock of the components, they manufacture five units and create a backorder for the remaining five. This splits the manufacturing order into two separate orders: *WH/MO/00175-001* and *WH/MO/00175-002*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:22 msgid "Order *001* contains the five units that have been manufactured, and is immediately marked as :guilabel:`Done`. Order *002* contains the five units that still need to be manufactured and is marked as :guilabel:`In Progress`. Once the remaining components are available, the employee returns to order *002* and manufactures the remaining units before closing the order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:28 msgid "Create a manufacturing backorder" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:30 msgid "To create a backorder for part of a manufacturing order, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`. Select a manufacturing order with a quantity of two or more or create one by clicking :guilabel:`Create`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:34 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:86 msgid "If a new manufacturing order is created, select a product from the :guilabel:`Product` drop-down menu and enter a quantity of two or more in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field, then click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:38 msgid "After manufacturing the quantity that is being produced immediately, enter that number in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field at the top of the manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:-1 msgid "The quantity field on a manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:45 msgid "Next, click :guilabel:`Validate`, and a :guilabel:`You produced less than initial demand` pop-up window appears, from which a backorder can be created. Click :guilabel:`Create Backorder` to split the manufacturing order into two separate orders, with the reference tags *WH/MO/XXXXX-001* and *WH/MO/XXXXX-002*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:-1 msgid "The Create Backorder button on the \"You produced less than initial demand\" pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:54 msgid "Order *001* contains the items that have been manufactured, and is closed immediately. Order *002* is the backorder that contains the items that have yet to be manufactured, and remains open, to be completed at a later date." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:58 msgid "Once the remaining units can be manufactured, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and then select the backorder manufacturing order. If all of the remaining units are manufactured immediately, simply click :guilabel:`Validate` to close the order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:63 msgid "If only some of the remaining units are manufactured immediately, create another backorder for the remainder by following the steps detailed in this section." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:67 msgid "Create a backorder from tablet view" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:69 msgid "Backorders for manufacturing orders can also be created from the work order tablet view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:72 msgid "In order to use tablet view, the *Work Orders* setting must be enabled. To enable it, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Configuration --> Settings`. On the :guilabel:`Settings` page, enable the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Work Orders`, then click :guilabel:`Save` to save the change. This makes the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab appear on manufacturing orders, from which the tablet view can be opened." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:0 msgid "The Work Orders setting on the Manufacturing settings page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:82 msgid "To create a backorder from the tablet view, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`. Select a manufacturing order with a quantity of two or more or create one by clicking :guilabel:`Create`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:90 msgid "After confirming the manufacturing order, select the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab and click the :guilabel:`📱 (tablet view)` button located on the line of the first work order to enter the tablet view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:-1 msgid "The tablet view button for a work order on a manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:97 msgid "Once in tablet view, enter the quantity being manufactured immediately in the :guilabel:`Units` field at the top left of the tablet view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:-1 msgid "The Units field in the tablet view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:104 msgid "The steps for the rest of the workflow depend on whether the manufacturing order being processed requires the completion of a single work order or multiple work orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:108 msgid "Single work order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:110 msgid "If the manufacturing order only requires the completion of a single work order, complete the work order, then click :guilabel:`Mark As Done And Close MO`. The manufacturing order is closed and a backorder for the units that still need to be manufactured is created automatically." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:-1 msgid "The Mark As Done And Close MO button in the tablet view of a work order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:118 msgid "Once the remaining units are ready to be manufactured, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, then select the backorder manufacturing order, which is titled using the reference tag of the original backorder with *002* added to the end." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:122 msgid "On the backorder manufacturing order, select the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab and click the :guilabel:`📱 (tablet view)` button located on the line of the work order to open the tablet view. If all of the units in the backorder will be completed immediately, simply click :guilabel:`Mark As Done And Close MO` after completing the work order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:127 msgid "If only some of the remaining units will be manufactured immediately, enter the number in the :guilabel:`Units` field at the top left of the tablet view, then click :guilabel:`Mark As Done And Close MO` to create another backorder for the remaining units. The new backorder can be processed using the steps detailed in this section." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:133 msgid "Multiple work orders" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:135 msgid "If the manufacturing order requires the completion of multiple work orders, complete the first work order, and then click :guilabel:`Record Production`. This splits the manufacturing order into two separate orders, titled *WH/MO/XXXXX-001* and *WH/MO/XXXXX-002*, with *XXXXX* being the number of the original order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:-1 msgid "The Record Production button on a work order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:144 msgid "The tablet view defaults to showing the first work order for the *002* manufacturing order. Since this manufacturing order will not be completed immediately, back out of tablet view by clicking the :guilabel:`⬅️ (back)` button twice. Doing so will take you to the *001* order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:148 msgid "To finish the *001* order, select the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab and click the :guilabel:`tablet view` button located on the line of the next work order. Finally, complete the remaining work orders, then click :guilabel:`Mark As Done And Close MO` to close the manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:152 msgid "Once the remaining units are ready to be manufactured, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, then select the *002* order. Select the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab and click the :guilabel:`tablet view` button located on the line of the first work order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:157 msgid "If all of the units in the backorder will be completed immediately, simply click :guilabel:`Mark As Done And Close MO` after completing all of the work orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:160 msgid "If only some of the remaining units will be manufactured immediately, enter the number in the :guilabel:`Units` field at the top left of the tablet view, then click :guilabel:`Record Production` to create an additional backorder for the remaining units, with *003* at the end of its reference tag." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:165 msgid "The *002* backorder and *003* backorder can be completed by following the steps detailed in this section." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:169 msgid "It is also possible to create a backorder in the middle of a manufacturing order, when some but not all of the work orders have already been completed. Doing so marks the completed work order(s) as :guilabel:`Finished` on the backorder." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:174 msgid "A manufacturing order for four chairs requires the completion of two work orders: *Paint* and *Assemble*. While the paint step can be completed immediately for all four chairs, there are only enough screws to assemble two of them." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:178 msgid "As a result, the employee responsible for producing the chairs begins by painting all four, and marking the *Paint* work order as :guilabel:`Finished` for all of them. Then, they move on to the *Assemble* work order. They assemble two of the four chairs, enter that number in the :guilabel:`Units` field of the tablet view, and click :guilabel:`Record Production`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:183 msgid "A backorder manufacturing order is created for the remaining two chairs. On the backorder, the *Paint* work order is already marked as :guilabel:`Finished`, and only the *Assemble* work order is left to be completed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/manufacturing_backorders.rst:187 msgid "Once more screws are available, the manufacturing employee assembles the remaining chairs and clicks :guilabel:`Mark As Done And Close MO` to complete the *Assemble* work order and close the backorder manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:3 msgid "One-step manufacturing" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:9 msgid "Odoo *Manufacturing* allows users to manufacture products using one, two, or three steps. When using one-step manufacturing, Odoo creates a manufacturing order (MO), but does not generate transfers for the movement of components out of inventory or finished products into stock. Inventory counts still update based on the number of components used and products manufactured, but the act of transferring them to and from inventory is not tracked." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:16 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:15 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:16 msgid "The number of steps used in manufacturing is set at the warehouse level, allowing for each warehouse to use a different number of steps. To change the number of steps used for a specific warehouse, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouses`, and then select a warehouse from the :guilabel:`Warehouses` screen." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:21 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:20 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:21 msgid "On the :guilabel:`Warehouse Configuration` tab, find the :guilabel:`Manufacture` radio input field, and select one of the three options: :guilabel:`Manufacture (1 step)`, :guilabel:`Pick components and then manufacture (2 steps)`, or :guilabel:`Pick components, manufacture and then store products (3 steps)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:0 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:0 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:0 msgid "The Manufacture radio input field on a warehouse configuration page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:31 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:30 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:31 msgid "Products must be properly configured before they can be manufactured in Odoo. For details on how to do so, see the documentation on how to :ref:`configure a product for manufacturing `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:36 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:35 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:36 msgid "Create manufacturing order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:38 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:37 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:38 msgid "To manufacture a product in Odoo *Manufacturing*, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and then click :guilabel:`New` to create a new |MO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:42 msgid "On the new |MO|, select the product to be produced from the :guilabel:`Product` drop-down menu. The :guilabel:`Bill of Material` field auto-populates with the associated bill of materials (BoM)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:45 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:44 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:45 msgid "If a product has more than one |BOM| configured for it, the specific |BOM| can be selected in the :guilabel:`Bill of Material` field, and the :guilabel:`Product` field auto-populates with the associated product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:49 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:48 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:49 msgid "After a |BOM| has been selected, the :guilabel:`Components` and :guilabel:`Work Orders` tabs auto-populate with the components and operations specified on the |BOM|. If additional components or operations are required for the |MO| being configured, add them to the :guilabel:`Components` and :guilabel:`Work Orders` tabs by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:55 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:80 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:77 msgid "Process manufacturing order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:57 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:82 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:79 msgid "An |MO| is processed by completing all of the work orders listed under its :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab. This can be done on the |MO| itself, or from the work order tablet view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:61 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:86 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:83 msgid "Basic workflow" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:63 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:85 msgid "To complete work orders from the |MO| itself, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and then select an |MO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:66 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:91 msgid "On the |MO| page, select the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab. Once work begins on the first work order that needs to be completed, click the :guilabel:`Start` button for that work order. Odoo *Manufacturing* then starts a timer that keeps track of how long the work order takes to complete." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:-1 msgid "The Start button for an operation on a manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:74 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:99 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:96 msgid "When the work order is completed, click the :guilabel:`Done` button for that work order. Repeat the same process for each work order listed on the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:-1 msgid "The Done button for an operation on a manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:81 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:106 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:103 msgid "After completing all of the work orders, click :guilabel:`Produce All` at the top of the screen to mark the |MO| as :guilabel:`Done`, and register the manufactured product(s) into inventory." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:85 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:110 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:107 msgid "Tablet view workflow" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:87 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:112 msgid "To complete the work orders for an |MO| using the tablet view, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and then select a manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:91 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:116 msgid "Next, click on the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab, and then select the :guilabel:`📱 (tablet)` button on the line of the first work order to be processed. This opens the tablet view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:98 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:123 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:119 msgid "After opening the tablet view, Odoo *Manufacturing* automatically starts a timer that keeps track of how long the work order takes to complete. After completing the work order, click the :guilabel:`Mark as Done` button in the top-right corner of the tablet view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:102 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:127 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:123 msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Mark as Done` while there is at least one more work order left to complete opens a page that lists the next work order. Click on that work order to open it in the tablet view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:105 msgid "Once the final work order for the |MO| has been reached, a :guilabel:`Mark as Done and Close MO` button appears on the tablet view in addition to the :guilabel:`Mark as Done` button. Click :guilabel:`Mark as Done and Close MO` to mark the |MO| as :guilabel:`Done` and register the manufactured product(s) into inventory." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/one_step_manufacturing.rst:110 msgid "It is also possible to complete the final operation while keeping the |MO| open, by clicking :guilabel:`Mark as Done`. In this case, the |MO| can be closed later by clicking the :guilabel:`Produce All` button on the order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:3 msgid "Managing BoMs for product variants" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:5 msgid "Odoo allows one bill of materials (BoM) to be used for multiple variants of the same product. Having a consolidated :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` for a product with variants saves time by preventing the need to manage multiple :abbr:`BoMs (bills of materials)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:10 msgid "Activate product variants" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:12 msgid "To activate the product variants feature, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Products` section. Then, click the checkbox to enable the :guilabel:`Variants` option. After that, click :guilabel:`Save` to apply the setting." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:17 msgid "For more information on configuring product variants, refer to the :doc:`product variants <../../../sales/sales/products_prices/products/variants>` documentation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:-1 msgid "Selecting \"Variants\" from Inventory app settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:25 msgid "Create custom product attributes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:27 msgid "Once the product variants feature is activated, create and edit product attributes on the :guilabel:`Attributes` page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:30 msgid "The :guilabel:`Attributes` page is accessible either from :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings` by clicking the :guilabel:`Attributes` button, or by clicking :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Attributes`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:34 msgid "Once on the :guilabel:`Attributes` page, either click into an existing attribute, or click :guilabel:`Create` to create a new one. Clicking :guilabel:`Create` reveals a new, blank form for customizing an attribute. For an existing attribute, click :guilabel:`Edit` on its form to make changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:39 msgid "Assign an :guilabel:`Attribute Name`, and choose a category from the :guilabel:`Category` field's drop-down menu. Then, select the desired options next to the :guilabel:`Display Type` and :guilabel:`Variants Creation Mode` fields. Once the desired options are selected, click :guilabel:`Add a line` under the :guilabel:`Attribute Values` tab to add a new value." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:45 msgid "Included on the :guilabel:`Value` row is a :guilabel:`Is custom value` checkbox. If selected, this value will be recognized as a custom value, which allows customers to type special customization requests upon ordering a custom variant of a product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:0 msgid "Product variant attribute configuration screen." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:54 msgid "Once all desired :guilabel:`Values` have been added, click :guilabel:`Save` to save the new attribute." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:58 msgid "Add product variants on the product form" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:60 msgid "Created attributes can be applied on specific variants for particular products. To add product variants to a product, navigate to the product form by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`. To make changes to the product, click :guilabel:`Edit`. Then, click the :guilabel:`Variants` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:65 msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Attribute` header, click :guilabel:`Add a line` to add a new attribute, and select one to add from the drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:68 msgid "Then, under the :guilabel:`Values` header, click the drop-down menu to choose from the list of existing values. Click on each desired value to add them, and repeat this process for any additional attributes that should be added to the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:72 msgid "Once finished, click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:-1 msgid "Product form variants tab with values and attributes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:79 msgid ":abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` products with multiple variants that are manufactured in-house should either have a **0,0 reordering rule** set up, or have their replenishment routes set to *Replenish on Order (MTO)*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:84 msgid "Apply BoM components to product variants" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:86 msgid "Next, create a new :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)`. Or, edit an existing one, by going to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Products --> Bills of Materials`. Then, click :guilabel:`Create` to open a new :guilabel:`Bills of Materials` form to configure from scratch." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:90 msgid "Add a product to the :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` by clicking the drop-down menu in the :guilabel:`Product` field and selecting the desired product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:93 msgid "Then, add components by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line` under the :guilabel:`Component` section of the :guilabel:`Components` tab, and choosing the desired components from the drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:96 msgid "Choose the desired values in the :guilabel:`Quantity` and :guilabel:`Product Unit of Measure` columns. Then, choose the desired values in the :guilabel:`Apply on Variants` column." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:100 msgid "The :guilabel:`Apply on Variants` option to assign components to specific product variants on the :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` is available once the :guilabel:`Variants` setting is activated from the :menuselection:`Inventory` application. If the :guilabel:`Apply on Variants` field is not immediately visible, activate it from the additional options menu (three-dots icon, to the right of the header row)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:-1 msgid "\"Apply on Variants\" option on the additional options menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:110 msgid "Each component can be assigned to multiple variants. Components with no variants specified are used in every variant of the product. The same principle applies when configuring operations and by-products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:114 msgid "When defining variant :abbr:`BoMs (bills of material)` by component assignment, the :guilabel:`Product Variant` field in the main section of the :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` should be left blank. This field is *only* used when creating a :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` specifically for one product variant." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:119 msgid "When all desired configurations have been made to the :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)`, click :guilabel:`Save` at the top of the form to save changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:123 msgid "For components that only apply for specific variants, choose which operations the components should be consumed in. If the :guilabel:`Consumed in Operation` column is *not* immediately visible, activate it from the additional options menu (three-dots icon, to the right of the header row)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:129 msgid "Sell and manufacture variants of BoM products" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:131 msgid "To sell and manufacture variants of :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` products to order, navigate to :menuselection:`Sales app --> Create` to create a new quotation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:135 msgid "Sell variant of BoM product" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:137 msgid "Once on the blank :guilabel:`Quotation` form, click the drop-down next to the :guilabel:`Customer` field to add a customer." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:140 msgid "Then, under the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a product`, and select the previously-created :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` product with variants from the drop-down menu. Doing so reveals a :guilabel:`Configure a product` pop-up." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:144 msgid "From the pop-up window, click the desired attribute options to configure the correct variant of the product to manufacture. Then, click the green :guilabel:`+` or :guilabel:`-` icons next to the `1` to change the quantity to sell and manufacture, if desired." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:-1 msgid "Configure a product pop-up for choosing variant attributes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:152 msgid "Once all the specifications have been chosen, click :guilabel:`Add`. This will change the pop-up to a second :guilabel:`Configure` pop-up, where available optional products will appear, if they have been created previously." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:156 msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to close the pop-up." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:158 msgid "Then, click :guilabel:`Save` to save all changes, and click :guilabel:`Confirm` at the top of the :guilabel:`Quotation` form to create and confirm a new sales order (SO)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:162 msgid "Manufacture variant of BoM product" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:164 msgid "Once the :abbr:`SO (sales order)` is confirmed, a :guilabel:`Manufacturing` smart button appears at the top of the :abbr:`SO (sales order)` form. Click the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` smart button to open the :guilabel:`Manufacturing Order` form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:168 msgid "On this form, under the :guilabel:`Components` tab, the appropriate components for the chosen variant are listed. And, depending on the variant, different components will be listed. To see any mandatory or optional :guilabel:`Operation` steps, click the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:172 msgid "To enter the tablet view work order screen, click the :guilabel:`tablet icon` to the right of the row for the desired operation to be completed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:175 msgid "From the tablet view, click :guilabel:`Mark as Done` as the operation progresses to complete the operation steps." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:178 msgid "Alternatively, click the :guilabel:`Mark as Done` button at the top of the manufacturing order form to complete the order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:-1 msgid "Manufacturing order for variant of BoM product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:185 msgid "Then, navigate back to the :abbr:`SO (sales order)` via the breadcrumbs at the top of the page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:187 msgid "Now that the product has been manufactured, click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button to deliver the product to the customer. From the :guilabel:`Delivery Order` form, click :guilabel:`Validate`, then click :guilabel:`Apply` to deliver the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:191 msgid "To finish the sale, click back to the :abbr:`SO (sales order)` via the :guilabel:`breadcrumbs` at the top of the page again. Then, click :guilabel:`Create Invoice` followed by :guilabel:`Create Invoice` again to invoice the customer for the order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:3 msgid "Scrap during manufacturing" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:5 msgid "During the manufacturing process, the need to scrap manufacturing components or finished products may arise. This can be necessary if a component or product is damaged, or unusable for any other reason." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:9 msgid "By default, scrapping a component or finished product removes it from physical inventory and places it in a virtual location titled *Virtual Locations/Scrap*. A virtual location is **not** a physical space, but rather a designation in Odoo that is used to track items that are no longer in physical inventory." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:14 msgid "Odoo *Manufacturing* allows for both components and finished products to be scrapped within a manufacturing order. The specific type of item that can be scrapped during a manufacturing order depends on the stage of the manufacturing process." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:23 msgid "To view the total quantity of each item scrapped, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Locations`, then remove the :guilabel:`Internal` filter from the :guilabel:`Search...` bar to display all virtual locations. From the list, select the :guilabel:`Virtual Locations/Scrap` location." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:29 msgid "Scrap manufacturing components" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:31 msgid "To scrap components during the manufacturing process, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Manufacturing Orders`, then select a manufacturing order or click :guilabel:`Create` to configure a new one. If a new manufacturing order is created, select a product from the :guilabel:`Product` drop-down menu, then click :guilabel:`Confirm`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:36 msgid "Once the manufacturing order has been confirmed, a :guilabel:`Scrap` button appears at the top of the page. Click the button and a :guilabel:`Scrap` pop-up window appears." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:-1 msgid "The scrap button on a manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:43 msgid "From the :guilabel:`Product` drop-down menu on the :guilabel:`Scrap` pop-up window, select the component that is being scrapped, then enter the quantity in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field. Finally, click :guilabel:`Done` to scrap the component." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:-1 msgid "The Scrap pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:52 msgid "Before clicking :guilabel:`Mark As Done` on a manufacturing order, only the components of the finished product can be scrapped, **not** the finished product itself. This is because Odoo recognizes that the finished product cannot be scrapped before it has been manufactured." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:56 msgid "After scrapping a component, continue the manufacturing process using the required quantity of the component that was scrapped. The on-hand stock count for the component that was scrapped updates to reflect both the scrapped quantity and the quantity consumed during manufacturing." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:61 msgid "If the manufacturing of a table requires four units of a table leg, and two units of the table leg were scrapped during the manufacturing process, the total quantity of table legs consumed will be six: four units used to manufacture the table plus two units scrapped." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:66 msgid "Scrap components from tablet view" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:68 msgid "Components can also be scrapped from the manufacturing tablet view. To do so, select the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab on a manufacturing order, then click the :guilabel:`📱 (tablet view)` icon for a work order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:-1 msgid "The tablet view icon for a work order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:76 msgid "With tablet view open, click the :guilabel:`☰ (menu)` button at the top left of the screen, then select the :guilabel:`Scrap` button on the :guilabel:`Menu` pop-up window. The :guilabel:`Scrap` pop-up window then appears." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:-1 msgid "The Scrap button on the Menu pop-up window of the manufacturing tablet view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:84 msgid "Finally, select a component from the :guilabel:`Product` drop-down menu and enter the quantity being scrapped in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field. Click :guilabel:`Done` to scrap the component." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:88 msgid "Scrap finished products" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:90 msgid "Odoo also allows for finished products to be scrapped from a manufacturing order once the order is completed. After clicking :guilabel:`Mark as Done`, click the :guilabel:`Scrap` button to make the :guilabel:`Scrap` pop-up window appear." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:94 msgid "Since the components have been consumed to create the finished product, they will no longer appear in the :guilabel:`Product` drop-down menu. Instead, the finished product will be available as an option. Select the finished product and enter the quantity to be scrapped in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field. Click :guilabel:`Done` to scrap the finished product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:99 msgid "The on-hand stock count for the product that was scrapped will update to reflect both the scrapped quantity and the quantity produced during manufacturing." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/scrap_manufacturing.rst:103 msgid "If five units of a chair were manufactured, but two units were scrapped after manufacturing was completed, then the on-hand inventory of the chair will increase by three: five units manufactured minus two units scrapped." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:3 msgid "Split and merge manufacturing orders" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:5 msgid "In Odoo *Manufacturing*, it is possible to create manufacturing orders for a single unit of an item, or multiple units of the same item. In some cases, it may be necessary to split a manufacturing order that contains multiple units into two or more orders, or to merge two or more orders into a single order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:11 msgid "A manufacturing order can only contain one unit of a product, or multiple units of a single product that all use the same Bill of Materials (BoM). As a result, it is only possible to merge manufacturing orders when every order contains the same product being manufactured with the same BoM." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:17 msgid "Split manufacturing orders" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:19 msgid "To split a manufacturing order into multiple orders, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, then select a manufacturing order. At the top of the page, next to the :guilabel:`New` button, the manufacturing order's reference number appears with a :guilabel:`⚙️ (settings)` button next to it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:24 msgid "Click the :guilabel:`⚙️ (settings)` button to open the general settings for the manufacturing order, then select :guilabel:`Split`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:-1 msgid "The Settings and Split buttons on a manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:31 msgid "After selecting :guilabel:`Split`, a :guilabel:`Split production` pop-up window appears. In the :guilabel:`Split #` field, enter the number of manufacturing orders that the original order should be split into, then click outside of the field. A table appears below, with a line for each new manufacturing order that will be created by the split. In the :guilabel:`Quantity To Produce` column, enter the number of units that will be assigned to each new manufacturing order. Finally, click :guilabel:`Split` to split the manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:-1 msgid "The Split production pop-up window for a manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:42 msgid "After clicking :guilabel:`Split`, the original manufacturing order is split into the number of orders that was specified in the :guilabel:`Split #` field. The reference numbers for the new manufacturing orders are the reference number for the original order with *-###* tags added to the end." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:48 msgid "Manufacturing order *WH/MO/00012* is split into three separate orders. The reference numbers for the new orders are *WH/MO/00012-001*, *WH/MO/00012-002*, and *WH/MO/00012-003*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:52 msgid "Merge manufacturing orders" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:54 msgid "To merge two or more manufacturing orders into a single order, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`. Select the manufacturing orders that will be merged by activating the checkbox to the left of the name of each order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:-1 msgid "Select manufacturing orders that will be merged by clicking the checkbox for each." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:62 msgid "Once all manufacturing orders have been selected, click the :guilabel:`Actions` button at the top of the page, then select :guilabel:`Merge` from the drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:-1 msgid "The Actions and Merge buttons on the Manufacturing Orders page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:69 msgid "The selected manufacturing orders are merged into a single order. The reference number for the new manufacturing order is the next sequential number that has *not* already been assigned to an order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:73 msgid "The last reference number used for a manufacturing order was *WH/MO/00012*. Two manufacturing orders, *WH/MO/00008* and *WH/MO/00009*, are merged into a single order. The reference number for the manufacturing order created by the merger is *WH/MO/00013*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:77 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Source` field for the manufacturing order created by the merger, the reference numbers of the manufacturing orders that were merged are listed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/split_merge.rst:81 msgid "Manufacturing orders *WH/MO/00009* and *WH/MO/00010* are merged to create *WH/MO/00011*. The source field for *WH/MO/00011* lists both *WH/MO/00009* and *WH/MO/00010*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:3 msgid "Manage semi-finished products" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:5 msgid "A *semi-finished product*, also known as a *subassembly*, is a manufactured product that is used as a component in another product's bill of materials (BoM). Semi-finished products are used to simplify complex :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)` or to more accurately represent a manufacturing flow. A :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` that contains semi-finished products is referred to as a *multilevel BoM*, where the main *top-level product* and its subassemblies are distinguished." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:12 msgid "Configure semi-finished products" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:14 msgid "To set up a multilevel :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, the top-level product and semi-finished products must be configured. Therefore, the first step is to create the semi-finished products and their :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:19 msgid ":doc:`bill_configuration`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:-1 msgid "A bill of materials for a semi-finished product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:26 msgid "Create the top-level bill of materials (BoM)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:28 msgid "After the semi-finished products are fully configured, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Products --> Products`. Then, :guilabel:`Create` the top-level product. Configure the product's specifications as desired, and be sure to :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:32 msgid "Once the top-level product is configured, click the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button on the product form, then click :guilabel:`Create` to make a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` for the top-level product. Then, simply add the semi-finished products to this :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, along with any other necessary components." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:-1 msgid "A bill of materials for a top-level product, containing a subassembly component." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:42 msgid "Manage production planning" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:44 msgid "There are several methods to manage manufacturing order automation for products with multilevel :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:48 msgid "Semi-finished products are specifically used to manage manufacturable products with multilevel BoMs. If a BoM is being created simply to organize components or bundle sellable products, using :doc:`Kits ` is the more appropriate option." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:52 msgid "To automatically trigger manufacturing orders for semi-finished products after confirming a manufacturing order for the main product, there are two options:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:55 msgid "**Option 1 (recommended):** Create *Reordering Rules* for the semi-finished products and set both the minimum and maximum desired stock quantities to `0`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:59 msgid ":doc:`../../purchase/products/reordering`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:61 msgid "**Option 2:** Activate the :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)` and :guilabel:`Manufacture` routes under the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab of the semi-finished product's product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:64 msgid "Option 1 is more flexible than Option 2 and is therefore recommended. Reordering rules do not directly link demand to replenishment, and therefore allow stocks to be unreserved and redirected to other orders, if necessary. The Replenish on Order (MTO) route creates a unique link between the semi-finished and top-level products, exclusively reserving quantities for the confirmed top-level manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:70 msgid "Regardless of the method chosen, semi-finished products must be fully manufactured before manufacturing can begin on the top-level product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:-1 msgid "A manufacturing order for a top-level product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:3 msgid "Subcontract your Manufacturing" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:5 msgid "Outsourcing a portion or all of your company’s manufacturing needs is not easy. To make it work correctly, you have to:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:8 msgid "Manage the inventory of raw materials at your subcontractor" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:9 msgid "Ship raw material to your subcontractors, at the right time" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:10 msgid "Control incoming goods quality" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:11 msgid "Control subcontractors bills" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:13 msgid "Here is an example of subcontracting the manufacturing of “C”, which is produced out of raw materials “A” and “B”." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:20 msgid "With its MRP subcontracting feature, Odoo helps you handle this flow easily." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:25 msgid "To use the subcontracting feature, go to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Configuration --> Settings` and tick the box *Subcontracting*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:32 msgid "To define if a product must be subcontracted, use a *Bill of Materials (BoM)* of type *Subcontracting*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:35 msgid "To create a new *BoM*, go to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Products --> Bill of Materials` and hit create. Then, list the components your subcontractor needs to manufacture the product. For costing purposes, you might want to register all the components, even the ones that are sourced directly from the subcontractor." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:41 msgid "Once you have set the *BoM Type* to *Subcontracting*, specify one or several subcontractors." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:49 msgid "Basic Subcontracting Flow" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:51 msgid "To let your subcontractor know how many products you need, create and send them purchase orders (PO). To do so, go to the *Purchase* app and create a new purchase order. Be sure to send the PO to a vendor that is defined as a subcontractor on the *BoM* of these products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:60 msgid "Once the *PO* is validated (1), a pending receipt is created. When the products are received, validate the receipt (2), with the actual quantity received. As a result, Odoo does the following things for you:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:64 msgid "Consumes the respective components at the subcontractor’s location, based on the *BoM* and your input (3);" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:66 msgid "Produces the finished goods at the subcontractor’s location (4);" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:68 msgid "Moves products from that subcontractor’s location to YourCompany via the validated receipt (5)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:73 msgid "The *PO* is optional. If you create a receipt manually, with the right subcontractor, Odoo still performs all the moves. This can be useful if the subcontractor does not bill a fixed price per item, but rather the time and materials used." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:79 msgid "Inventory Valuation" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:81 msgid "The cost of the manufactured product “C” is defined as:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:83 msgid "**C = A + B + s**" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:85 msgid "With:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:87 msgid "**A**: Cost of raw materials coming from YourCompany;" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:90 msgid "**B**: Cost of raw materials sourced directly from the" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:90 msgid "subcontractor;" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:92 msgid "**s**: Cost of the subcontracted service." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:94 msgid "Sending raw materials to your subcontractors (**A**) does not impact the inventory valuation, as the components are still valued as part of your stock. This is managed by making the *Subcontracting Location* an *Internal Location*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:99 msgid "Then, the vendor price set on the product C form has to be what has to be paid to the subcontractor for his parts and service time: **B + s**. The product cost has to be: **A + B + s**, how much the product is valued in the accounting." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:104 msgid "Finally, the subcontractor bill then matches the purchase order, with the proposed price coming from the finished products C." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:108 msgid "If managing the replenishment of raw materials **B** at your subcontractor’s location is not needed, simply include the cost of **B** in the subcontractor’s price **s** and remove the products *B* from the *BoM*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:116 msgid "In case the received products from the subcontractor contain tracked components, their serial or lot numbers need to be specified during the receipt." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:120 msgid "In that case, on the receipt of the subcontracted product, a *Record Components* button appears. Click on it to open a dialog box and record the serial/lot numbers of the components. If the finished product is also tracked, its serial/lot number can be registered here too." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:129 msgid "For audit purposes, it is possible to check the lot numbers recorded on a receipt by using the icon on the right of the finished products:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:136 msgid "Also note that in case flexible consumption has been selected on the subcontracted BOM for a non-tracked product, the record components option will also appear optionally on each move line, if you want to register more or less component consumption at your subcontracting location, when receiving your final product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:145 msgid "As you can see, the reception of both of these non-tracked products can either be executed by selecting the 'Set Quantities' Option or via the move line hamburger menus." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:149 msgid "Automate Replenishment of Subcontractors" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:151 msgid "There are two ways to automate the supply of raw materials to your subcontractors when purchasing the final product. The chosen method depends on whether or not you want the materials to transit through your warehouse. Both of these methods are described as pull style mechanisms as their trigger is the inital PO to the subcontractor, which creates a need at the subcontracting location, for raw material." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:158 msgid "If you are supplying your subcontractor with raw material from your own warehouse, you must activate the 'Resupply Subcontractor on Order' route as shown below. If this is a component that you buy from a vendor, the buy route should also be activated." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:169 msgid "Now, if you want your vendor to resupply your subcontractor directly, you must choose the 'Dropship Subcontractor on Order' option instead. In order for this option to be active on the product form, you must first activate the dropship option from :menuselection:`Purchase --> Configuration --> Settings --> Dropshipping`. Once the PO to the subcontractor is validated, this route will create a dropship RFQ from your vendor to that subcontractor. You then just need to review and validate it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:182 msgid "Note that the buy route is not selected in this case, as the dropship route is a buy route already." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:185 msgid "Finally, if you want to track the stock of these raw materials at your subcontracting location(s), then you must activate *Multi-locations* in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings --> Storage locations`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:189 msgid "From the location form, you are then able to access the Current Stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:198 msgid "Manual Replenishment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:200 msgid "You can also choose to replenish your subcontractors manually." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:202 msgid "If you want to send components to your subcontractor at your own convenience, select the 'Resupply Subcontractor' Operation Type from the *Inventory* Module, and create a picking, specifying to which subcontractor you are delivering to." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:210 msgid "Alternatively, you can also manually ask your vendor to resupply your subcontractor by creating a dropship type PO, with your subcontractor set as the delivery address." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:3 msgid "Three-step manufacturing" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:9 msgid "Odoo *Manufacturing* allows users to manufacture products using one, two, or three steps. When using three-step manufacturing, Odoo creates a pick components transfer, a manufacturing order (MO), and a store finished products transfer, and updates inventory counts based on the number of components removed, and finished products created." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:41 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:42 msgid "On the new |MO|, select the product to be produced from the :guilabel:`Product` drop-down menu. The :guilabel:`Bill of Material` field auto-populates with the associated Bill of Materials (BoM)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:53 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:54 msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the |MO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:56 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:57 msgid "Process pick components transfer" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:58 msgid "After confirming a three-step |MO|, a :guilabel:`Transfers` smart button appears at the top of the page. Click it to be taken to the :guilabel:`Transfers` page for the |MO|. The page lists two transfers: *WH/PC/XXXXX* (the pick components transfer), and *WH/SFP/XXXXX* (the store finished products transfer)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:63 msgid "Select :guilabel:`WH/PC/XXXXX` to open the pick components transfer for the |MO|. This transfer is used to track the movement of components from the locations where they are stored to the location where they are used to manufacture the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:67 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:64 msgid "After transferring the components out of their storage location, click :guilabel:`Validate` at the top of the transfer, followed by :guilabel:`Apply` on the :guilabel:`Immediate Transfer?` pop-up window that appears. Doing so marks the transfer as :guilabel:`Done`, and updates inventory counts to reflect the quantity of components transferred." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:72 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:69 msgid "Finally, return to the |MO| by clicking the :guilabel:`WH/MO/XXXXX` breadcrumb at the top of the page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:-1 msgid "The manufacturing order bread crumb on a pick components transfer." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:88 msgid "To complete work orders from the |MO| itself, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and then select a manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:-1 msgid "The Start button for a work order on a manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:-1 msgid "The Done button for an work order on a manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:130 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:126 msgid "Once the final work order for the |MO| has been reached, a :guilabel:`Mark as Done and Close MO` button appears on the tablet view in addition to the :guilabel:`Mark as Done` button. Click :guilabel:`Mark as Done and Close MO` to mark the |MO| as :guilabel:`Done`, and register the manufactured product(s) into inventory." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:135 msgid "It is also possible to complete the final work order while keeping the |MO| open, by clicking :guilabel:`Mark as Done`. In this case, the |MO| can be closed at a later time by clicking the :guilabel:`Produce All` button on the |MO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:140 msgid "Process finished product transfer" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:142 msgid "After completing the |MO|, return to the order's :guilabel:`Transfers` page by clicking the :guilabel:`Transfers` button at the top of the order. This time, select :guilabel:`WH/SFP/XXXXX` to open the store finished products transfer. This transfer is used to track the movement of finished products from the location where they were manufactured to the location where they are stored." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/three_step_manufacturing.rst:147 msgid "After transferring the finished products to their storage location, click :guilabel:`Validate` at the top of the transfer, followed by :guilabel:`Apply` on the :guilabel:`Immediate Transfer?` pop-up window that appears. Doing so marks the transfer as :guilabel:`Done`, and updates inventory counts to reflect the quantity of finished products transferred." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:3 msgid "Two-step manufacturing" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:9 msgid "Odoo *Manufacturing* allows users to manufacture products using one, two, or three steps. When using two-step manufacturing, Odoo creates a manufacturing order (MO) and a pick components transfer, but does not generate a transfer for the movement of finished products into stock. Inventory counts still update based on the number of products manufactured, but the act of transferring them to and from inventory is not tracked." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:59 msgid "After confirming a two-step |MO|, a :guilabel:`Transfers` smart button appears at the top of the page. Click it to open the pick components transfer for the |MO|. This transfer is used to track the movement of components from the locations where they are stored to the location where they are used to manufacture the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:88 msgid "On the |MO| page, select the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab. Once work begins on the first work order that needs to be completed, click the :guilabel:`Start` button for that operation. Odoo *Manufacturing* then starts a timer that keeps track of how long the work order takes to complete." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:-1 msgid "The Start button for an work order on a manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:-1 msgid "The Done button for a work order on a manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:109 msgid "To complete the work orders for an |MO| using the tablet view, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and then select an |MO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:112 msgid "Next, click on the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab, then select the :guilabel:`📱 (tablet)` button on the line of the first work order to be processed. This opens the tablet view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/two_step_manufacturing.rst:131 msgid "It is also possible to complete the final operation while keeping the |MO| open, by clicking :guilabel:`Mark as Done`. In this case, the |MO| can be closed at a later time by clicking the :guilabel:`Produce All` button on the order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:3 msgid "Use the Master Production Schedule" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:7 msgid "The Master Production Schedule (MPS) is a valuable tool to plan your production based on your demand forecast." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:13 msgid "Go to the :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Configuration --> Settings` and activate the Master Production Schedule feature before hitting save." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:17 msgid "In the MPS settings, you can define the time range of your MPS (month/week/day) and the number of periods you want to display at all times." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:20 msgid "Now, go to :menuselection:`Planning --> Master Production Schedule` and click on *add a product*. You can now define your safety stock target (= the stock you want to have on hand at the end of the period) and the minimum and maximum quantities that must or can be replenished in each period." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:28 msgid "In the MPS view, you can decide which information you would like to display by clicking on *rows*. For instance, the *Actual demand* will show you which quantity of products has already been ordered for the period, or *Available to Promise*, what can still be sold during that same period (what you plan to replenish - what is already sold during the period). You can also decide to hide rows if you like." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:38 msgid "Estimate your demand and launch replenishment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:40 msgid "The next step is to estimate the demand for the chosen period. This is done in the *Forecasted Demand* Row. You can easily, at any time, compare the demand forecast with the actual demand (= confirmed sales). The demand forecast for a finished product will impact the indirect demand for its components." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:48 msgid "Once the forecasted demand has been set, the quantity to replenish for the different periods will automatically be computed. The replenishments you are supposed to launch based on your lead times (vendor lead time or manufacturing lead time) are then displayed in green. You can now launch the replenishment by clicking on the replenish button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:54 msgid "Depending on the configuration of the product (buy vs. manufacture), requests for quotations or manufacturing orders will be created. You can easily access those by clicking on the *Actual Replenishment* cell." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:61 msgid "In case you manually edit the *Suggested Replenishment* quantity, a small cross will appear on the left hand side of the cell. In case you want to go back to the automatically computed value given by Odoo, simply click the cross." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:67 msgid "Cells color signification" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:69 msgid "The cells, which are part of the *Suggested Replenishment* line, can take different colors depending on the situation:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:72 msgid "**Green**: quantity of products which should be replenished to reach the expected safety stock considering the demand forecast and the indirect demand forecast." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:74 msgid "**Grey**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity still matches current data." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:76 msgid "**Red**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity was too high considering current data." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:78 msgid "**Orange**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity was too low considering current data." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:80 msgid "The *Forecasted stock* line can also contain red cells, which means the stock will be negative during the period in question." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:84 msgid "What if I have underestimated the demand?" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:86 msgid "You can still increase the demand forecast. It will impact the quantity to replenish. The cell will become orange, and you’ll be able to launch a new replenishment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:91 msgid "What if I have overestimated the demand?" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:93 msgid "You can decrease the demand forecast. The cell will become red to inform you that you’ve ordered more than planned. If you’re still able to do it, you can cancel some RFQ or MO manually." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:98 msgid "What if I wrongly added a product to the MPS?" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:100 msgid "You can easily remove a product from the MPS by clicking the small bin on the right of its name." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:3 msgid "Manage work orders using work centers" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:5 msgid "Odoo Manufacturing allows for work orders to be carried out at specific work centers. When a manufacturing order is created for a product, any work orders listed in the :guilabel:`Operations` tab of the product bill of materials (BoM) will be automatically created as well and assigned to the specified work center. Work orders can be managed in the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` module by selecting :menuselection:`Operations --> Work Orders`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:11 msgid "In order to use work centers, the :guilabel:`Work Orders` feature must first be enabled. To do so, go to the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` module, select :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, and activate the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Work Orders`. Work centers can then be created and managed by selecting :menuselection:`Configuration --> Work Centers`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:17 msgid "Create a work center" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:19 msgid "Within the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` module, select :menuselection:`Configuration --> Work Centers --> Create`. The work center form can then be filled out as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:22 msgid ":guilabel:`Work Center Name`: give the work center a concise name that describes the type of operations it will be used for" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:24 msgid ":guilabel:`Alternative Workcenters`: specify an alternative work center for operations to be carried out at if the main work center is not available" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:26 msgid ":guilabel:`Code`: assign the work center a reference code" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:27 msgid ":guilabel:`Working Hours`: define the number of hours that the work center can be in use each week" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:28 msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: select the company that the work center belongs to" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:-1 msgid "An example of a fully configured work center form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:37 msgid "Set standards for work center productivity" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:39 msgid "The :guilabel:`General Information` tab on the work center form allows for productivity goals to be assigned to a work center:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:42 msgid ":guilabel:`Time Efficiency`: used to calculate the expected duration of a work order at the work center; for example, if a work order normally takes one hour and the efficiency is set to 200%, the work order will take 30 minutes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:45 msgid ":guilabel:`Capacity`: the number of operations that can be performed at the work center simultaneously" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:47 msgid ":guilabel:`OEE Target`: the target for efficiency at the work center" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:48 msgid ":guilabel:`Time before prod.`: setup time required before work can commence" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:49 msgid ":guilabel:`Time after prod.`: breakdown or cleanup time required after work is finished" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:50 msgid ":guilabel:`Cost per hour`: the cost of operating the work center for one hour" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:51 msgid ":guilabel:`Analytic Account`: the account where the cost of the work center should be recorded" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:-1 msgid "The general information tab of the work center form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:58 msgid "Assign equipment to a work center" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:60 msgid "Using the :guilabel:`Equipment` tab, it is possible for specific pieces of equipment to be assigned to a work center. The following information will be displayed for each piece of equipment added:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:63 msgid ":guilabel:`Equipment Name`: the name of the piece of equipment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:64 msgid ":guilabel:`Technician`: the technician responsible for servicing the equipment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:65 msgid ":guilabel:`Equipment Category`: the category the equipment belongs to" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:66 msgid ":guilabel:`MTBF`: mean time between failures; the average time that the piece of equipment will operate before failing" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:68 msgid ":guilabel:`MTTR`: mean time to recovery; the average time it takes for the equipment to become fully operational again" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:70 msgid ":guilabel:`Est. Next Failure`: an estimate of when the next equipment failure will occur" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:-1 msgid "The equipment tab of the work center form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:77 msgid ":guilabel:`MTBF`, :guilabel:`MTTR`, and :guilabel:`Est. Next Failure` are all calculated automatically based on past failure data, if any exists." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:83 msgid "Integrate IoT devices" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:85 msgid "The :guilabel:`IoT Triggers` tab enables the integration of :abbr:`IoT (Internet of Things)` devices with a work center:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:88 msgid ":guilabel:`Device`: specifies the IoT device to be triggered" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:89 msgid ":guilabel:`Key`: the security key for the device" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:90 msgid ":guilabel:`Action`: the IoT device action triggered" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:-1 msgid "The IoT Triggers tab of the work center form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:97 msgid "Use case: configure an alternative work center" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:99 msgid "When a work center is at capacity, it cannot accept any new work orders. Instead of waiting for the work center to become available, it is possible to specify an alternative work center where surplus work orders should be carried out." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:103 msgid "Begin by creating a new work center. Configure the :guilabel:`Equipment` tab so that it has all of the same equipment as the main work center. This will ensure that the same tasks can be carried out at both work centers. Navigate to the main work center and include the new work center in the :guilabel:`Alternative Workcenters` selection field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:108 msgid "Now, create a new manufacturing order that uses the main work center for one of its operations. The main work center will automatically be selected for the operation in the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab. After confirming the manufacturing order, click the :guilabel:`Plan` button that appears at the top left of the form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:-1 msgid "Click the plan button to automatically select an available work center." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:117 msgid "If the main work center is at capacity, the work center selected for the operation will be automatically changed to the alternative work center." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:-1 msgid "The alternative work center is automatically selected." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:125 msgid "Monitor work center performance" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:127 msgid "Performance for an individual work center can be viewed by selecting :menuselection:`Configuration --> Work Centers`, and clicking on a work center. A variety of metrics showing work center performance can be viewed at the top right of the form:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:131 msgid ":guilabel:`OEE`: overall effective efficiency, the percentage of time that the work center has been fully productive" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:133 msgid ":guilabel:`Lost`: the amount of time lost due to work stoppages" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:134 msgid ":guilabel:`Load`: the amount of time it will take to complete the current workload" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:135 msgid ":guilabel:`Performance`: the real duration of work time, shown as a percentage of the expected duration" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:3 msgid "Make work centers unavailable using Time Off" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:5 msgid "In Odoo, *work centers* are used to carry out manufacturing operations at specific locations. However, if a work center cannot be used for some reason, work orders begin to pile up at the work center until it is operational again." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:9 msgid "As a result, it is necessary to make the work center unavailable in Odoo so that the platform routes new work orders to alternative work centers that are operational. Using Odoo *Time Off*, it is possible to designate a work center as being unavailable for a set period of time. Doing so ensures that manufacturing operations can continue until the impacted work center is available again." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:17 msgid "Before a work center can be designated as unavailable, the Odoo platform must be properly configured. First, it is necessary to enable :ref:`developer mode `. This allows the :guilabel:`Time Off` smart button to appear on each work center's :guilabel:`Working Hours` pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:22 msgid "Enable developer mode by going to :menuselection:`Settings`, scrolling to the bottom of the page, and clicking :guilabel:`Activate the developer mode` under the :guilabel:`Developer Tools` heading." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:-1 msgid "The \"Activate the developer mode\" button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:29 msgid "Next, install the *Time Off* app. This is the app used for assigning time off to all resources within Odoo, including employees and work centers. Navigate to :menuselection:`Apps`, then type `Time Off` in the :guilabel:`Search...` bar. The card for the :guilabel:`Time Off` module should be the only one that appears on the page. Click the green :guilabel:`Install` button on the card to install the app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:-1 msgid "The Time Off module installation card." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:39 msgid "The last step is to properly configure work centers. For this workflow, it is necessary to have at least two work centers: one that is made unavailable and a second that receives the work orders that the other cannot accept. If no second work center is configured, Odoo cannot route work orders away from the unavailable work center and they will pile up in its queue." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:44 msgid "To create a work center, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Configuration --> Work Centers --> Create`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:47 msgid "Make sure that both work centers have the same equipment listed under the :guilabel:`Equipment` tab. This ensures that operations carried out at one work center can also be performed at the other." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:-1 msgid "The equipment tab on a work center form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:54 msgid "For the work center that will be made unavailable, select the second work center on the :guilabel:`Alternative Workcenters` drop-down menu. Now, Odoo knows to send work orders to the second work center when the first is unavailable for any reason." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:-1 msgid "A work center form configured with an alternative work center." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:63 msgid "Add time off for a work center" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:65 msgid "With configuration completed, time off can now be assigned to the work center that will be made unavailable. Begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Configuration --> Work Centers` and selecting the affected work center. Click :guilabel:`Edit`, and then the :guilabel:`↗ (external link)` button next to the :guilabel:`Working Hours` drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:-1 msgid "The Working Hours \"External link\" button on the work center form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:74 msgid "A pop-up appears, titled :guilabel:`Open: Working Hours`. The standard working hours for the work center are listed here, along with various other details about it. Since developer mode was enabled, there is a :guilabel:`Time Off` button in the top right of the pop-up. Click it to be taken to the :guilabel:`Resource Time Off` page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:-1 msgid "The Time Off button on the Working Hours pop-up." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:83 msgid "On this page, click :guilabel:`Create` to configure a new time-off entry. On the time-off form, note the :guilabel:`Reason` for the work center closure (broken, maintenance, etc.), select the affected work center as the :guilabel:`Resource`, and choose a :guilabel:`Start Date` and :guilabel:`End Date` to specify the period during which the work center will be unavailable. Click :guilabel:`Save` and the time off for the work center is logged in Odoo." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:-1 msgid "The \"Resource Time Off\" form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:94 msgid "Route orders to an alternative work center" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:96 msgid "Once a work center is within its specified time-off period, work orders sent to it can be automatically routed to an alternative work center using the :guilabel:`Plan` button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:99 msgid "Begin by creating a new manufacturing order by selecting :menuselection:`Operations --> Manufacturing Orders --> Create`. On the manufacturing order form, specify a :guilabel:`Product` that uses the unavailable work center for one of its operations. Click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the work order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:104 msgid "On the confirmed work order, select the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab. By default, the unavailable work center is specified in the :guilabel:`Work Center` column. There is also a green :guilabel:`Plan` button on the top left of the page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:-1 msgid "The Plan button on a manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:112 msgid "Click :guilabel:`Plan` and the work center listed under the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab is automatically changed to the alternative work center." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:-1 msgid "The selected work center updates automatically after clicking the Plan button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_center_time_off.rst:119 msgid "Once the time-off period for the unavailable work center ends, Odoo recognizes that the work center is available again. At this point, clicking the :guilabel:`Plan` button does not route work orders to an alternative work center unless the first one is at capacity." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:3 msgid "Work order dependencies" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:7 msgid "When manufacturing certain products, specific operations may need to be completed before others can begin. In order to ensure operations are carried out in the correct order, Odoo *Manufacturing* features a *work order dependencies* setting. Enabling this setting allows for operations on a Bill of Materials (BoM) to be *blocked* by other operations that should occur first." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:15 msgid "The *work order dependencies* setting is not enabled by default. To enable it, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, enable the :guilabel:`Work Orders` setting, if it is not already active." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:19 msgid "After enabling the :guilabel:`Work Orders` setting, the :guilabel:`Work Order Dependencies` setting appears below it. Enable :guilabel:`Work Order Dependencies`, then click :guilabel:`Save` to confirm the changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:24 msgid "Add dependencies to BoM" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:26 msgid "Work order dependencies are configured on a product's |BOM|. To do so, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Products --> Bills of Materials`, then select a |BOM|, or create a new one by clicking :guilabel:`New`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:32 msgid "For a complete guide on how to properly configure a new |BOM|, see the documentation on :ref:`creating a bill of materials `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:35 msgid "On the |BOM|, click on the :guilabel:`Miscellaneous` tab, then enable the :guilabel:`Operation Dependencies` checkbox. This makes a new :guilabel:`Blocked By` option available in the settings of the :guilabel:`Operations` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:-1 msgid "The Operation Dependencies checkbox on the Miscellaneous tab of a BoM." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:43 msgid "Next, click on the :guilabel:`Operations` tab. On the top-right of the tab, click on the tab's :guilabel:`settings` button, then enable the :guilabel:`Blocked By` checkbox. This makes a :guilabel:`Blocked By` field appear for each operation on the :guilabel:`Operations` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:-1 msgid "The settings for the Operations tab on a BoM." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:51 msgid "In the line of the operation that should be blocked by another operation, click the :guilabel:`Blocked By` field, and an :guilabel:`Open: Operations` pop-up window appears. In the :guilabel:`Blocked By` drop-down field on the pop-up window, select the blocking operation that must be completed *before* the operation that is blocked." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:-1 msgid "The Blocked By drop-down field for an operation on a BoM." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:60 msgid "Finally, save the |BOM| by clicking :guilabel:`Save`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:63 msgid "Plan work orders using dependencies" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:65 msgid "Once work order dependencies have been configured on a |BOM|, Odoo *Manufacturing* is able to plan when work orders are scheduled, based on their dependencies. To plan the work orders for a manufacturing order, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:70 msgid "Next, select a manufacturing order for a product with work order dependencies set on its |BOM|, or create a new manufacturing order by clicking :guilabel:`New`. If a new manufacturing order is created, select a |BOM| configured with work order dependencies from the :guilabel:`Bill of Material` drop-down field, then click :guilabel:`Confirm`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:75 msgid "After confirming the manufacturing order, select the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab to view the work orders required to complete it. Any work orders that are *not* blocked by a different work order display a `Ready` tag in the :guilabel:`Status` section." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:79 msgid "Work orders that are blocked by one or more work orders display a `Waiting for another WO` tag instead. Once the blocking work order(s) are completed, the tag updates to `Ready`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:-1 msgid "The status tags for work orders on a manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:86 msgid "To schedule the manufacturing order's work orders, click the :guilabel:`Plan` button at the top of the page. After doing so, the :guilabel:`Scheduled Start Date` field for each work order on the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab auto-fills with the scheduled start date and time. A blocked work order is scheduled at the end of the time period specified in the :guilabel:`Expected Duration` field of the work order that precedes it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:-1 msgid "The Scheduled Start Date field for work orders on a manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:97 msgid "A manufacturing order is created for Product A. The manufacturing order has two operations: Cut and Assemble. Each operation has an expected duration of 60 minutes, and the Assemble operation is blocked by the Cut operation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:101 msgid "The :guilabel:`Plan` button for the manufacturing order is clicked at 1:30 pm, and the Cut operation is scheduled to begin immediately. Since the Cut operation has an expected duration of 60 minutes, the Assemble operation is scheduled to begin at 2:30 pm." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:106 msgid "Planning by workcenter" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:108 msgid "To see a visual representation of how work orders are planned, navigate to the :guilabel:`Work Orders Planning` page by going to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Planning --> Planning by Workcenter`. This page shows a timeline of all the work orders scheduled for each operation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:112 msgid "If one work order is blocked by the completion of another, the work order that is blocked is shown as scheduled to start after the work order blocking it. In addition, an arrow connects the two work orders, leading from the blocking operation to the blocked operation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/work_order_dependencies.rst:-1 msgid "The arrow connecting a blocked work order to the work order blocking it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor.rst:5 msgid "Shop Floor" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:3 msgid "Shop Floor overview" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:9 msgid "The *Shop Floor* module is a companion module to the *Manufacturing* app. *Shop Floor* provides a visual interface for processing manufacturing orders (MOs) and work orders. It also allows manufacturing employees to track the amount of time spent working on manufacturing and work orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:13 msgid "The *Shop Floor* module is installed alongside the *Manufacturing* app. It cannot be installed by itself. To install the *Manufacturing* app, navigate to :menuselection:`Apps`, search for `manufacturing` in the :guilabel:`Search...` bar, and then click :guilabel:`Install` on the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` app card." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:19 msgid "The *Shop Floor* module replaces the tablet view functionality of the *Manufacturing* app, and is only available in Odoo versions 16.4 and later." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:22 msgid "To check the version number of an Odoo database, navigate to :menuselection:`Settings` and scroll down to the :guilabel:`About` section at the bottom of the page. The version number is displayed there." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:26 msgid "To switch to a newer version of Odoo, see the documentation on :doc:`upgrading a database <../../../../administration/upgrade>`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:30 msgid "Navigation" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:32 msgid "*Shop Floor* is broken down into three main views, which can be selected from the navigation bar at the top of the module:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:35 msgid "The :guilabel:`All` page serves as the main dashboard for the module, and displays information cards for |MOs|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:37 msgid "Each work center also has a dedicated page, which shows information cards for work orders assigned to that work center. Work center pages can be toggled on or off by clicking the :guilabel:`+ (plus)` button in the navigation bar, selecting or deselecting them on the pop-up window that appears, and then clicking :guilabel:`Confirm`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:41 msgid "The :guilabel:`My` page shows information cards for all work orders assigned to the employee whose profile is currently active in the operator panel on the left side of the module. Other than only showing work orders assigned to the active employee, this page functions the same as the pages for each work center." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:47 msgid "To isolate an |MO| or work order, so that no other orders appear, simply search the reference number of the |MO| in the :guilabel:`Search...` bar at the top of the module. This search filter remains active while switching between the different module views." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:51 msgid "On the left side of the module is the operator panel, which shows all of the employees currently signed in to *Shop Floor*, and allows new employees to sign in. The operator panel is always available in the module, regardless of which view is selected. It can be toggled on or off by clicking the :guilabel:`sidebar` button at the extreme left of the navigation bar." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:-1 msgid "The \"sidebar\" button, which is used to toggle the operator panel on or off." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:61 msgid "All page" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:63 msgid "By default, the :guilabel:`All` page shows an information card for every |MO| that is *ready to start*. An |MO| is considered ready to start once it has been confirmed, and all required components are available." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:67 msgid "To view every confirmed |MO| regardless of readiness, click the :guilabel:`x` button on the :guilabel:`Ready to Start` filter to remove it from the :guilabel:`Search...` bar." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:71 msgid "MO information card" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:73 msgid "An |MO| information card on the :guilabel:`All` page shows all of the relevant details of the associated |MO|, and also provides employees with options for processing the |MO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:76 msgid "The header for an |MO| card shows the |MO| number, the product and number of units being produced, and the status of the |MO|. If work has not yet begun on the |MO|, the status appears as :guilabel:`Confirmed`. Once work has begun, the status updates to :guilabel:`In Progress`. If all work orders for an |MO| have been completed and the |MO| is ready to close, the status updates to :guilabel:`To Close`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:82 msgid "The main body of an |MO| card shows a line for each completed work order, if any, followed by the current work order that needs to be completed. Completed work orders are indicated by a green check mark to the right of title of the work order. The current work order is indicated by a button that opens the page for the work center to which the order is assigned." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:87 msgid "Below the current work order is a line titled :guilabel:`Register Production`, which is used to record the number of product units produced. To manually enter the number of units produced, click on the :guilabel:`Register Production` line, enter a value in the :guilabel:`Units` field of the resulting pop-up window, then click :guilabel:`Validate`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:92 msgid "Alternatively, click the :guilabel:`# Units` button on the right side of the line, which automatically records the number of units the |MO| was created for as the number of units produced. For example, if an |MO| is created for 10 units of a dining table, clicking the :guilabel:`10 units` button records that 10 units were produced." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:97 msgid "The footer of the |MO| card displays a :guilabel:`Close Production` button. This is used to close the |MO| once production is completed. However, if there are any quality checks required for the |MO| as a whole (not the work orders within it), a :guilabel:`Quality Checks` button appears instead. Clicking :guilabel:`Quality Checks` opens a pop-up window, from which any required quality checks can be completed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:103 msgid "After clicking :guilabel:`Close Production`, the |MO| card begins to fade away, and an :guilabel:`Undo` button appears on the footer. Clicking :guilabel:`Undo` causes the |MO| to remain open. Once the |MO| card disappears completely, the work order is closed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:107 msgid "On the right side of the footer is an :guilabel:`⋮ (options)` button, which opens a pop-up window with additional options for the |MO|:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:110 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:171 msgid ":guilabel:`Scrap` is used to send components to a scrap location when they are found to be defective." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:112 msgid ":guilabel:`Add Work Order` is used to add an additional work order to the |MO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:113 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:173 msgid ":guilabel:`Add Component` is used to add an additional component to the |MO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:114 msgid ":guilabel:`Open Backend MO` opens the |MO| in the Manufacturing app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:-1 msgid "An information card for an MO on the \"All\" page of the Shop Floor module." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:121 msgid "Work center pages" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:123 msgid "By default, the page for each work center shows an information card for every work order assigned to it that is *ready to start*. A work order is considered ready to start once the |MO| it is a part of is ready to start, and any preceding work orders have been completed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:127 msgid "To view every confirmed work order assigned to a work center regardless of readiness, click the :guilabel:`x` button on the :guilabel:`Ready to Start` filter to remove it from the :guilabel:`Search...` bar." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:132 msgid "Work order information card" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:134 msgid "A work order information card on a work center's page shows all of the relevant details of the associated work order, and also provides employees with options for processing the work order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:137 msgid "The header for a work order card shows the reference number of the |MO| that the work order is a part of, the product and number of units being produced, and the status of the work order. If work has not yet begun on the work order, the status appears as :guilabel:`To Do`. Once work has begun, the status updates to display a timer showing the total time the work order has been worked on." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:142 msgid "The main body of a work order card shows a line for each step required to complete the work order. Work order steps can be completed by clicking on the line, then following the instructions on the pop-up window that appears. Alternatively, clicking the checkbox on the right side of each line automatically marks the step as completed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:147 msgid "Below the final step of the work order is a line titled :guilabel:`Register Production`, which functions the same as the :guilabel:`Register Production` line on an |MO| card. Registering the number of units produced using the :guilabel:`Register Production` line on a work order card also completes the step for the associated |MO| card." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:152 msgid "If the work order being processed is the final work order for the |MO|, a :guilabel:`Close Production` button appears on the footer of the work order card. Clicking :guilabel:`Close Production` closes both the work order and the |MO|, unless a quality check is required for the |MO|. In this case, the quality check must be completed from the |MO| card before the |MO| can be closed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:158 msgid "Alternatively, if the |MO| requires the completion of additional work orders, a :guilabel:`Mark as Done` button appears instead. Clicking :guilabel:`Mark as Done` marks the current work order as completed, and causes the next work order to appear on the page for the work center it is assigned to." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:163 msgid "After clicking :guilabel:`Close Production` or :guilabel:`Mark as Done`, the work order card begins to fade away, and an :guilabel:`Undo` button appears on the footer. Clicking :guilabel:`Undo` causes the work order to remain open. Once the work order card disappears completely, the work order is marked as :guilabel:`Finished` on the |MO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:168 msgid "On the right side of the footer is an :guilabel:`⋮ (options)` button, which opens a pop-up window with additional options for the work order:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:174 msgid ":guilabel:`Move to work center` is used to transfer the work order to a different work center." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:175 msgid ":guilabel:`Suggest a Worksheet improvement` allows the user to propose a change to the work order's instructions or steps." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:177 msgid ":guilabel:`Create a Quality Alert` opens a quality alert form that can be filled out to alert a quality team about a potential issue." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:-1 msgid "An information card for a work order in the Shop Floor module." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:185 msgid "Operator panel" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:187 msgid "The operator panel is used to manage the employees that are signed in to the *Shop Floor* module. The panel shows the name and profile picture of every employee that is currently signed in across all instances of the database." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:191 msgid "To interact with *Shop Floor* as a specific employee, click the employee's name to activate their profile. Profiles that are not active appear with their names and profile pictures greyed-out." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:194 msgid "When an employee is selected in the operator panel, they can begin working on a work order by clicking the work order's heading. If an employee is working on one or more work orders, the work order title(s) appear under their name, along with a timer showing how long they've been working on each order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:199 msgid "To add a new employee to the operator panel, click the :guilabel:`+ Add Operator` button at the bottom of the panel. Then, select an employee from the :guilabel:`Select Employee` pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:202 msgid "To remove an employee from the operator panel, simply click the :guilabel:`x` button next to their name in the panel." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:-1 msgid "The operator panel of the Shop Floor module, showing three employees signed in." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm.rst:8 msgid "Product lifecycle management" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm.rst:10 msgid "Odoo *Product Lifecycle Management* (*PLM*) offers a systematic approach for testing, collaboration, and iteration of products across concept development, design, manufacturing, marketing, and post-launch support stages." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm.rst:14 msgid "With approvals, key stakeholders can review changes before implementation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes.rst:3 msgid "Change management" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:10 msgid "ECO type" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:12 msgid "An *ECO type* is assigned to *engineering change orders* (ECOs) to organize and track changes to products and bills of materials (BoMs). Each |ECO| type separates |ECOs| into a project in Gantt view, ensuring collaborators and stakeholders **only** view and assist with relevant |BOM| improvements." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:17 msgid "For example, an electronic chip manufacturer might use 'New Product Introduction', 'Product Improvement', 'Component Change', and 'Firmware Update' |ECO| types. Then, designers and engineers can focus on |ECOs| in the 'New Product Introduction' and 'Product Improvement' projects, avoiding unrelated supplier change or firmware update |ECOs|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:23 msgid "Create ECO type" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:25 msgid "To access and manage ECO types, navigate to :menuselection:`PLM app --> Configuration --> ECO Types`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:28 msgid "Create a new ECO type by clicking :guilabel:`New`. On the new :guilabel:`ECO Types` form, fill in the following information:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:31 msgid ":guilabel:`Name`: the name of the |ECO| type, which will organize all of the |ECOs| of this *type* in a project." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:33 msgid ":guilabel:`Email Alias`: if this optional field is filled, emails submitted to this email address automatically generate |ECOs| in the left-most stage of this |ECO| type." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:37 msgid "The `Formulation change` |ECO| type is used to organize and track related |ECOs| in a single project. Configuring the :guilabel:`Email Alias` field generates |ECOs| in the `Formulation change` project sent to the email address, `pawlish-change@pawlished-glam.odoo.com`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:0 msgid "Example of an ECO type." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:46 msgid "Edit ECO type" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:48 msgid "Modify existing |ECO| type names and email aliases by navigating to the :menuselection:`PLM app --> Configuration --> ECO Types` page. There, click on the desired |ECO| type from the list." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:51 msgid "On the form for each |ECO| type, proceed to edit the :guilabel:`Name` and :guilabel:`Email Alias` fields." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:57 msgid "Stages" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:59 msgid "Within an |ECO| type project, *stages* are like milestones and are used to identify the progress of the |ECO| before the changes are ready to be applied. (e.g. 'Feedback', 'In Progress', 'Approved', 'Complete')" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:63 msgid "Additionally, required approvers can be added to each stage, ensuring that changes to the production |BOM| cannot proceed until the approver reviews and approves the |ECO|. Doing so prevents errors on the production |BOM| by enforcing at least one review of suggested changes before they're applied on a production |BOM|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:68 msgid "For best practice, there should be at least one *verification* stage, which is a stage with a required approver, and one *closing* stage, which stores |ECOs| that have been either canceled or approved for use as the next production |BOM|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:73 msgid "Create stage" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:75 msgid "To add a stage, go to the :menuselection:`PLM` app and select the intended project for an |ECO| type from the :guilabel:`PLM Overview` dashboard." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:78 msgid "Then, on the :guilabel:`Engineering Change Orders` project pipeline for the |ECO| type, click the :guilabel:`+ Stage` button. Doing so reveals a text box to fill in the name of the stage. After filling it in, click the :guilabel:`Add` button to finish adding the stage." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:83 msgid "A new `Assigned` stage separates assigned |ECOs| from the unassigned ones in the `New` stage. Adding another stage helps the product manager track unassigned tasks." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:0 msgid "Create a new stage in a project for an ECO type." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:91 msgid "Verification stage" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:93 msgid "Click an ECO type from :menuselection:`PLM app --> Overview` to open a kanban view of |ECOs| of this type." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:96 msgid "To configure a verification stage, hover over the intended stage, and select the :guilabel:`⚙️ (gear)` icon. Then, click :guilabel:`Edit` to open a pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:99 msgid "Configure the verification stage in the edit stage pop-up window, by checking the box for :guilabel:`Allow to apply changes`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:102 msgid "Then, add an approver in the :guilabel:`Approvers` section, by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`, and specifying the :guilabel:`Role` of the reviewer, their :guilabel:`User`, and :guilabel:`Approval Type`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:106 msgid "Make sure at least one approver is configured with the :guilabel:`Approval Type`: :guilabel:`Is required to approve`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:109 msgid "The approver listed is automatically notified when |ECOs| are dropped in the stage specified in the pop-up window. Once finished, click :guilabel:`Save & Close`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:113 msgid "In the |ECO| type `New Product Introduction`, the verification stage `Validated` is configured by clicking the :guilabel:`⚙️ (gear)` icon, and selecting :guilabel:`Edit`. Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Edit: Validated` pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:117 msgid "By adding the `Engineering manager` as an approver, only |ECOs| approved by this user can proceed to the next stage, and have the changes applied on the production |BOM|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:120 msgid "Additionally, check the :guilabel:`Allow to apply changes` option to ensure proper behavior." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:0 msgid "Show \"Allow to apply changes\" option is checked." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:127 msgid "Closing stage" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:129 msgid "Configure a closing stage by opening the :guilabel:`Edit: [stage]` pop-up window. To do so, hover over the intended stage and click the :guilabel:`⚙️ (gear)` icon that appears in the top-right corner. Then, click :guilabel:`Edit` from the drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:133 msgid "On the :guilabel:`Edit: [stage]` pop-up window, select the check boxes for :guilabel:`Folded in kanban view`, :guilabel:`Allow to apply changes` and :guilabel:`Final Stage`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:137 msgid "The closing stage, `Effective` is configured by checking the :guilabel:`Folded in kanban view`, :guilabel:`Allow to apply changes`, and :guilabel:`Final Stage` options" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:-1 msgid "Show configurations of the closing stage." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:3 msgid "Engineering change orders" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:12 msgid "Utilize *engineering change orders* (*ECOs*) to track, implement, and revert change versions made to products, and :ref:`bills of materials `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:15 msgid "Engineering change orders can be created:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:17 msgid ":ref:`directly in the ECO type `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:18 msgid "by an operator in the :ref:`tablet view ` of an operation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:19 msgid "automatically from feedback submitted to the :ref:`ECO type's email alias `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:24 msgid "Create ECO" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:26 msgid "To create a new |ECO|, begin by navigating to the *PLM* app. Then, select the |ECO| type card that will be used to track the progress of the change. On the :guilabel:`Engineering Change Orders` page, click the :guilabel:`New` button in the top-left corner." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:31 msgid "Learn how to create new :ref:`ECO types ` to categorize and organize change orders. Doing so ensures employees only view the |ECOs| related to their responsibilities, whether it involves new product introductions, targeted product line updates, or regulatory compliance fulfillment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:36 msgid "On the |ECO| form, fill in the following fields accordingly:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:38 msgid ":guilabel:`Description` is a brief summary of the improvement." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:39 msgid ":guilabel:`Type`: specifies the |ECO| type project for organizing the |ECOs|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:40 msgid ":guilabel:`Apply on` determines if the |ECO| changes the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` or the :guilabel:`Product Only`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:42 msgid ":guilabel:`Product` indicates the product being improved." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:43 msgid ":guilabel:`Bill of Materials` specifies the changed |BOM|. It auto-populates if the product in :guilabel:`Product` field has an existing |BOM|. If multiple |BOMs| exist, select the intended radio options from the drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:46 msgid ":guilabel:`Company` field is used in multi-company databases. Specify if the change applies to products in a specific company, or leave blank if the change applies to all companies." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:48 msgid ":guilabel:`Responsible` represents the assignee in charge of this |ECO|. (Optional)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:49 msgid ":guilabel:`Effective` specifies when the |ECO| becomes live. Choosing :guilabel:`As soon as possible` means the |ECO| applies to the production |BOM| as soon as an authorized user :ref:`applies the changes `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:53 msgid "On the other hand, choosing :guilabel:`At Date`, and setting a specific date, leaves a date that makes it easier to track the version history of the |BOM|, and the specific date |BOMs|, used for production." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:56 msgid ":guilabel:`Tags` are assigned to |ECOs| for prioritization and organization. Create a new tag by typing the name in the field and selecting :guilabel:`Create` from the drop-down menu. (Optional)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:59 msgid "After filling out the |ECO| form, click the :guilabel:`Start Revision` button to begin implementing the changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:62 msgid "By pressing :guilabel:`Start Revision`, three actions occur:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:64 msgid "The :guilabel:`Documents` smart button appears, storing relevant files of the |BOM|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:65 msgid "A copy of the production |BOM| is stored in the newly-appeared :guilabel:`Revision` smart button of the |ECO|. The next available version number (e.g., `V2`, `V3`, ...) is also assigned to keep track of all |BOM| versions." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:68 msgid "The stages of the |ECO| :guilabel:`Type` are displayed in the top-right corner of the |ECO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:71 msgid "The :guilabel:`Revision` smart button is available **only** when the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` radio button is selected in the :guilabel:`Apply on` field, and the :guilabel:`Start Revision` button has been pressed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:-1 msgid "ECO with overview of stages in the top-right corner, and *Revision* smart button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:80 msgid "Change components" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:82 msgid "To modify the components in a |BOM|, click the :guilabel:`Revision` smart button on an |ECO| to access the new version of the |BOM|. Odoo distinguishes the non-production version of the |BOM| from the current version, by flagging the test |BOM| with a large :guilabel:`Archived` tag." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:87 msgid "After clicking the :guilabel:`Start Revision` button for an |ECO| for the product, `[D_0045 Stool]`, make changes to the product's |BOM| by clicking the :guilabel:`Revision` smart button. Doing so opens the archived |BOM|, marked with a large red :guilabel:`Archived` flag." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:0 msgid "Show the archived Bill of Materials." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:95 msgid "On the new |BOM|, in the :guilabel:`Components` tab, proceed to modify the components list, by changing the :guilabel:`Quantity` of existing components, adding new components using the :guilabel:`Add a line` button, and removing components with the :guilabel:`🗑️ (trash)` icon." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:102 msgid "In version two of the |BOM| for a keyboard, the component quantities are reduced, and an additional component, `Stabilizers`, is added." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:0 msgid "Make changes to components by going to the new BoM with the *Revision* smart button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:110 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:153 msgid "Compare changes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:112 msgid "Once the changes are complete, navigate back to the |ECO|, by clicking `ECO00X` in the breadcrumbs located in the top-left corner. On the |ECO| form, a new :guilabel:`BoM Changes` tab displays the differences between the current |BOM| and the new version." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:116 msgid "Blue text indicates new components added to the revised |BOM| that are not in the production |BOM|. Black text represents updates shared by both |BOMs|, while red text indicates components removed in the revised |BOM|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:120 msgid "Changes and tests are encapsulated in the revised |BOM|, and do **not** affect the |BOM| currently used in production. That is, until the :ref:`changes are applied `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:124 msgid "View the summary of the differences between the current and revised keyboard |BOMs| in the :guilabel:`BoM Changes` tab of the |ECO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:0 msgid "View summary of component changes in the *BoM Changes* tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:132 msgid "Change operations" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:134 msgid "To modify the operations in a |BOM|, click the :guilabel:`Revision` smart button on an |ECO| to access the archived, new version of the |BOM|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:137 msgid "In the new |BOM| version, switch to the :guilabel:`Operations` tab to view and edit |BOM| operations. To make changes, select each operation, which opens the corresponding :guilabel:`Open: Operations` pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:142 msgid "The :guilabel:`Operations` tab is *not* available by default. To enable it, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and check the :guilabel:`Work Orders` box." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:146 msgid "Make changes to any of the fields in the :guilabel:`Open: Operations` pop-up window, then click :guilabel:`Save` once completed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:149 msgid "Create new operations by clicking the :guilabel:`Add a line` button, and remove new operations by clicking the :guilabel:`Archive Operation` button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:155 msgid "Once the changes are complete, navigate back to the |ECO|, by clicking `ECO00X` in the breadcrumbs located in the top-left corner." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:158 msgid "On the |ECO| form, a new :guilabel:`Operation Changes` tab displays the differences between the current production |BOM| and the new version." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:161 msgid "Blue text indicates new operations added to the revised |BOM| that do not yet exist in the production |BOM|. Black text represents updates shared by both |BOMs|, while red text indicates operations removed in the revised |BOM|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:165 msgid "Modifications to the |BOM| in an |ECO| will **not** affect the |BOM| used in production. That is, until the :ref:`changes are applied `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:168 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Operation Changes` tab, each row of details, beneath the columns in the table, reflect the following information:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:171 msgid ":guilabel:`Operation`: Name of the operation that was modified." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:172 msgid ":guilabel:`Step`: specifies the quality control point, visible when the operation includes detailed instructions." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:176 msgid "To check for instructions, click the operation line item in the :guilabel:`Operations` tab of a |BOM|. Then, in the :guilabel:`Open: Operations` pop-up window, look for the :guilabel:`Instructions` smart button displayed at the top." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:181 msgid "The `Assembly` :guilabel:`Operation` includes `10` detailed :guilabel:`Instructions` to complete it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:0 msgid "Show *Instructions* smart button to check whether an operation has additional\n" "instructions." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:189 msgid ":guilabel:`Step Type` details the type of quality control for further instructions in the operation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:191 msgid ":guilabel:`Type` corresponds with the colored text to specify how the revised |BOM| differs from the production |BOM|. Operation change types can be :guilabel:`Add`, :guilabel:`Remove`, or :guilabel:`Update`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:194 msgid ":guilabel:`Work Center` specifies the work center at which the operation is performed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:195 msgid ":guilabel:`Manual Duration Change` refers to the change in the :guilabel:`Default Duration` field in the :guilabel:`Open: Operations` pop-up window, which specifies the expected time for completing the operation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:200 msgid "The :guilabel:`Operation Changes` tab compares the production |BOM| with the revised |BOM| in the |ECO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:203 msgid "In the revised |BOM|, a new `Assembly` :guilabel:`Operation` at the :guilabel:`Work Center` `Assembly Line 1` is added. In addition, the expected duration of the operation is `20.00` minutes, as specified by the :guilabel:`Manual Duration Change`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:207 msgid "To supplement the `Assembly` operation, two quality control point instructions are added:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:209 msgid "The first is the :guilabel:`Step` `QCP00039`, a :guilabel:`Step Type` to :guilabel:`Register Production` of components." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:211 msgid "The second :guilabel:`Step` is `QCP00034`, an `Instructions` :guilabel:`Step Type` that provides additional assembly details." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:0 msgid "Show *Operation Changes* tab in an |ECO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:221 msgid "Apply changes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:223 msgid "After verifying the changes, move the |ECO| to a :ref:`verification stage `, which are stages that require approval before the revised changes can be applied to the production |BOM|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:227 msgid "Once the approvers accept the changes, the :guilabel:`Apply Changes` button becomes available. Click this button, and the |ECO| is automatically moved to a closing stage. The changes are applied, which archives the original production |BOM|, and the revised |BOM| becomes the new production |BOM|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:232 msgid "Verify changes" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:234 msgid "To ensure the changes are live, from the |ECO| where the :guilabel:`Apply Changes` button was just pressed, return to the revised |BOM| by clicking the :guilabel:`Revision` smart button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:237 msgid "On the revised |BOM|, the large red :guilabel:`Archived` flag is removed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:239 msgid "To further verify the changes, check the production |BOM| by going to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Products --> Products` and select the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:242 msgid "Then, on the product form, click the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button, and select the |BOM| from the list. In the :guilabel:`Miscellaneous` tab of the |BOM|, the :guilabel:`Version` field is updated to match the version number shown on the :guilabel:`Revision` smart button of the latest |ECO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:248 msgid "After applying the changes of the |ECO| for the :ref:`keyboard `, view the version of the current keyboard |BOM| in the :guilabel:`Miscellaneous` tab. Here, the :guilabel:`Version` number has been updated to `2`, matching the `V2` that appears in the :guilabel:`Revision` smart button of the |ECO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:0 msgid "View current *BOM* version in the Miscellaneous tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:260 msgid "Create ECO from tablet view" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:262 msgid "Operators can directly suggest clearer operation instructions, while performing manufacturing orders (MOs) in the *Manufacturing* app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:265 msgid "To create |ECOs| in this manner, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`. Then, select the desired :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` and switch to the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab. Then, click the :guilabel:`📱 (mobile phone)` icon for the desired work order to open the *tablet view* of the operation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:271 msgid "The :guilabel:`📱 (mobile phone)` icon is **only** available for :abbr:`MOs (Manufacturing Orders)` with a :guilabel:`Confirmed` or :guilabel:`In Progress` status." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:-1 msgid "Find the tablet icon for each operation, second from the far right." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:278 msgid "Next, add an instructional step, by clicking the :guilabel:`☰ (three horizontal lines)` icon in the tablet view of an operation. Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Menu` of action items for a :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)`. Then, click the :guilabel:`Add a step` button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:-1 msgid "Open the *Add a Step* pop-up by clicking the three horizontal lines icon in tablet view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:286 msgid "Clicking the button reveals an :guilabel:`Add a step` pop-up window, where the proposed changes are submitted." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:289 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Title` field, enter a short step description. Next, in the :guilabel:`Instruction` text field, type the instructions of the step in greater detail. Optionally, add an image to the :guilabel:`Document` field. Once completed, finish by clicking the :guilabel:`Propose Change` button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:295 msgid "To propose an additional check for broken components, enter the details in the :guilabel:`Add a Step` pop-up window. Doing so creates an instructional quality control point that will be reviewed in the following section." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:0 msgid "Fill out the *Add a Step* form to suggest an additional quality control point." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:303 msgid "Based on the inputs from the :guilabel:`Add a Step` pop-up window, an |ECO| is created with the following information:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:306 msgid ":guilabel:`Description` is the name of the operation, followed by the :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` number for reference." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:308 msgid "The |ECO| :guilabel:`Type` is automatically assigned to `BOM Changes`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:309 msgid ":guilabel:`Product` and :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` fields are automatically populated, based on the |BOM| used in the :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:311 msgid ":guilabel:`Responsible` is the operator who submitted the feedback." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:314 msgid "View ECO" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:316 msgid "To review the proposed changes, navigate to the :menuselection:`PLM app --> Overview`. In the `BOM Updates` |ECO| type card, the :guilabel:`X Engineering Changes` button represents the amount of operational changes created from the tablet view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:320 msgid "Click on the :guilabel:`X Engineering Changes` button to open the kanban view of the |ECO| type. To view the suggestion, select an |ECO| in the `New` stage." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:323 msgid "On the |ECO|, view a summary of the proposed changes in the :guilabel:`Operation Changes` tab. Click the :guilabel:`Revision` smart button to navigate to the revised |BOM| and look into the proposed changes in greater detail." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:328 msgid "An operator suggested another check for broken components by adding a step from the tablet view, while performing the `Assemble switches` operation for the :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` `WH/MO/00010` for the product, `Keyboard`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:332 msgid "Then, this created |ECO| can be viewed by navigating to the `BOM Changes` ECO type found in :menuselection:`PLM app --> Overview`. By default, |ECOs| created from tablet view are set to spawn in the `New` stage." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:336 msgid "The :guilabel:`Responsible` field is assigned to the operator who made the suggestion, allowing the employee revising the |BOM| to seek further clarification from the person who proposed the changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:0 msgid "Find the new ECO in the \"BOM Changes\" ECO type, in the *New* stage." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:344 msgid "On the revised |BOM|, switch to the :guilabel:`Operations` tab, and select the :guilabel:`☰ (three horizontal lines)` icon. Doing so opens a list of :guilabel:`Steps` to perform the operation, with the newest instruction titled `New Step Suggestion:`, followed by the user-entered title. Click the line item to view the suggested changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:-1 msgid "\"Show Instructions\" icon in the *Operations* tab of a BoM." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:353 msgid "On the :ref:`quality control point ` form, ensure the following form fields are accurately filled out to give detailed instructions for operators:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:356 msgid ":guilabel:`Title`: rename to give a concise description of the new instruction." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:357 msgid ":guilabel:`Control per`: using the drop-down menu, determine whether this instruction applies broadly for the :guilabel:`Product`, specifically for this :guilabel:`Operation` *only*, or a particular :guilabel:`Quantity` of the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:360 msgid ":guilabel:`Type`: categorizes the control point type. From the drop-down menu, select :guilabel:`Instructions` to detail an instruction for the worker. To receive input from the workers, select the :guilabel:`Take a Picture`, :guilabel:`Register Consumed Materials`, :guilabel:`Print Label`, or other :ref:`quality check options `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:367 msgid ":ref:`Configure quality control points `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:369 msgid "Once the quality control point is configured, return to the :guilabel:`Steps` list using the breadcrumbs. Finally, drag the last quality control line item to its intended order of instructions." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:373 msgid "Drag and reorder the `Check for broken switches` instruction, by clicking and dragging its \"6 dots\" icon to move it from the bottom to the second position." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:0 msgid "Drag and reorder instructions by selecting the \"6 dots\" icon on the far left." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:3 msgid "Version control" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:10 msgid "Use Odoo's *Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)* to manage previous versions of bills of materials (BoMs). Store former assembly instructions, component details, and past product design files while keeping the past details out of the production |BOM|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:14 msgid "Easily revert to previous |BOM| versions, when needed. Additionally, use *PLM* to trace which |BOM| version was active on specific dates for recalls or customer complaints." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:17 msgid "Every |BOM| version is stored in an *engineering change order* (ECO) for organized testing and improvements without disrupting normal manufacturing operations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:21 msgid ":ref:`Engineering change order `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:24 msgid "Current BoM version" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:26 msgid "To see the current version of the |BOM| used in production, go to :menuselection:`PLM app --> Master Data --> Bill of Materials`, and select the desired |BOM| from the list. Then, switch to the :guilabel:`Miscellaneous` tab, where the currently live :guilabel:`Version` of the |BOM| is displayed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:32 msgid "|BOMs| can also be accessed from :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Products --> Bill of Materials`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:-1 msgid "Show the current version BOM in the Misc tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:40 msgid "Version history" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:42 msgid "To manage all former, current, and future versions of a |BOM|, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Products --> Bills of Materials` and click the desired |BOM|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:45 msgid "From the |BOM| page, click the :guilabel:`ECO` smart button, and switch to list view by selecting the :guilabel:`≣ (four horizontal lines)` icon on the top right corner." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:49 msgid "The :guilabel:`ECO` smart button is visible on the |BOM| **only** if the *PLM* app is installed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:-1 msgid "Show ECO smart button on a BoM." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:55 msgid "In the list of |ECOs| for the product, navigate to the search bar at the top, and click the :guilabel:`▼ (down arrow)` icon on the right to access a drop-down menu of :guilabel:`Filters`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:58 msgid "Next, filter by :guilabel:`Done` |ECOs| to view: the revision history of the |BOM|, the :guilabel:`Responsible` user who applied the change, and the :guilabel:`Effective Date` of the |BOM|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:62 msgid "Click each |ECO| to view the past components, operations, and design files associated with the |BOM|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:-1 msgid "Display ECO revision history for a BoM for a product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:70 msgid "If the :guilabel:`Effective Date` field is empty, the :guilabel:`Effective` date of the |ECO| is automatically set to :guilabel:`As soon as possible` and no dates are recorded in the revision history of the |BOM|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:0 msgid "List of BOM effective dates." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:79 msgid "A workaround for checking when the |BOM| went live is by navigating to the chatter, and hovering over the time the |ECO| was moved to the :ref:`closing stage `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:83 msgid "Design files" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:85 msgid "Attach computer-aided design (CAD) files, PDFs, images, or other design material to the |BOM| itself." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:88 msgid "To do so, navigate to :menuselection:`PLM app --> Master Data --> Bill of Materials`, and select the desired |BOM|. On the |BOM|, navigate to the *chatter*, and click the :guilabel:`📎 (paperclip)` icon." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:92 msgid "The files associated with the |BOM| are displayed in the :guilabel:`Files` section. To add more design files, select the :guilabel:`Attach files` button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:-1 msgid "Show paperclip icon in the chatter to attach files to a BoM." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:100 msgid "Manage design files in an ECO" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:102 msgid "Add, modify, and remove files in an |ECO|. Once the |ECO| is approved and applied, the new files are automatically linked to the production |BOM|. Archived files are removed from the |BOM|, but are still accessible in the |ECO|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:106 msgid "To manage the design files in the |ECO|, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`PLM app --> Changes` and choose the desired |ECO|. Next, open the :guilabel:`Attachments` page by clicking the :guilabel:`Documents` smart button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:110 msgid "Hover over each attachment to reveal the :guilabel:`︙ (three vertical dots)` icon. From there, choose whether to :guilabel:`Edit`, :guilabel:`Remove`, or :guilabel:`Download` the file. Any changes made to these files are contained within the |ECO|, and will only apply to the production |BOM| once the :ref:`changes are applied `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:116 msgid "In the `Create 60% keyboard` |ECO|, the design files are from the original `100% keyboard` |BOM|. To replace the keyboard PDF, begin by selecting the :guilabel:`Documents` smart button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:0 msgid "Show *Documents* smart button from an active ECO." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:123 msgid "On the :guilabel:`Attachments` page, hover over the `100% keyboard manual.pdf` design file, and click the :guilabel:`︙ (three vertical dots)` icon. Then, click the :guilabel:`Remove` option to archive the file." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:127 msgid "Next, on the same :guilabel:`Attachments` page, click the :guilabel:`Upload` button to upload the new design file, named `60% keyboard manual`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:0 msgid "View of *Attachments* page from the *Documents* smart button. Displays one archived and\n" "one newly added attachment." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:136 msgid "Archived files are **not** permanently deleted — they can still be accessed in the previous |ECO|, or as an archived file in the latest |ECO|, where the archival occurred." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:140 msgid "Apply rebase" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:142 msgid "Odoo simplifies merge conflict resolution for concurrent |ECOs| on the same product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:144 msgid "Conflicts can occur when the production |BOM| is updated while other |ECOs| are modifying the previous version. Differences between the new and previous production |BOMs| are displayed in the :guilabel:`Previous Eco Bom Changes` tab, visible only in this scenario." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:148 msgid "To resolve conflicts and retain |ECO| changes, click the :guilabel:`Apply Rebase` button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:151 msgid "Two |ECOs|, `ECO0011` and `ECO0012`, are created when the current |BOM| version is `5`. In `ECO0011`, a new component, `Space stabilizer`, is added, and the changes are applied. This means the current |BOM| version has become `6`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:0 msgid "Apply changes to an ECO to update the production BOM." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:159 msgid "This means `ECO0012` is modifying an outdated |BOM|. As shown in the :guilabel:`Previous Eco Bom Changes` tab, the |BOM| is missing the `Space stabilizer`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:162 msgid "To ensure the changes applied by `ECO0011` are kept when the changes occur in `ECO0012`, click the :guilabel:`Apply Rebase` button to apply the previous |ECO| changes, without affecting the changes already made to `ECO0012`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:0 msgid "Click the *Apply Rebase* button to update the BOM to match the production BOM." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management.rst:3 msgid "Project management" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:3 msgid "Approvals" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:10 msgid "Notify stakeholders and managers automatically by assigning approvers to stages of :ref:`engineering change orders ` (ECOs) under review. Changes can only be applied after the assigned approver accepts them. Approvals ensure reviews by team members, which prevents mistakes and premature actions." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:16 msgid ":ref:`Stage configuration `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:19 msgid "Add approver" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:21 msgid "To add an approver, first go to the :menuselection:`PLM app`, and click on the project card of an ECO type to open the Gantt view of the |ECOs|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:24 msgid "On the :guilabel:`Engineering Change Orders` page, hover over the intended stage, and select the :guilabel:`⚙️ (gear)` icon. Then, click :guilabel:`Edit` to open a pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:28 msgid "Approvers can be added to any stage, but it's strongly recommended to assign them to the *verification* stage, which comes before the *closing* stage, where |ECOs| are applied, and the :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` version is updated." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:32 msgid "See the documentation about :ref:`stage types ` for more information." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:36 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Edit` stage pop-up window, click the :guilabel:`Add a line` button, located under :guilabel:`Approvals`. Then, type in the approver's position (or title) under :guilabel:`Role` (e.g. `Engineering Manager`, `Quality Team`, etc.), and select the relevant :guilabel:`User` from the drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:41 msgid "Next, set the :guilabel:`Approval Type` to :guilabel:`Is required to approve`, :guilabel:`Approves, but the approval is optional`, or :guilabel:`Comments only`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:45 msgid "Assign the `CTO`, \"Mitchell Admin,\" as a required approver for |ECOs| in the `Validated` stage in the `New Product Introduction` ECO type." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:48 msgid "Approvals from the quality and marketing teams are **not** required to apply changes to the |ECO| because their :guilabel:`Approval Type` is set to :guilabel:`Approves, but the approval is optional` and :guilabel:`Comments only`, respectively." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:0 msgid "Set an approver that \"Is required to approve\" ECOs in the \"Validated\" stage." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:57 msgid "Manage approvals" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:59 msgid "Approvers can easily track their to-do approvals by navigating to the :menuselection:`PLM app`, and looking at the card for an ECO type, which shows the count of open tasks assigned to them." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:62 msgid "Here's what each button on an ECO project card does:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:64 msgid "The :guilabel:`# Engineering Changes` button displays a count of in-progress |ECOs| of this ECO type. Clicking the button opens the Gantt view of the :guilabel:`Engineering Change Orders` page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:66 msgid ":guilabel:`My Validations` displays a count of |ECOs| the approver must accept or reject. Clicking on this button displays |ECOs| pending approval or rejected (marked with the red :guilabel:`Blocked` state)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:69 msgid "The :guilabel:`All Validations` button shows the count of |ECOs| awaiting approval or rejected by any approver. Clicking it reveals these pending |ECOs|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:71 msgid ":guilabel:`To Apply` displays a count of |ECOs| to which the user needs to apply changes. Clicking on the button displays all the |ECOs| to approve, and apply changes to, in the verification stage." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:75 msgid "|ECOs| marked with the green :guilabel:`Done` stage have already been approved, and the user just needs to click on the |ECO| to enter the form view, and click the :guilabel:`Apply Changes` button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:-1 msgid "Display count of validations to-do and buttons to open filtered list of ECOs." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:84 msgid "Approve ECOs" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:86 msgid "Navigate to an |ECO| in a verification stage, while logged in as the assigned approver, to see the :guilabel:`Approve`, :guilabel:`Reject`, and :guilabel:`Apply Changes` buttons." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:89 msgid "To approve the |ECO|, and apply the changes onto the production :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, click :guilabel:`Approve`, and then :guilabel:`Apply Changes`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:92 msgid "Note that the :guilabel:`Apply Changes` button will **not** work unless the :guilabel:`Approve` button was clicked first. Additionally, the chatter logs the history of the clicked buttons." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:96 msgid "When the :guilabel:`Approval Type` is **not** set to :guilabel:`Is required to approve`, approval from the associated user is not needed before applying changes with the :guilabel:`Apply Changes` button. Thus, the :guilabel:`Apply Changes` button **will work** without requiring the :guilabel:`Approve` button to be clicked first." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:102 msgid "Automated activities" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:104 msgid "When an |ECO| is moved to a verification stage, a planned activity is automatically created for assigned approvers to review the |ECO|. Approvers receive a notification in their activities inbox, accessible through the :guilabel:`🕘 (clock)` icon at the top of the page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:108 msgid "In the to-do task list, the :guilabel:`Engineering Change Order (ECO)` notification displays the number of activities marked :guilabel:`Late`, :guilabel:`Today`, and :guilabel:`Future`. Clicking on each of these buttons shows a filtered Gantt view of the respective |ECOs|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:113 msgid "Scheduled activities are shown as a number on the :guilabel:`🕘 (clock)` icon, with `5` |ECOs| pending approval :guilabel:`Today`. Currently, there are `0` :guilabel:`Late` or :guilabel:`Future` |ECOs|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:0 msgid "Show scheduled approvals notifications for the user." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:121 msgid "By clicking a pending |ECO|, a *planned activity* for :guilabel:`ECO Approval` is recorded in the chatter. Click on the :guilabel:`i (Info)` icon to view additional information, including the approval's :guilabel:`Created` date, the approver :guilabel:`Assigned to` it, and the due date." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:-1 msgid "Show additional details of the planned ECO approval." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:130 msgid "Follow-up activities" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:132 msgid "When |ECOs| are rejected, tasks need to be assigned to project members for required modifications before |ECO| approval. To create tasks with deadlines, navigate to the rejected |ECO| form, and go to the chatter." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:136 msgid "Select the :guilabel:`Mark Done` button in the :guilabel:`Planned Activities` section of the chatter to close the activity, and open a pop-up window for creating tasks." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:-1 msgid "Show *Mark Done* window to show *Done & Schedule Next*, *Done*, and *Discard* buttons to\n" "close the planned activity." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:144 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Mark Done` window, click :guilabel:`Done & Schedule Next` to open a new :guilabel:`Schedule an Activity` window. Next, set the :guilabel:`Assigned to` team member and the :guilabel:`Due Date` for completing the changes. Provide task details in the :guilabel:`Summary` field and the text box. Click the :guilabel:`Schedule` button to close the window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:149 msgid "After closing the window, on the |ECO| form, move the |ECO| back one stage. Doing so ensures that when the team member completes the changes, and returns the |ECO| to the verification stage, a new :guilabel:`ECO Approval` task is created for the approver." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:154 msgid "The approver creates an activity for the :guilabel:`Responsible` of the |ECO|, `Laurie Poiret`, that details the changes required for the approver to :guilabel:`Accept` the |ECO|. Clicking the :guilabel:`Schedule` button creates a planned activity for Laurie due on `08/15/2023`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:0 msgid "Create a scheduled activity for follow-up changes to a rejected ECO." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase.rst:8 msgid "Purchase" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase.rst:10 msgid "**Odoo Purchase** helps keep track of purchase agreements, quotations, and purchase orders. Learn how to monitor purchase tender, automate replenishment, and follow up on your orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase.rst:14 msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Purchase `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced.rst:5 msgid "Advanced" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:3 msgid "Analyze the performance of your purchases" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:5 msgid "If your company regularly purchases products, you have several reasons to track and analyze your performance. The insights gathered can help you to better forecast and plan your future orders. For example, you can assess if your business is dependent on particular vendors, and the data can help you negotiate discounts on prices." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:11 msgid "Generate customized reports" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:13 msgid "Go to *Reporting* to access the purchase analysis. Simply by accessing the reporting dashboard, you can get a quick overview of your actual performance. By default, the reporting dashboard displays a line chart presenting the untaxed amount of your purchase orders per day, and below it, key metrics and a pivot table." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:-1 msgid "Reporting dashboard in Odoo Purchase" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:22 msgid "While the data initially presented is useful, there are several tools and features you can use to get even more insights on your purchases." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:26 msgid "Use filters to select the data you need" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:28 msgid "Odoo offers several default filters you can use and combine by clicking on *Filters*. When you select one or several filters, Odoo looks for all the orders that match at least one of the filters you have chosen and populates the chart, key metrics, and pivot table with the data. The pre-configured filters are:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:33 msgid "All *Requests for Quotation*" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:35 msgid "All *Purchase Orders*, except canceled ones" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:37 msgid "*Confirmation Date Last Year* includes all orders that were confirmed the previous year, canceled purchase orders included" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:40 msgid "*Order Date* includes all orders - request for quotations and purchases orders (canceled ones included) - depending on their date of creation" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:43 msgid "*Confirmation Date* includes all confirmed orders, canceled ones included, depending on their date of confirmation" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:47 msgid "When you have to select a period, you can use multiple years, and, with at least one year selected, multiple quarters and the three most recent months." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:51 msgid "If you use the *Order Date* or *Confirmation Date* filters, the *Comparison* feature appears next to *Filters*. It enables you to compare the period you filtered with the previous one." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:-1 msgid "Reporting filters in Odoo Purchase" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:59 msgid "Add custom filters" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:61 msgid "Thanks to the 31 filtering options to choose from, the possibilities of your customizing your dataset are almost limitless. Go to :menuselection:`Filters --> Add Custom Filter`, specify the condition the filtering option should meet (e.g. *is equal to*, *contains*, etc.), and click on *Apply*. If you want to select orders matching several conditions simultaneously (*and* operator), repeat the process to add another custom filter. If you want to use the *or* operator, don't click on *Apply*, and click on *Add a condition* instead. Once you have added all the desired filtering options, click on *Apply*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:-1 msgid "Custom reporting filter in Odoo Purchase" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:74 msgid "To avoid having to recreate custom filters every time, save them by clicking on :menuselection:`Favorites --> Save current search --> Save`. The customized search filter can then be accessed by clicking on *Favorites* or can even be set as the default filter when you open the reporting dashboard." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:80 msgid "Measure exactly what you need" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:82 msgid "Before selecting what you want to measure, you need to decide whether you prefer using the graph view or the pivot view. By default, the dashboard presents both views. However, the measures you select won't be applied to both views. You can access each view separately by clicking on the icons at the top right of the dashboard." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:-1 msgid "Switch reporting view in Odoo Purchase" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:92 msgid "Visualize your data" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:94 msgid "You can transform the main graph in just a click by selecting one of the three charts: bar, line or pie. Fourteen different measures are available, but you can only use one at a time. However, you can group the measure using one or several of the 19 *Groups*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:-1 msgid "Reporting graph view in Odoo Purchase" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:102 msgid "For bar and line charts, the selected measure is your y-axis, and the first group you select is used to create the x-axis. Adding more group adds additional lines (line chart) or transforms your bar chart into a stacked bar chart. For pie charts, the more groups you select, the more slices are displayed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:108 msgid "Explore your data" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:110 msgid "The pivot table view enables you to explore your data in great detail. Unlike the graph view, the pivot table enables you to add several measures at the same time. By clicking on *Measures* or on the **+** sign in the *Total* column, you can add as many as you want, each assigned to a new column. By clicking on the **+** sign in the *Total* row, you can add *Groups*. If you click on a group's **+** sign, you can add a sub-group, and so on." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:-1 msgid "Pivot table view in Odoo Purchase" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:121 msgid "You can insert your pivot table's data directly in the Spreadsheet app or export it as an Excel file." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals.rst:5 msgid "Manage deals" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:3 msgid "Use blanket orders to create purchase agreements with vendors" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:5 msgid "Blanket orders are long-term purchase agreements between a company and a vendor to deliver products on a recurring basis with predetermined pricing. Using blanket orders are useful when products are always purchased from the same vendor, but in different quantities at different times." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:9 msgid "By simplifying the ordering process, blanket orders not only save time, they also save money, since they can be advantageous when negotiating bulk pricing with vendors." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:13 msgid ":doc:`calls_for_tenders`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:16 msgid "Create a new blanket order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:18 msgid "To create blanket orders, the *Purchase Agreements* feature first needs to be enabled in the settings of the *Purchase* app. To do this, go to :menuselection:`Purchase --> Configuration --> Settings`, and under the :guilabel:`Orders` section, click the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Purchase Agreements`. Doing so will enable the ability to create blanket orders, as well as alternative requests for quotation (RFQs)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:-1 msgid "Purchase Agreements enabled in the Purshase app settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:28 msgid "To create a blanket order, go to :menuselection:`Purchase --> Orders --> blanket orders`, and click :guilabel:`New`. This creates (and navigates to) a new blanket order form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:31 msgid "From this new blanket order form, different fields and settings can be configured, so there are pre-determined rules that the recurring long-term agreement must follow:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:34 msgid ":guilabel:`Purchase Representative`: is the user assigned to this specific blanket order. By default, this is the user who created the agreement; the user can be changed directly from the drop-down menu next to this field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:37 msgid ":guilabel:`Agreement Type`: is the type of purchase agreement this blanket order is classified as. In Odoo, blanket orders are the only official purchase agreement." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:39 msgid ":guilabel:`Vendor`: is the supplier to whom this agreement is tied, either once or on a recurring basis. The vendor can be selected directly from the drop-down menu next to this field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:41 msgid ":guilabel:`Currency`: is the agreed-upon currency that will be used for this exchange. If multiple currencies have been activated in the database, the currency can be changed from the drop-down menu next to this field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:44 msgid ":guilabel:`Agreement Deadline`: is the date that this purchase agreement will be set to expire on (if desired). If this blanket order should not expire, leave this field blank." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:46 msgid ":guilabel:`Ordering Date`: is the date that this blanket order should be placed on if a new quotation is created directly from the blanket order form. If a new quotation is created, this value will automatically populate the *Order Deadline* field on the :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:50 msgid ":guilabel:`Delivery Date`: is the expected delivery date that the products included in an :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)` created directly from the blanket order form will be expected to arrive. If a new quotation is created, this value will automatically populate the *Expected Arrival* field on the :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:54 msgid ":guilabel:`Source Document`: is the source purchase order (PO) that this blanket order will be tied to. If this blanket order should not be tied to any existing :abbr:`POs (Purchase Orders)`, leave this field blank." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:57 msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: is the company assigned to this specific blanket order. By default, this is the company that the user creating the blanket order is listed under. If the database is not a multi-company database, this field can not be changed, and will default to the only company listed in the database." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:-1 msgid "New blanket order purchase agreement with added products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:66 msgid "Once all relevant fields have been filled out, click :guilabel:`Add a line` to add products under the :guilabel:`Product` column. Then, change the quantity of each product in the :guilabel:`Quantity` column (if desired), and set a price in the :guilabel:`Unit Price` column." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:71 msgid "When adding products to a new blanket order, the pre-existing prices of products will not be added automatically to the product lines. The prices must be manually assigned by changing the value in the :guilabel:`Unit Price` column to an agreed-upon price with the listed vendor. Otherwise, the price will remain **0**." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:76 msgid "To view and change the default purchase agreement settings for blanket orders directly from the blanket order form, click the :guilabel:`internal link (arrow icon)` next to the :guilabel:`Agreement Type` field where :guilabel:`Blanket Order` is listed. This navigates to the blanket order settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:81 msgid "From here, the settings for blanket orders can be edited. Under the :guilabel:`Agreement Type` section, the name of the :guilabel:`Agreement Type` can be changed (if desired), and the :guilabel:`Agreement Selection Type` can be changed, as well. There are two options that can be activated for the type of selection:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:86 msgid ":guilabel:`Select only one RFQ (exclusive)`: when a purchase order is confirmed, the remaining purchase orders will be canceled." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:88 msgid ":guilabel:`Select multiple RFQ (non-exclusive)`: when a purchase order is confirmed, remaining purchase orders will ***not** be canceled. Instead, multiple purchase orders are allowed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:91 msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Data For New Quotations` section, the settings for how product lines and quantities will be populated on new quotations using this purchase agreeement can be changed next to the :guilabel:`Lines` and :guilabel:`Quantities` fields." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:-1 msgid "Purchase Agreement type edit screen for blanket orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:99 msgid "There are two options that can be activated for :guilabel:`Lines`:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:101 msgid ":guilabel:`Use lines of agreement`: when creating a new quotation, the product lines will pre-populate with the same products listed on the blanket order, if said blanket order is chosen on the new quotation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:104 msgid ":guilabel:`Do not create RfQ lines automatically`: when creating a new quotation and selecting an existing blanket order, the settings will carry over to the new quotation, but the product lines will not populate." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:108 msgid "And, there are two options that can be activated for :guilabel:`Quantities`:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:110 msgid ":guilabel:`Use quantities of agreement`: when creating a new quotation, the product quantities listed on the blanket order will pre-populate on the product lines, if said blanket order is chosen on the new quotation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:113 msgid ":guilabel:`Set quantities manually`: when creating a new quotation and selecting an existing blanket order, the product lines will pre-populate, but all quantities will be set to **0**. The quantities will need to be manually set by the user." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:117 msgid "Once the desired changes have been made (if any), click :guilabel:`New` (via the breadcrumbs, at the top of the page) to navigate back to the blanket order form, and click :guilabel:`Confirm` to save this new purchase agreement. Once confirmed, the blanket order changes from *Draft* to *Ongoing*, meaning this agreement can be selected and used when creating new :abbr:`RFQs (Requests for Quotation)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:124 msgid "After creating and confirming a blanket order, products, quantities, and prices can still be edited, added, and removed from the purchase agreement." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:128 msgid "Create a new :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)` from the blanket order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:130 msgid "After confirming a blanket order, new quotations can be created directly from the blanket order form that will use the rules set on the form and pre-populate the new quotation with the correct information. Additionally, this new quotation will be automatically linked to this blanket order form via the :guilabel:`RFQs/Orders` smart button at the top right of the form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:135 msgid "To create a new quotation from the blanket order form, click :guilabel:`New Quotation`. This creates (and navigates to) a new :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)`, that is pre-populated with the correct information, depending on the settings configured on the blanket order form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:139 msgid "From the new :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)` form, click :guilabel:`Send by Email` to compose and send an email to the listed vendor; click :guilabel:`Print RFQ` to generate a printable PDF of the quotation; or, once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to confirm the purchase order (PO)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:-1 msgid "New quotation with copied products and rules from blanket order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:147 msgid "Once the :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` has been confirmed, click back to the blanket order form (via the breadcrumbs, at the top of the page). From the blanket order form, there is now one :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)` listed in the :guilabel:`RFQs/Orders` smart button at the top right of the form. Click the :guilabel:`RFQs/Orders` smart button to see the purchase order that was just created." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:-1 msgid "RFQs and Orders smart button from blanket order form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:157 msgid "Create a new blanket order from an :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:159 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:49 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:148 msgid "To create a new :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)`, navigate to the :menuselection:`Purchase` app, and click :guilabel:`New`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:162 msgid "Then, add information to the :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)` form: add a vendor from the drop-down menu next to the :guilabel:`Vendor` field, and click :guilabel:`Add a product` to select a product from the drop-down menu in the :guilabel:`Product` column. Then, set the desired purchase quantity in the :guilabel:`Quantity` column, and change the purchase price in the :guilabel:`Unit Price` column, if desired." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:168 msgid "Clicking the :guilabel:`additional options (two-dots)` icon provides additional visibility options to add to the line item. Repeat these steps to add as many additional options as desired, including the :guilabel:`UoM` (Units of Measure) to purchase the products in, and the :guilabel:`Expected Arrival` date." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:173 msgid "Before confirming the new quotation and creating a purchase order, click the drop-down menu next to the :guilabel:`Blanket Order` field, and type a new name for the new blanket order. This creates a brand new purchase agreement, and saves the information entered in the fields of the purchase order form, as well as the product information entered on the product lines." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:178 msgid "From the new :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)` form, click :guilabel:`Send by Email` to compose and send an email to the listed vendor; click :guilabel:`Print RFQ` to generate a printable PDF of the quotation; or, once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to confirm the :abbr:`PO (purchase order)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:-1 msgid "New blanket order created directly from quotation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:188 msgid "To see the newly-created blanket order purchase agreement, go to :menuselection:`Orders --> Blanket Orders`, and click into the new blanket order. From here, settings and rules can be changed, if desired." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:193 msgid "Blanket orders and replenishment" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:195 msgid "Once a blanket order is confirmed, a new vendor line is added under the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab of of the products included in the :abbr:`BO (Blanket Order)`. This makes blanket orders useful with :doc:`automated replenishment <../../purchase/products/reordering>`, because information about the :guilabel:`Vendor`, :guilabel:`Price`, and the :guilabel:`Agreement` are referenced on the vendor line. This information is used to determine where, when, and for what price this product could be replenished." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:-1 msgid "Product form with replenishment agreement linked to blanket order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:3 msgid "Create alternative requests for quotation for multiple vendors" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:5 msgid "Sometimes, companies might want to request offers from multiple vendors at the same time, by inviting those vendors to submit offers for similar goods or services all at once. This helps companies to select the cheapest (and fastest) vendors, depending on their specific business needs." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:9 msgid "In Odoo, this can be done by adding alternative requests for quotation (RFQs) for different vendors. Once a response is received from each vendor, the product lines from each :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)` can be compared, and a decision can be made for which products to purchase from which vendors." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:14 msgid "Sometimes referred to as a *call for tender*, this process is primarily used by organizations in the public sector, who are legally bound to use it when making a purchase. However, private companies can also use alternative :abbr:`RFQs (Requests for Quotation)` to spend money efficiently, as well." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:20 msgid ":doc:`blanket_orders`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:23 msgid "Configure purchase agreement settings" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:25 msgid "To create alternative :abbr:`RFQs (Requests for Quotation)` directly from a quotation, the *Purchase Agreements* feature first needs to be enabled in the settings of the *Purchase* app. To do this, go to :menuselection:`Purchase --> Configuration --> Settings`, and under the :guilabel:`Orders` section, click the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Purchase Agreements`. Doing so will enable the ability to create alternative :abbr:`RFQs (Requests for Quotation)`, as well as the ability to create *blanket orders*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:-1 msgid "Purchase Agreements enabled in the Purchase app settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:37 msgid "To save time on a *call for tender*, custom vendors, prices, and delivery lead times can be set in the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab on a product form. To do so, navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase --> Products --> Products`, and select a product to edit. From the product form, click the :guilabel:`Purchase tab`, then click :guilabel:`Add a line`. From the drop-down menu, choose a vendor to set under the :guilabel:`Vendor` column, and set a :guilabel:`Price` and :guilabel:`Delivery Lead Time` if desired. Clicking the :guilabel:`additional options (two-dots)` icon provides additional visibility options to add to the line item." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:47 msgid "Create an :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:52 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:151 msgid "Then, add information to the :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)` form: add a vendor from the drop-down next to the :guilabel:`Vendor` field, and click :guilabel:`Add a product` to select a product from the drop-down menu in the :guilabel:`Product` column. Then, set the desired purchase quantity in the :guilabel:`Quantity` column, and change the purchase price in the :guilabel:`Unit Price` column, if desired." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:58 msgid "Clicking the :guilabel:`additional options (two-dots)` icon provides additional visibility options to add to the line item. Repeat these steps to add as many options as desired, including the :guilabel:`UoM` (Units of Measure) to purchase the products in, and the :guilabel:`Expected Arrival` date." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:63 msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Send by Email`. This causes a :guilabel:`Compose Email` pop-up window to appear, wherein the message to the vendor can be customized. Once ready, click :guilabel:`Send`. This turns the :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)` into a purchase order (PO), and sends an email to the vendor listed on the purchase order form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:-1 msgid "Compose and send quotation email pop-up." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:73 msgid "Sending emails to each vendor can be useful when creating alternative :abbr:`RFQs (Requests for Quotation)`, because vendors can confirm if their past prices still hold today, which can help companies choose the best offers for them." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:78 msgid "Create alternatives to an :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:80 msgid "Once a :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` is created and sent by email to a vendor, alternative :abbr:`RFQs (Requests for Quotation)` can be created and sent to additional, alternate vendors to compare prices, delivery times, and other factors to make a decision from which vendors to order which products." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:85 msgid "To create alternative :abbr:`RFQs (Requests for Quotation)`, click the :guilabel:`Alternatives` tab from the purchase order form, then click :guilabel:`Create Alternative`. When clicked, a :guilabel:`Create alternative` pop-up window appears." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:-1 msgid "Calls for tenders pop-up to create alternative quotation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:93 msgid "From this window, select a new/different vendor from the drop-down menu next to the :guilabel:`Vendor` field to assign this alternative quotation to." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:96 msgid "Next to this, there is a :guilabel:`Copy Products` checkbox that is selected by default. When selected, the product quantities of the original :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` are copied to the alternative. For this first alternative quotation, leave the checkbox checked. Once finished, click :guilabel:`Create Alternative`. This creates (and navigates to) a new :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:101 msgid "Since the :guilabel:`Create Alternative` checkbox was left checked, this new purchase order form is already populated with the same products, quantities, and other details as the previous, original :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:106 msgid "When the :guilabel:`Copy Products` checkbox is selected while creating an alternative quotation, additional products do not need to be added on the purchase order form unless desired. However, if a chosen vendor is listed in the :guilabel:`Vendor` column under the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab on a product form included in the purchase order, the values set on the product form carry over to the :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)`, and have to be changed manually, if desired." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:112 msgid "Once ready, create a second alternative quotation by clicking the :guilabel:`Alternatives` tab, and once again, click :guilabel:`Create Alternative`. This causes the :guilabel:`Create alternative` pop-up window to appear again. This time, choose a different vendor from the drop-down menu next to :guilabel:`Vendor`, and this time, *uncheck* the :guilabel:`Copy Products` checkbox. Then, click :guilabel:`Create Alternative`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:119 msgid "If an alternative quotation needs to be removed from the :guilabel:`Alternatives` tab, they can be individually removed by clicking on the :guilabel:`Remove (X)` icon at the end of their row." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:122 msgid "This creates a third, new purchase order. But, since the product quantities of the original :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` were *not* copied over, the product lines are empty, and new products need to be added by clicking :guilabel:`Add a product`, and selecting the desired products from the drop-down menu. Once the desired number of products are added, click :guilabel:`Send by Email`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:-1 msgid "Blank alternative quotation with alternatives in breadcrumbs." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:131 msgid "This causes a :guilabel:`Compose Email` pop-up window to appear, wherein the message to the vendor can be customized. Once ready, click :guilabel:`Send` to send an email to the vendor listed on the purchase order form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:135 msgid "From this newest purchase order form, click the :guilabel:`Alternatives` tab. Under this tab, all three purchase orders can be seen in the :guilabel:`Reference` column. Additionally, the vendors are listed under the :guilabel:`Vendor` column, and the order :guilabel:`Total` and :guilabel:`Status` of the orders are in the rows, as well." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:141 msgid "Link a new :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)` to existing quotations" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:143 msgid "Creating alternative quotations directly from a purchase order form under the :guilabel:`Alternatives` tab is the easiest way to create and link quotations. However, separate :abbr:`RFQs (Requests for Quotation)` can also be linked *after* the fact, even if they are created completely separately at first." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:157 msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Send by Email`. This causes a :guilabel:`Compose Email` pop-up window to appear, wherein the message to the vendor can be customized. Once ready, click :guilabel:`Send` to send an email to the vendor listed on the purchase order form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:161 msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Alternatives` tab once more. Since this new :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` was created separately, there are no other orders linked yet. To link this order with the alternatives created previously, click :guilabel:`Link to Existing RfQ` on the first line in the :guilabel:`Vendor` column." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:-1 msgid "pop-up to link new quotation to existing RFQs." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:170 msgid "This causes an :guilabel:`Add: Alternative POs` pop-up window to appear. Select the three purchase orders created previously, and click :guilabel:`Select`. All of these orders are now copied to this :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` under the :guilabel:`Alternatives` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:175 msgid "If a large number of purchase orders are being processed and the previous :abbr:`POs (Purchase Orders)` can't be located, try clicking :menuselection:`Group By --> Vendor` under the search bar at the top of the pop-up window to group by the vendors selected on the previous orders." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:181 msgid "Compare product lines" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:183 msgid "When there are multiple :abbr:`RFQs (Requests for Quotation)` linked as alternatives, they can be compared side-by-side in order to determine which vendors offer the best deals on which products. To compare each quotation, go to the :menuselection:`Purchase` app, and select one of the quotations created previously." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:188 msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Alternatives` tab to see all the linked :abbr:`RFQs (Requests for Quotation)`. Next, under the :guilabel:`Create Alternative` tab, click :guilabel:`Compare Product Lines`. This navigates to a Compare Order Lines page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:-1 msgid "Compare Product Lines page for alternative RFQs." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:196 msgid "The Compare Order Lines page, by default, groups by :guilabel:`Product`. Each product included in any of the :abbr:`RFQs (Requests for Quotation)` is displayed in its own drop-down, along with all of the :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` numbers in the :guilabel:`Reference` column." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:200 msgid "Additional columns on this page include the :guilabel:`Vendor` from which products were ordered, the :guilabel:`Status` of the quotation (i.e., RFQ, RFQ Sent); the :guilabel:`Quantity` of products ordered from each vendor; the :guilabel:`Unit Price` per product and :guilabel:`Total` price of the order, and more." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:206 msgid "To remove product lines from the Compare Order Lines page, click :guilabel:`Clear` at the far right end of that product line's row. This removes this product as a chooseable option from the page, and changes the :guilabel:`Total` price of that product on the page to **0**. On the purchase order form in which that product was included, its ordered quantity is changed to **0**, as well." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:212 msgid "Once the best offers have been identified, at the end of each row, individual products can be selected by clicking :guilabel:`Choose`. Once all the desired products have been chosen, click :guilabel:`Requests for Quotation` (in the breadcrumbs, at the top of the page) to navigate back to an overview of all :abbr:`RFQs (Requests for Quotation)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:218 msgid "Cancel (or keep) alternatives" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:220 msgid "Now that the desired products have been chosen, based on which vendors provided the best offer, the other :abbr:`RFQs (Requests for Quotation)` (from which no products were chosen) can be canceled." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:223 msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Total` column, at the far right of each row, the orders from which no products were chosen have automatically had their total cost set to **0**. Although they haven't been canceled yet, this means that they can ultimately be canceled without repercussions, *after* the desired purchase orders have been confirmed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:-1 msgid "Canceled quotations in the Purchase app overview." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:232 msgid "To confirm a quotation that contains the chosen product quantities, click into one. Then, click :guilabel:`Confirm Order`. This causes an :guilabel:`Alternative Warning` pop-up window to appear. From there, either :guilabel:`Cancel Alternatives` or :guilabel:`Keep Alternatives` can be clicked. If this :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` should *not* be confirmed, click :guilabel:`Cancel`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:237 msgid ":guilabel:`Cancel Alternatives` automatically cancels the alternative purchase orders. :guilabel:`Keep Alternatives` keeps the alternative purchase orders open, so they can still be accessed if any additional product quantities need to be ordered. Once all products are ordered, :guilabel:`Cancel Alternatives` can be selected from whichever :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` is open." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:242 msgid "To view a detailed form of one of the :abbr:`RFQs (Requests for Quotation)` listed, click the line item for that quotation. This causes an :guilabel:`Open: Alternative POs` pop-up window to appear, from which all details of that particular quotation can be viewed. Click :guilabel:`Close` when finished." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:-1 msgid "Keep or cancel pop-up for alternative RFQs." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:251 msgid "From the :guilabel:`Alternative Warning` pop-up window, click :guilabel:`Keep Alternatives` to keep all alternative quotations open for now. Then, click :guilabel:`Requests for Quotation` (in the breadcrumbs, at the top of the page) to navigate back to an overview of all :abbr:`RFQs (Requests for Quotation)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:256 msgid "Click into the remaining quotation(s) that contain products that need to be ordered, and click :guilabel:`Confirm Order`. This causes the :guilabel:`Alternative Warning` pop-up window to appear again. This time, click :guilabel:`Cancel Alternatives` to cancel all other alternative :abbr:`RFQs` linked with this quotation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:261 msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Requests for Quotation` (in the breadcrumbs, at the top of the page) to navigate back to an overview of all :abbr:`RFQs (Requests for Quotation)`. The canceled orders can be seen greyed out and listed with a :guilabel:`Cancelled` status under the :guilabel:`Status` column at the far right of their rows." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:266 msgid "Now that all product quantities have been ordered, the purchase process can be followed, and continued to completion, until the products are received into the warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:3 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:15 msgid "Bill control policies" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:5 msgid "In Odoo, the *bill control* policy determines the quantities billed by vendors on every purchase order, for ordered or received quantities. The policy selected in the settings will act as the default value and will be applied to any new product created." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:12 msgid "To view the default bill control policy and make changes, go to :menuselection:`Purchase --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Invoicing` section. Here, there are the two :guilabel:`Bill Control` policy options: :guilabel:`Ordered quantities` and :guilabel:`Received quantities`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:17 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:28 msgid "The policy selected will be the default for any new product created. The definition of each policy is as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:20 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:31 msgid ":guilabel:`Ordered quantities`: creates a vendor bill as soon as a purchase order is confirmed. The products and quantities in the purchase order are used to generate a draft bill." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:22 msgid ":guilabel:`Received quantities`: a bill is created only *after* part of the total order has been received. The products and quantities *received* are used to generate a draft bill. An error message will appear if creation of a vendor bill is attempted without receiving anything." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:-1 msgid "Bill control policy draft bill error message." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:31 msgid "If one or two products need a different control policy, the default bill control setting can be overridden by going to the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab in a product's template and modifying its :guilabel:`Control Policy` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:36 msgid "Example flow: Ordered quantities" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:38 msgid "To complete an example workflow using the *ordered quantities* bill control policy, first go to :menuselection:`Purchase --> Configuration --> Settings`, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Invoicing` section, and select :guilabel:`Ordered quantities`. Then, :guilabel:`Save` changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:42 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Purchase` app, create a new :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)`. Fill out the information on the quotation form, add products to the invoice lines, and click :guilabel:`Confirm Order`. Then, click :guilabel:`Create Bill`. Since the policy is set to *ordered quantities*, the draft bill can be confirmed as soon as it is created, without any products actually being received." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:48 msgid "Example flow: Received quantities" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:50 msgid "To complete an example workflow using the *received quantities* bill control policy, first go to :menuselection:`Purchase --> Configuration --> Settings`, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Invoicing` section, and select :guilabel:`Received quantities`. Then, :guilabel:`Save` changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:54 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Purchase` app, create a new :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)`. Fill out the information on the quotation form, add products to the invoice lines, and click :guilabel:`Confirm Order`. Then, click on the :guilabel:`Receipt smart button`. Set the quantities in the :guilabel:`Done` column to match the quantities in the :guilabel:`Demand` column, and :guilabel:`Validate` the changes. Then, in the purchase order, click :guilabel:`Create Bill` and :guilabel:`Confirm`. Since the policy is set to *received quantities*, the draft bill can be confirmed *only* when at least some of the quantities are received." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:63 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:46 msgid "3-way matching" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:65 msgid "Activating :guilabel:`3-way matching` ensures that vendor bills are only paid once some or all of the products included in the purchase order have actually been received. To activate it, go to :menuselection:`Purchase --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Invoicing` section. Then, click :guilabel:`3-way matching: purchases, receptions, and bills`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:72 msgid "3-way matching is *only* intended to work when the bill control policy is set to *received quantities*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:76 msgid "Pay vendor bills with 3-way matching" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:78 msgid "When :guilabel:`3-way matching` is activated, vendor bills will display the :guilabel:`Should Be Paid` field under the :guilabel:`Other Info` tab. When a new vendor bill is created, the field will be set to :guilabel:`Yes`, since a bill can't be created until at least some of the products included in a purchase order have been received." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:-1 msgid "Draft bill should be paid field status." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:88 msgid "If the total quantity of products from a purchase order has not been received, Odoo only includes the products that *have* been received in the draft vendor bill." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:91 msgid "Draft bills can be edited to increase the billed quantity, change the price of the products in the bill, and add additional products to the bill. If this is done, the :guilabel:`Should Be Paid` field status will be set to :guilabel:`Exception`. This means that Odoo notices the discrepancy, but doesn't block the changes or display an error message, since there might be a valid reason for making changes to the draft bill." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:97 msgid "Once payment has been registered for a vendor bill and displays the green :guilabel:`Paid` banner, the :guilabel:`Should Be Paid` field status will be set to :guilabel:`No`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:101 msgid "The :guilabel:`Should Be Paid` status on bills is set automatically by Odoo. However, the status can be changed manually by clicking the field's drop-down menu inside the :guilabel:`Other Info` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:106 msgid "View a purchase order's billing status" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:108 msgid "When a purchase order is confirmed, its :guilabel:`Billing Status` can be viewed under the :guilabel:`Other Information` tab on the purchase order form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:-1 msgid "Purchase order billing status." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:115 msgid "Below is a list of the different statuses that a :guilabel:`Billing Status` could appear as and when they are displayed, depending on the bill control policy used." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:119 msgid ":guilabel:`Billing Status`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:119 msgid "**Conditions**" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:121 msgid "*On received quantities*" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:121 msgid "*On ordered quantities*" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:123 msgid ":guilabel:`Nothing to Bill`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:123 msgid "PO confirmed; no products received" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:123 msgid "*Not applicable*" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:125 msgid ":guilabel:`Waiting Bills`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:125 msgid "All/some products received; bill not created" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:125 msgid "PO confirmed" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:127 msgid ":guilabel:`Fully Billed`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:127 msgid "All/some products received; draft bill created" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:127 msgid "Draft bill created" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:3 msgid "Manage vendor bills" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:7 msgid "A *vendor bill* is an invoice received for products and/or services that a company purchases from a vendor. Vendor bills record payables as they arrive from vendors, and can include amounts owed for the goods and/or services purchased, sales taxes, freight and delivery charges, and more." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:11 msgid "In Odoo, a vendor bill can be created at different points in the purchasing process, depending on the *bill control* policy chosen in the *Purchase* app settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:17 msgid "To view and edit the default bill control policy and make changes to it, go to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Invoicing` section." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:21 msgid "Here, there are two :guilabel:`Bill Control` policy options: :guilabel:`Ordered quantities` and :guilabel:`Received quantities`. After a policy is selected, click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:-1 msgid "Bill control policies in purchase app settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:33 msgid ":guilabel:`Received quantities`: a bill is only created **after** part of the total order has been received. The products and quantities **received** are used to generate a draft bill." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:37 msgid "If a product needs a different control policy, the default bill control policy can be overridden by going to the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab in a product's template, and modifying its :guilabel:`Control Policy` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:-1 msgid "Control policy field on product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:48 msgid "*3-way matching* ensures vendor bills are only paid once some (or all) of the products included in the purchase order have actually been received." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:51 msgid "To activate it, go to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Invoicing` section. Then, check the box next to :guilabel:`3-way matching: purchases, receptions, and bills`, and click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:56 msgid ":guilabel:`3-way matching` is **only** intended to work with the :guilabel:`Bill Control` policy set to :guilabel:`Received quantities`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:0 msgid "Activated three-way matching feature in purchase settings." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:64 msgid "Create and manage vendor bills on receipts" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:66 msgid "When products are received into a company's warehouse, receipts are created. Once the company processes the received quantities, they can choose to create a vendor bill directly from the warehouse receipt form. Depending on the bill control policy chosen in the settings, vendor bill creation is completed at different steps of the procurement process." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:72 msgid "With the bill control policy set to ordered quantities" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:74 msgid "To create and manage vendor bills on receipts using the *ordered quantities* bill control policy, first go to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Configuration --> Settings`, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Invoicing` section, and select :guilabel:`Ordered quantities` under :guilabel:`Bill Control`. Then, click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:79 msgid "Next, go to the :menuselection:`Purchase` app, and click :guilabel:`Create` to create a new request for quotation (RFQ). Doing so reveals a blank :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` detail form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:82 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:144 msgid "On the blank detail form, add a vendor to the :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` in the :guilabel:`Vendor` field, and add products to the :guilabel:`Product` lines by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:86 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:148 msgid "Then, confirm the :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` by clicking the :guilabel:`Confirm Order` button above the detail form. Doing so turns the :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` into a purchase order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:90 msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Create Bill` button to create a vendor bill for the purchase order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:92 msgid "Clicking the :guilabel:`Create Bill` button reveals the :guilabel:`Draft Bill` page for the purchase order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:95 msgid "On the :guilabel:`Draft Bill`, click the :guilabel:`Edit` button to modify the bill, and add a bill date in the :guilabel:`Bill Date` field. If needed, add additional products to the :guilabel:`Product` lines by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line` in the :guilabel:`Invoice Lines` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:99 msgid "Next, confirm the bill by clicking the :guilabel:`Confirm` button on the :guilabel:`Draft Bill` page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:103 msgid "Since the bill control policy is set to *ordered quantities*, the draft bill can be confirmed as soon as it is created, before any products have been received." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:106 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:179 msgid "On the new :guilabel:`Vendor Bill`, add a :guilabel:`Bill Reference` number, which can be used to match the bill with additional documents (such as the :abbr:`PO (purchase order)`). Then, click :menuselection:`Confirm --> Register Payment`. Doing so causes a pop-up to appear, wherein a payment :guilabel:`Journal` can be chosen; a :guilabel:`Payment Method` selected; and a :guilabel:`Recipient Bank Account` can be selected from a drop-down menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:112 msgid "Additionally, the bill :guilabel:`Amount`, :guilabel:`Payment Date`, and :guilabel:`Memo` (:dfn:`Reference Number`) can be changed from this pop-up. Once ready, click :guilabel:`Create Payment` to finish creating the :guilabel:`Vendor Bill`. Doing so causes a green :guilabel:`In Payment` banner to display on the :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:-1 msgid "Vendor bill form for ordered quantities control policy." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:122 msgid "Each vendor bill provides the option to either :guilabel:`Add Credit Note` or :guilabel:`Add Debit Note`. A *credit note* is typically issued when a vendor or supplier of goods get some quantity of products back from the customer to whom they were sold, while *debit notes* are reserved for goods returned from the customer/buyer to the vendor or supplier." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:128 msgid "With the bill control policy set to received quantities" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:131 msgid "If the creation of a vendor bill is attempted without receiving any quantities of a product (while using the *received quantities* bill control policy), an error message appears, and settings must be changed before proceeding." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:135 msgid "To create and manage vendor bills on receipts using the *received quantities* bill control policy, first go to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Configuration --> Settings`, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Invoicing` section, and select :guilabel:`Received quantities` under :guilabel:`Bill Control`. Then, click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:140 msgid "Next, go to the :menuselection:`Purchase` app, and click :guilabel:`Create` to create a new :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)`. Doing so reveals a blank :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` detail form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:152 msgid "Finally, click the :guilabel:`Create Bill` button to create a bill for the purchase order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:155 msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Create Bill` before any products have been received will cause a :guilabel:`User Error` pop-up to appear. The :guilabel:`Purchase Order` requires the receipt of at least partial quantity of the items included on the order to create a vendor bill." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:-1 msgid "User error pop-up for received quantities control policy." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:163 msgid "Next, click the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button to view the warehouse receipt form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:165 msgid "On the warehouse receipt form, click :menuselection:`Validate --> Apply` to mark the :guilabel:`Done` quantities. Then, navigate back to the :menuselection:`Purchase Order` (via the breadcrumbs), and click the :guilabel:`Create Bill` button on the purchase order form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:169 msgid "Doing so reveals the :guilabel:`Draft Bill` for the purchase order. On the :guilabel:`Draft Bill`, click the :guilabel:`Edit` button, and add a :guilabel:`Bill Date`. If needed, add additional products to the :guilabel:`Product` lines by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:173 msgid "Next, click the :guilabel:`Confirm` button to confirm the :guilabel:`Draft Bill`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:176 msgid "Since the bill control policy is set to *received quantities*, the draft bill can **only** be confirmed when at least some of the quantities are received." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:185 msgid "Additionally, the bill :guilabel:`Amount`, :guilabel:`Payment Date`, and :guilabel:`Memo` (:dfn:`Reference Number`) can be changed from this pop-up. Once ready, click :guilabel:`Create Payment` to finish creating the vendor bill. Doing so causes a green **In Payment** banner to display on the :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:191 msgid "Create and manage vendor bills in Accounting" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:193 msgid "Vendor bills can also be created directly from the *Accounting* app, **without** having to create a purchase order first. To do this, go to :menuselection:`Accounting app --> Vendors --> Bills`, and click :guilabel:`Create`. Doing so reveals a blank vendor bill detail form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:197 msgid "On this blank vendor bill detail form, add a vendor in the :guilabel:`Vendor` field, and add products to the :guilabel:`Product` lines (under the :guilabel:`Invoice Lines` tab), by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`. Then, add a bill date in the :guilabel:`Bill Date` field, and any other necessary information. Finally, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the bill." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:202 msgid "From here, click the :guilabel:`Journal Items` tab to view (or change) the :guilabel:`Account` journals that were populated based on the configuration on the corresponding :guilabel:`Vendor` and :guilabel:`Product` forms." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:206 msgid "Then, click :guilabel:`Add Credit Note` or :guilabel:`Add Debit Note` to add credit or debit notes to the bill. Or, add a :guilabel:`Bill Reference` number (while in :guilabel:`Edit` mode)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:209 msgid "Then, when ready, click :menuselection:`Register Payment --> Create Payment` to complete the :guilabel:`Vendor Bill`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:213 msgid "To tie the draft bill to an existing purchase order, click the drop-down menu next to :guilabel:`Auto-Complete`, and select a :abbr:`PO (purchase order)` from the menu. The bill will auto-populate with the information from the :abbr:`PO (purchase order)`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:0 msgid "Auto-complete drop-down list on draft vendor bill." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:222 msgid "Batch billing" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:224 msgid "Vendor bills can be processed and managed in batches in the *Accounting* app." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:226 msgid "To do this, go to :menuselection:`Accounting app --> Vendors --> Bills`. Then, click the :guilabel:`checkbox` at the top left of the page, beside the :guilabel:`Number` column, under the :guilabel:`Create` button. This selects all existing vendor bills with a :guilabel:`Posted` or :guilabel:`Draft` :guilabel:`Status`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:231 msgid "From here, click the :guilabel:`Action` gear icon to export, delete, or send & print the bills; click the :guilabel:`Print` icon to print the invoices or bills; or click :guilabel:`Register Payment` to create and process payments for multiple vendor bills at once." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:235 msgid "When :guilabel:`Register Payment` is selected, a pop-up appears. In this pop-up window, select the appropriate journal in the :guilabel:`Journal` field, choose a payment date in the :guilabel:`Payment Date` field, and choose a :guilabel:`Payment Method`. There is also the option to :guilabel:`Group Payments` on this pop-up, as well." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:240 msgid "When ready, click the :guilabel:`Create Payment` button, which creates a list of journal entries on a separate page. This list of journal entries are all tied to their appropriate vendor bills." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:-1 msgid "Batch billing register payment pop-up." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:248 msgid "The :guilabel:`Register Payment` option for vendor bills in batches will only work for journal entries whose :guilabel:`Status` is set to :guilabel:`Posted`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:252 msgid ":doc:`/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills`" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products.rst:5 msgid "Products" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:3 msgid "Configure reordering rules" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:5 msgid "For certain products, it is necessary to ensure that there is always a minimum amount available on hand at any given time. By adding a reordering rule to a product, it is possible to automate the reordering process so that a purchase order is automatically created whenever the amount on hand falls below a set threshold." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:11 msgid "The *Inventory* module must be installed to use reordering rules." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:14 msgid "Configure products for reordering" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:16 msgid "Products must be configured in a specific way before a reordering rule can be added to them." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:18 msgid "Starting from the :menuselection:`Inventory`, :menuselection:`Manufacturing`, :menuselection:`Purchase`, or :menuselection:`Sales` module, navigate to :menuselection:`Products --> Products` and then click :guilabel:`Create` to make a new product. Alternatively, find a product that already exists in the database and click into it's product form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:23 msgid "Next, on the product form, enable reordering by checking the :guilabel:`Can be Purchased` option underneathe the :guilabel:`Product Name` field. Finally, set the :guilabel:`Product Type` to `Storable Product` under the :guilabel:`General Information` tab." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:-1 msgid "Configure a product for reordering in Odoo." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:32 msgid "Add a reordering rule to a product" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:34 msgid "After properly configuring a product, a reordering rule can be added to it by selecting the now visible :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` tab at the top of that product's form, and then clicking :guilabel:`Create` on the :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` dashboard." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:-1 msgid "Access reordering rules for a product from the product page in Odoo." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:42 msgid "Once created, the reordering rule can be configured to generate purchase orders automatically by defining the following fields:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:45 msgid ":guilabel:`Location` specifies where the ordered quantities should be stored once they are received and entered into stock." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:47 msgid ":guilabel:`Min Quantity` sets the lower threshold for the reordering rule while :guilabel:`Max Quantity` sets the upper threshold. If the stock on hand falls below the minimum quantity, a new purchase order will be created to replenish it up to the maximum quantity." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:52 msgid "If :guilabel:`Min Quantity` is set to `5` and :guilabel:`Max Quantity` is set to `25` and the stock on hand falls to four, a purchase order will be created for 21 units of the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:55 msgid ":guilabel:`Multiple Quantity` can be configured so that products are only ordered in batches of a certain quantity. Depending on the number entered, this can result in the creation of a purchase order that would put the resulting stock on hand above what is specified in the :guilabel:`Max Quantity` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:61 msgid "If :guilabel:`Max Quantity` is set to `100` but :guilabel:`Multiple Quantity` is set to order the product in batches of `200`, a purchase order will be created for 200 units of the product." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:65 msgid ":guilabel:`UoM` specifies the unit of measurement by which the quantity will be ordered. For discrete products, this should be set to `Units`. However, it can also be set to units of measurement like `Volume` or `Weight` for non-discrete products like water or bricks." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:-1 msgid "Configure the reordering rule in Odoo." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:74 msgid "Manually trigger reordering rules using the scheduler" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:76 msgid "Reordering rules will be automatically triggered by the scheduler, which runs once a day by default. To trigger reordering rules manually, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Run Scheduler`. On the pop-up window, confirm the manual action by clicking :guilabel:`Run Scheduler`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:82 msgid "Manually triggering reordering rules will also trigger any other scheduled actions." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:85 msgid "Manage reordering rules" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:87 msgid "To manage the reordering rules for a single product, navigate to that product page's form and select the :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` tab at the top of the form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:90 msgid "To manage all reordering rules for every product, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Reordering Rules`. From this dashboard, typical bulk actions in Odoo can be performed such as exporting data or archiving rules that are no longer needed. As well, the :guilabel:`Filters`, :guilabel:`Group By` or triple-dotted menu on the form are available to search for and/or organize the reordering rules as desired." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:3 msgid "Purchase in different units of measure than sales" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:5 msgid "When you purchase a product, it may happen that your vendor uses a different unit of measure than you do when you sell it. This can cause confusion between sales and purchase representatives. It is also time-consuming to convert measures manually every time. With Odoo, you can configure your product once and let Odoo handle the conversion." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:10 msgid "Consider the following examples:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:12 msgid "You purchase orange juice from an American vendor, and they use **gallons**. However, your customers are European and use **liters**." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:15 msgid "You buy curtains from a vendor in the form of **rolls** and you sell pieces of the rolls to your customers using **square meters**." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:19 msgid "Enable units of measure" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:21 msgid "Open your Sales app and go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. Under Product Catalog, enable *Units of Measure*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:-1 msgid "Enable the units of measure option in Odoo Sales" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:29 msgid "Specify sales and purchase units of measure" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:32 msgid "Standard units of measure" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:34 msgid "A variety of units of measure are available by default in your database. Each belongs to one of the five pre-configured units of measure categories: *Length / Distance*, *Unit*, *Volume*, *Weight* and *Working Time*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:39 msgid "You can create your new units of measure and units of measure categories (see next section)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:41 msgid "To specify different units of measures for sales and purchases, open the Purchase app and go to :menuselection:`Products --> Products`. Create a product or select an existing one. Under the product's *General Information* tab, first select the *Unit of Measure* to be used for sales (as well as for other apps such as inventory). Then, select the *Purchase Unit of Measure* to be used for purchases." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:47 msgid "Back to the first example, if you purchase orange juice from your vendor in **gallons** and sell it to your customers in **liters**, first select *L* (liters) as the *Unit of Measure*, and *gal (US)* (gallons) as the *Purchase Unit of Measure*, then click on *Save*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:-1 msgid "Configure a product's units of measure in Odoo" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:56 msgid "Create new units of measure and units of measure categories" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:58 msgid "Sometimes you need to create your own units and categories, either because the measure is not pre-configured in Odoo or because the units do not relate with each other (e.g. kilos and centimeters)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:62 msgid "If you take the second example where you buy curtains from a vendor in the form of **rolls** and you sell pieces of the rolls using **square meters**, you need to create a new *Units of Measure Category* in order to relate both units of measure." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:66 msgid "To do so, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Units of Measure Categories`. Click on *Create* and name the category." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:-1 msgid "Create a new units of measure category in Odoo Purchase" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:73 msgid "The next step is to create the two units of measures. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Units of Measure`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:76 msgid "First, create the unit of measure used as the reference point for converting to other units of measure inside the category by clicking on *Create*. Name the unit and select the units of measure category you just created. For the *Type*, select *Reference Unit of Measure for this category type*. Enter the *Rounding Precision* you would like to use. The quantity computed by Odoo is always a multiple of this value." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:82 msgid "In the example, as you cannot purchase less than 1 roll and won't use fractions of a roll as a unit of measure, you can enter 1." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:-1 msgid "Create a new reference unit of measure in Odoo Purchase" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:89 msgid "If you use a *Rounding Precision* inferior to 0.01, a warning message might appear stating that it is higher than the *Decimal Accuracy* and that it might cause inconsistencies. If you wish to use a *Rounding Precision* lower than 0.01, first activate the :ref:`developer mode `, then go to :menuselection:`Settings --> Technical --> Database Structure --> Decimal Accuracy`, select *Product Unit of Measure* and edit *Digits* accordingly. For example, if you want to use a rounding precision of 0.00001, set *Digits* to 5." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:96 msgid "Next, create a second unit of measure, name it, and select the same units of measure category as your reference unit. As *Type*, select *Smaller* or *Bigger than the reference Unit of Measure*, depending on your situation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:100 msgid "As the curtain roll equals to 100 square meters, you should select *Smaller*." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:102 msgid "Next, you need to enter the *Ratio* between your reference unit and the second one. If the second unit is smaller, the *Ratio* should be greater than 1. If the second unit is larger, the ratio should be smaller than 1." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:106 msgid "For your curtain roll, the ratio should be set to 100." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:-1 msgid "Create a second unit of measure in Odoo Purchase" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:112 msgid "You can now configure your product just as you would using Odoo's standard units of measure." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:-1 msgid "Set a product's units of measure using your own units in Odoo Purchase" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality.rst:7 msgid "Quality" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality.rst:9 msgid "**Odoo Quality** helps ensure product quality throughout manufacturing processes and inventory movements. Conduct quality checks, automate quality inspection frequency, and create quality alerts when issues arise." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality.rst:14 msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Quality Overview `_" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types.rst:5 msgid "Quality check types" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:3 msgid "Instructions quality check" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:7 msgid "In Odoo *Quality*, an *Instructions* check is one of the quality check types that can be selected when creating a new quality check or quality control point (QCP). *Instructions* checks consist of a text entry field that allows the creator to provide instructions for how to complete the check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:11 msgid "For a full overview of how to configure a quality check or a |QCP|, see the documentation on :ref:`quality checks ` and :ref:`quality control points `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:16 msgid "Process an Instructions quality check" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:18 msgid "There are multiple ways that *Instructions* quality checks can be processed. If a quality check is assigned to a specific manufacturing, inventory, or work order, the check can be processed on the order itself. Alternatively, a check can be processed from the check's page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:23 msgid "Process from the quality check's page" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:25 msgid "To process an *Instructions* quality check from the check's page, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, and select a quality check. Follow the :guilabel:`Instructions` for how to complete the check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:29 msgid "If the product passes the check, click the :guilabel:`Pass` button above the quality check form. If the product does not pass the check, click the :guilabel:`Fail` button, instead." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:33 msgid "Process quality check on an order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:35 msgid "To process an *Instructions* quality check on an order, select a manufacturing order or inventory order (receipt, delivery, return, etc.) for which a check is required. Manufacturing orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and clicking on an order. Inventory orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory`, clicking the :guilabel:`# To Process` button on an operation card, and selecting an order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:42 msgid "On the selected manufacturing or inventory order, a purple :guilabel:`Quality Checks` button appears above the order. Click the button to open the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window, from which any quality checks created for the order can be processed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:-1 msgid "The Quality Check pop-up window on a manufacturing or inventory order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:50 msgid "To complete an *Instructions* quality check, follow the instructions detailed in the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window. Finally, click :guilabel:`Validate` to confirm that the check has been completed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:54 msgid "If an issue or defect is found during the quality check, a quality alert may need to be created to notify a quality team. To do so, click the :guilabel:`Quality Alert` button that appears at the top of the manufacturing or inventory order after the check is validated." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:58 msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Quality Alert` opens a quality alert form on a new page. For a complete guide on how to fill out quality alert forms, view the documentation on :ref:`quality alerts `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:63 msgid "Process work order quality check" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:65 msgid "When configuring a |QCP| that is triggered by a manufacturing order, a specific work order can also be specified in the :guilabel:`Work Order Operation` field on the |QCP| form. If a work order is specified, an *Instructions* quality check is created for that specific work order, rather than the manufacturing order as a whole." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:70 msgid "Quality checks configured for work orders must be completed from the tablet view. To do so, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`. Select a manufacturing order that includes a work order for which a quality check is required. Open the tablet view for that work order by clicking the :guilabel:`📱 (tablet)` button on the order's line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:75 msgid "With tablet view open, complete the steps listed on the left side of the screen until the *Instructions* quality check step is reached. Upon reaching the check, the instructions for how to complete it will appear at the top of the screen. Follow the instructions, then click :guilabel:`Next` to move on to the next step." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:-1 msgid "An Instructions check for a work order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:84 msgid "If an issue or defect is found during the quality check, a quality alert may need to be created to notify a quality team. To do so, click the :guilabel:`☰ (menu)` button in the tablet view, and then select :guilabel:`Quality Alert` from the :guilabel:`Menu` pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:88 msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Quality Alert` opens a :guilabel:`Quality Alerts` pop-up window, from which a quality alert can be created. For a complete guide to quality alert creation, view the documentation on :ref:`quality alerts `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:3 msgid "Measure quality check" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:8 msgid "In Odoo *Quality*, a *Measure* check is one of the quality check types that can be selected when creating a new quality check or quality control point (QCP). *Measure* checks prompt users to measure a certain aspect of a product and record the measurement in Odoo. For the quality check to pass, the recorded measurement must be within a certain *tolerance* of a *norm* value." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:14 msgid "Create a Measure quality check" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:16 msgid "There are two distinct ways that *Measure* quality checks can be created. A single check can be manually created. Alternatively, a |QCP| can be configured that automatically creates checks at a predetermined interval." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:20 msgid "This documentation only details the configuration options that are unique to *Measure* quality checks and |QCPs|. For a full overview of all the configuration options available when creating a single check or a |QCP|, see the documentation on :ref:`quality checks ` and :ref:`quality control points `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:27 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:27 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:26 msgid "Quality check" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:29 msgid "To create a single *Measure* quality check, navigate to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, and click :guilabel:`New`. Fill out the new quality check form as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:32 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Type` drop-down field, select the :guilabel:`Measure` quality check type." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:33 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:34 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:33 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Team` drop-down field, select the quality team responsible for managing the check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:35 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:35 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Instructions` text field of the :guilabel:`Notes` tab, enter instructions for how the picture should be taken." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:-1 msgid "A quality check form configured for a Measure quality check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:43 msgid "Quality control point (QCP)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:45 msgid "To create a |QCP| that generates *Measure* quality checks automatically, navigate to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Control Points`, and click :guilabel:`New`. Fill out the new |QCP| form as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:49 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Type` drop-down field, select the :guilabel:`Measure` quality check type. Doing so causes two new fields to appear: :guilabel:`Norm` and :guilabel:`Tolerance`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:52 msgid "Use the first text-entry field of the :guilabel:`Norm` field to record the ideal measurement that the product should conform to. Use the second text-entry field to specify the unit of measurement that should be used." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:55 msgid "The :guilabel:`Tolerance` field features two sub-fields: :guilabel:`from` and :guilabel:`to`. Use the :guilabel:`from` field to specify the minimum acceptable measurement, and the :guilabel:`to` field to specify the maximum acceptable measurement." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:59 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:51 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:54 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Team` drop-down field, select the quality team responsible for managing the checks created by the |QCP|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:61 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Instructions` text field, enter instructions for how the measurement should be taken." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:-1 msgid "A QCP form configured to create Measure quality checks." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:69 msgid "Process a Measure quality check" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:71 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:63 msgid "Once created, there are multiple ways that *Measure* quality checks can be processed. If a quality check is assigned to a specific inventory, manufacturing, or work order, the check can be processed on the order itself. Alternatively, a check can be processed from the check's page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:76 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:68 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:71 msgid "From the check's page" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:78 msgid "To process a *Measure* quality check from the check's page, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, and select a quality check. Follow the :guilabel:`Instructions` for how to take the measurement." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:82 msgid "After taking the measurement, record the value in the :guilabel:`Measure` field on the quality check form. To manually pass or fail the check, click :guilabel:`Pass` or :guilabel:`Fail` at the top-left corner of the check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:86 msgid "Alternatively, if the quality check is assigned to a |QCP| for which *norm* and *tolerance* values have been specified, click :guilabel:`Measure` at the top-left corner of the check instead. Doing so automatically marks the check as *Passed* if the recorded value is within the specified *tolerance*, or *Failed* if the value is outside of it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:92 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:78 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:87 msgid "On an order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:94 msgid "To process a *Measure* quality check on an order, select a manufacturing order or inventory order (receipt, delivery, return, etc.), for which a check is required. Manufacturing orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and clicking on an order. Inventory orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory`, clicking the :guilabel:`# To Process` button on an operation card, and selecting an order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:101 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:96 msgid "On the selected manufacturing or inventory order, a purple :guilabel:`Quality Checks` button appears at the top of the page. Click the button to open the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window, which shows all of the quality checks required for that order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:105 msgid "To process a *Measure* quality check, measure the product as instructed, then enter the value in the :guilabel:`Measure` field on the pop-up window. Finally, click :guilabel:`Validate` to register the recorded value." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:-1 msgid "A Measure quality check pop-up window on a manufacturing or inventory order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:113 msgid "If the value entered is within the range specified in the :guilabel:`Tolerance` section of the |QCP|, the quality check passes and the pop-up window closes. The rest of the manufacturing or inventory order can then be processed as usual." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:117 msgid "However, if the value entered is outside of the specified range, a new pop-up window appears, titled :guilabel:`Quality Check Failed`. The body of the pop-up shows a warning message that states, :guilabel:`You measured # units and it should be between # units and # units.`, as well as the instructions entered in the :guilabel:`Message If Failure` tab of the |QCP|. At the bottom of the pop-up, two buttons appear: :guilabel:`Correct Measure` and :guilabel:`Confirm Measure`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:-1 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:-1 msgid "The \"Quality Check Failed\" pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:127 msgid "If the measurement was not entered correctly and should be changed, select :guilabel:`Correct Measure`. Doing so re-opens the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window. Enter the corrected measurement in the :guilabel:`Measure` field, and then click :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:132 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:185 msgid "If the measurement was entered correctly, click :guilabel:`Confirm Measure` instead, and the quality check fails. Follow any instructions that were listed on the :guilabel:`Quality Check Failed` pop-up window." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:136 msgid "If a quality alert must be created, click the :guilabel:`Quality Alert` button that appears at the top of the manufacturing or inventory order after the check fails. Clicking :guilabel:`Quality Alert` opens a quality alert form on a new page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:140 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:193 msgid "For a complete guide on how to fill out the quality alert form, view the documentation on :ref:`quality alerts `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:144 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:106 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:120 msgid "On a work order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:146 msgid "When configuring a |QCP| that is triggered during manufacturing, a specific work order can also be specified in the :guilabel:`Work Order Operation` field on the |QCP| form. If a work order is specified, a *Measure* quality check is created for that specific work order, rather than the manufacturing order as a whole." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:151 msgid "*Measure* quality checks created for work orders must be processed from the tablet view. To do so, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`. Select a manufacturing order that includes a work order for which a quality check is required. Open the tablet view for that work order by selecting the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab, and then clicking the :guilabel:`📱 (tablet)` button on the order's line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:157 msgid "With tablet view open, complete the steps listed on the left side of the screen until the *Measure* quality check step is reached. Upon reaching the check, the instructions for how to take the measurement appear at the top of the screen. Enter the measured value in the :guilabel:`Measure` field above the instructions, and then click :guilabel:`Validate`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:-1 msgid "A Measure quality check in the Manufacturing tablet view." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:166 msgid "If the measurement entered is within the range specified in the :guilabel:`Tolerance` section of the |QCP|, the quality check passes and the tablet view moves on to the next step of the work order. However, if the measurement entered is outside of the specified range, a pop-up window appears, titled :guilabel:`Quality Check Failed`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:171 msgid "The body of the :guilabel:`Quality Check Failed` pop-up window shows a warning message that states, :guilabel:`You measured # units and it should be between # units and # units.`, as well as the instructions entered in the :guilabel:`Message If Failure` tab of the |QCP|. At the bottom of the pop-up, two buttons appear: :guilabel:`Correct Measure` and :guilabel:`Confirm Measure`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:180 msgid "If the measurement was not entered correctly, and should be changed, select :guilabel:`Correct Measure`. Doing so opens a new pop-up window, titled :guilabel:`Quality Check`. Enter the corrected measurement in the :guilabel:`Measure` field, then click :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the check, and move on to the next step of the work order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:189 msgid "If a quality alert must be created, do so by clicking the :guilabel:`☰ (three horizontal lines)` button, and selecting :guilabel:`Quality Alert` from the :guilabel:`Menu` pop-up window. A :guilabel:`Quality Alerts` pop-up window appears, from which a quality alert can be created." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:3 msgid "Pass - Fail quality check" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:8 msgid "In Odoo *Quality*, a *Pass - Fail* check is one of the quality check types that can be selected when creating a new quality check or quality control point (QCP). *Pass - Fail* checks consist of a text field that allows the creator to specify a certain criteria that a product must meet to pass the check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:14 msgid "Create a Pass - Fail quality check" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:16 msgid "There are two distinct ways that *Pass - Fail* quality checks can be created. A single check can be manually created. Alternatively, a |QCP| can be configured that automatically creates checks at a predetermined interval." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:20 msgid "This documentation only details the configuration options that are unique to *Pass - Fail* quality checks and |QCPs|. For a full overview of all the configuration options available when creating a single check or a |QCP|, see the documentation on :ref:`quality checks ` and :ref:`quality control points `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:29 msgid "To create a single *Pass - Fail* quality check, navigate to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, and click :guilabel:`New`. Fill out the new quality check form as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:33 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:50 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Type` drop-down field, select the :guilabel:`Pass - Fail` quality check type." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:36 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Instructions` text field of the :guilabel:`Notes` tab, enter instructions for how to complete the quality check and the criteria that must be met for the check to pass." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:-1 msgid "A quality check form configured for a Pass - Fail quality check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:44 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:43 msgid "Quality Control Point (QCP)" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:46 msgid "To create a |QCP| that generates *Pass - Fail* quality checks automatically, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Control Points`, and click :guilabel:`New`. Fill out the new |QCP| form as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:53 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Instructions` text field, enter instructions for how to complete the quality check and the criteria that must be met for the check to pass." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:-1 msgid "A Quality Control Point (QCP) form configured to create a Pass - Fail quality check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:61 msgid "Process a Pass - Fail quality check" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:70 msgid "To process a *Measure* quality check from the check's page, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, and select a quality check. Follow the :guilabel:`Instructions` for how to complete the check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:74 msgid "If the criteria for the check is met, click the :guilabel:`Pass` button at the top-left corner of the page. If the criteria is not met, click the :guilabel:`Fail` button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:80 msgid "To process a *Pass - Fail* quality check on an order, select a manufacturing order or inventory order (receipt, delivery, return, etc.), for which a check is required. Manufacturing orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and clicking on an order. Inventory orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory`, clicking the :guilabel:`# To Process` button on an operation card, and selecting an order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:87 msgid "On the selected manufacturing or inventory order, a purple :guilabel:`Quality Checks` button appears at the top of the order. Click the button to open the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window, which shows all of the quality checks required for that order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:91 msgid "To process a *Pass - Fail* quality check, follow the instructions shown on the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window. If the criteria for the check is met, click the :guilabel:`Pass` button at the bottom of the window. If the criteria is not met, click the :guilabel:`Fail` button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:-1 msgid "A Pass - Fail quality check pop-up window on a manufacturing or inventory order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:99 msgid "If a quality alert must be created, click the :guilabel:`Quality Alert` button that appears at the top of the manufacturing or inventory order after the check fails. Clicking :guilabel:`Quality Alert` opens a quality alert form on a new page. For a complete guide on how to fill out quality alert forms, view the documentation on :ref:`quality alerts `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:108 msgid "When configuring a |QCP| that is triggered during manufacturing, a specific work order can also be specified in the :guilabel:`Work Order Operation` field on the |QCP| form. If a work order is specified, a *Pass - Fail* quality check is created for that specific work order, rather than the manufacturing order as a whole." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:113 msgid "*Pass - Fail* quality checks configured for work orders must be processed from the tablet view. To do so, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`. Select a manufacturing order that includes a work order for which a quality check is required. Open the tablet view for that work order by selecting the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab, and then clicking the :guilabel:`📱 (tablet)` button on the order's line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:119 msgid "With tablet view open, complete the steps listed on the left side of the screen until the *Pass - Fail* quality check step is reached. Upon reaching the check, follow the instructions that appear at the top of the screen. If the criteria for the check is met, click the :guilabel:`Pass` button at the top-right of the screen. If the criteria is not met, click the :guilabel:`Fail` button." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:-1 msgid "A Pass - Fail check for a manufacturing work order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:128 msgid "If a quality alert must be created, do so by clicking the :guilabel:`☰ (menu)` button in the tablet view, and selecting :guilabel:`Quality Alert` from the :guilabel:`Menu` pop-up window. A :guilabel:`Quality Alerts` pop-up window appears, from which a quality alert can be created. For a complete guide on how to fill out quality alert forms, view the documentation on :ref:`quality alerts `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:3 msgid "Take a Picture quality check" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:8 msgid "In Odoo *Quality*, a *Take a Picture* check is one of the quality check types that can be selected when creating a new quality check or quality control point (QCP). *Take a Picture* checks require a picture to be attached to the check, which can then be reviewed by a quality team." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:13 msgid "Create a Take a Picture quality check" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:15 msgid "There are two distinct ways that *Take a Picture* quality checks can be created. A single check can be manually created. Alternatively, a |QCP| can be configured that automatically creates checks at a predetermined interval." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:19 msgid "This documentation only details the configuration options that are unique to *Take a Picture* quality checks and |QCPs|. For a full overview of all the configuration options available when creating a single check or a |QCP|, see the documentation on :ref:`quality checks ` and :ref:`quality control points `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:28 msgid "To create a single *Take a Picture* quality check, navigate to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, and click :guilabel:`New`. Fill out the new quality check form as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:32 #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:49 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Type` drop-down field, select the :guilabel:`Take a Picture` quality check type." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:-1 msgid "A quality check form configured for a Take a Picture quality check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:45 msgid "To create a |QCP| that will generate *Take a Picture* quality checks automatically, navigate to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Control Points`, and click :guilabel:`New`. Fill out the new |QCP| form as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:50 msgid "If the *Maintenance* app is installed, a :guilabel:`Device` field appears after selecting the *Take a Picture* check type. Use this field to specify a device that should be used to take quality check pictures. For information about managing devices in the *Maintenance* app, see the documentation on :ref:`adding new equipment `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:56 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Instructions` text field, enter instructions for how the picture should be taken." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:-1 msgid "A Quality Control Point (QCP) form configured to create a Take a Picture quality check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:64 msgid "Process a Take a Picture quality check" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:66 msgid "Once created, there are multiple ways that *Take a Picture* quality checks can be processed. If a quality check is assigned to a specific inventory, manufacturing, or work order, the check can be processed on the order itself. Alternatively, a check can be processed from the check's page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:73 msgid "To process a *Take a Picture* quality check from the check's page, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, and then select a quality check. Follow the :guilabel:`Instructions` for how to take the picture." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:77 msgid "After taking the picture, make sure it is stored on the device being used to process the quality check (computer, tablet, etc.). Then, click the :guilabel:`✏️ (pencil)` button in the :guilabel:`Picture` section to open the device's file manager. In the file manager, navigate to the picture, select it, and click :guilabel:`Open` to attach it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:-1 msgid "The edit button (pencil) on a Take a Picture quality check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:89 msgid "To process a *Take a Picture* quality check on an order, select a manufacturing order or inventory order (receipt, delivery, return, etc.), for which a check is required. Manufacturing orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and clicking on an order. Inventory orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory`, clicking the :guilabel:`# To Process` button on an operation card, and selecting an order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:100 msgid "Follow the instructions detailing how to take the picture, which are shown on the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window. After taking the picture, make sure it is stored on the device being used to process the quality check (computer, tablet, etc.)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:104 msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Take a Picture` button in the :guilabel:`Picture` section to open the device's file manager. In the file manager, navigate to the picture, select it, and click :guilabel:`Open` to attach it. Finally, click :guilabel:`Validate` on the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window to complete the quality check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:-1 msgid "A Take a Picture quality check pop-up window on a manufacturing or inventory order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:113 msgid "If a quality alert must be created, click the :guilabel:`Quality Alert` button that appears at the top of the manufacturing or inventory order after the check is validated. Clicking :guilabel:`Quality Alert` opens a quality alert form on a new page. For a complete guide on how to fill out quality alert forms, view the documentation on :ref:`quality alerts `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:122 msgid "When configuring a |QCP| that is triggered during manufacturing, a specific work order can also be specified in the :guilabel:`Work Order Operation` field on the |QCP| form. If a work order is specified, a *Take a Picture* quality check is created for that specific work order, rather than the manufacturing order as a whole." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:127 msgid "*Take a Picture* quality checks created for work orders must be completed from the tablet view. To do so, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`. Select a manufacturing order that includes a work order for which a quality check is required. Open the tablet view for that work order by selecting the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab, and then clicking the :guilabel:`📱 (tablet)` button on the order's line." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:133 msgid "With tablet view open, complete the steps listed on the left side of the screen until the *Take a Picture* quality check step is reached. Upon reaching the check, follow the instructions for how to take the picture, which appear at the top of the screen." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:137 msgid "After taking the picture, make sure it is stored on the device being used to process the work order (computer, tablet, etc.). Then, click the :guilabel:`Take a Picture` button to open the device's file manager. In the file manager, navigate to the picture, select it, and click :guilabel:`Open` to attach it. Finally, click :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the quality check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:-1 msgid "A Take a Picture check for a manufacturing work order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:146 msgid "If a quality alert must be created, do so by clicking the :guilabel:`☰ (three horizontal lines)` button in the tablet view, and selecting :guilabel:`Quality Alert` from the :guilabel:`Menu` pop-up window. A :guilabel:`Quality Alerts` pop-up window appears, from which a quality alert can be created. For a complete guide on how to fill out quality alert forms, view the documentation on :ref:`quality alerts `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:153 msgid "Review a picture attached to a check" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:155 msgid "After a picture has been attached to a check, it can then be reviewed by quality team members or other users. To do so, navigate to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, and select a quality check to review." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:159 msgid "The attached picture appears in the :guilabel:`Picture` section of the quality check form. After reviewing the picture, click the :guilabel:`Pass` button if the check passes, or the :guilabel:`Fail` button if the check fails." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:-1 msgid "A Take a Picture check with a picture attached." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management.rst:5 msgid "Quality control basics" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:3 msgid "Create quality alerts" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:7 msgid "Configuring quality control points is a great way to ensure that quality checks are performed at routine stages during specific operations. However, quality issues can often appear outside of these scheduled checks. Using Odoo *Quality*, users can create quality alerts for issues that are not detected by automated processes." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:13 msgid ":doc:`Add quality control points `" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:16 msgid "Find and fill out the quality alerts form" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:18 msgid "In some situations, it is necessary to manually create quality alerts within the *Quality* module." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:21 msgid "A helpdesk user who is notified of a product defect by a customer ticket can create an alert that brings the issue to the attention of the relevant quality team." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:24 msgid "To create a new quality alert, start from the :menuselection:`Quality` module and select :menuselection:`Quality Control --> Quality Alerts --> Create`. The quality alert form can then be filled out as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:28 msgid ":guilabel:`Title`: choose a concise, yet descriptive title for the quality alert" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:29 msgid ":guilabel:`Product`: the product about which the quality alert is being created" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:30 msgid ":guilabel:`Product Variant`: the specific variant of the product that has the quality issue, if applicable" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:32 msgid ":guilabel:`Lot`: the lot number assigned to the product" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:33 msgid ":guilabel:`Work Center`: the work center where the quality issue originated" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:34 msgid ":guilabel:`Picking`: the picking operation during which the quality issue originated" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:35 msgid ":guilabel:`Team`: the quality team that will be notified by the quality alert" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:36 msgid ":guilabel:`Responsible`: the individual responsible for managing the quality alert" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:37 msgid ":guilabel:`Tags`: classify the quality alert based on user-created tags" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:38 msgid ":guilabel:`Root Cause`: the cause of the quality issue, if known" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:39 msgid ":guilabel:`Priority`: assign a priority between one and three stars to ensure more urgent issues are prioritized" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:42 msgid "The tabs at the bottom of the form can be used to provide additional information to quality teams:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:44 msgid ":guilabel:`Description`: provide additional details about the quality issue" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:45 msgid ":guilabel:`Corrective Actions`: the method for fixing affected products" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:46 msgid ":guilabel:`Preventive Actions`: procedures for preventing the issue from occurring in the future" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:48 msgid ":guilabel:`Miscellaneous`: the product vendor (if applicable), the company that produces the product, and the date assigned" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:-1 msgid "An example of a completed quality alert form." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:56 msgid "Add quality alerts during the manufacturing process" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:58 msgid "Odoo enables manufacturing employees to create quality alerts within a work order without accessing the *Quality* module. From the work order tablet view, click the :guilabel:` ☰ ` hamburger menu icon in the top left corner and select :guilabel:`Quality Alert`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:-1 msgid "Access the work order menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:66 msgid "The quality alert form can then be filled out as detailed in the previous section. After saving the form, a new alert will appear on the :guilabel:`Quality Alerts` dashboard that can be found through the :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control` menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:71 msgid "Manage existing quality alerts" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:73 msgid "By default, quality alerts are organized in a kanban board view. The stages of the kanban board are fully configurable and alerts can be moved from one stage to the next by dragging and dropping or from within each alert. Additional options are available for viewing alerts, including graph, calendar, and pivot table views." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:79 msgid "Filter alerts based on diverse criteria like date assigned or date closed. Alerts can also be grouped by quality team, root cause, or other parameters found under the :guilabel:`Filters` button menu." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:3 msgid "Quality checks" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:8 msgid "Quality checks are manual inspections conducted by employees, and are used to ensure the quality of products. In Odoo, a quality check can be conducted for a single product, or multiple products within the same inventory operation or manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:12 msgid "Using a Quality Control Point (QCP), it is possible to create quality checks automatically at regular intervals. When quality checks are created by a |QCP|, they appear on a manufacturing or inventory order, where the employee processing the order will be prompted to complete them. For a full explanation of how to create and configure a |QCP|, see the documentation on :ref:`quality control points `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:18 msgid "While quality checks are most commonly created automatically by a |QCP|, it is also possible to manually create a single quality check. Creating a check manually is useful when an employee wants to schedule a quality check that will only occur once, or register a quality check that they conduct unprompted." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:24 msgid "Manual quality check" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:26 msgid "To manually create a single quality check, navigate to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, and click :guilabel:`New`. On the quality check form, begin by selecting an option from the :guilabel:`Control per` drop-down menu:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:30 msgid ":guilabel:`Operation` requests a check for an entire operation (ex. delivery order) and all products within it." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:32 msgid ":guilabel:`Product` requests a check for every unit of a product that is part of an operation (ex. every unit of a product within a delivery order)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:34 msgid ":guilabel:`Quantity` requests a check for every quantity of a product that is part of an operation (ex. one check for five units of a product within a delivery order). Selecting :guilabel:`Quantity` also causes a :guilabel:`Lot/Serial` drop-down field to appear, from which can be selected a specific lot or serial number that the quality check should be conducted for." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:39 msgid "Next, select an inventory operation from the :guilabel:`Picking` drop-down menu or a manufacturing order from the :guilabel:`Production Order` drop-down menu. This is necessary because Odoo needs to know for which operation the quality check is being conducted." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:43 msgid "If the quality check should be assigned to a specific |QCP|, select it from the :guilabel:`Control Point` drop-down menu. This is useful if the quality check is being created manually, but should still be recognized as belonging to a specific |QCP|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:47 msgid "Select a quality check type from the :guilabel:`Type` drop-down field:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:49 msgid ":guilabel:`Instructions` provides specific instructions for how to conduct the quality check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:50 msgid ":guilabel:`Take a Picture` requires a picture to be attached to the check before the check can be completed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:52 msgid ":guilabel:`Pass - Fail` is used when the product being checked must meet a certain criteria to pass the check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:54 msgid "Selecting :guilabel:`Measure` causes a :guilabel:`Measure` input field to appear, in which a measurement must be entered before the check can be completed." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:56 msgid "Selecting :guilabel:`Worksheet` causes a :guilabel:`Quality Template` drop-down field to appear. Use it to select a quality worksheet that must be filled out to complete the check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:59 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Team` field, select the quality team that is responsible for the quality check. In the :guilabel:`Company` field, select the company that owns the product being inspected." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:62 msgid "On the :guilabel:`Notes` tab at the bottom of the form, enter any relevant instructions in the :guilabel:`Instructions` text entry box (ex. 'Attach a picture of the product'). In the :guilabel:`Notes` text entry box, enter any relevant information about the quality check (who created it, why it was created, etc.)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:67 msgid "Finally, if the check is being processed immediately, click the :guilabel:`Pass` button at the top left of the screen if the check passes, or the :guilabel:`Fail` button if the check fails." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:-1 msgid "A quality check form filled out for a Pass - Fail check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:75 msgid "Process quality check" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:77 msgid "Quality checks can be processed directly on the quality check's page, or from a manufacturing or inventory order for which a check is required. Alternatively, if a quality check is created for a specific work order operation, the check is processed in the tablet view for the work order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:82 msgid "It is not possible to manually create a single quality check that is assigned to a specific work order operation. Quality checks for work order operations can only be created by a |QCP|. See the documentation on :ref:`Quality Control Points ` for information about how to configure a |QCP| that will create quality checks for a specific work order operation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:89 msgid "Quality check page" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:91 msgid "To process a quality check from the check's page, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, then select the check to process. Follow the instructions for how to complete the check, listed in the :guilabel:`Instructions` field of the :guilabel:`Notes` tab at the bottom of the page." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:96 msgid "If the quality check passes, click the :guilabel:`Pass` button at the top of the page. If the check fails, click the :guilabel:`Fail` button, instead." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:100 msgid "Quality check on order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:102 msgid "To process a quality check on an order, select a manufacturing or inventory order (receipt, delivery, return, etc.), for which a check is required. Manufacturing orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and clicking on an order. Inventory orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory`, clicking the :guilabel:`# To Process` button on an operation card, and selecting an order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:108 msgid "On the selected inventory or manufacturing order, a purple :guilabel:`Quality Checks` button appears at the top of the order. Click the button to open the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window, which shows all of the quality checks required for that order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:112 msgid "Follow the instructions that appear on the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window. If a Pass - Fail check is being processed, complete the check by clicking :guilabel:`Pass` or :guilabel:`Fail` at the bottom of the pop-up window. For all other quality check types, a :guilabel:`Validate` button appears instead. Click it to complete the check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:-1 msgid "The \"Quality Check\" pop-up window on a manufacturing order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:122 msgid "Quality check on work order" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:124 msgid "To process a quality check for a work order, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, then select a manufacturing order. Select the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab, then click the :guilabel:`📱 (tablet)` tablet view button for the work order that requires the quality check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:129 msgid "With tablet view open, complete the steps listed on the left side of the screen until the quality check step is reached, then follow the instructions at the top of the screen. If a Pass - Fail check is being processed, complete the check by clicking :guilabel:`Pass` or :guilabel:`Fail` at the top of the screen. For all other quality check types, a :guilabel:`Next` button appears instead. Click it to complete the check and move on to the next step of the work order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:-1 msgid "A quality check for a work order." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:3 msgid "Quality control points" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:11 msgid "In Odoo, *quality control points* (QCPs), are used to automatically create :doc:`quality checks ` at predetermined intervals. |QCPs| can be configured to create quality checks for specific operations (manufacturing, delivery, etc.), as well as specific products within those operations." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:16 msgid "Using |QCPs| allows quality teams to ensure products are being regularly inspected for defects and other issues." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:20 msgid "Configure quality control points" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:22 msgid "To create a new |QCP|, navigate to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Control Points`, and then click :guilabel:`New`." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:25 msgid "Begin filling out the new |QCP| by entering a unique :guilabel:`Title` that makes the |QCP| easily identifiable." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:28 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Products` field, select one or more products the |QCP| should apply to. If the |QCP| should apply to an entire product category, select it in the :guilabel:`Product Categories` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:32 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Operations` field, select the operation(s) that should trigger the |QCP|. For example, selecting the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` option in the :guilabel:`Operations` field causes a quality check to be created for new manufacturing orders (MOs)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:37 msgid "When creating a new |QCP|, at least one operation must be listed in the :guilabel:`Operations` field. However, the :guilabel:`Products` and :guilabel:`Product Categories` fields can be left blank. If they are left blank, the |QCP| generates quality checks for every instance of the specified operation(s)." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:42 msgid "If the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` operation is selected in the :guilabel:`Operations` field, a new field appears below it, titled :guilabel:`Work Order Operation`. From this field, select a specific work order to generate quality checks for that operation, rather than the manufacturing operation in general." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:47 msgid "For example, a |QCP| could be configured to create quality checks for the `Assembly` work order of the `Coffee Table` product. Then, if a new |MO| is confirmed for a `Coffee Table`, the |QCP| creates a quality check specifically for the `Assembly` operation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:51 msgid "The :guilabel:`Control Per` field is set to one of three options that determine *when* a new quality check is created:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:54 msgid ":guilabel:`Operation`: one check is requested for the specified operation, as a whole." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:55 msgid ":guilabel:`Product`: one check is requested for each *unique* product included in the specified operation. For example, a delivery operation for one table and four chairs would generate two checks, since two *unique* products are included in the operation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:58 msgid ":guilabel:`Quantity`: a check is requested for a certain percentage of items within the specified operation. This percentage is set by enabling the :guilabel:`Partial Transfer Test` checkbox, and then entering a numerical value in the :guilabel:`Percentage` field that appears below. If the checkbox is not enabled, one quality check is created for the full quantity." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:63 msgid "The :guilabel:`Control Frequency` field is set to one of three options that determine *how often* a new quality check is created:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:66 msgid ":guilabel:`All`: a quality check is requested every time the conditions of the |QCP| are met." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:67 msgid ":guilabel:`Randomly`: a quality check is randomly requested for a certain percentage of operations, which can be specified in the :guilabel:`Every #% of Transfers` field that appears below." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:70 msgid ":guilabel:`Periodically`: a quality check is requested once every set period of time, which is specified by entering a numerical value in the field below, and choosing either :guilabel:`Days`, :guilabel:`Weeks`, or :guilabel:`Months` as the desired time interval." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:74 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Type` field, specify the type of quality check that should be performed. The method for processing quality checks created by the |QCP| depends upon the type of quality check selected:" msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:78 msgid ":guilabel:`Instructions` checks provide specific instructions for how to complete the quality check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:80 msgid ":guilabel:`Take a Picture` checks require a picture of the product be uploaded for later review by the assigned quality team." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:82 msgid ":guilabel:`Register Production` checks prompt manufacturing employees to confirm the quantity of the product that was produced during the manufacturing operation." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:84 msgid ":guilabel:`Pass - Fail` checks specify a criterion that products must meet for the check to pass." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:85 msgid ":guilabel:`Measure` checks prompt employees to record a measurement of the product that must be within a tolerance of a norm value for the check to pass." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:87 msgid ":guilabel:`Worksheet` checks provide an interactive worksheet that must be filled out by the employee processing the check." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:91 msgid "An *Instructions* check is the same as a step on a work order for an MO." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:93 msgid "When a step is added to a work order, Odoo stores it in the Quality app as a |QCP|. It is possible to manually create a |QCP| with the *Instructions* check type, and even assign it to an operation other than manufacturing, like receipts." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:97 msgid "However, when creating a control point specifically for quality control purposes, using a different check type is probably more effective." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:100 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Team` field, specify the quality team that is responsible for managing the |QCP|, and the quality checks it creates. If a specific quality team member is responsible for the |QCP|, select them in the :guilabel:`Responsible` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:104 msgid "The :guilabel:`Step Document` field has two options that specify the location of an instructional document detailing how to complete the quality checks created by the |QCP|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:107 msgid "Select :guilabel:`Specific Page of Operation Worksheet` if the document is included with the instructional worksheet for the work order, then enter the page number in the :guilabel:`Worksheet Page` field that appears below." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:111 msgid "Select :guilabel:`Custom` if the document should be included in the :guilabel:`Instructions` tab at the bottom of the |QCP|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:114 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Instructions` tab at the bottom of the form, enter instructions for how to complete the quality checks created by the |QCP|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:117 msgid "If the :guilabel:`Custom` option was selected in the :guilabel:`Step Document` field above, a document can be attached in this tab. To do so, either select the :guilabel:`Upload your file` button to open the device's file manager, and then select a file, or add a link to a Google Slides document in the :guilabel:`Google Slide Link` field." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:122 msgid "In the :guilabel:`Message If Failure` tab, include instructions for what to do if the quality check fails. For example, instruct the employee processing the quality check to create a :doc:`quality alert `." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:126 msgid "The :guilabel:`Notes` tab is used to provide additional information about the |QCP|, like the reason it was created. The information entered in this tab is **not** shown to employees processing the quality checks created by the |QCP|." msgstr "" #: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:-1 msgid "A QCP configured to create Pass - Fail checks for a work order operation." msgstr ""